WO2022131324A1 - Transfer film, method for producing laminate, and method for producing circuit wiring - Google Patents

Transfer film, method for producing laminate, and method for producing circuit wiring Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022131324A1
WO2022131324A1 PCT/JP2021/046474 JP2021046474W WO2022131324A1 WO 2022131324 A1 WO2022131324 A1 WO 2022131324A1 JP 2021046474 W JP2021046474 W JP 2021046474W WO 2022131324 A1 WO2022131324 A1 WO 2022131324A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
composition layer
mass
preferable
compound
meth
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2021/046474
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
裕之 米澤
Original Assignee
富士フイルム株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 富士フイルム株式会社 filed Critical 富士フイルム株式会社
Publication of WO2022131324A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022131324A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/027Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/038Macromolecular compounds which are rendered insoluble or differentially wettable
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/004Photosensitive materials
    • G03F7/09Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers
    • G03F7/11Photosensitive materials characterised by structural details, e.g. supports, auxiliary layers having cover layers or intermediate layers, e.g. subbing layers
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/20Exposure; Apparatus therefor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/26Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/26Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/30Imagewise removal using liquid means
    • GPHYSICS
    • G03PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
    • G03FPHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
    • G03F7/00Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
    • G03F7/26Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
    • G03F7/40Treatment after imagewise removal, e.g. baking
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/03Arrangements for converting the position or the displacement of a member into a coded form
    • G06F3/041Digitisers, e.g. for touch screens or touch pads, characterised by the transducing means
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K3/00Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits
    • H05K3/02Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which the conductive material is applied to the surface of the insulating support and is thereafter removed from such areas of the surface which are not intended for current conducting or shielding
    • H05K3/06Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which the conductive material is applied to the surface of the insulating support and is thereafter removed from such areas of the surface which are not intended for current conducting or shielding the conductive material being removed chemically or electrolytically, e.g. by photo-etch process

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a transfer film, a laminate, and a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring.
  • the etching resist film and various protective films are usually formed by a photolithography process using a photoresist.
  • the photolithography process is a process of exposing a photoresist through a mask and then removing a portion soluble in a developer by development.
  • the photoresist is a photoresist (negative type photoresist) that is cured by exposure
  • the curing reaction proceeds in the mask opening, while the curing reaction is suppressed in the unexposed portion shielded by the mask. Therefore, the exposed portion and the unexposed portion have different solubility in the developing solution, and only the unexposed portion having high solubility in the developing solution is removed during the developing process.
  • a negative photosensitive composition layer is arranged on an arbitrary substrate by using a transfer film, and a mask is applied to the negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • a method of developing after exposure through a film is widely used.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a temporary support and a transfer film having a first transparent layer, a second transparent layer, and a third transparent layer on the temporary support in this order.
  • a negative photosensitive composition layer (first transparent layer) containing a temporary support / binder polymer, a polymerizable monomer, and a polymerization initiator / a resin composition containing metal oxide particles.
  • Negative photosensitive layer (second transparent layer) / negative-type photosensitive component containing a low molecular weight component specifically, a component capable of contributing to a curing reaction such as a polymerizable monomer and a polymerization initiator
  • a transfer film provided with a composition layer (third transparent layer) is disclosed.
  • the present inventor prepared a transfer film with reference to Patent Document 1 and examined the pattern forming process. As a result, a component that does not dissolve in a developing solution during the developing step (hereinafter, also referred to as “development undissolved substance”). ) Adhered to the object to be treated, and it was clarified that a defect occurred in the pattern. Further, as a result of further studies by the present inventor, the adhesion of the undissolved developer to the object to be processed (hereinafter, also referred to as “reattachment failure”) is a half exposure that occurs in the boundary region between the exposed portion and the unexposed portion. It was also clarified that the cause was the low solubility of the part in the developer.
  • the half-exposed portion is intended as a region where a curing reaction occurs due to light leakage caused by diffusion or diffraction of light source light, although the region is originally shielded by a mask. More specifically, FIG. 1 will show that the negative photosensitive composition layer 41 arranged on the substrate 40 is exposed to light (arrows in FIG. 1) through a mask 42 having an opening in a predetermined region. By irradiating, the opening portion of the mask 42 becomes the exposed portion 43, and the region shielded by the mask 42 becomes the unexposed portion 44.
  • the half-exposed unit 45 is a region where a curing reaction occurs due to light leakage caused by diffusion or diffraction of light source light, although it is originally a region shielded by the mask 42. That is, it was clarified that the component cured in this half-exposed portion has low solubility in the developing solution and becomes an undissolved substance in the developing solution, which causes a reattachment failure.
  • a transfer film having a temporary support and a composition layer The composition layer includes a negative photosensitive composition layer, and includes a negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group, and a photopolymerization initiator.
  • Requirement 1 The surface of the transfer film opposite to the temporary support side is brought into contact with the glass substrate to form a laminate having the glass substrate, the composition layer, and the temporary support in this order, and the laminate is formed.
  • the thickness of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer in the exposed portion after the body is exposed to a plurality of locations while increasing the exposure amount and the development and cleaning treatment satisfying the following condition A is performed.
  • the measurement was performed, and the points corresponding to the film thickness and the exposure amount at each exposure point were plotted on the orthogonal coordinates with the film thickness of the cured film as the vertical axis and the exposure amount as the horizontal axis, and the film thickness changed substantially.
  • the film thickness at the exposure amount that disappears is used as the reference film thickness, and from the orthogonal coordinates, the exposure amount E10 at which the film thickness of the cured film is 10% of the reference film thickness, and the film thickness of the cured film are
  • the exposure amount E90 which is 90% of the reference film thickness
  • Condition A A development treatment is carried out for 30 seconds using a 1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution having a temperature of 30 ° C., and then a cleaning treatment is carried out for 30 seconds using pure water having a temperature of 30 ° C. ..
  • the development process is a shower method, the shower pressure is 0.10 MPa, and the shower flow rate is 1000 mL / min.
  • the washing process is a shower method, the shower pressure is 0.10 MPa, and the shower flow rate is 1000 mL / min. Equation (1): E10 / E90 ⁇ 0.5 Requirement 2: The surface of the transfer film opposite to the temporary support side is brought into contact with the quartz crystal to form a laminate having the quartz crystal, the composition layer, and the temporary support in this order. After irradiating the laminate with ultraviolet rays at twice the exposure amount of E90, when the exposed laminate is immersed in a 1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution having a temperature of 30 ° C., crystal vibration occurs.
  • the mass increase rate of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer 30 seconds after the start of immersion, which is determined based on the child microbalance method, is 20% by mass or less.
  • the transfer film according to [1] which satisfies the following formula (1-1). Equation (1-1): E10 / E90 ⁇ 0.8
  • the E10 and the E90 are synonymous with the E10 and the E90 in the formula (1), respectively.
  • the binder polymer contains a structural unit having a radically polymerizable group.
  • the transfer film according to [5], wherein the content of the structural unit having a radically polymerizable group is 20% by mass or more with respect to all the structural units in the binder polymer.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer further contains a polymerization inhibitor and contains a polymerization inhibitor.
  • the bonding step is a step of bonding the transfer film and the substrate having the conductive layer by roll-to-roll, and at least the long laminated body formed by the bonding step is bonded.
  • the present invention it is possible to provide a transfer film capable of forming a pattern in which defects caused by reattachment failure are suppressed. Further, the present invention can provide a method for manufacturing a laminated body and a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram when the exposed sample of FIG. 4 is developed. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating a sensitivity curve. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the structure of the transfer film of 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the structure of the transfer film of 2nd Embodiment.
  • the numerical range represented by using “-" means a range including the numerical values before and after "-" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
  • the upper limit value or the lower limit value described in one numerical range may be replaced with the upper limit value or the lower limit value in another numerical range described in stages. ..
  • the upper limit value or the lower limit value described in a certain numerical range may be replaced with the value shown in the examples.
  • process is included in this term not only as an independent process but also as long as the intended purpose of the process is achieved even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. ..
  • transparent means that the average transmittance of visible light having a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm is 80% or more, and is preferably 90% or more.
  • the average transmittance of visible light is a value measured by using a spectrophotometer, and can be measured by, for example, a spectrophotometer U-3310 manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) are TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, or TSKgel G2000HxL (all trade names manufactured by Toso Co., Ltd.) as columns. ), THF (tetrahydrofuran) as the eluent, polystyrene as the standard material, and polystyrene as the standard material measured by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer.
  • GPC gel permeation chromatography
  • the molecular weight of a compound having a molecular weight distribution is the weight average molecular weight (Mw).
  • the ratio of the constituent units of the polymer is the mass ratio.
  • the content of the metal element is a value measured by using an inductively coupled plasma (ICP) spectroscopic analyzer.
  • the refractive index is a value measured using an ellipsometer at a wavelength of 550 nm.
  • the hue is a value measured using a color difference meter (CR-221, manufactured by Minolta Co., Ltd.).
  • (meth) acrylic is a concept that includes both acrylic and methacrylic
  • (meth) acryloxy group is a concept that includes both an acryloxy group and a metaacryloxy group.
  • alkali-soluble means that the solubility of sodium carbonate in 100 g of a 1% by mass aqueous solution at 22 ° C. is 0.1 g or more.
  • water-soluble means that the solubility in 100 g of water having a liquid temperature of 22 ° C. and a pH of 7.0 is 0.1 g or more. Therefore, for example, the water-soluble resin is intended to be a resin satisfying the above-mentioned solubility conditions.
  • the "solid content" of a composition means a component forming a composition layer formed by using the composition, and when the composition contains a solvent (organic solvent, water, etc.), the solvent is used. Means all ingredients except. Further, if the component forms a composition layer, the liquid component is also regarded as a solid content.
  • the transfer film of the present invention is A transfer film having a temporary support and a composition layer.
  • the composition layer includes a negative photosensitive composition layer, and includes a negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group, and a photopolymerization initiator. Satisfy Requirement 1 and Requirement 2 described later. With the above configuration, the transfer film of the present invention can form a pattern in which defects caused by reattachment failure are suppressed.
  • the composition layer is composed of only the negative photosensitive composition layer (single layer configuration of only the negative photosensitive composition layer)
  • a mode in which the composition layer is composed of only the negative photosensitive composition layer will be described as an example.
  • a laminate formed by transferring a transfer film provided with a temporary support and a negative photosensitive composition layer to a substrate a laminate composed of a substrate / a negative photosensitive composition layer / a temporary support.
  • the thickness of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer in the exposed portion after exposure was performed at a plurality of locations while increasing the exposure amount and development and cleaning treatment were performed under predetermined conditions, and the cured film was measured.
  • the points corresponding to the film thickness and the exposure amount at each exposed point are plotted on the orthogonal coordinates with the film thickness as the vertical axis and the exposure amount as the horizontal axis (hereinafter, the exposure amount with the film thickness of the cured film as the vertical axis).
  • the curve obtained by plotting the points corresponding to the film thickness and the amount of exposure at each exposure point on the orthogonal coordinates with the horizontal axis as the horizontal axis is also called a "sensitivity curve"), and the exposure that the film thickness does not change substantially
  • the film thickness in the amount is used as the reference film thickness, and from the orthogonal coordinates, the exposure amount E10 is 10% of the reference film thickness, and the exposure amount is 90% of the reference film thickness.
  • the transfer film of the present invention is characterized in that the difference between E10 and E90 is small, as shown in FIG. 2A. That is, during the exposure process, curing is suppressed until a predetermined exposure amount is reached, and when the predetermined exposure amount is reached, a chain curing reaction occurs and a sensitivity curve with a steep slope is shown. As a result, the transfer film of the present invention undergoes a curing reaction even if light leakage occurs due to diffusion or diffraction of light source light in a shielded region by a mask during exposure processing, as long as the exposure amount does not reach a predetermined level. Progression is suppressed, and undeveloped undissolved material is less likely to be formed.
  • the inventors have clarified by this study that when E10 / E90 ⁇ 1.5, the reattachment failure can be remarkably suppressed.
  • the difference between E10 and E90 is large, and a sensitivity curve with a gentle inclination is shown.
  • a curing reaction is likely to occur even with light leakage caused by diffusion or diffraction of light source light in a shielded region by a mask during an exposure process, and a developed undissolved substance is likely to be formed.
  • the present inventor also suppresses the swelling rate (mass increase rate) of the exposed negative photosensitive composition layer (cured film) by the developer to a predetermined value or less, which also causes a reattachment failure.
  • the swelling rate (mass increase rate) is too large, the half-exposed portion, which is insufficiently cured, swells with the developing solution and is easily deformed to cause desorption, which may cause a reattachment failure.
  • the cured film is swollen, the elastic modulus is lowered, so that the undissolved developer liquid is likely to adhere to the surface of the swollen cured film, and a reattachment failure is likely to occur.
  • the present inventor has clarified that when the above-mentioned mass increase rate is 20% by mass or less, the reattachment failure can be remarkably suppressed.
  • the transfer film of the present invention is suitable for a developing process in which a developing solution is circulated and the developing solution is repeatedly used.
  • the solubility of the developer is usually lowered due to the developer fatigue, and reattachment failure due to the undissolved developer is likely to occur.
  • the transfer film of the present invention as described above, the generation of undissolved developer in the developing solution due to the half-exposed portion is suppressed, so that even if the developing solution is used repeatedly, it is contained in the developing solution. Undissolved developer is less likely to occur.
  • the transfer film of the present invention is suitable for a method for producing a laminate in a roll tool process.
  • the area in which the transport roller contacts the work is large. Therefore, if the undissolved developer solution adheres to the work after the development process, the undissolved developer solution is pressed against the work, and a reattachment failure is likely to occur.
  • the transfer film of the present invention as described above, the generation of undissolved developer due to the half-exposed portion is suppressed, so that the undissolved developer adheres to the work after the development process. Is unlikely to occur.
  • the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the transfer film of the present invention has a temporary support and a composition layer arranged on the temporary support, and the composition layer includes a negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • the composition layer is not particularly limited as long as it includes a negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • the composition layer may have a single layer structure or may have a structure of two or more layers.
  • examples of the other composition layer include a refractive index adjusting layer, a thermoplastic resin layer, and an intermediate layer.
  • the transfer film may have a structure in which a protective film (hereinafter, also referred to as “cover film”) is provided on the composition layer.
  • the composition layer does not contain a protective film.
  • the transfer film of the present invention satisfies the following requirements 1 and 2.
  • Requirement 1 The surface of the transfer film opposite to the temporary support side is brought into contact with the glass substrate to form a laminate having the glass substrate, the composition layer, and the temporary support in this order, and the laminate is formed.
  • the thickness of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer in the exposed portion after the body is exposed to a plurality of locations while increasing the exposure amount and the development and cleaning treatment satisfying the following condition A is performed. The measurement was performed, and the points corresponding to the film thickness and the exposure amount at each exposure point were plotted on the orthogonal coordinates with the film thickness of the cured film as the vertical axis and the exposure amount as the horizontal axis, and the film thickness changed substantially.
  • the reference film thickness is the film thickness at the exposure amount that disappears, and from the orthogonal coordinates, the exposure amount E10 is 10% of the reference film thickness, and the film thickness is 90% of the reference film thickness.
  • the exposure amount E90 is calculated, the relationship of the following formula (1) is satisfied.
  • the fact that the film thickness does not substantially change can be mentioned, for example, that the change in film thickness before and after the treatment under the following condition A is 3.0% or less.
  • Condition A A development treatment is carried out for 30 seconds using a 1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution having a temperature of 30 ° C., and then a cleaning treatment is carried out for 30 seconds using pure water having a temperature of 30 ° C. ..
  • the development process is a shower method, the shower pressure is 0.10 MPa, and the shower flow rate is 1000 mL / min.
  • the washing process is a shower method, the shower pressure is 0.10 MPa, and the shower flow rate is 1000 mL / min. Equation (1): E10 / E90 ⁇ 0.5
  • a stylus type film thickness meter for example, "DekTak150” manufactured by Bruker Co., Ltd.
  • the transfer film has a protective film
  • the protective film is peeled off, and then the transfer film after the protective film is peeled off is transferred to the glass substrate.
  • the transfer film has another composition layer (for example, a thermoplastic resin layer and an intermediate layer) between the temporary support and the negative photosensitive composition layer
  • the transfer film is transferred onto the glass substrate. This comprises a step of removing the other composition layer from the laminated body after subjecting the laminated body to a predetermined ultraviolet irradiation.
  • the other composition layer can be removed from the laminate by treatments such as alkaline development treatment, solvent cleaning, and tape peeling.
  • the transfer film has another composition layer (for example, a refractive index adjusting layer) on the side opposite to the temporary support side of the negative photosensitive composition layer, the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • a sensitivity curve is created by plotting the points corresponding to the film thickness and the exposure amount at each exposure point on the orthogonal coordinates with the total film thickness of the above and the other composition layers as the vertical axis and the exposure amount as the horizontal axis.
  • the residual film ratio of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer can be measured.
  • the laminated body irradiated with ultraviolet rays is kept in an environment of 25 ° C. and 60% for 24 hours before the development and cleaning treatment satisfying the above-mentioned condition A is carried out.
  • the sensitivity curve in Requirement 1 will be described with reference to the drawings.
  • a method of obtaining a sensitivity curve of a transfer film composed of a temporary support, a negative photosensitive composition layer, and a protective film will be described as an example.
  • the surface of the transfer film opposite to the temporary support side is brought into contact with the glass substrate, and the transfer film is transferred (laminated) to the glass substrate to prepare a laminated body.
  • the transfer film has a protective film
  • the transfer film from which the protective film has been peeled off is transferred to the glass substrate.
  • the laminate (sample) thus obtained has a negative photosensitive composition layer 32 having a thickness T and a temporary support 34 on a glass substrate 30.
  • the transfer can be carried out using a commercially available device (for example, a known laminator such as a vacuum laminator and an auto-cut laminator).
  • the temperature at which the transfer film is transferred onto the glass substrate is not particularly limited, but is preferably 80 to 150 ° C, more preferably 90 to 120 ° C, for example.
  • the transfer film is transferred to the glass substrate, it is preferably carried out by roll-to-roll, and the transport speed at that time is preferably, for example, 0.5 to 5 m / min. More preferably, it is 5 to 3 m / min.
  • the glass substrate is not particularly limited, but for example, soda glass, non-alkali glass, quartz glass and the like can be used.
  • ultraviolet irradiation is performed on the negative photosensitive composition layer through the temporary support 34 while increasing the exposure amount. Specifically, while increasing the exposure amount by 10 mJ / cm 2 to 5 mJ / cm 2 , exposure is performed at 20 or more locations on different positions of the negative photosensitive composition layer. That is, different exposure amounts are exposed to 20 or more different positions on the surface of the negative photosensitive composition layer. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, as shown by the white arrows, different parts of the negative photosensitive composition layer are exposed to different exposure amounts. In FIG. 4, exposure is performed at three different positions of the negative photosensitive composition layer 32. The leftmost exposure in FIG.
  • the area of the exposed portion is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a length of about 10 mm and a width of about 20 mm. In addition, 20 or more exposure points are carried out. The upper limit of the number of exposed points is not particularly limited, but it is preferable to carry out the exposure until the film thickness reaches the maximum value and becomes substantially constant, and more preferably 50 or less.
  • the exposure apparatus is not particularly limited as long as it can irradiate ultraviolet rays, but for example, it is preferable to use an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp.
  • the developing and cleaning treatment satisfying the above condition A can be carried out by using a developing machine "YCD-500WA” manufactured by Yamagata Machinery Co., Ltd. and using a "full cone nozzle” as a shower nozzle. Specifically, a development process (development method: shower) for 30 seconds using a developer "YCD-500WA” manufactured by Yamagata Machinery Co., Ltd. and a 1.0 mass% concentration sodium carbonate aqueous solution at a temperature of 30 ° C.
  • shower nozzle “full cone nozzle”, shower pressure: 0.10 MPa, shower flow rate is 1000 mL / min), and then cleaning treatment for 30 seconds using pure water at a temperature of 30 ° C.
  • cleaning method shower washing, shower nozzle: “full cone nozzle”, shower pressure: 0.10 MPa, shower flow rate is 1000 mL / min).
  • drying temperature is not particularly limited, but is preferably 30 to 80 ° C, more preferably 30 to 60 ° C, for example.
  • the drying time is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 to 30 minutes, more preferably 5 to 10 minutes, for example.
  • FIG. 5 is a view after the film shown in FIG. 4 is subjected to development and cleaning treatment satisfying the condition A, and the cured film 32A at the leftmost exposed portion has the thinnest thickness and the most.
  • the thickness of the cured film 32A at the exposed portion on the right side is the thickest. That is, the relationship is T1 ⁇ T2 ⁇ T3.
  • FIG. 5 only the film thicknesses at three points are shown, but in reality, the film thicknesses at 20 or more exposed points are measured.
  • a plot diagram is created using the data of the exposure amount and the film thickness at each exposed portion. Specifically, the points corresponding to the film thickness and the exposure amount at each exposed portion are plotted on the orthogonal coordinates with the film thickness as the vertical axis and the exposure amount as the horizontal axis. That is, a graph (sensitivity curve) is created with the film thickness at each exposed point on the vertical axis and the exposure amount at each exposed point on the horizontal axis. The unit of the vertical axis is ⁇ m, and the unit of the exposure amount is mJ / cm 2 .
  • FIG. 6 shows an example of a plot diagram. Each black circle in FIG. 6 corresponds to the result (film thickness and exposure amount) at each exposed portion. In FIG. 6, the number of plots of black circles is smaller than the actual 20 points for the sake of simplicity. Further, a line may be created by connecting the plotted points in the obtained plot diagram.
  • the film thickness usually increases as the exposure amount increases in the region A, and the film thickness becomes substantially constant at the maximum value even if the exposure amount increases in the region B. ..
  • the decomposition amount of the photopolymerization initiator increases in the exposure region, and the amount of active species (for example, radicals) generated increases.
  • the generated active species for example, radicals
  • act on the polymerization components such as the polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group, and a chain polymerization reaction occurs.
  • the cured film formed by the polymerization reaction becomes less likely to dissolve in the alkaline developer, the cured film becomes more difficult to be removed at the exposed portion where the exposure amount is large, and the film thickness increases.
  • the region B having a certain exposure amount or more the cured film remains almost, and the film thickness becomes substantially constant at the maximum value. That is, the film thickness does not substantially change.
  • the film thickness does not substantially change.
  • the film thickness does not substantially change means that the rate of change in the film thickness at two adjacent plot points is 3% or less. Specifically, it is located in the region B in FIG.
  • ⁇ ( TP2 - TP1 ) It means that the rate of change represented by / T P1 ⁇ ⁇ 100 is 3% or less.
  • the thickness of the cured film in the region B where the film thickness does not substantially change even if the exposure amount is increased is set as the reference film thickness T100, and the film thickness of the cured film is 10% of the reference film thickness T100.
  • the exposure amount E10 is calculated, and the exposure amount E90 at which the film thickness of the cured film is 90% of the reference film thickness T90 is calculated, and the value of E10 / E90 is calculated based on the obtained numerical values. ..
  • Requirement 2 The surface of the transfer film opposite to the temporary support side is brought into contact with the crystal oscillator to form a laminate having the crystal oscillator, the composition layer, and the temporary support in this order. After irradiating the laminate with ultraviolet rays at twice the exposure amount of E90, the crystal vibration when the exposed laminate is immersed in a 1.0% by mass concentration sodium carbonate aqueous solution at a temperature of 30 ° C. The mass increase rate of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer 30 seconds after the start of immersion, which is obtained based on the child microbalance method (QCM method), is 20% by mass or less.
  • QCM method child microbalance method
  • the mass increase rate is ⁇ (weight of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer after immersion-weight of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer before immersion) / negative photosensitive before immersion. Weight of the cured film of the sex composition layer ⁇ ⁇ 100.
  • the mass increase rate based on the QCM method can be measured by a resist development analyzer such as "RDA-Qz3" manufactured by Lithotech Japan.
  • the transfer film has another composition layer (for example, a thermoplastic resin layer and an intermediate layer) between the temporary support and the negative photosensitive composition layer, the transfer film is transferred onto the glass substrate.
  • the above-mentioned other composition layer is removed from the laminated body after subjecting the laminated body to the predetermined ultraviolet irradiation.
  • the other composition layer can be removed from the laminate by treatments such as alkaline development treatment, solvent cleaning, and tape peeling. Further, it is preferable that the laminated body irradiated with ultraviolet rays is kept in an environment of 25 ° C.
  • the transfer film has another composition layer (for example, a refractive index adjusting layer) on the side opposite to the temporary support side of the negative photosensitive composition layer, the transfer film is transferred onto the glass substrate.
  • the other composition layer is located between the cured negative photosensitive composition layer and the glass substrate. Therefore, when the above-mentioned mass increase rate is measured for the laminate, the mass increase derived from the other composition layers is usually substantially nonexistent or even slight. be.
  • the refractive index adjusting layer is usually extremely thin with respect to the cured negative photosensitive composition layer, and has the above-mentioned mass with respect to the laminate.
  • the mass increase derived from the refractive index adjusting layer usually does not occur substantially.
  • the transfer film of the present invention preferably satisfies the following formula (1-1) in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. Equation (1-1): E10 / E90 ⁇ 0.8 In formula (1-1), E10 and E90 are synonymous with E10 and E90 in formula (1), respectively.
  • the compounding ratio of the polymerization inhibitor and the photopolymerization initiator in the negative photosensitive composition layer is adjusted within a predetermined range, and A method of reprecipitating the binder polymer to reduce the content of the residual monomer, adjusting the compounding ratio of the polymerization inhibitor and the photopolymerization initiator in the negative photosensitive composition layer to a predetermined range, and The method of introducing a large amount of radically polymerizable groups into the binder polymer and the compounding ratio of the polymerization inhibitor and the photopolymerization initiator in the negative photosensitive composition layer are adjusted within a predetermined range, and reprecipitated into the binder polymer. Examples thereof include a method of reducing the content of the residual monomer and introducing a large amount of radically polymerizable groups into the binder polymer.
  • the transfer film of the present invention may be used as a transfer film for a protective film or as a transfer film for an etching resist, as will be described later.
  • the term "for protective film” means a protective film provided to cover the electrodes and / or the wiring for the purpose of protecting the electrodes and / or the wiring, and a protective film for insulating the electrodes (specifically). Is intended as a protective film for insulating electrodes such as bridge wiring).
  • the structure of the transfer film is preferably, for example, the above-mentioned structure (1) or (2).
  • the composition of the transfer film is preferably, for example, the above-mentioned configurations (2) to (4).
  • the composition layer of the transfer film further has another composition layer (for example, a refractive index adjusting layer) on the side opposite to the temporary support side of the negative photosensitive composition layer, the sum of the other layers is described above.
  • the thickness is preferably 0.1 to 30%, more preferably 0.1 to 20%, based on the thickness of the negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • the other composition layer is a single layer of the refractive index adjusting layer, it is preferably 0.1 to 10%, more preferably 0.1 to 5%.
  • the maximum width of the undulation of the transfer film is preferably 300 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 200 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 60 ⁇ m or less.
  • the lower limit of the maximum width of the swell is 0 ⁇ m or more, preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or more, and more preferably 1 ⁇ m or more.
  • the maximum width of the waviness of the transfer film is a value measured by the following procedure. First, the transfer film is cut in a direction perpendicular to the main surface so as to have a size of 20 cm in length ⁇ 20 cm in width to prepare a test sample. If the transfer film has a protective film, the protective film is peeled off.
  • test sample is placed on a stage having a smooth and horizontal surface so that the surface of the temporary support faces the stage.
  • the surface of the sample sample was scanned with a laser microscope (for example, VK-9700SP manufactured by Keyence Co., Ltd.) for a range of 10 cm square in the center of the test sample to obtain a three-dimensional surface image, and the obtained 3 Subtract the minimum concave height from the maximum convex height observed in the 3D surface image.
  • a laser microscope for example, VK-9700SP manufactured by Keyence Co., Ltd.
  • the transfer film of the present invention will be described with reference to an example of a specific embodiment.
  • the transfer film of the first embodiment below can be suitably used as a transfer film for a protective film
  • the transfer film of the second embodiment below can be suitably used as a transfer film for an etching resist. It is a composition.
  • the transfer film 10 shown in FIG. 7 has a temporary support 1, a composition layer 2 including a negative photosensitive composition layer 3 and a refractive index adjusting layer 5, and a protective film 7 in this order.
  • the transfer film 10 shown in FIG. 7 has a form in which the protective film 7 is arranged, but the protective film 7 may not be arranged.
  • the transfer film 10 shown in FIG. 7 has a form in which the refractive index adjusting layer 5 is arranged, but the refractive index adjusting layer 5 may not be arranged.
  • each element constituting the transfer film will be described.
  • Temporary support The transfer film has a temporary support.
  • the temporary support is a member that supports the composition layer, and is finally removed by a peeling treatment.
  • the temporary support may have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure.
  • the temporary support is preferably a film, more preferably a resin film.
  • the temporary support is preferably a film that is flexible and does not undergo significant deformation, shrinkage, or elongation under pressure, or under pressure and heating.
  • the film include a polyethylene terephthalate film (for example, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film), a polymethylmethacrylate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, a polyimide film, and a polycarbonate film.
  • a polyethylene terephthalate film is preferable as the temporary support.
  • the film used as the temporary support is free from deformation such as wrinkles and scratches.
  • the temporary support is preferably highly transparent from the viewpoint that the pattern can be exposed through the temporary support, and the transmittance at 365 nm is preferably 60% or more, more preferably 70% or more. From the viewpoint of pattern formation during pattern exposure via the temporary support and transparency of the temporary support, it is preferable that the haze of the temporary support is small. Specifically, the haze value of the temporary support is preferably 2% or less, more preferably 0.5% or less, still more preferably 0.1% or less. From the viewpoint of pattern formation during pattern exposure via the temporary support and transparency of the temporary support, it is preferable that the number of fine particles, foreign substances, and defects contained in the temporary support is small.
  • the number of fine particles, foreign matter, and defects having a diameter of 1 ⁇ m or more in the temporary support is preferably 50 pieces / 10 mm 2 or less, more preferably 10 pieces / 10 mm 2 or less, further preferably 3 pieces / 10 mm 2 or less, and 0. Pieces / 10 mm 2 are particularly preferred.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 to 200 ⁇ m, more preferably 5 to 150 ⁇ m, still more preferably 5 to 50 ⁇ m, and most preferably 5 to 25 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of ease of handling and versatility.
  • the thickness of the temporary support is calculated as an average value of any five points measured by cross-sectional observation with an SEM (Scanning Electron Microscope).
  • the side of the temporary support in contact with the composition layer may be surface-modified by UV irradiation, corona discharge, plasma, or the like.
  • the exposure amount is preferably 10 to 2000 mJ / cm 2 , and more preferably 50 to 1000 mJ / cm 2 .
  • the light sources include low-pressure mercury lamps, high-pressure mercury lamps, ultra-high-pressure mercury lamps, carbon arc lamps, metal halide lamps, xenon lamps, chemical lamps, electrodeless discharge lamps, and light-emitting diodes that emit light in the wavelength band of 150 to 450 nm. LED) and the like. As long as the amount of light irradiation is within this range, the lamp output and illuminance are not particularly limited.
  • Examples of the temporary support include a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 16 ⁇ m, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 12 ⁇ m, and a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 9 ⁇ m.
  • Preferred forms of the temporary support include, for example, paragraphs [0017] to [0018] of JP-A-2014-085643, paragraphs [0019]-[0026] of JP-A-2016-0273363, and International Publication No. 2012 /.
  • the description is given in paragraphs [0041] to [0057] of No. 081680 and paragraphs [0029] to [0040] of International Publication No. 2018/179370, and the contents of these publications are incorporated in the present specification.
  • a layer containing fine particles may be provided on the surface of the temporary support from the viewpoint of imparting handleability.
  • the lubricant layer may be provided on one side of the temporary support or on both sides.
  • the diameter of the particles contained in the lubricant layer is preferably 0.05 to 0.8 ⁇ m.
  • the film thickness of the lubricant layer is preferably 0.05 to 1.0 ⁇ m.
  • Examples of commercially available temporary supports include Lumirror 16KS40, Lumirror 16FB40 (above, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.), Cosmoshine A4100, Cosmoshine A4300, and Cosmoshine A8300 (above, manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd.).
  • the transfer film has a negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • a pattern can be formed on the transferred body by transferring the negative photosensitive composition layer onto the transferred body and then exposing and developing the layer.
  • the exposed portion becomes a cured film due to exposure, and the solubility in a developing solution is lowered.
  • the components that can be contained in the negative photosensitive composition layer will be described.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a binder polymer.
  • the binder polymer include (meth) acrylic resin, styrene resin, epoxy resin, amide resin, amide epoxy resin, alkyd resin, phenol resin, ester resin, urethane resin, and the reaction of epoxy resin with (meth) acrylic acid.
  • examples thereof include the obtained epoxy acrylate resin and the acid-modified epoxy acrylate resin obtained by reacting the epoxy acrylate resin with the acid anhydride.
  • the binder polymer is a (meth) acrylic resin in that it is excellent in alkali developability and film forming property.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin means a resin having a structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound.
  • the content of the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, still more preferably 90% by mass or more, based on all the structural units of the (meth) acrylic resin. ..
  • the (meth) acrylic resin may be composed of only a structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound, or may have a structural unit derived from a polymerizable monomer other than the (meth) acrylic compound. .. That is, the upper limit of the content of the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound is 100% by mass or less with respect to all the structural units of the (meth) acrylic resin.
  • Examples of the (meth) acrylic compound include (meth) acrylic acid, (meth) acrylic acid ester, (meth) acrylamide, and (meth) acrylonitrile.
  • Examples of the (meth) acrylic acid ester include (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid tetrahydrofurfuryl ester, (meth) acrylic acid dimethylaminoethyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid diethylaminoethyl ester, and (meth) acrylic acid ester.
  • Acrylic acid glycidyl ester (meth) acrylic acid benzyl ester, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl (meth) acrylate, and 2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropyl (meth) acrylate.
  • Meta) Acrylic acid alkyl esters are preferred.
  • the (meth) acrylamide include acrylamide such as diacetone acrylamide.
  • the alkyl group of the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester may be linear or may have a branch. Specific examples include, for example, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, pentyl (meth) acrylate, hexyl (meth) acrylate, ( Heptyl acrylate, octyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, nonyl (meth) acrylate, decyl (meth) acrylate, undecyl (meth) acrylate, and (meth) acrylate.
  • Examples thereof include (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters having an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms such as dodecyl.
  • the alkyl group of the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester may be cyclic.
  • the cyclic alkyl group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. Specific examples include cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
  • As the (meth) acrylic acid ester a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is preferable, and methyl (meth) acrylate or ethyl (meth) acrylate is more preferable.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin may have a structural unit other than the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound.
  • the polymerizable monomer forming the structural unit is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound other than the (meth) acrylic compound that can be copolymerized with the (meth) acrylic compound, and is, for example, styrene, vinyltoluene, and ⁇ . -Styrene compounds such as methylstyrene which may have a substituent on the ⁇ -position or aromatic ring, vinyl alcohol esters such as acrylonitrile and vinyl-n-butyl ether, maleic acid, maleic acid anhydride, monomethyl maleate, maleic acid.
  • maleic acid monoesters such as monoethyl and monoisopropyl maleic acid, fumaric acid, cinnamic acid, ⁇ -cyanocinnamic acid, itaconic acid, and crotonic acid. These polymerizable monomers may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin preferably has a structural unit having an acid group from the viewpoint of improving the alkali developability.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, and a phosphonic acid group.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin more preferably has a structural unit having a carboxy group, and further preferably has a structural unit derived from the above-mentioned (meth) acrylic acid.
  • the content of the structural unit having an acid group (preferably the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid) in the (meth) acrylic resin is excellent in developability, and is based on the total mass of the (meth) acrylic resin. 10% by mass or more is preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 40% by mass or less, in terms of excellent alkali resistance.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin has a structural unit derived from the above-mentioned (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester.
  • the content of the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester in the (meth) acrylic resin is preferably 50 to 90% by mass, preferably 60 to 90% by mass, based on all the structural units of the (meth) acrylic resin. More preferably, 65 to 90% by mass is further preferable.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin a resin having both a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable, and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid are preferable.
  • a resin composed only of structural units derived from the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is more preferable.
  • an acrylic resin having a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid, a structural unit derived from methyl methacrylate, and a structural unit derived from ethyl acrylate is also preferable.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin may have at least one selected from the group consisting of a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid and a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid alkyl ester from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. It is preferable to have both a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid and a structural unit derived from an alkyl methacrylate ester.
  • the total content of the constituent units derived from methacrylic acid and the constituent units derived from methacrylic acid alkyl ester in the (meth) acrylic resin is higher than that of all the constituent units of the (meth) acrylic resin because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • 40% by mass or more is preferable, and 60% by mass or more is more preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, and may be 100% by mass or less, preferably 80% by mass or less.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin is at least one selected from the group consisting of a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid and a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid, and acrylic acid, because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. It is also preferable to have at least one selected from the group consisting of the structural unit derived from the acrylic acid alkyl ester and the structural unit derived from the acrylic acid alkyl ester. From the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent, the total content of the structural unit derived from methacrylic acid and the structural unit derived from methacrylic acid alkyl ester is the structural unit derived from acrylic acid and the structural unit derived from acrylic acid alkyl ester. The mass ratio is preferably 60/40 to 80/20 with respect to the total content of the ester.
  • the (meth) acrylic resin preferably has an ester group at the terminal in that the negative photosensitive composition layer after transfer is excellent in developability.
  • the terminal portion of the (meth) acrylic resin is composed of a site derived from the polymerization initiator used in the synthesis.
  • a (meth) acrylic resin having an ester group at the terminal can be synthesized by using a polymerization initiator that generates a radical having an ester group.
  • the binder polymer is preferably, for example, a binder polymer having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more from the viewpoint of developability.
  • the binder polymer is, for example, a resin having a carboxy group having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more (so-called carboxy group-containing resin) from the viewpoint that it is easily crosslinked with the crosslinked component by heating to form a strong film. More preferably, it is a (meth) acrylic resin having a carboxy group having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more (so-called carboxy group-containing (meth) acrylic resin).
  • the binder polymer is a resin having a carboxy group
  • the three-dimensional crosslink density can be increased by adding a thermally crosslinkable compound such as a blocked isocyanate compound and thermally crosslinking the binder polymer.
  • a thermally crosslinkable compound such as a blocked isocyanate compound
  • the carboxy group of the resin having a carboxy group is dehydrated and made hydrophobic, the wet heat resistance can be improved.
  • the carboxy group-containing (meth) acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more is not particularly limited as long as the above acid value conditions are satisfied, and can be appropriately selected from known (meth) acrylic resins.
  • carboxy group-containing acrylic resins having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more paragraphs [0033] to [0052] of JP-A-2010-237589.
  • a carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more can be preferably used.
  • the binder polymer is a styrene-acrylic copolymer.
  • the styrene-acrylic copolymer refers to a resin having a structural unit derived from a styrene compound and a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylic compound, and is a structural unit derived from the styrene compound.
  • the total content of the structural units derived from the (meth) acrylic compound is preferably 30% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, based on all the structural units of the copolymer.
  • the lower limit of the content of the structural unit derived from the styrene compound is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and 20% by mass or more, based on all the structural units of the copolymer. More preferred.
  • the upper limit is preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass, and even more preferably 50% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit of the content of the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, based on 10% by mass, based on all the structural units of the copolymer. By mass or more is more preferable, and 20% by mass or more is particularly preferable.
  • the upper limit thereof is preferably 95% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass, and even more preferably 30% by mass or less.
  • the binder polymer preferably has an aromatic ring structure, and more preferably has a structural unit having an aromatic ring structure, from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the monomers forming the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure include a monomer having an aralkyl group, styrene, and a polymerizable styrene derivative (for example, methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, tert-butoxystyrene, acetoxystyrene, 4-vinylbenzoic acid). , Styrene dimer, styrene trimmer, etc.). Of these, a monomer having an aralkyl group or styrene is preferable.
  • aralkyl group examples include a substituted or unsubstituted phenylalkyl group (excluding a benzyl group), a substituted or unsubstituted benzyl group and the like, and a substituted or unsubstituted benzyl group is preferable.
  • Examples of the monomer having a phenylalkyl group include phenylethyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
  • Examples of the monomer having a benzyl group include (meth) acrylate having a benzyl group, for example, benzyl (meth) acrylate, and chlorobenzyl (meth) acrylate; a vinyl monomer having a benzyl group, for example, vinylbenzyl chloride, and the like. Examples include vinylbenzyl alcohol. Of these, benzyl (meth) acrylate is preferable.
  • the binder polymer has a structural unit (constituent unit derived from styrene) represented by the following formula (S) from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the content of the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure is 5 to 90 mass with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • % Is preferred, more preferably 10 to 70% by mass, still more preferably 20 to 60% by mass.
  • the content of the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure in the binder polymer is preferably 5 to 70 mol%, preferably 10 to 60 mol%, based on all the structural units of the binder polymer, from the viewpoint of further excellent effect of the present invention. Is more preferable, and 20 to 60 mol% is further preferable.
  • the content of the structural unit represented by the above formula (S) in the binder polymer is preferably 5 to 70 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of further excellent effect of the present invention. From 20 to 60 mol% is more preferable, 20 to 60 mol% is further preferable, and 20 to 50 mol% is particularly preferable.
  • the above “constituent unit” shall be synonymous with the "monomer unit”.
  • the above-mentioned "monomer unit” may be modified after polymerization by a polymer reaction or the like. The same applies to the following.
  • the binder polymer preferably has an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. That is, the binder polymer preferably has a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure may be monocyclic or polycyclic. Above all, it is more preferable that the binder polymer has a ring structure in which two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are fused.
  • Examples of the ring constituting the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in the structural unit having the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure include a tricyclodecane ring, a cyclohexane ring, a cyclopentane ring, a norbornane ring, and an isoborone ring.
  • a ring in which two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are condensed is preferable because the effect of the present invention is more excellent, and a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring (tricyclo [5.2.1.0 2,6 ] decane) is preferable. Ring) is more preferred.
  • the monomer forming a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure examples include dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, and isobornyl (meth) acrylate.
  • the binder polymer more preferably has a structural unit represented by the following formula (Cy), and the structural unit represented by the above formula (S) and the following formula. It is more preferable to have a structural unit represented by (Cy).
  • RM represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
  • RCy represents a monovalent group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure.
  • the RM in the formula ( Cy ) is preferably a methyl group.
  • the RCy in the formula ( Cy ) is preferably a monovalent group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure having 5 to 20 carbon atoms, and a fat having 6 to 16 carbon atoms, because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. It is more preferably a monovalent group having a group hydrocarbon ring structure, and even more preferably a monovalent group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure having 8 to 14 carbon atoms.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in RCy of the formula ( Cy ) has a cyclopentane ring structure, a cyclohexane ring structure, a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring structure, a norbornane ring structure, or a norbornane ring structure, because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. It is preferably an isoborone ring structure, more preferably a cyclohexane ring structure or a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring structure, and even more preferably a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring structure.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in RCy of the formula ( Cy ) is preferably a ring structure in which two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are fused, from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. It is more preferable that the ring is a condensed ring of ⁇ 4 aliphatic hydrocarbon rings.
  • the binder polymer may have one type of structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure alone, or may have two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure is higher than that of all the structural units of the binder polymer because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. 5 to 90% by mass is preferable, 10 to 80% by mass is more preferable, and 20 to 70% by mass is further preferable. Further, the content of the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in the binder polymer is preferably 5 to 70 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the content of the structural unit represented by the above formula (Cy) in the binder polymer is preferably 5 to 70 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of further excellent effect of the present invention. -60 mol% is more preferred, and 20-50 mol% is even more preferred.
  • the binder polymer has a structural unit having an aromatic ring structure and a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure
  • the total content of the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure and the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure is the present.
  • 10 to 90% by mass is preferable, 20 to 80% by mass is more preferable, and 40 to 75% by mass is further preferable, based on all the structural units of the binder polymer.
  • the total content of the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure and the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in the binder polymer is 10 with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the total content of the structural unit represented by the above formula (S) and the structural unit represented by the above formula (Cy) in the binder polymer is the total structural unit of the binder polymer from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • 10 to 80 mol% is preferable, 20 to 70 mol% is more preferable, and 40 to 60 mol% is further preferable.
  • the molar amount nS of the structural unit represented by the above formula (S) and the molar amount nCy of the structural unit represented by the above formula (Cy) in the binder polymer are given by the following formulas because the effects of the present invention are more excellent. It is preferable to satisfy the relationship shown in (SCy), more preferably to satisfy the following formula (SCy-1), and further preferably to satisfy the following formula (SCy-2).
  • the binder polymer preferably has a structural unit having an acid group because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group, and a carboxy group is preferable.
  • the structural unit having the acid group the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid shown below is preferable, and the structural unit derived from methacrylic acid is more preferable.
  • the binder polymer may have one type of structural unit having an acid group alone or two or more types.
  • the content of the structural unit having an acid group is 5 to 50% by mass with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. It is preferable, 5 to 40% by mass is more preferable, and 10 to 30% by mass is further preferable.
  • the content of the constituent unit having an acid group in the binder polymer is preferably 5 to 70 mol%, preferably 10 to 50 mol%, based on all the constituent units of the binder polymer, from the viewpoint of further excellent effect of the present invention. More preferably, 20-40 mol% is even more preferable.
  • the content of the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid in the binder polymer is preferably 5 to 70 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of further excellent effect of the present invention, and is preferably 10 to 50. More preferably, mol%, more preferably 20-40 mol%.
  • the binder polymer preferably has a reactive group, and more preferably has a structural unit having a reactive group, from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • a reactive group a radically polymerizable group is preferable, and an ethylenically unsaturated group is more preferable.
  • the binder polymer preferably has a structural unit having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain.
  • the "main chain” represents a relatively longest binding chain among the molecules of the polymer compound constituting the resin, and the "side chain” refers to an atomic group branched from the main chain. show.
  • an ethylenically unsaturated group an allyl group or a (meth) acryloxy group is more preferable. Examples of structural units having a reactive group include, but are not limited to, those shown below.
  • the binder polymer may have one type of structural unit having a reactive group alone or two or more types.
  • the lower limit of the content of the structural unit having a reactive group is set with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • 5% by mass or more is preferable, 10% by mass or more is more preferable, 20% by mass or more is further preferable, 35% by mass or more is particularly preferable, and 40% by mass or more is most preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and further preferably 50% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit of the content of the structural unit having a reactive group in the binder polymer is preferably 5 mol% or more, preferably 10 mol%, based on all the structural units of the binder polymer, from the viewpoint of further improving the effect of the present invention.
  • the above is more preferable, 20 mol% or more is further preferable, 35 mol% or more is particularly preferable, and 40 mol% or more is most preferable.
  • the upper limit thereof is preferably 70 mol% or less, more preferably 60 mol% or less, still more preferably 50 mol% or less.
  • a functional group such as a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, an acetoacetyl group, and a sulfo group, an epoxy compound, and a blocked isocyanate are used.
  • a functional group such as a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, an acetoacetyl group, and a sulfo group, an epoxy compound, and a blocked isocyanate.
  • examples thereof include a method of reacting a compound such as a compound, an isocyanate compound, a vinyl sulfone compound, an aldehyde compound, a methylol compound, and a carboxylic acid anhydride.
  • a preferred example of a means for introducing a reactive group into a binder polymer is that a polymer having a carboxy group is synthesized by a polymerization reaction and then glycidyl (meth) acrylate is added to a part of the carboxy group of the obtained polymer by the polymer reaction.
  • a means for introducing a (meth) acryloxy group into a polymer by reacting with the polymer By this means, a binder polymer having a (meth) acryloxy group in the side chain can be obtained.
  • the polymerization reaction is preferably carried out under a temperature condition of 70 to 100 ° C., and more preferably carried out under a temperature condition of 80 to 90 ° C.
  • an azo-based initiator is preferable, and for example, V-601 (trade name) or V-65 (trade name) manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd. is more preferable.
  • the polymer reaction is preferably carried out under temperature conditions of 80 to 110 ° C. In the above polymer reaction, it is preferable to use a catalyst such as an ammonium salt.
  • the polymers X1 to X4 shown below are preferable from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the content ratios (a to d) and the weight average molecular weight Mw of each structural unit shown below can be appropriately changed depending on the intended purpose, but the following configuration is particularly effective in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. Is preferable.
  • Polymer X3 a: 25 to 65% by mass, b: 1.0 to 20% by mass, c: 5.0 to 25% by mass, d: 10 to 50% by mass.
  • Polymer X4 a: 1.0 to 20% by mass, b: 20 to 60% by mass, c: 5.0 to 25% by mass, d: 10 to 50% by mass.
  • the binder polymer since the effect of the present invention is more excellent, a structural unit derived from styrene, a structural unit derived from methyl methacrylic acid, a structural unit derived from -2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, and methacrylic acid.
  • a polymer containing a structural unit obtained by adding glycidyl methacrylate to an acid is preferable.
  • the binder polymer may contain a polymer having a structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure (hereinafter, also referred to as “polymer X”).
  • the carboxylic acid anhydride structure may be either a chain carboxylic acid anhydride structure or a cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride structure, but a cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride structure is preferable.
  • a cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride structure As the ring having a cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride structure, a 5- to 7-membered ring is preferable, a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring is more preferable, and a 5-membered ring is further preferable.
  • the structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure is a structural unit containing a divalent group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the compound represented by the following formula P-1 in the main chain, or the following formula P-1. It is preferable that the monovalent group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the represented compound is a structural unit bonded directly to the main chain or via a divalent linking group.
  • RA1a represents a substituent
  • n1a RA1a may be the same or different
  • Examples of the substituent represented by RA1a include an alkyl group.
  • Z 1a an alkylene group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms is preferable, an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an alkylene group having 2 carbon atoms is further preferable.
  • n 1a represents an integer of 0 or more.
  • Z 1a represents an alkylene group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms
  • n 1a is preferably an integer of 0 to 4, more preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and even more preferably 0.
  • a plurality of RA1a may be the same or different. Further, although a plurality of RA1a may be bonded to each other to form a ring, it is preferable that the RA1a are not bonded to each other to form a ring.
  • a structural unit derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid anhydride is preferable, a structural unit derived from an unsaturated cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride is more preferable, and an unsaturated aliphatic cyclic carboxylic acid is preferable.
  • a structural unit derived from an acid anhydride is more preferable, a structural unit derived from maleic anhydride or an itaconic acid anhydride is particularly preferable, and a structural unit derived from maleic anhydride is most preferable.
  • Rx represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a CH 2 OH group, or CF 3 groups
  • Me represents a methyl group.
  • the structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure in the polymer X may be one kind alone or two or more kinds.
  • the total content of the structural units having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure is preferably 0 to 60 mol%, more preferably 5 to 40 mol%, and further preferably 10 to 35 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the polymer X. preferable.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain only one kind of polymer X, or may contain two or more kinds of polymer X.
  • the content of the polymer X is 0.1 with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. It is preferably from 30% by mass, more preferably 0.2 to 20% by mass, still more preferably 0.5 to 20% by mass, still more preferably 1 to 20% by mass.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the binder polymer is preferably 5,000 or more, more preferably 10,000 or more, because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the upper limit thereof is preferably 120,000 or less, more preferably 60,000 or less, further preferably 35,000 or less, and particularly preferably 30,000 or less.
  • the acid value of the binder polymer is preferably 10 to 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 60 to 200 mgKOH / g, further preferably 60 to 150 mgKOH / g, particularly preferably 70 to 1150 mgKOH / g, and most preferably 70 to 125 mgKOH / g. ..
  • the acid value of the binder polymer can be calculated from, for example, the average content of acid groups in the compound according to the method described in JIS K0070: 1992.
  • the dispersity of the binder polymer is preferably 1.0 to 6.0, more preferably 1.0 to 5.0, further preferably 1.0 to 4.0, and 1.0 to 3 from the viewpoint of developability. .0 is particularly preferred.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the binder polymer is 60,000 or less, and the proportion of the structural unit having a radically polymerizable group in the binder polymer is 20 mass. % Or more, more preferably, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the binder polymer is 35,000 or less, and the proportion of the structural unit having a radically polymerizable group in the binder polymer is 35% by mass or more. It is more preferable that the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the binder polymer is 30,000 or less, and the proportion of the structural unit having a radically polymerizable group in the binder polymer is 40% by mass or more.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain only one kind of binder polymer, or may contain two or more kinds of binder polymers.
  • the content of the binder polymer is preferably 10 to 90% by mass, more preferably 20 to 80% by mass, and 30 to 30 to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. 70% by mass is more preferable, and 30 to 60% by mass is further preferable.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “ethylenically unsaturated compound”).
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably a radically polymerizable compound.
  • a (meth) acryloxy group is preferable.
  • the number of ethylenically unsaturated groups in the ethylenically unsaturated compound is not particularly limited, but one or more is preferable, and two or more are more preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 20 or less.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound in the present specification is a compound other than the binder polymer, and preferably has a molecular weight of less than 5,000.
  • a compound represented by the following formula (M) (simply referred to as “Compound M”) can be mentioned.
  • Q2 - R1 - Q1 formula (M) Q 1 and Q 2 each independently represent a (meth) acryloyloxy group, and R 1 represents a divalent linking group having a chain structure.
  • Q 1 and Q 2 in the formula (M) have the same group as Q 1 and Q 2 from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis. Further, Q 1 and Q 2 in the formula (M) are preferably acryloyloxy groups from the viewpoint of reactivity.
  • R 1 in the formula (M) an alkylene group, an alkyleneoxyalkylene group (-L 1 -OL 1- ), or a polyalkylene oxyalkylene group (-(L)" is used because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • a hydrocarbon group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms or a polyalkyleneoxyalkylene group is more preferable, an alkylene group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms is further preferable, and an alkylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferable. Eighteen linear alkylene groups are particularly preferred.
  • the hydrocarbon group may have a chain structure at least partially, and the portion other than the chain structure is not particularly limited, and is, for example, a branched chain, cyclic, or having 1 to 1 to carbon atoms.
  • the alkylene group is more preferable, and the linear alkylene group is further preferable.
  • the above L 1 independently represents an alkylene group, and an ethylene group, a propylene group, or a butylene group is preferable, and an ethylene group or a 1,2-propylene group is more preferable.
  • p represents an integer of 2 or more, and is preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
  • the number of atoms of the shortest connecting chain connecting between Q1 and Q2 in the compound M is preferably 3 to 50, more preferably 4 to 40, from the viewpoint of further excellent effect of the present invention. 6 to 20 are more preferable, and 8 to 12 are particularly preferable.
  • the number of atoms in the shortest connecting chain connecting between Q1 and Q2 means the atoms in R1 connected to Q1 to the atoms in R1 connected to Q2 . The shortest number of atoms.
  • the compound M examples include 1,3-butanediol di (meth) acrylate, tetramethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, and 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate.
  • the ester monomer can also be used as a mixture.
  • 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • It is preferably at least one compound selected from the group consisting of acrylates and neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylates, preferably 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylates and 1,9-nonanediol di (1) -nonanediol di (meth) acrylates.
  • it is at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a meta) acrylate and a 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate, and the 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, and More preferably, it is at least one compound selected from the group consisting of 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate.
  • a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound can be mentioned.
  • the term "bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound” means a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule.
  • a (meth) acryloyl group is preferable.
  • a (meth) acrylate compound is preferable.
  • the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known compounds.
  • Examples of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound other than the compound M include tricyclodecanedimethanol di (meth) acrylate and 1,4-cyclohexanediol di (meth) acrylate.
  • NK ester A-DCP tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate
  • NK ester A-DCP tricyclodecanedimenanol dimethacrylate
  • NK ester DCP manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • 1,9-nonandiol diacrylate (trade name: NK ester A-NOD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • 1,6 -Hexanediol diacrylate (trade name: NK ester A-HD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • the trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known compounds.
  • Examples of the trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound include dipentaerythritol (tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol (tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate, and trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate.
  • Examples thereof include ditrimethylolpropane tetra (meth) acrylate, isocyanuric acid (meth) acrylate, and (meth) acrylate compound having a glycerintri (meth) acrylate skeleton.
  • (tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate is a concept including tri (meth) acrylate, tetra (meth) acrylate, penta (meth) acrylate, and hexa (meth) acrylate.
  • (tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate” is a concept that includes tri (meth) acrylate and tetra (meth) acrylate. Examples of commercially available trifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds include trimethylolpropane triacrylate (“A-TMPT” manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
  • Examples of commercially available products of the tetrafunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound include pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (“A-TMMT” manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
  • Examples of commercially available products of 5- or hexafunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds include dipentaerythritol polyacrylate (“A-DPH” manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include caprolactone-modified compounds of (meth) acrylate compounds (KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., A-9300-1CL manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., etc.).
  • examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include urethane (meth) acrylate compounds.
  • examples of the urethane (meth) acrylate include urethane di (meth) acrylate, and examples thereof include propylene oxide-modified urethane di (meth) acrylate, and ethylene oxide and propylene oxide-modified urethane di (meth) acrylate.
  • a urethane (meth) acrylate having trifunctionality or higher can also be mentioned.
  • the lower limit of the number of functional groups 6-functionality or more is more preferable, and 8-functionality or more is further preferable.
  • the upper limit of the number of functional groups is preferably 20 or less.
  • trifunctional or higher functional urethane (meth) acrylates include 8UX-015A (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), UA-32P (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and U-15HA (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). ), UA-1100H (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), AH-600 (trade name) manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd., and UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, UA-510H. , And UX-5000 (both manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and the like.
  • One of the preferred embodiments of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group.
  • the acid group include a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group, and a carboxy group, and among them, a carboxy group is preferable.
  • a 3- to 4-functional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group [pentaerythritol tri and a tetraacrylate (PETA) skeleton introduced with a carboxy group (acid value: 80 to 80).
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group at least one selected from the group consisting of a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxy group and a carboxylic acid anhydride thereof is preferable.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group is at least one selected from the group consisting of a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxy group and a carboxylic acid anhydride thereof, the developability and film strength are further improved. It will increase.
  • the bifunctional or higher functional unsaturated compound having a carboxy group is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known compounds.
  • Examples of the bifunctional or higher functional unsaturated compound having a carboxy group include Aronix (registered trademark) TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Aronix (registered trademark) M-520 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and the like.
  • Aronix (registered trademark) M-510 manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd. can be mentioned.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include a compound obtained by reacting a polyhydric alcohol with an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated carboxylic acid, and a compound obtained by reacting a glycidyl group-containing compound with an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated carboxylic acid.
  • Urethane monomers such as (meth) acrylate compounds with urethane bonds, ⁇ -chloro- ⁇ -hydroxypropyl- ⁇ '-(meth) acryloyloxyethyl-o-phthalate, ⁇ -hydroxyethyl- ⁇ '-(meth) acryloyl Examples thereof include phthalic acid compounds such as oxyethyl-o-phthalate and ⁇ -hydroxypropyl- ⁇ '-(meth) acryloyloxyethyl-o-phthalate, and (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters. These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • Examples of the compound obtained by reacting a polyvalent alcohol with an ⁇ , ⁇ -unsaturated carboxylic acid include 2,2-bis (4-((meth) acrylamide polyethoxy) phenyl) propane and 2,2-bis.
  • Bisphenol A-based (meth) acrylate compounds such as (4-((meth) acrylamide polypropoxy) phenyl) propane and 2,2-bis (4-((meth) acrylamide polyethoxypolypropoxy) phenyl) propane , Polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate having 2 to 14 ethylene oxide groups, polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate having 2 to 14 propylene oxide groups, and 2 to 14 ethylene oxide groups.
  • an ethylene unsaturated compound having a tetramethylolmethane structure or a trimethylolpropane structure is preferable, and a tetramethylolmethanetri (meth) acrylate, a tetramethylolmethanetetra (meth) acrylate, a trimethylolpropanetri (meth) acrylate, or a trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate is preferable.
  • Di (trimethylolpropane) tetraacrylate is more preferred.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include a caprolactone-modified compound of an ethylenically unsaturated compound (for example, KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., A-9300-1CL manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., etc. ), An alkylene oxide-modified compound of an ethylenically unsaturated compound (for example, KAYARAD RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., ATM-35E, A-9300 manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., EBECRYL manufactured by Daicel Ornex Co., Ltd. (Registered trademark) 135, etc.), ethoxylated glycerin triacrylate (A-GLY-9E, etc. manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and the like can also be mentioned.
  • KAYARAD registered trademark
  • DPCA-20
  • ethylenically unsaturated compound those containing an ester bond are particularly preferable in that the negative photosensitive composition layer after transfer is excellent in developability.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound containing an ester bond is not particularly limited as long as it contains an ester bond in the molecule, but is not ethylene-free having a tetramethylolmethane structure or a trimethylolpropane structure in that the effect of the present invention is excellent.
  • Saturated compounds are preferred, and tetramethylolmethanetri (meth) acrylates, trimethylolmethanetetra (meth) acrylates, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylates, or di (trimethylolpropane) tetraacrylates are more preferred.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound includes an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms and the above-mentioned ethylene unsaturated compound having a tetramethylol methane structure or a trimethylol propane structure. It is preferable to contain a compound.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic structure having 6 or more carbon atoms include 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate, and tricyclodecanedimethanoldi. Examples include (meth) acrylate.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound is a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure.
  • the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure is a ring structure in which two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are fused (preferably a structure selected from the group consisting of a tricyclodecane structure and a tricyclodecene structure). Is preferable, and a cyclopentane structure, a cyclohexane structure, a tricyclodecane structure, a tricyclodecene structure, a norbornan structure, or an isoborone structure is preferable from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • tricyclodecanedimethanol di (meth) acrylate is particularly preferable.
  • the molecular weight of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 200 to 3,000, more preferably 250 to 2,600, further preferably 280 to 2,200, and particularly preferably 300 to 2,200.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound and preferably contains a trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound. It is more preferable to contain a tetrafunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer has a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure and an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring. It preferably contains a binder polymer having a structural unit.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a compound represented by the formula (M) and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group. , And more preferably 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate, tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate, and a polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxylic acid group. And, it is more preferable to contain tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate and a succinic acid-modified form of dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer includes a compound represented by the formula (M) and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, which will be described later. It preferably contains a thermally crosslinkable compound, and more preferably contains a compound represented by the formula (M), an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, and a blocked isocyanate compound described later.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer is a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound (preferably) from the viewpoint of suppressing development residue and rust resistance.
  • the mass ratio of the content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound and the trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 10:90 to 90:10, more preferably 30:70 to 70:30.
  • the content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 20 to 80% by mass, more preferably 30 to 70% by mass, based on the total amount of all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds.
  • the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 10 to 60% by mass, more preferably 15 to 40% by mass.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer is bifunctional ethylenically having compound M and an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure from the viewpoint of rust resistance. It preferably contains an unsaturated compound. Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the negative-type photosensitive composition layer, the negative-type photosensitive composition layer contains the compound M and an acid from the viewpoints of substrate adhesion, development residue inhibitory property, and rust resistance.
  • an ethylenically unsaturated compound having a group it is preferable to contain an ethylenically unsaturated compound having a group, and more preferably to contain a compound M, a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group.
  • Compound M, a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, a trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound, and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group are more preferably contained.
  • the negative type photosensitive composition layer contains a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, a trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound, an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, and a urethane (meth) acrylate compound.
  • the negative type photosensitive composition layer has a negative type photosensitive composition layer, and the negative type photosensitive composition layer has substrate adhesion, development residue suppressing property, and rust resistance.
  • 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate and a polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxylic acid group 1,9-nonandiol diacrylate, tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate, and , Polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds having a carboxylic acid group, preferably 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate, tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, and ethylene having a carboxylic acid group.
  • a sex unsaturated compound it is more preferable to contain a sex unsaturated compound, and it is particularly preferable to contain a 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate, a tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate, an ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxylic acid group, and a urethane acrylate compound. ..
  • the ratio of the content of the polymerizable compound having a molecular weight of 300 or less among the polymerizable compounds contained in the negative photosensitive composition layer is the negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • the content of all the polymerizable compounds contained in the sex composition layer 30% by mass or less is preferable, 25% by mass or less is more preferable, and 20% by mass or less is further preferable.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound as the ethylenically unsaturated compound.
  • the content of the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound in the ethylenically unsaturated compound is 60 to 100% by mass with respect to the total content of all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in the negative photosensitive composition layer. Is preferable, 80 to 100% by mass is more preferable, and 90 to 100% by mass is further preferable.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the lower limit of the content of the ethylenically unsaturated compound in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. , 20% by mass or more is further preferable, 35% by mass or more is further preferable, and 40% by mass or more is particularly preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and further preferably 55% by mass or less.
  • the mass content ratio of the ethylenically unsaturated compound to the binder polymer is preferably 0.4 or more, preferably 0.5 or more. Is more preferable, 0.6 or more is further preferable, 0.7 or more is particularly preferable, and 0.8 or more is most preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1.5 or less, and more preferably 1.2 or less.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a polymerizable compound other than the ethylenically unsaturated compound (hereinafter, also referred to as “another polymerizable compound”).
  • the other polymerizable compound is a compound having a polymerizable group other than the ethylene unsaturated group.
  • examples of the polymerizable group other than the ethylene unsaturated group include a radically polymerizable group and a cationically polymerizable group, and a radically polymerizable group is preferable.
  • the number of polymerizable groups in the other polymerizable compounds is not particularly limited, but one or more is preferable, and two or more are more preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 20 or less.
  • the other polymerizable compound in the present specification is a compound other than the binder polymer, and preferably has a molecular weight of less than 5,000.
  • the content of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is the total mass of the polymerizable compound (total mass of the ethylenically unsaturated compound and other polymerizable compounds). ), 60 to 100% by mass is preferable, 80 to 100% by mass is more preferable, 90 to 100% by mass is further preferable, and 95 to 100% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the lower limit of the content of the polymerizable compound (total mass of the ethylenically unsaturated compound and other polymerizable compounds) in the negative photosensitive composition layer is the total mass of the polymerizable compound (ethylene unsaturated compound and 1% by mass or more is preferable, 5% by mass or more is more preferable, 20% by mass or more is further preferable, 35% by mass or more is further preferable, and 40% by mass or more is particularly preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and further preferably 55% by mass or less.
  • the transfer film of the present invention preferably contains a polyfunctional or higher functional compound in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the tetrafunctional or higher functional polymerizable compound is preferably a tetrafunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound (a polymerizable compound having four or more ethylenically unsaturated groups).
  • the content of the tetrafunctional or higher-functional polymerizable compound is preferably 35% by mass or more, preferably 35% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the polymerizable compound (total mass of the ethylenically unsaturated compound and other polymerizable compounds).
  • the upper limit value is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100% by mass or less, more preferably 90% by mass or less, and further preferably 80% by mass or less.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, and a known photopolymerization initiator can be used.
  • Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include a photopolymerization initiator having an oxime ester structure (hereinafter, also referred to as “oxym-based photopolymerization initiator”) and a photopolymerization initiator having an ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone structure (hereinafter, “ ⁇ -”.
  • Photopolymerization initiator hereinafter, also referred to as “acylphosphine oxide-based photopolymerization initiator”
  • photopolymerization initiator having an N-phenylglycine structure hereinafter, “N-phenylglycine-based photopolymerization initiator”. Also referred to as "agent").
  • the photopolymerization initiator is selected from the group consisting of an oxime-based photopolymerization initiator, an ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone-based photopolymerization initiator, an ⁇ -hydroxyalkylphenone-based polymerization initiator, and an N-phenylglycine-based photopolymerization initiator. It is preferable to contain at least one selected from the group consisting of an oxime-based photopolymerization initiator, an ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone-based photopolymerization initiator, and an N-phenylglycine-based photopolymerization initiator. Is more preferable.
  • photopolymerization initiator is described in, for example, paragraphs [0031] to [0042] of JP-A-2011-95716 and paragraphs [0064]-[0081] of JP-A-2015-014783.
  • a polymerization initiator may be used.
  • photopolymerization initiators include 1- [4- (phenylthio) phenyl] -1,2-octanedione-2- (O-benzoyloxime) [trade name: IRGACURE (registered trademark) OXE-01, BASF.
  • the photopolymerization initiator may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more kinds are used in combination, an oxime-based photopolymerization initiator and at least one selected from an ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone-based photopolymerization initiator and an ⁇ -hydroxyalkylphenone-based polymerization initiator may be used. preferable.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, preferably 0.5% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. Is more preferable, and 1.0% by mass or more is further preferable.
  • the upper limit thereof is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a polymerization inhibitor.
  • the polymerization inhibitor means a compound having a function of delaying or prohibiting a polymerization reaction.
  • a known compound used as a polymerization inhibitor can be used.
  • polymerization inhibitor examples include phenothiazine compounds such as phenothiazine, bis- (1-dimethylbenzyl) phenothiazine, and 3,7-dioctylphenothiazine; phenoxazine compounds such as phenoxazine; bis [3- (3-tert- Butyl-4-hydroxy-5-methylphenyl) propionic acid] [ethylenebis (oxyethylene)] 2,4-bis [(laurylthio) methyl] -o-cresol, 1,3,5-tris (3,5-) Di-t-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl), 1,3,5-tris (4-t-butyl-3-hydroxy-2,6-dimethylbenzyl), 2,4-bis- (n-octylthio)- 6- (4-Hydroxy-3,5-di-t-butylanilino) -1,3,5-triazine and pentaerythritol tetra
  • examples thereof include metal salt compounds such as copper acid, manganese diethyldithiocarbamate, and manganese diphenyldithiocarbamate.
  • examples of the polymerization inhibitor include thermal polymerization inhibitors, naphthylamines, cuprous chloride and the like described in paragraph 0018 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784.
  • the polymerization inhibitor is composed of a phenothiazine compound (phenothiazine and its derivative), a phenoxazine compound such as phenoxazine; a nitroso compound or a salt thereof, and a hindered phenol compound in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • At least one selected from the group is preferable, and phenolthiazine, phenoxazine, bis [3- (3-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy-5-methylphenyl) propionic acid], [ethylenebis (oxyethylene)] 2,4 -Bis [(laurylthio) methyl] -o-cresol, 1,3,5-tris (3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl), p-methoxyphenol, or N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine
  • Aluminum salts are more preferred, and phenothiazine, phenoxazine, or p-methoxyphenol is even more preferred.
  • the polymerization inhibitor may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Further, in order for the transfer film of the present invention to exert the effect of the present invention, the content of the polymerization inhibitor in the negative type photosensitive composition layer is 0.10 with respect to the total mass of the negative type photosensitive composition layer. It is preferably ⁇ 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.10 to 3.0% by mass, still more preferably 0.10 to 2.0% by mass. Further, in order for the transfer film of the present invention to exert the effect of the present invention, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 5 to 15% by mass with respect to the content of the photopolymerization initiator.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.005 to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 3.0% by mass, and 0.01 to 0.01% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymerizable compound. 1.0% by mass is more preferable.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a heterocyclic compound.
  • the heterocycle contained in the heterocyclic compound may be either a monocyclic or polycyclic complex.
  • Examples of the hetero atom contained in the heterocyclic compound include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom.
  • the heterocyclic compound preferably has at least one atom selected from the group consisting of a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom, and more preferably has a nitrogen atom.
  • heterocyclic compound examples include a triazole compound, a benzotriazole compound, a tetrazole compound, a thiadiazole compound, a triazine compound, a rhonin compound, a thiazole compound, a benzothiazole compound, a benzoimidazole compound, a benzoxazole compound, and a pyrimidine compound.
  • the heterocyclic compound is at least one selected from the group consisting of a triazole compound, a benzotriazole compound, a tetrazole compound, a thiaziazole compound, a triazine compound, a rhonin compound, a thiazole compound, a benzimidazole compound, and a benzoxazole compound.
  • Species compounds are preferred, and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of triazole compounds, benzotriazole compounds, tetrazole compounds, thiathazole compounds, thiazole compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzimidazole compounds, and benzoxazole compounds is more preferred.
  • heterocyclic compound Preferred specific examples of the heterocyclic compound are shown below.
  • examples of the triazole compound and the benzotriazole compound include the following compounds.
  • Examples of the tetrazole compound include the following compounds.
  • thiadiazole compounds include the following compounds.
  • Examples of the triazine compound include the following compounds.
  • Examples of the loadonin compound include the following compounds.
  • Examples of the thiazole compound include the following compounds.
  • benzothiazole compound examples include the following compounds.
  • Examples of the benzimidazole compound include the following compounds.
  • benzoxazole compound examples include the following compounds.
  • the heterocyclic compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the heterocyclic compound is preferably 0.01 to 20.0% by mass, preferably 0, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. .10 to 10.0% by mass is more preferable, 0.30 to 8.0% by mass is further preferable, and 0.50 to 5.0% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain an aliphatic thiol compound.
  • an en-thiol reaction can occur between the aliphatic thiol compound and the ethylenically unsaturated compound. As a result, the curing shrinkage of the formed film is suppressed and the stress is relieved.
  • aliphatic thiol compound a monofunctional aliphatic thiol compound or a polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound (that is, a bifunctional or higher functional aliphatic thiol compound) is preferable.
  • aliphatic thiol compound a polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion of the formed pattern (particularly, adhesion after exposure).
  • polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound means an aliphatic compound having two or more thiol groups (also referred to as “mercapto groups”) in the molecule.
  • the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound a low molecular weight compound having a molecular weight of 100 or more is preferable. Specifically, the molecular weight of the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound is more preferably 100 to 1,500, and even more preferably 150 to 1,000.
  • the number of functional groups of the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound for example, 2 to 10 functionalities are preferable, 2 to 8 functionalities are more preferable, and 2 to 6 functionalities are further preferable, from the viewpoint of adhesion of the formed pattern.
  • polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound examples include trimethylolpropanetris (3-mercaptobutyrate), 1,4-bis (3-mercaptobutyryloxy) butane, pentaerythritol tetrakis (3-mercaptobutyrate), and the like.
  • the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compounds include trimethylolpropane tris (3-mercaptobutyrate), 1,4-bis (3-mercaptobutylyloxy) butane, and 1,3,5-. At least one compound selected from the group consisting of tris (3-mercaptobutylyloxyethyl) -1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6 (1H, 3H, 5H) -trione is preferred.
  • Examples of the monofunctional aliphatic thiol compound include 1-octanethiol, 1-dodecanethiol, ⁇ -mercaptopropionic acid, methyl-3-mercaptopropionate, 2-ethylhexyl-3-mercaptopropionate, and n-. Examples thereof include octyl-3-mercaptopropionate, methoxybutyl-3-mercaptopropionate, and stearyl-3-mercaptopropionate.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain one type of aliphatic thiol compound alone, or may contain two or more types of aliphatic thiol compounds.
  • the content of the aliphatic thiol compound is preferably 5% by mass or more, preferably 5 to 50% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. % Is more preferable, 5 to 30% by mass is further preferable, and 8 to 20% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains a heat-crosslinkable compound from the viewpoint of the strength of the obtained cured film and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film.
  • the heat-crosslinkable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group which will be described later, is not treated as an ethylenically unsaturated compound, but is treated as a heat-crosslinkable compound.
  • the heat-crosslinkable compound include an epoxy compound, an oxetane compound, a methylol compound, and a blocked isocyanate compound. Among them, the blocked isocyanate compound is preferable from the viewpoint of the strength of the obtained cured film and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound reacts with a hydroxy group and a carboxy group, for example, when at least one of the binder polymer and the radically polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group has at least one of the hydroxy group and the carboxy group, The hydrophilicity of the formed film tends to decrease, and the function as a protective film tends to be strengthened.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound refers to "a compound having a structure in which the isocyanate group of isocyanate is protected (so-called masked) with a blocking agent".
  • the dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate compound is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 to 160 ° C, more preferably 130 to 150 ° C.
  • the dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate means "the temperature of the endothermic peak associated with the deprotection reaction of the blocked isocyanate when measured by DSC (Differential scanning calorimetry) analysis using a differential scanning calorimeter".
  • DSC Different scanning calorimeter
  • a differential scanning calorimeter model: DSC6200 manufactured by Seiko Instruments, Inc. can be preferably used.
  • the differential scanning calorimeter is not limited to this.
  • the blocking agent having a dissociation temperature of 100 to 160 ° C. for example, at least one selected from oxime compounds is preferable from the viewpoint of storage stability.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound preferably has an isocyanurate structure, for example, from the viewpoint of improving the brittleness of the membrane and improving the adhesion to the transferred body.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound having an isocyanurate structure can be obtained, for example, by subjecting hexamethylene diisocyanate to isocyanurate to protect it.
  • a compound having an oxime structure using an oxime compound as a blocking agent is easier to set the dissociation temperature in a preferable range than a compound having no oxime structure, and has less development residue. It is preferable because it is easy to do.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound may have a polymerizable group.
  • the polymerizable group is not particularly limited, and a known polymerizable group can be used, and a radically polymerizable group is preferable.
  • the polymerizable group include a (meth) acryloxy group, a (meth) acrylamide group, an ethylenically unsaturated group such as a styryl group, and a group having an epoxy group such as a glycidyl group.
  • an ethylenically unsaturated group is preferable
  • a (meth) acryloxy group is more preferable
  • an acryloxy group is further preferable.
  • blocked isocyanate compound a commercially available product can be used.
  • examples of commercially available blocked isocyanate compounds include Karenz (registered trademark) AOI-BM, Karenz (registered trademark) MOI-BM, Karenz (registered trademark) MOI-BP (all manufactured by Showa Denko KK), and blocks.
  • Examples thereof include the Duranate series of molds (for example, Duranate (registered trademark) TPA-B80E, Duranate (registered trademark) WT32-B75P, etc., manufactured by Asahi Kasei Chemicals Co., Ltd.).
  • the heat-crosslinkable compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the heat-crosslinkable compound is preferably 1 to 50% by mass, preferably 5 to 30% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative-type photosensitive composition layer. % By mass is more preferred.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a surfactant.
  • the surfactant include the surfactants described in paragraph [0017] of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 and paragraphs [0060] to [0071] of JP-A-2009-237362.
  • a nonionic surfactant a fluorine-based surfactant, or a silicone-based surfactant is preferable.
  • fluorine-based surfactants include, for example, Megafuck F-171, F-172, F-173, F-176, F-177, F-141, F-142, F-143, F-144.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant has a molecular structure having a functional group containing a fluorine atom, and when heat is applied, the portion of the functional group containing the fluorine atom is cut off and the fluorine atom volatilizes. Can also be suitably used.
  • fluorine-based surfactants include the Megafuck DS series manufactured by DIC Corporation (The Chemical Daily (February 22, 2016), Nikkei Sangyo Shimbun (February 23, 2016)), for example, Megafuck. DS-21 can be mentioned.
  • the fluorine-based surfactant it is also preferable to use a polymer of a fluorine atom-containing vinyl ether compound having a fluorinated alkyl group or a fluorinated alkylene ether group and a hydrophilic vinyl ether compound. Further, as the fluorine-based surfactant, a block polymer can also be used. Further, the fluorine-based surfactant has a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and two or more (preferably five or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups).
  • a fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound can also be preferably used.
  • a fluorine-based surfactant a fluorine-containing polymer having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain can also be used. Examples thereof include Megafuck RS-101, RS-102, RS-718K, RS-72-K (all manufactured by DIC Corporation) and the like.
  • a compound having a linear perfluoroalkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms such as perfluorooctanoic acid (PFOA) and perfluorooctanesulfonic acid (PFOS), may be used.
  • PFOA perfluorooctanoic acid
  • PFOS perfluorooctanesulfonic acid
  • It is preferably a surfactant derived from an alternative material.
  • the nonionic surfactant include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane, their ethoxylates and propoxylates (eg, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, and the like.
  • silicone-based surfactant examples include a linear polymer composed of a siloxane bond and a modified siloxane polymer having an organic group introduced into a side chain or a terminal.
  • surfactant examples include DOWSIL 8032 ADDITIVE, Torre Silicone DC3PA, Torre Silicone SH7PA, Torre Silicone DC11PA, Torre Silicone SH21PA, Torre Silicone SH28PA, Torre Silicone SH29PA, Torre Silicone SH30PA, Torre Silicone SH8400 (above, Toray Dow).
  • the surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.01 to 3.0% by mass, preferably 0, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. 0.01 to 1.0% by mass is more preferable, and 0.05 to 0.80% by mass is further preferable.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a hydrogen donating compound.
  • the hydrogen donating compound has an action of further improving the sensitivity of the photopolymerization initiator to active light rays and suppressing the inhibition of the polymerization of the polymerizable compound by oxygen.
  • Examples of the hydrogen donating compound include amines and amino acid compounds.
  • Examples of amines include M.I. R. "Journal of Polymer Society" by Sander et al., Vol. 10, pp. 3173 (1972), JP-A-44-020189, JP-A-51-081022, JP-A-52-134692, JP-A-59-138205. Examples thereof include the compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 60-0843305, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 62-018537, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 64-033104, and Research Disclosure No. 33825.
  • examples thereof include dimethylaniline and p-methylthiodimethylaniline.
  • at least one selected from the group consisting of 4,4'-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone and tris (4-dimethylaminophenyl) methane is used as amines because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. preferable.
  • amino acid compound examples include N-phenylglycine, N-methyl-N-phenylglycine, and N-ethyl-N-phenylglycine.
  • N-phenylglycine is preferable as the amino acid compound because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • Examples of the hydrogen donor compound include an organometallic compound (tributyltin acetate, etc.) described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-042965, a hydrogen donor described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 55-0344414, and JP-A-6. Sulfur compounds (Tritian and the like) described in JP-A-308727 can also be mentioned.
  • organometallic compound tributyltin acetate, etc.
  • Sulfur compounds Tritian and the like
  • the hydrogen donating compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the hydrogen donating compound is such that the curing rate is improved by the balance between the polymerization growth rate and the chain transfer. 0.01 to 10.0% by mass is preferable, 0.01 to 8.0% by mass is more preferable, and 0.03 to 5.0% by mass is further preferable, based on the total mass of the above.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a predetermined amount of impurities.
  • impurities include sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, manganese, copper, aluminum, titanium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, zinc, tin, halogen and ions thereof.
  • halide ions, sodium ions, and potassium ions are easily mixed as impurities, so the following content is preferable.
  • the content of impurities in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 80 ppm or less, more preferably 10 ppm or less, still more preferably 2 ppm or less on a mass basis.
  • the content of impurities in the negative photosensitive composition layer can be 1 ppb or more or 0.1 ppm or more on a mass basis.
  • a material having a low impurity content is selected as a raw material for the negative photosensitive composition layer, and contamination of the negative photosensitive composition layer is prevented during formation of the negative photosensitive composition layer. , Cleaning and removal.
  • the amount of impurities can be kept within the above range.
  • the impurities can be quantified by known methods such as ICP (Inductively Coupled Plasma) emission spectroscopy, atomic absorption spectroscopy, and ion chromatography.
  • ICP Inductively Coupled Plasma
  • the content of these compounds in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 100 ppm or less, more preferably 20 ppm or less, still more preferably 4 ppm or less on a mass basis.
  • the lower limit is based on mass and can be 10 ppb or more, and can be 100 ppb or more.
  • the content of these compounds can be suppressed in the same manner as the above-mentioned metal impurities. Further, it can be quantified by a known measurement method.
  • the water content in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 0.01 to 1.0% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 0.5% by mass, from the viewpoint of improving reliability and laminating property.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain residual monomers of each structural unit of the binder polymer (eg, alkali-soluble resin) described above.
  • the content of the residual monomer is preferably 5,000 mass ppm or less, more preferably 2,000 mass ppm or less, and 500 mass ppm or less with respect to the total mass of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of patterning property and reliability. Is more preferable.
  • the lower limit is not particularly limited, but 1 mass ppm or more is preferable, and 10 mass ppm or more is more preferable.
  • the residual monomer of each structural unit of the binder polymer is preferably 3,000 mass ppm or less, preferably 600 mass ppm or less, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer from the viewpoint of patterning property and reliability. More preferably, 100 mass ppm or less is further preferable.
  • the lower limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 mass ppm or more, and more preferably 1 mass ppm or more.
  • the amount of residual monomer of the monomer when synthesizing the binder polymer by the polymer reaction is also preferably in the above range.
  • the content of glycidyl acrylate is preferably in the above range.
  • the amount of the residual monomer can be measured by a known method such as liquid chromatography and gas chromatography.
  • the amount of the residual monomer can be reduced by purifying the binder polymer by a method such as reprecipitation.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a component other than the above-mentioned components (hereinafter, also referred to as “other component”).
  • Other components include, for example, colorants, antioxidants, and particles (eg, metal oxide particles).
  • other additives described in paragraphs [0058] to [0071] of JP-A-2000-310706 can also be mentioned.
  • metal oxide particles are preferable.
  • the metal in the metal oxide particles also includes metalloids such as B, Si, Ge, As, Sb, and Te.
  • the average primary particle size of the particles is, for example, preferably 1 to 200 nm, more preferably 3 to 80 nm, from the viewpoint of transparency of the cured film.
  • the average primary particle size of the particles is calculated by measuring the particle size of 200 arbitrary particles using an electron microscope and arithmetically averaging the measurement results. When the shape of the particle is not spherical, the longest side is the particle diameter.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain only one kind of particles having different metal species and sizes, or two or more kinds.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer does not contain particles, or when the negative photosensitive composition layer contains particles, the content of the particles is relative to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. , 0% by mass and 35% by mass or less, and more preferably 0% by mass or more and 10% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer, which does not contain particles or contains particles.
  • Particles are not contained, or the content of the particles is more preferably more than 0% by mass and 5% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer, and the particles are not contained or the particles are contained.
  • the amount is more preferably more than 0% by mass and 1% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer, and it is particularly preferable that the amount does not contain particles.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a trace amount of a colorant (pigment, dye, etc.), but for example, from the viewpoint of transparency, it is preferable that the layer does not contain a colorant substantially.
  • the content of the colorant is preferably less than 1% by mass, more preferably less than 0.1% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. preferable.
  • the antioxidant examples include 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidone (also known as phenidone), 1-phenyl-4,4-dimethyl-3-pyrazolidone, and 1-phenyl-4-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-.
  • 3-Pyrazoridones such as 3-pyrazolidone; polyhydroxybenzenes such as hydroquinone, catechol, pyrogallol, methylhydroquinone, and chlorhydroquinone; paramethylaminophenol, paraaminophenol, parahydroxyphenylglycine, and paraphenylenediamine. Be done.
  • 3-pyrazolidones are preferable, and 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidone is more preferable as the antioxidant because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the content of the antioxidant is preferably 0.001% by mass or more, preferably 0.005% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. % Or more is more preferable, and 0.01% by mass or more is further preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1% by mass or less.
  • the thickness of the negative photosensitive composition layer is not particularly limited, but is often 30 ⁇ m or less, and is preferably 20 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 15 ⁇ m or less, still more preferably 10 ⁇ m or less, in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. 9.0 ⁇ m or less is particularly preferable. As the lower limit, 0.60 ⁇ m or more is preferable, and 1.5 ⁇ m or more is more preferable, because the strength of the film obtained by curing the negative photosensitive composition layer is excellent.
  • the thickness of the negative photosensitive composition layer can be calculated as, for example, an average value of any five points measured by cross-sectional observation with a scanning electron microscope (SEM).
  • the refractive index of the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 1.47 to 1.56, more preferably 1.49 to 1.54.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably achromatic. Specifically, the total reflection (incident angle 8 °, light source: D-65 (2 ° field)) has an L * value of 10 to 90 in the CIE1976 (L *, a *, b *) color space.
  • the a * value is preferably ⁇ 1.0 to 1.0
  • the b * value is preferably ⁇ 1.0 to 1.0.
  • the pattern (cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer) obtained by curing the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably achromatic.
  • the total reflection (incident angle 8 °, light source: D-65 (2 ° field)) has a pattern L * value of 10 to 90 in the CIE1976 (L *, a *, b *) color space.
  • the a * value of the pattern is preferably ⁇ 1.0 to 1.0
  • the b * value of the pattern is preferably ⁇ 1.0 to 1.0.
  • the moisture permeability of the pattern (cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer) obtained by curing the negative photosensitive composition layer at a film thickness of 40 ⁇ m is 500 g / m 2/24 hr or less from the viewpoint of rust prevention. It is preferably 300 g / m 2/24 hr or less, and even more preferably 100 g / m 2/24 hr or less.
  • the moisture permeability is determined by exposing the negative photosensitive composition layer with an i-line at an exposure amount of 300 mJ / cm 2 and then post-baking at 145 ° C. for 30 minutes to obtain a negative photosensitive composition layer. Is measured with a cured film.
  • the dissolution rate of the negative photosensitive composition layer in a 1.0% aqueous solution of sodium carbonate is preferably 0.01 ⁇ m / sec or more, more preferably 0.10 ⁇ m / sec or more, and 0. 20 ⁇ m / sec or more is more preferable. From the viewpoint of the edge shape of the pattern, 5.0 ⁇ m / sec or less is preferable, 4.0 ⁇ m / sec or less is more preferable, and 3.0 ⁇ m / sec or less is further preferable. Specific preferable numerical values are, for example, 1.0 ⁇ m / sec, 0.8 ⁇ m / sec and the like.
  • the dissolution rate of the negative photosensitive composition layer in a 1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution per unit time shall be measured as follows.
  • a negative-type photosensitive composition layer (within a film thickness of 1.0 to 10 ⁇ m) formed on a glass substrate from which the solvent has been sufficiently removed is subjected to a negative solution using a 1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 25 ° C.
  • shower development is performed until the type photosensitive composition layer is completely melted (however, the maximum is 2 minutes). It is obtained by dividing the film thickness of the negative photosensitive composition layer by the time required for the negative photosensitive composition layer to melt completely. If it does not melt completely in 2 minutes, calculate in the same way from the amount of change in film thickness up to that point.
  • a shower nozzle of 1/4 MINJJX030PP manufactured by Ikeuchi Co., Ltd. is used, and the shower pressure is 0.08 MPa. Under the above conditions, the shower flow rate per unit time is 1,800 mL / min.
  • the number of foreign substances having a diameter of 1.0 ⁇ m or more in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 10 pieces / mm 2 or less, and more preferably 5 pieces / mm 2 or less. preferable.
  • the number of foreign substances shall be measured as follows. From the normal direction of the surface of the negative photosensitive composition layer, any five regions (1 mm ⁇ 1 mm) on the surface of the negative photosensitive composition layer are visually observed using an optical microscope. Then, the number of foreign substances having a diameter of 1.0 ⁇ m or more in each region is measured, and they are arithmetically averaged to calculate the number of foreign substances.
  • the transfer film may have a protective film.
  • a resin film having heat resistance and solvent resistance can be used, and examples thereof include a polyolefin film such as a polypropylene film and a polyethylene film, a polyester film such as a polyethylene terephthalate film, a polycarbonate film, and a polystyrene film. Be done.
  • a resin film made of the same material as the above-mentioned temporary support may be used.
  • a polyolefin film is preferable, a polypropylene film or a polyethylene film is more preferable, and a polyethylene film is further preferable.
  • the thickness of the protective film is preferably 1 to 100 ⁇ m, more preferably 5 to 50 ⁇ m, further preferably 5 to 40 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 15 to 30 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the protective film is preferably 1 ⁇ m or more in terms of excellent mechanical strength, and preferably 100 ⁇ m or less in terms of relatively low cost.
  • the number of fish eyes having a diameter of 80 ⁇ m or more contained in the protective film is 5 / m 2 or less.
  • fish eye refers to foreign substances, undissolved substances, oxidative deterioration substances, etc. of the material when the material is thermally melted, kneaded, extruded, and used to produce a film by a biaxial stretching method, a casting method, or the like. Was incorporated into the film.
  • the number of particles having a diameter of 3 ⁇ m or more contained in the protective film is preferably 30 particles / mm 2 or less, more preferably 10 particles / mm 2 or less, and further preferably 5 particles / mm 2 or less. As a result, it is possible to suppress defects caused by the unevenness caused by the particles contained in the protective film being transferred to the negative photosensitive composition layer or the conductive layer.
  • the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the protective film opposite to the surface in contact with the composition layer is preferably 0.01 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 0.02 ⁇ m or more, and more preferably 0.03 ⁇ m from the viewpoint of imparting windability. The above is more preferable. On the other hand, less than 0.50 ⁇ m is preferable, 0.40 ⁇ m or less is more preferable, and 0.30 ⁇ m or less is further preferable.
  • the protective film has a surface roughness Ra of the surface in contact with the composition layer of preferably 0.01 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 0.02 ⁇ m or more, still more preferably 0.03 ⁇ m or more, from the viewpoint of suppressing defects during transfer. On the other hand, less than 0.50 ⁇ m is preferable, 0.40 ⁇ m or less is more preferable, and 0.30 ⁇ m or less is further preferable.
  • the transfer film preferably satisfies one or more of preferred embodiments 1, preferred embodiments 2, preferred embodiments 3, preferred embodiments 4, and preferred embodiments 5, and more preferably all of them.
  • “Breaking elongation of the cured film obtained by curing the negative photosensitive composition layer” is performed by exposing the negative photosensitive composition layer having a thickness of 20 ⁇ m to 120 mJ / cm 2 with an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp and curing it, and then using a high pressure mercury lamp.
  • the cured film after further exposure at 400 mJ / cm 2 and heated at 145 ° C. for 30 minutes is measured by a tensile test.
  • the "arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the temporary support on the negative photosensitive composition layer side” can be measured by the following method. Using a three-dimensional optical profiler (New View7300, Zygo), a surface profile of the object to be measured is obtained under the following conditions.
  • the measurement and analysis software Microscope Application of MetroPro ver8.3.2 is used.
  • the Surface Map screen is displayed using the above software, and histogram data is obtained in the Surface Map screen. From the obtained histogram data, the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the object to be measured is obtained.
  • the method for measuring the "arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the protective film on the negative photosensitive composition layer side" is the measurement of the "arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the temporary support on the negative photosensitive composition layer side". It is carried out in the same way as the method.
  • the physical characteristics of the temporary support, the negative photosensitive composition layer, and the protective film of the transfer film 1 satisfy all of the following conditions (P1) to (P3).
  • P1 The breaking elongation of the cured film obtained by curing the negative photosensitive composition layer at 120 ° C. is 15% or more.
  • P2 The arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the temporary support on the negative photosensitive composition layer side is 50 nm or less.
  • P3 The arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the protective film on the negative photosensitive composition layer side is 150 nm or less.
  • the physical characteristics of the temporary support of the transfer film 1 and the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably satisfy the following formula (1).
  • X ⁇ Y ⁇ 1500 formula (1) X represents the value (%) of the elongation at break at 120 ° C. of the cured film obtained by curing the negative photosensitive composition layer, and Y represents the negative photosensitive composition of the temporary support. It represents the value (nm) of the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface on the material layer side.
  • the value represented by X ⁇ Y is preferably 750 or less.
  • the photosensitive physical properties of the transfer film 1 preferably satisfy the following condition (P4).
  • P4 The breaking elongation at 120 ° C. is more than twice as large as the breaking elongation at 23 ° C. of the cured film obtained by curing the negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • the physical characteristics of the temporary support of the transfer film 1 and the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably satisfy the following formula (2).
  • Y represents the value (nm) of the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the surface of the temporary support on the negative photosensitive composition layer side
  • Z represents the negative photosensitive of the protective film. It represents the value (nm) of the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface on the composition layer side.
  • the transfer film preferably has a refractive index adjusting layer.
  • a known refractive index adjusting layer can be applied.
  • the material contained in the refractive index adjusting layer include a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound, a metal salt, and particles.
  • the method for controlling the refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer is not particularly limited, and for example, a method using a resin having a predetermined refractive index alone, a method using a resin and particles, and a composite of a metal salt and a resin are used. Is mentioned.
  • binder polymer and the polymerizable compound examples include the binder polymer and the polymerizable compound described in the section of the above-mentioned "negative photosensitive composition layer".
  • the particles include metal oxide particles and metal particles.
  • the type of the metal oxide particles is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include known metal oxide particles.
  • the metal in the metal oxide particles also includes metalloids such as B, Si, Ge, As, Sb, and Te.
  • the average primary particle size of the particles is, for example, preferably 1 to 200 nm, more preferably 3 to 80 nm, from the viewpoint of transparency of the cured film.
  • the average primary particle size of the particles is calculated by measuring the particle size of 200 arbitrary particles using an electron microscope and arithmetically averaging the measurement results. When the shape of the particle is not spherical, the longest side is the particle diameter.
  • the metal oxide particles include zirconium oxide particles (ZrO 2 particles), Nb 2 O 5 particles, titanium oxide particles (TiO 2 particles), silicon dioxide particles (SiO 2 particles), and a composite thereof. At least one selected from the group consisting of particles is preferred. Among these, as the metal oxide particles, for example, at least one selected from the group consisting of zirconium oxide particles and titanium oxide particles is more preferable because the refractive index can be easily adjusted.
  • metal oxide particles include calcined zirconium oxide particles (manufactured by CIK Nanotech Co., Ltd., product name: ZRPGM15WT% -F04), calcined zirconium oxide particles (manufactured by CIK Nanotech Co., Ltd., product name: ZRPGM15WT% -F74).
  • Fired Zirconium Oxide Particles (CIK Nanotech Co., Ltd., Product Name: ZRPGM15WT% -F75), Fired Zirconium Oxide Particles (CIK Nanotech Co., Ltd., Product Name: ZRPGM15WT% -F76), Zirconium Oxide Particles (Nano Teen OZ-S30M, Nissan) Examples include (manufactured by Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and zirconium oxide particles (Nano Teen OZ-S30K, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
  • the particles may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the particles in the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 1 to 95% by mass, more preferably 20 to 90% by mass, still more preferably 40 to 85% by mass, based on the total mass of the refractive index adjusting layer.
  • the content of the titanium oxide particles is preferably 1 to 95% by mass, more preferably 20 to 90% by mass, and 40 to 85% by mass with respect to the total mass of the refractive index adjusting layer. % Is more preferable.
  • the refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably higher than that of the negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • the refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 1.50 or more, more preferably 1.55 or more, further preferably 1.60 or more, and particularly preferably 1.65 or more.
  • the upper limit of the refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 2.10 or less, more preferably 1.85 or less, and even more preferably 1.78 or less.
  • the refractive index is a refractive index having a wavelength of 550 nm at 25 ° C.
  • the thickness of the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 50 to 500 nm, more preferably 55 to 110 nm, and even more preferably 60 to 100 nm.
  • the thickness of the refractive index adjusting layer is calculated as an average value of any five points measured by cross-sectional observation with a scanning electron microscope (SEM).
  • the method for producing the transfer film of the first embodiment is not particularly limited, and a known method can be used.
  • a method for producing the transfer film 10 for example, a negative-type photosensitive composition layer-forming composition is applied to the surface of the temporary support 1 to form a coating film, and the coating film is further dried to make a negative.
  • the step of forming the mold photosensitive composition layer 3 and the composition for forming a refractive index adjusting layer are applied to the surface of the negative photosensitive composition layer 3 to form a coating film, and the coating film is further dried.
  • a method including a step of forming the refractive index adjusting layer 5 and a method including the step of forming the refractive index adjusting layer 5 can be mentioned.
  • the transfer film 10 is manufactured by crimping the protective film 7 onto the refractive index adjusting layer 5 of the laminate manufactured by the above-mentioned manufacturing method.
  • the method for producing the transfer film of the first embodiment includes a step of providing the protective film 7 so as to be in contact with the surface of the refractive index adjusting layer 5 opposite to the side having the temporary support 1. 1. It is preferable to manufacture a transfer film 10 including a negative photosensitive composition layer 3, a refractive index adjusting layer 5, and a protective film 7. After the transfer film 10 is manufactured by the above-mentioned manufacturing method, the transfer film 10 may be wound up to prepare and store the transfer film in the form of a roll.
  • the roll-type transfer film can be provided as it is in the bonding process with the substrate in the roll-to-roll method described later.
  • the method for producing the transfer film 10 is to form the refractive index adjusting layer 5 on the protective film 7 and then form the negative photosensitive composition layer 3 on the surface of the refractive index adjusting layer 5. There may be. Further, as a method for producing the transfer film 10, the negative type photosensitive composition layer 3 is formed on the temporary support 1, and the refractive index adjusting layer 5 is separately formed on the protective film 7, and the negative type photosensitive is formed. A method may be used in which the refractive index adjusting layer 5 is bonded to the sex composition layer 3.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer in the transfer film has components (for example, a binder polymer, an ethylenically unsaturated compound, and photopolymerization initiation) constituting the negative photosensitive composition layer described above. It is desirable that the film is formed by a coating method using a composition for forming a negative photosensitive composition layer containing an agent, etc.) and a solvent. Specifically, as a method for producing a transfer film of the first embodiment, a composition for forming a negative photosensitive composition layer is applied onto a temporary support to form a coating film, and the coating film is dried. Is preferable in this method to form a negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • An organic solvent is preferable as the solvent that can be contained in the composition for forming the negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • the organic solvent include methyl ethyl ketone, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (also known as 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate), diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether, cyclohexanone, methyl isobutyl ketone, ethyl lactate, methyl lactate, and caprolactam. , N-Propanol, and 2-Propanol.
  • an organic solvent having a boiling point of 180 to 250 ° C. can be used, if necessary.
  • the solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the total solid content of the negative-type photosensitive composition layer-forming composition is preferably 5 to 80% by mass, more preferably 5 to 40% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative-type photosensitive composition layer-forming composition. It is preferable, and 5 to 30% by mass is more preferable. That is, the content of the solvent in the composition for forming the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 20 to 95% by mass, preferably 60 to 95% by mass, based on the total mass of the composition for forming the negative photosensitive composition layer. 95% by mass is more preferable, and 70 to 95% by mass is further preferable.
  • the viscosity of the composition for forming a negative photosensitive composition layer at 25 ° C. is, for example, preferably 1 to 50 mPa ⁇ s, more preferably 2 to 40 mPa ⁇ s, and further preferably 3 to 30 mPa ⁇ s from the viewpoint of coatability. preferable. Viscosity is measured using a viscometer.
  • a viscometer manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd. (trade name: VISCOMETER TV-22) can be preferably used.
  • the viscometer is not limited to the above-mentioned viscometer.
  • the surface tension of the negative photosensitive composition layer forming composition at 25 ° C. is, for example, preferably 5 to 100 mN / m, more preferably 10 to 80 mN / m, and 15 to 40 mN / m from the viewpoint of coatability. More preferred.
  • Surface tension is measured using a tensiometer.
  • a surface tension meter manufactured by Kyowa Interface Science Co., Ltd. (trade name: Acoustic Surface Tensiometer CBVP-Z) can be preferably used.
  • the tensiometer is not limited to the above-mentioned tensiometer.
  • Examples of the method for applying the negative photosensitive composition layer forming composition include a printing method, a spray method, a roll coating method, a bar coating method, a curtain coating method, a spin coating method, and a die coating method (that is, a slit coating method). Law).
  • drying means removing at least a part of the solvent contained in a composition.
  • drying method include natural drying, heat drying, and vacuum drying.
  • the above methods can be applied alone or in combination.
  • the drying temperature is preferably 80 ° C. or higher, more preferably 90 ° C. or higher.
  • the upper limit thereof is preferably 130 ° C. or lower, more preferably 120 ° C. or lower. It can also be dried by continuously changing the temperature.
  • the drying time is preferably 20 seconds or longer, more preferably 40 seconds or longer, and even more preferably 60 seconds or longer.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 600 seconds or less, and more preferably 300 seconds or less.
  • composition for forming a refractive index adjusting layer and a method for forming the refractive index adjusting layer preferably contains various components forming the above-mentioned refractive index adjusting layer and a solvent.
  • the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total solid content of the composition is the same as the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total mass of the refractive index adjusting layer described above. be.
  • the solvent is not particularly limited as long as it can dissolve or disperse the components contained in the refractive index adjusting layer, and at least one selected from the group consisting of water and a water-miscible organic solvent is preferable, with water or water.
  • a mixed solvent with a water-miscible organic solvent is more preferable.
  • the water-miscible organic solvent include alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, acetone, ethylene glycol, and glycerin, and alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms are preferable, and methanol or ethanol is more preferable.
  • the solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the solvent is preferably 50 to 2,500 parts by mass, more preferably 50 to 1,900 parts by mass, and even more preferably 100 to 900 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the composition.
  • the method for forming the refractive index adjusting layer is not particularly limited as long as it can form a layer containing the above components, and for example, known coating methods (slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, inkjet coating, etc.) can be used. Can be mentioned.
  • the transfer film of the first embodiment can be manufactured by adhering the protective film to the refractive index adjusting layer.
  • the method of attaching the protective film to the refractive index adjusting layer is not particularly limited, and known methods can be mentioned.
  • Examples of the device for adhering the protective film to the refractive index adjusting layer include a vacuum laminator and a known laminator such as an auto-cut laminator. It is preferable that the laminator is provided with an arbitrary heatable roller such as a rubber roller and can be pressurized and heated.
  • the transfer film 20 shown in FIG. 8 includes a temporary support 11, a composition layer 12 including a thermoplastic resin layer 13, an intermediate layer 15, and a negative photosensitive composition layer 17, and a protective film 19 in this order.
  • the transfer film 20 shown in FIG. 8 has a form in which the protective film 19 is arranged, but the protective film 19 may not be arranged.
  • the transfer film 20 shown in FIG. 8 has a form in which the thermoplastic resin layer 13 and the intermediate layer 15 are arranged, but the thermoplastic resin layer 13 and the intermediate layer 15 may not be arranged.
  • each element constituting the transfer film will be described.
  • examples of the temporary support 11 and the protective film 17 are the same as those of the temporary support 1 and the protective film 9 of the first embodiment described above, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • Negative Photosensitive Composition Layer In display devices equipped with a touch panel such as a capacitance type input device (organic electroluminescence (EL) display device, liquid crystal display device, etc.), the electrode pattern corresponding to the sensor of the visual recognition part, the peripheral wiring part, and the wiring of the take-out wiring part are wired. Etc. are provided inside the touch panel.
  • a negative photosensitive composition layer is provided on a substrate using a transfer film or the like, and a mask having a desired pattern for the negative photosensitive composition layer is used. A method of developing after exposure is widely adopted. In the negative photosensitive composition layer, the exposed portion becomes a cured film due to exposure, and the solubility in a developing solution is lowered.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group (ethylenically unsaturated compound), and a photopolymerization initiator. Further, it is also preferable that the binder polymer contains an alkali-soluble resin (polymer A or the like which is an alkali-soluble resin) as a part or the whole thereof. That is, in one embodiment, the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains a binder polymer containing an alkali-soluble resin, an ethylenically unsaturated compound, and a photopolymerization initiator.
  • Such a negative photosensitive composition layer has a binder polymer: 10 to 90% by mass; an ethylenically unsaturated compound: 5 to 70% by mass; photopolymerization initiation, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • Agent It is preferable to contain 0.01 to 20% by mass.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains the polymer A as the binder polymer.
  • the polymer A is preferably an alkali-soluble resin.
  • the acid value of the polymer A is preferably 220 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably less than 200 mgKOH / g, from the viewpoint of more excellent resolution by suppressing the swelling of the negative photosensitive composition layer due to the developing solution. More preferably less than 190 mgKOH / g.
  • the lower limit of the acid value of the polymer A is not particularly limited, but 60 mgKOH / g or more is preferable. In terms of more excellent developability, 120 mgKOH / g or more is more preferable, 150 mgKOH / g or more is further preferable, and 170 mgKOH / g or more is particularly preferable.
  • the acid value (mgKOH / g) is the mass [mg] of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize 1 g of the sample.
  • the acid value can be calculated from the average content of acid groups in the compound, for example, according to the method described in JIS K0070: 1992.
  • the acid value of the polymer A may be adjusted according to the type of the structural unit constituting the polymer A and the content of the structural unit containing the acid group.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the polymer A is preferably 5,000 to 500,000. When the weight average molecular weight is 500,000 or less, it is preferable from the viewpoint of improving resolution and developability.
  • the weight average molecular weight is more preferably 100,000 or less, further preferably 60,000 or less, particularly preferably 35,000 or less, and most preferably 30,000 or less.
  • the weight average molecular weight is 5,000 or more, the viewpoint of controlling the properties of the developed aggregate and the properties of the unexposed film such as the edge fuse property and the cut chip property when the negative photosensitive resin laminate is used. Is preferable.
  • the weight average molecular weight is more preferably 10,000 or more.
  • the edge fuse property refers to the degree of ease with which the negative photosensitive composition layer protrudes from the end face of the roll when it is wound into a roll as a negative photosensitive resin laminate.
  • the cut chip property refers to the degree of ease of chip flying when the unexposed film is cut with a cutter. When this chip adheres to the upper surface of the negative photosensitive resin laminate or the like, it is transferred to the mask in a later exposure process or the like, which causes a defective product.
  • the dispersity of the polymer A is preferably 1.0 to 6.0, more preferably 1.0 to 5.0, still more preferably 1.0 to 4.0, and particularly preferably 1.0 to 3.0. ..
  • the degree of dispersion is intended to be the ratio of the weight average molecular weight to the number average molecular weight (weight average molecular weight / number average molecular weight).
  • the weight average molecular weight and the number average molecular weight are values measured by gel permeation chromatography.
  • the polymer A preferably contains a structural unit based on a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
  • aromatic hydrocarbon groups include substituted or unsubstituted phenyl groups and substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl groups.
  • the content of the structural unit based on the monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group in the polymer A is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the polymer A.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 95% by mass or less, and more preferably 85% by mass or less.
  • the average value of the content of the structural unit based on the monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is within the above range.
  • the monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group examples include a monomer having an aralkyl group, styrene, and a polymerizable styrene derivative (for example, methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, tert-butoxystyrene, acetoxystyrene, 4-vinyl benzoic acid). Acids, styrene dimers, styrene trimers, etc.). Of these, a monomer having an aralkyl group or styrene is preferable.
  • the content of the structural unit based on styrene is 20 to 70% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer A. Is preferable, 25 to 65% by mass is more preferable, 30 to 60% by mass is further preferable, and 30 to 55% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a plurality of types of polymers A, the content of the structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is determined as a weight average value.
  • aralkyl group examples include a substituted or unsubstituted phenylalkyl group (excluding a benzyl group), a substituted or unsubstituted benzyl group and the like, and a substituted or unsubstituted benzyl group is preferable.
  • Examples of the monomer having a phenylalkyl group include phenylethyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
  • Examples of the monomer having a benzyl group include (meth) acrylate having a benzyl group, for example, benzyl (meth) acrylate, and chlorobenzyl (meth) acrylate; a vinyl monomer having a benzyl group, for example, vinylbenzyl chloride, and the like. Examples include vinylbenzyl alcohol. Of these, benzyl (meth) acrylate is preferable.
  • the monomer component having an aromatic hydrocarbon group in the polymer A is benzyl (meth) acrylate
  • the content of the structural unit based on the benzyl (meth) acrylate is the total mass of the polymer A.
  • 25 to 95% by mass is preferable, 50 to 95% by mass is more preferable, 60 to 90% by mass is further preferable, 70 to 90% by mass is particularly preferable, and 75 to 90% by mass is most preferable.
  • the polymer A containing a structural unit based on a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group includes a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group, at least one of the first monomers described later, and / or described below. It is preferably obtained by polymerizing with at least one of the second monomers.
  • the polymer A containing no structural unit based on a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably obtained by polymerizing at least one of the first monomers described later, and is preferably the first single amount. It is more preferable to obtain it by copolymerizing at least one kind of the body and at least one kind of the second monomer described later.
  • the first monomer is a monomer having a carboxyl group in the molecule.
  • the first monomer include (meth) acrylic acid, fumaric acid, cinnamic acid, crotonic acid, itaconic acid, 4-vinylbenzoic acid, maleic acid anhydride, maleic acid semi-ester and the like. .. Among these, (meth) acrylic acid is preferable.
  • the content of the structural unit based on the first monomer in the polymer A is preferably 5 to 50% by mass, more preferably 10 to 40% by mass, and 15 to 30% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer A. % Is more preferable.
  • the content is 5% by mass or more from the viewpoint of developing good developability and controlling edge fuseability. It is preferable that the content is 50% by mass or less from the viewpoint of high resolution of the resist pattern and the shape of the resist pattern, and further from the viewpoint of chemical resistance of the resist pattern.
  • the second monomer is a monomer that is non-acidic and has at least one polymerizable unsaturated group in the molecule.
  • Examples of the second monomer include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and isobutyl (meth) acrylate.
  • Tart-butyl (meth) acrylates 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylates, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylates, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylates, and (meth) acrylates such as 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylates; acetic acid.
  • examples thereof include esters of vinyl alcohols such as vinyl; and (meth) acrylonitrile. Of these, methyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, or n-butyl (meth) acrylate is preferable, and methyl (meth) acrylate is more preferable.
  • the content of the structural unit based on the second monomer in the polymer A is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and further preferably 15% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the polymer A. It is preferable, and 17% by mass or more is particularly preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 60% by mass or less, more preferably 50% by mass or less, and further preferably 45% by mass or less.
  • 1 to 60% by mass is preferable, 5 to 60% by mass is more preferable, 15 to 50% by mass is further preferable, and 17 ⁇ 45% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the polymer A contains a monomer-based structural unit having an aralkyl group and / or a styrene-based monomer-based structural unit, it suppresses line width thickening and deterioration of resolution when the focal position shifts during exposure. It is preferable from the viewpoint of For example, a copolymer containing a methacrylic acid-based constituent unit, a benzyl methacrylate-based constituent unit, and a styrene-based constituent unit, a methacrylic acid-based constituent unit, a methyl methacrylate-based constituent unit, a benzyl methacrylate-based constituent unit, and a styrene.
  • the polymer A has 25 to 55% by mass of a structural unit based on a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group, 20 to 35% by mass of a structural unit based on the first monomer, and a second. It is preferably a polymer containing 15 to 45% by mass of a constituent unit based on a monomer. In another embodiment, the polymer contains 70 to 90% by mass of a structural unit based on a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group and 10 to 25% by mass of a structural unit based on the first monomer. Is preferable.
  • the structural unit based on the monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is 25 to 70% by mass
  • the structural unit based on the first monomer is 15 to 25% by mass
  • the second unit amount is preferably a polymer containing 1 to 5% by mass of a body-based structural unit.
  • the polymer A may have any of a linear structure, a branched structure, and an alicyclic structure in the side chain.
  • a monomer having a group having a branched structure in the side chain or a monomer having a group having an alicyclic structure in the side chain a branched structure or an alicyclic structure can be introduced into the side chain of the polymer A. ..
  • the group having an alicyclic structure may be a monocyclic ring or a polycyclic ring.
  • the monomer containing a group having a branched structure in the side chain include isopropyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, sec-butyl (meth) acrylate, tert-butyl (meth) acrylate, and (. Isoamyl (meth) acrylate, tert-amyl (meth) acrylate, sec-amyl (meth) acrylate, 2-octyl (meth) acrylate, 3-octyl (meth) acrylate and tert-octyl (meth) acrylate. And so on.
  • isopropyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, and tert-butyl methacrylate are preferable, and isopropyl methacrylate or tert-butyl methacrylate are more preferable.
  • the monomer having a group having an alicyclic structure in the side chain include a monomer having a monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and a monomer having a polycyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group.
  • a (meth) acrylate having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms can be mentioned.
  • More specific examples include (meth) acrylic acid (bicyclo [2.2.1] heptyl-2), (meth) acrylic acid-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid-2-adamantyl, (meth). -3-Methyl-1-adamantyl acrylate, -3,5-dimethyl-1-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, -3-ethyladamantyl (meth) acrylate, -3-methyl-5-methyl (meth) acrylate Ethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid-3,5,8-triethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid-3,5-dimethyl-8-ethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid 2 -Methyl-2-adamantyl, 2-ethyl-2-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, 3-hydroxy-1-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, o
  • (meth) acrylic acid esters (meth) acrylic acid cyclohexyl, (meth) acrylic acid (nor) boronyl, (meth) acrylic acid isobornyl, (meth) acrylic acid-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid -2-adamantyl, fentyl (meth) acrylate, 1-mentyl (meth) acrylate, or tricyclodecane (meth) acrylate is preferred, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, (nor) bornyl, (meth) acrylate, Isobornyl (meth) acrylate, -2-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, or tricyclodecane (meth) acrylate are more preferred.
  • the polymer A preferably has a reactive group, and more preferably has a structural unit having a reactive group.
  • a reactive group a radically polymerizable group is preferable, and an ethylenically unsaturated group is more preferable.
  • the polymer A preferably has a structural unit having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain.
  • an allyl group or a (meth) acryloxy group is more preferable.
  • the polymer A may have one type of structural unit having a reactive group alone or two or more types.
  • the lower limit of the content of the structural unit having a reactive group is set with respect to all the structural units of the polymer A from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. 5% by mass or more is preferable, 10% by mass or more is more preferable, 20% by mass or more is further preferable, 35% by mass or more is particularly preferable, and 40% by mass or more is most preferable.
  • the upper limit is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 50% by mass or less.
  • the lower limit of the content of the structural unit having a reactive group in the polymer A is preferably 5 mol% or more with respect to all the structural units of the polymer A from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. More preferably, it is more preferably mol% or more, further preferably 20 mol% or more, particularly preferably 35 mol% or more, and most preferably 40 mol% or more.
  • the upper limit thereof is preferably 70 mol% or less, more preferably 60 mol% or less, still more preferably 50 mol% or less.
  • the polymer A which is a binder polymer, has a weight average molecular weight (Mw) of 60,000 or less and has a radical polymerizable group in the polymer A in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the ratio of the structural units is preferably 20% by mass or more, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer A is 35,000 or less, and the ratio of the structural units having radical polymerizable groups in the polymer A is It is more preferably 35% by mass or more, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer A is 30,000 or less, and the proportion of the structural unit having a radical polymerizable group in the polymer A is 40% by mass or more. Is more preferable.
  • the polymer A may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • two kinds of polymer A containing a structural unit based on a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group may be mixed and used, or based on a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group. It is preferable to use a mixture of the polymer A containing a structural unit and the polymer A not containing a structural unit based on a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group.
  • the ratio of the polymer A containing the structural unit based on the monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 50% by mass or more, preferably 70% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the polymer A. More preferably, 80% by mass or more is preferable, and 90% by mass or more is more preferable.
  • a radical polymerization initiator such as benzoyl peroxide and azoisobutyronitrile is prepared by diluting the above-mentioned one or more monomers with a solvent such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, and isopropanol. Is preferably added in an appropriate amount and heated and stirred. In some cases, a part of the mixture is added dropwise to the reaction solution for synthesis. After completion of the reaction, a solvent may be further added to adjust the concentration to a desired level.
  • a solvent may be further added to adjust the concentration to a desired level.
  • the synthesis means bulk polymerization, suspension polymerization, or emulsion polymerization may be used in addition to solution polymerization.
  • the glass transition temperature Tg of the polymer A is preferably 30 to 135 ° C.
  • the Tg of the polymer A is preferably 130 ° C. or lower, more preferably 120 ° C. or lower, and particularly preferably 110 ° C. or lower.
  • the polymer A having a Tg of 30 ° C. or higher from the viewpoint of improving the edge fuse resistance.
  • the Tg of the polymer A is more preferably 40 ° C. or higher, further preferably 50 ° C. or higher, particularly preferably 60 ° C. or higher, and most preferably 70 ° C. or higher.
  • the alkali-soluble resin described in the description of the thermoplastic resin layer described later may be used.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a resin other than the above as the polymer A.
  • resins include acrylic resin, styrene-acrylic copolymer, polyurethane resin, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl formal, polyamide resin, polyester resin, polyamide resin, epoxy resin, polyacetal resin, polyhydroxystyrene resin, polyimide resin, and poly. Examples thereof include benzoxazole resin, polysiloxane resin, polyethyleneimine, polyallylamine, and polyalkylene glycol.
  • the polymer A is purified by reprecipitation.
  • the amount of residual monomers can be reduced. As a result, it is difficult to form a half-exposed portion.
  • the content of the polymer A is preferably 10 to 90% by mass, more preferably 20 to 80% by mass, further preferably 30 to 70% by mass, and even more preferably 40 to 40% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. 60% by mass is particularly preferable. It is preferable that the content of the polymer A is 90% by mass or less from the viewpoint of controlling the developing time. On the other hand, it is preferable that the content of the polymer A is 10% by mass or more from the viewpoint of improving the edge fuse resistance.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a polymerizable compound.
  • the polymerizable compound is a compound other than the above-mentioned polymer A, and preferably has a molecular weight of less than 5,000.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “ethylenically unsaturated compound”) as a polymerizable compound.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably a radically polymerizable compound.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated group include a vinyl group, a (meth) acryloyl group, a styryl group, a maleimide group and the like, and a (meth) acryloyl group is preferable.
  • the number of ethylenically unsaturated groups in the ethylenically unsaturated compound is not particularly limited, but one or more is preferable, and two or more are more preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 20 or less.
  • a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated groups is preferable in that the photosensitivity of the negative photosensitive composition layer is more excellent, and the ethylenically unsaturated compound is contained in one molecule.
  • a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated groups is more preferable.
  • the number of ethylenically unsaturated groups contained in one molecule of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 6 or less, more preferably 3 or less, and 2 or less in terms of excellent resolution and peelability. More preferred.
  • the content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound in the negative photosensitive composition layer with respect to the total mass of the polymerizable compound is 20 from the viewpoint of excellent peelability with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited and may be 100% by mass. That is, all the polymerizable compounds may be bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds.
  • a (meth) acrylate compound having a (meth) acryloyl group as a polymerizable group is preferable.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains a polymerizable compound B1 having an aromatic ring and two ethylenically unsaturated groups.
  • the polymerizable compound B1 is a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having one or more aromatic rings in one molecule among the above-mentioned polymerizable compounds B.
  • the mass ratio of the content of the polymerizable compound B1 to the total mass of the polymerizable compound in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 40% or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, from the viewpoint of better resolution. , 55% by mass or more is more preferable, and 60% by mass or more is particularly preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of peelability, for example, it is 100% by mass or less, preferably 99% by mass or less, more preferably 95% by mass or less, further preferably 90% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 85% by mass or less. preferable.
  • aromatic ring contained in the polymerizable compound B1 examples include aromatic hydrocarbon rings such as benzene ring, naphthalene ring and anthracene ring, thiophene ring, furan ring, pyrrole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring and pyridine ring. Heterocycles and fused rings thereof are mentioned, and aromatic hydrocarbon rings are preferable, and benzene rings are more preferable.
  • the aromatic ring may have a substituent.
  • the polymerizable compound B1 may have only one aromatic ring or may have two or more aromatic rings.
  • the polymerizable compound B1 preferably has a bisphenol structure from the viewpoint of improving the resolution by suppressing the swelling of the negative photosensitive composition layer due to the developing solution.
  • the bisphenol structure include a bisphenol A structure derived from bisphenol A (2,2-bis (4-hydroxyphenyl) propane) and a bisphenol derived from bisphenol F (2,2-bis (4-hydroxyphenyl) methane).
  • examples thereof include an F structure and a bisphenol B structure derived from bisphenol B (2,2-bis (4-hydroxyphenyl) butane), and a bisphenol A structure is preferable.
  • Examples of the polymerizable compound B1 having a bisphenol structure include a compound having a bisphenol structure and two polymerizable groups (preferably (meth) acryloyl groups) bonded to both ends of the bisphenol structure. Both ends of the bisphenol structure and the two polymerizable groups may be directly bonded or may be bonded via one or more alkyleneoxy groups. As the alkyleneoxy group added to both ends of the bisphenol structure, an ethyleneoxy group or a propyleneoxy group is preferable, and an ethyleneoxy group is more preferable.
  • the number of alkyleneoxy groups added to the bisphenol structure is not particularly limited, but is preferably 4 to 16 per molecule, more preferably 6 to 14.
  • the polymerizable compound B1 having a bisphenol structure is described in paragraphs 0072 to 0080 of JP-A-2016-224162, and the contents described in this publication are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the polymerizable compound B1 a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a bisphenol A structure is preferable, and 2,2-bis (4-((meth) acryloxypolyalkoxy) phenyl) propane is more preferable.
  • 2,2-bis (4-((meth) acryloxypolyalkoxy) phenyl) propane examples include 2,2-bis (4- (methacryloxydiethoxy) phenyl) propane (FA-324M, Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.).
  • polymerizable compound B1 a compound represented by the following general formula (B1) is also preferable.
  • R 1 and R 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, respectively.
  • A represents C 2 H 4 .
  • B represents C 3 H 6 .
  • n1 and n3 are independently integers of 1 to 39, and n1 + n3 are integers of 2 to 40.
  • n2 and n4 are independently integers of 0 to 29, and n2 + n4 are integers of 0 to 30.
  • the sequence of constituent units of-(AO)-and-(BO)- may be random or block. In the case of a block, either ⁇ (A—O) ⁇ or ⁇ (BO) ⁇ may be on the bisphenyl group side.
  • n1 + n2 + n3 + n4 is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 16, and even more preferably 4 to 12. Further, n2 + n4 is preferably 0 to 10, more preferably 0 to 4, further preferably 0 to 2, and particularly preferably 0.
  • the polymerizable compound B1 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the polymerizable compound B1 is preferably 10% by mass or more, more preferably 20% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer, from the viewpoint of better resolution.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of transferability and edge fusion (a phenomenon in which the photosensitive resin exudes from the end of the transfer member), 70% by mass or less is preferable, and 60% by mass or less is more preferable.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a polymerizable compound other than the above-mentioned polymerizable compound B1.
  • the polymerizable compound other than the polymerizable compound B1 is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known compounds.
  • a compound having one ethylenically unsaturated group in one molecule monoofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound
  • a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having no aromatic ring and a trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound. Examples include compounds.
  • Examples of the monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound include ethyl (meth) acrylate, ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl succinate, polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, and polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate. , And phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate.
  • Examples of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having no aromatic ring include alkylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polyalkylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, urethane di (meth) acrylate, and trimethylolpropane diacrylate. ..
  • Examples of the alkylene glycol di (meth) acrylate include tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate (A-DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), tricyclodecanedimethanol dimethacrylate (DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and the like.
  • 1,9-Nonandiol diacrylate (A-NOD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (A-HD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), ethylene glycol dimethacrylate , 1,10-decanediol diacrylate, and neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate.
  • the polyalkylene glycol di (meth) acrylate include polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, dipropylene glycol diacrylate, tripropylene glycol diacrylate, and polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate.
  • Examples of the urethane di (meth) acrylate include propylene oxide-modified urethane di (meth) acrylate, and ethylene oxide and propylene oxide-modified urethane di (meth) acrylate.
  • Examples of commercially available products include 8UX-015A (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), UA-32P (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and UA-1100H (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
  • Examples of the trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound include dipentaerythritol (tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol (tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate, and trimethylolpropane tri (meth).
  • Examples thereof include acrylates, trimethylolpropane tetra (meth) acrylates, trimethylolethanetri (meth) acrylates, isocyanuric acid tri (meth) acrylates, glycerintri (meth) acrylates, and alkylene oxide modified products thereof.
  • (tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate) is a concept including tri (meth) acrylate, tetra (meth) acrylate, penta (meth) acrylate, and hexa (meth) acrylate.
  • (Tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate” is a concept that includes tri (meth) acrylate and tetra (meth) acrylate.
  • Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound having 5 to 6 or more functionalities include dipentaerythritol polyacrylate (“A-DPH” manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains the above-mentioned polymerizable compound B1 and a trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound, and the above-mentioned polymerizable compound B1 and two or more trifunctional or higher. It is more preferable to contain an ethylenically unsaturated compound.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains the above-mentioned polymerizable compound B1 and two or more trifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds.
  • alkylene oxide-modified product of the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound examples include caprolactone-modified (meth) acrylate compound (KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. and A-9300-1CL manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
  • KAYARAD registered trademark
  • DPCA-20 Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.
  • A-9300-1CL manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
  • alkylene oxide-modified (meth) acrylate compound (KAYARAD RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., ATM-35E and A-9300 manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., EBECRYL (registered trademark) 135 manufactured by Daicel Ornex Co., Ltd., etc.), Acrylate glycerin triacrylate (A-GLY-9E manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Aronix (registered trademark) TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Aronix M-520 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and Aronix M- 510 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) can be mentioned.
  • a polymerizable compound having an acid group (carboxy group or the like) may be used.
  • the acid group may form an acid anhydride group.
  • Polymerizable compounds having an acid group include Aronix (registered trademark) TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei), Aronix (registered trademark) M-520 (manufactured by Toagosei), and Aronix (registered trademark) M-510 (registered trademark). Toagosei Co., Ltd.).
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group for example, the compounds described in paragraphs 0025 to 0030 of JP-A-2004-239942 may be used.
  • the ethylenically unsaturated compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the lower limit of the content of the ethylenically unsaturated compound in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. , 20% by mass or more is further preferable, 35% by mass or more is further preferable, and 40% by mass or more is particularly preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and further preferably 55% by mass or less.
  • the mass content ratio of the ethylenically unsaturated compound to the binder polymer is preferably 0.4 or more, preferably 0.5 or more. Is more preferable, 0.6 or more is further preferable, 0.7 or more is particularly preferable, and 0.8 or more is most preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1.5 or less, and more preferably 1.2 or less.
  • the molecular weight (weight average molecular weight when having a molecular weight distribution) of the ethylenically unsaturated compound (including the polymerizable compound B1) is preferably 200 to 3,000, more preferably 280 to 2,200, and 300 to 2, 200 is more preferred.
  • the polymerizable compound may contain a polymerizable compound other than the ethylenically unsaturated compound (hereinafter, also referred to as “another polymerizable compound”).
  • the other polymerizable compound is a compound that polymerizes under the action of a photopolymerization initiator described later, and means a compound different from the above-mentioned polymer A.
  • the other polymerizable compound preferably has a molecular weight of less than 5,000.
  • Examples of the polymerizable group of the other polymerizable compound include a group having a cationically polymerizable group such as an epoxy group and an oxetane group.
  • the content of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is the total mass of the polymerizable compound (total mass of the ethylenically unsaturated compound and other polymerizable compounds). ), 60 to 100% by mass is preferable, 80 to 100% by mass is more preferable, 90 to 100% by mass is further preferable, and 95 to 100% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the lower limit of the content of the polymerizable compound (total mass of the ethylenically unsaturated compound and other polymerizable compounds) in the negative photosensitive composition layer is the total mass of the polymerizable compound (ethylene unsaturated compound and 1% by mass or more is preferable, 5% by mass or more is more preferable, 20% by mass or more is further preferable, 35% by mass or more is further preferable, and 40% by mass or more is particularly preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and further preferably 55% by mass or less.
  • the transfer film of the present invention preferably contains a polyfunctional or higher functional compound in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • the tetrafunctional or higher functional polymerizable compound is preferably a tetrafunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound (a polymerizable compound having four or more ethylenically unsaturated groups).
  • the content of the tetrafunctional or higher-functional polymerizable compound is preferably 35% by mass or more, preferably 35% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the polymerizable compound (total mass of the ethylenically unsaturated compound and other polymerizable compounds).
  • the upper limit value is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100% by mass or less, more preferably 90% by mass or less, and further preferably 80% by mass or less.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a photopolymerization initiator.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is a compound that initiates the polymerization of a polymerizable compound by receiving active light such as ultraviolet rays, visible light, and X-rays.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, and a known photopolymerization initiator can be used. Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include a photoradical polymerization initiator and a photocationic polymerization initiator, and a photoradical polymerization initiator is preferable.
  • Examples of the photoradical polymerization initiator include a photopolymerization initiator having an oxime ester structure, a photopolymerization initiator having an ⁇ -aminoalkylphenone structure, a photopolymerization initiator having an ⁇ -hydroxyalkylphenone structure, and an acylphosphine oxide. Examples thereof include a photopolymerization initiator having a structure and a photopolymerization initiator having an N-phenylglycine structure.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer contains 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer as a photoradical polymerization initiator from the viewpoints of photosensitive, visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, and resolution. It preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of the body and its derivatives.
  • the two 2,4,5-triarylimidazole structures in the 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer and its derivatives may be the same or different.
  • Derivatives of the 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer include, for example, 2- (o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2- (o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-di.
  • the photoradical polymerization initiator for example, the polymerization initiator described in paragraphs 0031 to 0042 of JP-A-2011-09571 and paragraphs 0064-0081 of JP-A-2015-014783 may be used.
  • photoradical polymerization initiator examples include ethyl dimethylaminobenzoate (DBE, CAS No. 10287-53-3), benzoin methyl ether, anisyl (p, p'-dimethoxybenzyl), and TAZ-110 (trade name:).
  • Examples of commercially available photoradical polymerization initiators include 1- [4- (phenylthio)] -1,2-octanedione-2- (O-benzoyloxime) (trade name: IRGACURE® OXE-01). , BASF), 1- [9-ethyl-6- (2-methylbenzoyl) -9H-carbazole-3-yl] etanone-1- (O-acetyloxime) (trade name: IRGACURE OXE-02, BASF) IRGACURE OXE-03 (BASF), IRGACURE OXE-04 (BASF), 2- (dimethylamino) -2-[(4-methylphenyl) methyl] -1- [4- (4) -Morphorinyl) Phenyl] -1-butanone (trade name: Omnirad 379EG, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), 2-methyl-1- (4-methylthiophenyl) -2-morpholinopropane-1
  • the photocationic polymerization initiator is a compound that generates an acid by receiving active light rays.
  • a compound that is sensitive to active light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably a wavelength of 300 to 450 nm and generates an acid is preferable, but its chemical structure is not limited.
  • a photocationic polymerization initiator that is not directly sensitive to active light with a wavelength of 300 nm or more is also a sensitizer if it is a compound that is sensitive to active light with a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer. Can be preferably used in combination with.
  • a photocationic polymerization initiator that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less is preferable, a photocationic polymerization initiator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less is more preferable, and an acid having a pKa of 2 or less is used.
  • the generated photocationic polymerization initiator is particularly preferred.
  • the lower limit of pKa is not particularly defined, but is preferably -10.0 or higher, for example.
  • Examples of the photocationic polymerization initiator include an ionic photocationic polymerization initiator and a nonionic photocationic polymerization initiator.
  • Examples of the ionic photocationic polymerization initiator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts.
  • the ionic photocationic polymerization initiator described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-085643 may be used.
  • nonionic photocationic polymerization initiator examples include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds.
  • trichloromethyl-s-triazines the diazomethane compound and the imide sulfonate compound
  • the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP-A-2011-22149 may be used.
  • the oxime sulfonate compound the compound described in paragraphs 0084 to 0088 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 may be used.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains a photoradical polymerization initiator, and more preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimers and derivatives thereof. preferable.
  • the photopolymerization initiator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 1.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. % Or more is more preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less, still more preferably 10% by mass or less, still more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. ..
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a polymerization inhibitor.
  • the polymerization inhibitor means a compound having a function of delaying or prohibiting a polymerization reaction.
  • a known compound used as a polymerization inhibitor can be used.
  • polymerization inhibitor examples include phenothiazine compounds such as phenothiazine, bis- (1-dimethylbenzyl) phenothiazine, and 3,7-dioctylphenothiazine; phenoxazine compounds such as phenoxazine; bis [3- (3-tert- Butyl-4-hydroxy-5-methylphenyl) propionic acid] [ethylenebis (oxyethylene)] 2,4-bis [(laurylthio) methyl] -o-cresol, 1,3,5-tris (3,5-) Di-t-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl), 1,3,5-tris (4-t-butyl-3-hydroxy-2,6-dimethylbenzyl), 2,4-bis- (n-octylthio)- 6- (4-Hydroxy-3,5-di-t-butylanilino) -1,3,5-triazine and pentaerythritol tetra
  • examples thereof include metal salt compounds such as copper acid, manganese diethyldithiocarbamate, and manganese diphenyldithiocarbamate.
  • examples of the polymerization inhibitor include thermal polymerization inhibitors, naphthylamines, cuprous chloride and the like described in paragraph 0018 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784.
  • the polymerization inhibitor is composed of a phenothiazine compound (phenothiazine and its derivative), a phenoxazine compound such as phenoxazine; a nitroso compound or a salt thereof, and a hindered phenol compound in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
  • At least one selected from the group is preferable, and phenolthiazine, phenoxazine, bis [3- (3-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy-5-methylphenyl) propionic acid], [ethylenebis (oxyethylene)] 2,4 -Bis [(laurylthio) methyl] -o-cresol, 1,3,5-tris (3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl), p-methoxyphenol, or N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine
  • Aluminum salts are more preferred, and phenothiazine, phenoxazine, or p-methoxyphenol is even more preferred.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a radical polymerization inhibitor.
  • the radical polymerization inhibitor include the thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0018 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784. Of these, phenothiazine, phenoxazine, or 4-methoxyphenol is preferable.
  • examples of other radical polymerization inhibitors include naphthylamine, cuprous chloride, nitrosophenylhydroxyamine aluminum salt, diphenylnitrosamine and the like. It is preferable to use a nitrosophenylhydroxylamine aluminum salt as a radical polymerization inhibitor so as not to impair the sensitivity of the negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • the preferred content of the radical polymerization inhibitor is the same as in the first embodiment.
  • the polymerization inhibitor may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Further, in order for the transfer film of the present invention to exert the effect of the present invention, the content of the polymerization inhibitor in the negative type photosensitive composition layer is 0.10 with respect to the total mass of the negative type photosensitive composition layer. It is preferably ⁇ 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.10 to 3.0% by mass, still more preferably 0.10 to 2.0% by mass. Further, in order for the transfer film of the present invention to exert the effect of the present invention, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 5 to 15% by mass with respect to the content of the photopolymerization initiator.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.005 to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 3.0% by mass, and 0.01 to 0.01% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymerizable compound. 1.0% by mass is more preferable.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer has a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 to 780 nm at the time of color development from the viewpoints of visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, pattern visibility after development, and resolution. It is also preferable to include a dye (also referred to as "dye N") whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, a base, or a radical. When the dye N is contained, the detailed mechanism is unknown, but the adhesion to the adjacent layer (for example, a water-soluble resin layer) is improved, and the resolution is more excellent.
  • the term "the maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, a base, or a radical” means that the dye in a color-developing state is decolorized by an acid, a base, or a radical, and the dye in a decolorized state is decolorized. It may mean any aspect of a mode in which a color is developed by an acid, a base, or a radical, and a mode in which a dye in a color-developing state changes to a color-developing state of another hue.
  • the dye N may be a compound that changes its color from the decolorized state by exposure and may be a compound that changes its color from the decolorized state by exposure.
  • it may be a dye whose color development or decolorization state changes due to the generation and action of an acid, a base, or a radical in the negative photosensitive composition layer by exposure, and the negative type by the acid, the base, or the radical. It may be a dye whose color development or decolorization state changes by changing the state (for example, pH) in the photosensitive composition layer. Further, it may be a dye that changes the state of color development or decolorization by directly receiving an acid, a base, or a radical as a stimulus without going through exposure.
  • the dye N is preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid or a radical, and more preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by a radical. ..
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer is a negative photosensitive composition layer
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer is a radical as the dye N from the viewpoint of visibility and resolution of the exposed portion and the non-exposed portion. It is preferable to contain both a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength changes depending on the temperature and a photoradical polymerization initiator.
  • the dye N is preferably a dye that develops color by an acid, a base, or a radical.
  • a photoradical polymerization initiator, a photocationic polymerization initiator (photoacid generator), or a photobase generator is added to a negative photosensitive composition layer, and a photoradical is applied after exposure.
  • a radical-reactive dye, an acid-reactive dye, or a base-reactive dye for example, a leuco dye
  • a radical-reactive dye, an acid-reactive dye, or a base-reactive dye for example, a leuco dye
  • the dye N preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength of 550 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 to 780 nm at the time of color development, more preferably 550 to 700 nm. It is more preferably ⁇ 650 nm. Further, the dye N may have only one maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 to 780 nm at the time of color development, or may have two or more. When the dye N has two or more maximum absorption wavelengths in the wavelength range of 400 to 780 nm at the time of color development, the maximum absorption wavelength having the highest absorbance among the two or more maximum absorption wavelengths may be 450 nm or more.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength of the dye N is the transmission spectrum of the solution containing the dye N (liquid temperature 25 ° C.) in the range of 400 to 780 nm using a spectrophotometer: UV3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) in an atmospheric atmosphere. Is measured, and the wavelength at which the light intensity becomes the minimum (maximum absorption wavelength) is detected.
  • Examples of the dye that develops or decolorizes by exposure include leuco compounds.
  • Examples of the dye that is decolorized by exposure include a leuco compound, a diarylmethane dye, an oxadin dye, a xanthene dye, an iminonaphthoquinone dye, an azomethin dye, and an anthraquinone dye.
  • As the dye N a leuco compound is preferable from the viewpoint of visibility of the exposed portion and the non-exposed portion.
  • the leuco compound examples include a leuco compound having a triarylmethane skeleton (triarylmethane dye), a leuco compound having a spiropyran skeleton (spiropylan dye), a leuco compound having a fluorane skeleton (fluorane dye), and a diarylmethane skeleton.
  • triarylmethane dye a leuco compound having a triarylmethane skeleton
  • spiropyran skeleton a leuco compound having a spiropyran skeleton
  • fluorane dye fluorane skeleton
  • diarylmethane skeleton examples include a diarylmethane skeleton having a diarylmethane skeleton.
  • leuco compound (diarylmethane dye) having a leuco compound (diarylmethane dye), a leuco compound having a rhodamine lactam skeleton (lodamine lactam dye), a leuco compound having an indrill phthalide skeleton (indrill phthalide dye), and a leuco auramine skeleton.
  • Leuco compounds (leuco-auramine-based dyes) can be mentioned.
  • triarylmethane-based dyes or fluorane-based dyes are preferable, and leuco compounds (triphenylmethane-based dyes) or fluorane-based dyes having a triphenylmethane skeleton are more preferable.
  • the leuco compound preferably has a lactone ring, a surujin ring, or a sultone ring from the viewpoint of visibility of the exposed portion and the non-exposed portion.
  • the lactone ring, sultone ring, or sultone ring of the leuco compound is reacted with the radical generated from the photoradical polymerization initiator or the acid generated from the photocationic polymerization initiator to change the leuco compound into a closed ring state.
  • the color can be decolorized, or the radical compound can be changed to an open ring state to develop a color.
  • a compound having a lactone ring, a sultone ring, or a sultone ring, and the lactone ring, the sultone ring, or the sultone ring is opened by a radical or an acid to develop color is preferable, and the lactone ring has a radical or a radical.
  • a compound in which the lactone ring is opened by an acid to develop a color is more preferable.
  • Examples of the dye N include the following dyes and leuco compounds. Specific examples of the dyes among the dyes N include Brilliant Green, Ethyl Violet, Methyl Green, Crystal Violet, Basic Fuxin, Methyl Violet 2B, Kinaldine Red, Rose Bengal, Metanyl Yellow, Timor Sulfophthalein, Xylenol Blue, and Methyl.
  • leuco compound among the dyes N include p, p', p "-hexamethyltriaminotriphenylmethane (leucocrystal violet), Pergascript Blue SRB (manufactured by Ciba Geigy), crystal violet lactone, and malakite green lactone.
  • the dye N is preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by radicals from the viewpoints of visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, pattern visibility after development, and resolution, and is a dye that develops color by radicals. It is more preferable to have.
  • As the dye N leuco crystal violet, crystal violet lactone, brilliant green, or Victoria pure blue-naphthalene sulfonate is preferable.
  • the dye N may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the dye N is 0.1 mass with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer from the viewpoints of visibility of the exposed portion and the non-exposed portion, pattern visibility after development, and resolution. % Or more is preferable, 0.1 to 10% by mass is more preferable, 0.1 to 5% by mass is further preferable, and 0.1 to 1% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the content of the dye N means the content of the dye when all of the dye N contained in the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer is in a colored state.
  • a method for quantifying the content of dye N will be described by taking a dye that develops color by radicals as an example.
  • a solution prepared by dissolving 0.001 g and 0.01 g of the dye in 100 mL of methyl ethyl ketone is prepared.
  • Irradicure OXE01 (trade name, BASF Japan, Inc.), a photoradical polymerization initiator, is added to each of the obtained solutions, and radicals are generated by irradiating with light of 365 nm to bring all the dyes into a colored state.
  • the absorbance of each solution having a liquid temperature of 25 ° C. is measured using a spectrophotometer (UV3100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation), and a calibration curve is prepared.
  • UV3100 UV3100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation
  • the absorbance of the solution in which all the dyes are colored is measured by the same method as above except that 3 g of the negative photosensitive composition layer is dissolved in methyl ethyl ketone instead of the dye. From the absorbance of the obtained solution containing the negative photosensitive composition layer, the content of the dye contained in the negative photosensitive composition layer is calculated based on the calibration curve.
  • the negative type photosensitive composition layer 3 g is the same as 3 g of the total solid content in the composition for forming the negative type photosensitive composition layer.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer is a negative photosensitive composition layer
  • the heat-crosslinkable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group which will be described later, is not treated as a polymerizable compound, but is treated as a heat-crosslinkable compound.
  • the heat-crosslinkable compound include a methylol compound and a blocked isocyanate compound. Of these, a blocked isocyanate compound is preferable from the viewpoint of the strength of the obtained cured film and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound reacts with a hydroxy group and a carboxy group, for example, when the resin and / or the polymerizable compound has at least one of the hydroxy group and the carboxy group, the hydrophilicity of the formed film decreases.
  • the function tends to be enhanced.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound refers to "a compound having a structure in which the isocyanate group of isocyanate is protected (so-called masked) with a blocking agent".
  • the dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate compound is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 to 160 ° C, more preferably 130 to 150 ° C.
  • the dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate means "the temperature of the endothermic peak associated with the deprotection reaction of the blocked isocyanate when measured by DSC (Differential scanning calorimetry) analysis using a differential scanning calorimeter".
  • DSC Different scanning calorimeter
  • a differential scanning calorimeter model: DSC6200 manufactured by Seiko Instruments Co., Ltd. can be preferably used.
  • the differential scanning calorimeter is not limited to this.
  • the blocking agent having a dissociation temperature of 100 to 160 ° C. for example, at least one selected from oxime compounds is preferable from the viewpoint of storage stability.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound preferably has an isocyanurate structure, for example, from the viewpoint of improving the brittleness of the membrane and improving the adhesion to the transferred body.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound having an isocyanurate structure can be obtained, for example, by subjecting hexamethylene diisocyanate to isocyanurate to protect it.
  • a compound having an oxime structure using an oxime compound as a blocking agent is more likely to have a dissociation temperature in a preferable range than a compound having no oxime structure, and has less development residue. It is preferable from the viewpoint of easy operation.
  • the blocked isocyanate compound may have a polymerizable group.
  • the polymerizable group is not particularly limited, and a known polymerizable group can be used, and a radically polymerizable group is preferable.
  • the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated group such as a (meth) acryloxy group, a (meth) acrylamide group, and a styryl group, and a group having an epoxy group such as a glycidyl group.
  • an ethylenically unsaturated group is preferable, a (meth) acryloxy group is more preferable, and an acryloxy group is further preferable.
  • blocked isocyanate compound a commercially available product can be used.
  • examples of commercially available blocked isocyanate compounds include Karenz (registered trademark) AOI-BM, Karenz (registered trademark) MOI-BM, Karenz (registered trademark) MOI-BP (all manufactured by Showa Denko KK), and block type.
  • examples thereof include the Duranate series (for example, Duranate (registered trademark) TPA-B80E, Duranate (registered trademark) WT32-B75P, etc., manufactured by Asahi Kasei Chemicals Co., Ltd.).
  • the blocked isocyanate compound a compound having the following structure can also be used.
  • the heat-crosslinkable compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the heat-crosslinkable compound is preferably 1 to 50% by mass, preferably 5 to 30% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative-type photosensitive composition layer. % By mass is more preferred.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain known additives in addition to the above components, if necessary.
  • the additive include sensitizers, plasticizers, heterocyclic compounds (triazole and the like), benzotriazoles, carboxybenzotriazoles, pyridines (isonicotinamide and the like), purine bases (adenine and the like), and surfactants. Agents are mentioned.
  • Each additive may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • benzotriazoles include 1,2,3-benzotriazole, 1-chloro-1,2,3-benzotriazole, bis (N-2-ethylhexyl) aminomethylene-1,2,3-benzotriazole, and the like. Examples thereof include bis (N-2-ethylhexyl) aminomethylene-1,2,3-tolyltriazole and bis (N-2-hydroxyethyl) aminomethylene-1,2,3-benzotriazole.
  • carboxybenzotriazoles examples include 4-carboxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole, 5-carboxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole, and N- (N, N-di-2-ethylhexyl) aminomethylene. Examples thereof include carboxybenzotriazole, N- (N, N-di-2-hydroxyethyl) aminomethylenecarboxybenzotriazole, N- (N, N-di-2-ethylhexyl) aminoethylenecarboxybenzotriazole and the like.
  • a commercially available product such as CBT-1 (Johoku Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., trade name) can be used.
  • the total content of the benzotriazols and the carboxybenzotriazols is preferably 0.01 to 3% by mass, preferably 0.05 to 1% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. Is more preferable.
  • the content is 0.01% by mass or more, the storage stability of the negative photosensitive composition layer is more excellent.
  • the content is 3% by mass or less, the maintenance of sensitivity and the suppression of dye decolorization are more excellent.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a sensitizer.
  • the sensitizer is not particularly limited, and known sensitizers, dyes and pigments can be used.
  • Examples of the sensitizer include dialkylaminobenzophenone compounds, pyrazoline compounds, anthracene compounds, coumarin compounds, xanthone compounds, thioxanthone compounds, acridone compounds, oxazole compounds, benzoxazole compounds, thiazole compounds, benzothiazole compounds, and triazole compounds (for example). 1,2,4-triazole), stilben compounds, triazine compounds, thiophene compounds, naphthalimide compounds, triarylamine compounds, and aminoacridin compounds.
  • the sensitizer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the sensitizer can be appropriately selected depending on the purpose, but the sensitivity to the light source is improved and the curing rate is improved by the balance between the polymerization rate and the chain transfer. From the viewpoint, 0.01 to 5% by mass is preferable, and 0.05 to 1% by mass is more preferable with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain at least one selected from the group consisting of a plasticizer and a heterocyclic compound.
  • the plasticizer and the heterocyclic compound include the compounds described in paragraphs 097 to 0103 and 0111 to 0118 of International Publication No. 2018/179640.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains a surfactant. Examples of the surfactant include the same surfactants as those of the first embodiment, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer includes metal oxide particles, antioxidants, dispersants, acid growth agents, development accelerators, conductive fibers, ultraviolet absorbers, thickeners, cross-linking agents, and organic or inorganic materials. It may further contain known additives such as anti-precipitation agents. Additives contained in the negative photosensitive composition layer are described in paragraphs 0165 to 0184 of JP-A-2014-085643, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the water content in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 0.01 to 1.0% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 0.5% by mass, from the viewpoint of improving reliability and laminateability.
  • the layer thickness (thickness) of the negative photosensitive composition layer is generally 0.1 to 300 ⁇ m, preferably 0.2 to 100 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.5 to 50 ⁇ m, and 0.5 to 15 ⁇ m. Is more preferable, 0.5 to 10 ⁇ m is particularly preferable, and 0.5 to 8 ⁇ m is most preferable. As a result, the developability of the negative photosensitive composition layer can be improved, and the resolution can be improved. Further, in one embodiment, 0.5 to 5 ⁇ m is preferable, 0.5 to 4 ⁇ m is more preferable, and 0.5 to 3 ⁇ m is further preferable.
  • the transmittance of light having a wavelength of 365 nm in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 10% or more, more preferably 30% or more, still more preferably 50% or more.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 99.9% or less.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a predetermined amount of impurities.
  • impurities include sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, manganese, copper, aluminum, titanium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, zinc, tin, halogen and ions thereof.
  • halide ions, sodium ions, and potassium ions are likely to be mixed as impurities, so the following content is preferable.
  • the content of impurities in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 80 ppm or less, more preferably 10 ppm or less, still more preferably 2 ppm or less on a mass basis.
  • the content of impurities may be 1 ppb or more, or 0.1 ppm or more, on a mass basis.
  • the impurities can be quantified by known methods such as ICP (Inductively Coupled Plasma) emission spectroscopy, atomic absorption spectroscopy, and ion chromatography.
  • ICP Inductively Coupled Plasma
  • the content of compounds such as benzene, formaldehyde, trichlorethylene, 1,3-butadiene, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, and hexane in the negative photosensitive composition layer is , Preferably less.
  • the content of these compounds with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 100 ppm or less, more preferably 20 ppm or less, still more preferably 4 ppm or less on a mass basis.
  • the lower limit can be 10 ppb or more and 100 ppb or more with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer on a mass basis.
  • the content of these compounds can be suppressed in the same manner as the above-mentioned metal impurities. Further, it can be quantified by a known measurement method.
  • the water content in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 0.01 to 1.0% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 0.5% by mass, from the viewpoint of improving reliability and laminateability.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer may be a colored resin layer containing a pigment.
  • the liquid crystal display window of an electronic device may have a cover glass having a black frame-shaped light-shielding layer formed on the peripheral edge of the back surface of a transparent glass substrate or the like to protect the liquid crystal display window. be.
  • a colored resin layer can be used to form such a light-shielding layer.
  • the pigment may be appropriately selected according to the desired hue, and can be selected from black pigments, white pigments, and chromatic pigments other than black and white. Among them, when forming a black pattern, a black pigment is preferably selected as the pigment.
  • the black pigment a known black pigment (organic pigment, inorganic pigment, etc.) can be appropriately selected as long as the effect of the present invention is not impaired.
  • the black pigment for example, carbon black, titanium oxide, titanium carbide, iron oxide, titanium oxide, graphite and the like are preferably mentioned from the viewpoint of optical density, and carbon black is particularly preferable.
  • carbon black from the viewpoint of surface resistance, carbon black having at least a part of the surface coated with a resin is preferable.
  • the particle size of the black pigment is preferably 0.001 to 0.1 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.01 to 0.08 ⁇ m in terms of number average particle size.
  • the particle size refers to the diameter of a circle when the area of the pigment particles is obtained from a photographic image of the pigment particles taken with an electronic microscope and a circle having the same area as the area of the pigment particles is considered, and the number average particle size. Is an average value obtained by obtaining the above particle size for any 100 particles and averaging the obtained 100 particle sizes.
  • the white pigment described in paragraphs 0015 and 0114 of JP-A-2005-007765 can be used as the white pigment.
  • the white pigments as the inorganic pigment, titanium oxide, zinc oxide, lithopone, light calcium carbonate, white carbon, aluminum oxide, aluminum hydroxide, or barium sulfate are preferable, and titanium oxide or zinc oxide is more preferable.
  • titanium oxide is more preferred.
  • rutile-type or anatase-type titanium oxide is more preferable, and rutile-type titanium oxide is particularly preferable.
  • the surface of titanium oxide may be treated with silica, alumina, titania, zirconia, or an organic substance, or may be subjected to two or more treatments.
  • the catalytic activity of titanium oxide is suppressed, and heat resistance, fading and the like are improved.
  • at least one of alumina treatment and zirconia treatment is preferable as the surface treatment of the surface of titanium oxide, and both alumina treatment and zirconia treatment are particularly preferable. ..
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer when the negative photosensitive composition layer is a colored resin layer, the negative photosensitive composition layer may further contain a chromatic pigment other than the black pigment and the white pigment from the viewpoint of transferability. preferable.
  • a chromatic pigment when a chromatic pigment is contained, the particle size of the chromatic pigment is preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 0.08 ⁇ m or less, in that the dispersibility is more excellent.
  • chromatic pigments include Victoria Pure Blue BO (Color Index (hereinafter CI) 42595), Auramine (CI41000), Fat Black HB (CI26150), and Monolite.
  • Pigment Red 180 C.I. I. Pigment Red 192, C.I. I. Pigment Red 215, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 1, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 4, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 22, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 60, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 64, and C.I. I. Pigment Violet 23 and the like. Above all, C.I. I. Pigment Red 177 is preferred.
  • the content of the pigment is preferably more than 3% by mass and 40% by mass or less, preferably more than 3% by mass and 35% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative type photosensitive composition layer. More preferably, it is more preferably 5% by mass or more and 35% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 10% by mass or more and 35% by mass or less.
  • the content of the pigment other than the black pigment is preferably 30% by mass or less with respect to the black pigment. It is more preferably from 20% by mass, still more preferably from 3 to 15% by mass.
  • the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a black pigment and the negative photosensitive composition layer is formed of a composition for forming a negative photosensitive composition layer
  • a black pigment preferably carbon black
  • the dispersion liquid may be prepared by adding a mixture obtained by previously mixing a black pigment and a pigment dispersant to an organic solvent (or vehicle) and dispersing it with a disperser.
  • the pigment dispersant may be selected depending on the pigment and the solvent, and for example, a commercially available dispersant can be used.
  • the vehicle refers to a portion of the medium in which the pigment is dispersed when the pigment is dispersed, and is a liquid, a binder component that holds the black pigment in a dispersed state, and a solvent component that dissolves and dilutes the binder component. (Organic solvent) and.
  • the disperser is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include known dispersers such as a kneader, a roll mill, an attritor, a super mill, a dissolver, a homomixer, and a sand mill. Further, it may be finely pulverized by mechanical grinding using frictional force.
  • disperser and fine pulverization the description of "Encyclopedia of Pigments" (Kunizo Asakura, First Edition, Asakura Shoten, 2000, 438, 310) can be referred to.
  • thermoplastic resin layer is usually arranged between the temporary support and the negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer is usually arranged between the temporary support and the negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer contains resin.
  • the resin contains a thermoplastic resin in part or in whole. That is, in one embodiment, it is also preferable that the resin of the thermoplastic resin layer is a thermoplastic resin.
  • the thermoplastic resin is preferably an alkali-soluble resin.
  • alkali-soluble resin include acrylic resin, polystyrene resin, styrene-acrylic copolymer, polyurethane resin, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl formal, polyamide resin, polyester resin, polyamide resin, epoxy resin, polyacetal resin, and polyhydroxystyrene resin.
  • an acrylic resin is preferable from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to an adjacent layer.
  • the acrylic resin is at least selected from the group consisting of a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid, a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester, and a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid amide. It means a resin having one kind of structural unit.
  • the acrylic resin the total content of the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid, the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester, and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid amide is the total content of the acrylic resin. It is preferably 50% by mass or more with respect to the mass.
  • the total content of the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester is preferably 30 to 100% by mass, preferably 50 to 100% by mass, based on the total mass of the acrylic resin. 100% by mass is more preferable.
  • the alkali-soluble resin is preferably a polymer having an acid group.
  • the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, and a phosphonic acid group, and a carboxy group is preferable.
  • the alkali-soluble resin is more preferably an alkali-soluble resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more, and further preferably a carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more.
  • the upper limit of the acid value of the alkali-soluble resin is not particularly limited, but is preferably 300 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 250 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, and particularly preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less.
  • the carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known resins and used.
  • an alkali-soluble resin which is a carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more, described in paragraphs 0033 to 0052 of JP-A-2010-237589.
  • Acrylic can be mentioned.
  • the copolymerization ratio of the structural unit having a carboxy group in the carboxy group-containing acrylic resin is preferably 5 to 50% by mass, more preferably 10 to 40% by mass, and 12 to 30% by mass with respect to the total mass of the acrylic resin. Is more preferable.
  • an acrylic resin having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to an adjacent layer.
  • the alkali-soluble resin may have a reactive group.
  • the reactive group may be any addition-polymerizable group, and an ethylenically unsaturated group; a polycondensable group such as a hydroxy group and a carboxy group; a polyaddition reactive group such as an epoxy group and a (block) isocyanate group may be used. Can be mentioned.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 1,000 or more, more preferably 10,000 to 100,000, and even more preferably 20,000 to 50,000.
  • the alkali-soluble resin may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 10 to 99% by mass, more preferably 20 to 90% by mass, based on the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to the adjacent layer. 40 to 80% by mass is more preferable, and 50 to 75% by mass is particularly preferable.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer contains a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 to 780 nm at the time of color development and whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, a base, or a radical (also referred to simply as “dye B”). Is preferable.
  • the preferred embodiment of the dye B is the same as the preferred embodiment of the dye N described above, except for the points described later.
  • the dye B is preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid or a radical, and more preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, from the viewpoint of visibility and resolution of the exposed part and the non-exposed part. ..
  • the thermoplastic resin layer contains both a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength changes depending on the acid as the dye B and a compound that generates an acid by light, which will be described later. It is preferable to include it.
  • the dye B may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the dye B is preferably 0.2% by mass or more, more preferably 0.2 to 6% by mass, based on the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoint of visibility of the exposed portion and the non-exposed portion. , 0.2 to 5% by mass, more preferably 0.25 to 3.0% by mass.
  • the content of the dye B means the content of the dye when all of the dye B contained in the thermoplastic resin layer is in a colored state.
  • a method for quantifying the content of dye B will be described by taking a dye that develops color by radicals as an example.
  • a solution prepared by dissolving 0.001 g and 0.01 g of the dye in 100 mL of methyl ethyl ketone is prepared.
  • Irradicure OXE01 (trade name, BASF Japan, Inc.), a photoradical polymerization initiator, is added to each of the obtained solutions, and radicals are generated by irradiating with light of 365 nm to bring all the dyes into a colored state.
  • thermoplastic resin layer (3 g) is the same as the solid content of the composition (3 g).
  • the thermoplastic resin layer may contain a compound (also simply referred to as “compound C”) that generates an acid, a base, or a radical by light.
  • a compound that generates an acid, a base, or a radical by receiving active light such as ultraviolet rays and visible light is preferable.
  • known photoacid generators, photobase generators, and photoradical polymerization initiators photoradical generators can be used.
  • thermoplastic resin layer may contain a photoacid generator from the viewpoint of resolution.
  • the photoacid generator include a photocationic polymerization initiator that may be contained in the negative-type photosensitive composition layer described above, and the same preferred embodiments are used except for the points described below.
  • the photoacid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound and an oxime sulfonate compound from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, and preferably contains sensitivity, resolution and adhesion. From the viewpoint of sex, it is more preferable to contain an oxime sulfonate compound. Further, as the photoacid generator, a photoacid generator having the following structure is also preferable.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer may contain a photoradical polymerization initiator.
  • the photo-radical polymerization initiator include a photo-radical polymerization initiator that may be contained in the negative-type photosensitive composition layer described above, and the same preferred embodiments are also used.
  • the thermoplastic resin composition may contain a photobase generator.
  • the photobase generator is not particularly limited as long as it is a known photobase generator, and for example, 2-nitrobenzylcyclohexylcarbamate, triphenylmethanol, O-carbamoyl hydroxylamide, O-carbamoyloxime, [[(2, 6-Dinitrobenzyl) Oxy] carbonyl] cyclohexylamine, bis [[(2-nitrobenzyl) oxy] carbonyl] hexane 1,6-diamine, 4- (methylthiobenzoyl) -1-methyl-1-morpholinoetan, (4) -Morholinobenzoyl) -1-benzyl-1-dimethylaminopropane, N- (2-nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl) pyrrolidine, hexaammine cobalt (III) tris (triphenylmethylborate), 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino- 1- (4
  • Compound C may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the compound C is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.5 to 5% by mass, based on the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoint of visibility and resolution of the exposed and non-exposed areas. More preferably by mass.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer preferably contains a plasticizer from the viewpoints of resolution, adhesion to adjacent layers, and developability.
  • the plasticizer preferably has a smaller molecular weight (weight average molecular weight when it is an oligomer or a polymer and has a molecular weight distribution) than that of an alkali-soluble resin.
  • the molecular weight (weight average molecular weight) of the plasticizer is preferably 200 to 2,000.
  • the plasticizer is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that is compatible with an alkali-soluble resin and exhibits plasticity, but from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity, the plasticizer preferably has an alkyleneoxy group in the molecule, and is a polyalkylene glycol. Compounds are more preferred. It is more preferable that the alkyleneoxy group contained in the plasticizer has a polyethyleneoxy structure or a polypropyleneoxy structure.
  • the plasticizer preferably contains a (meth) acrylate compound from the viewpoint of resolution and storage stability.
  • the alkali-soluble resin is an acrylic resin and the plasticizer contains a (meth) acrylate compound.
  • the (meth) acrylate compound used as a plasticizer include the (meth) acrylate compound described as the polymerizable compound contained in the above-mentioned negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • both the thermoplastic resin layer and the negative photosensitive composition layer contain the same (meth) acrylate compound. Is preferable. This is because the thermoplastic resin layer and the negative photosensitive composition layer each contain the same (meth) acrylate compound, so that the diffusion of components between the layers is suppressed and the storage stability is improved.
  • the (meth) acrylate compound may not polymerize even in the exposed portion after exposure from the viewpoint of adhesion between the thermoplastic resin layer and the adjacent layer.
  • the (meth) acrylate compound used as a plasticizer two or more (meth) in one molecule from the viewpoint of the resolution of the thermoplastic resin layer, the adhesion to the adjacent layer, and the developability.
  • Polyfunctional (meth) acrylate compounds having an acryloyl group are preferred.
  • a (meth) acrylate compound having an acid group or a urethane (meth) acrylate compound is also preferable.
  • the plasticizer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the plasticizer is preferably 1 to 70% by mass with respect to the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoints of the resolution of the thermoplastic resin layer, the adhesion to the adjacent layer, and the developability. 10 to 60% by mass is more preferable, and 20 to 50% by mass is further preferable.
  • the thermoplastic resin layer may contain a sensitizer.
  • the sensitizer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a sensitizer that may be contained in the negative photosensitive composition layer described above.
  • the sensitizer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the sensitizer can be appropriately selected depending on the purpose, but from the viewpoint of improving the sensitivity to the light source and the visibility of the exposed and non-exposed areas, it is 0.01 with respect to the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer. It is preferably from 5% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 1% by mass.
  • thermoplastic resin layer may contain a known additive such as a surfactant, if necessary. Further, the thermoplastic resin layer is described in paragraphs 0189 to 0193 of JP-A-2014-085643, and the contents described in this publication are incorporated in the present specification.
  • the layer thickness of the thermoplastic resin layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 2 ⁇ m or more, from the viewpoint of adhesion to adjacent layers.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of developability and resolvability, 20 ⁇ m or less is preferable, 10 ⁇ m or less is more preferable, and 8 ⁇ m or less is further preferable.
  • the intermediate layer 15 is present between the thermoplastic resin layer 13 and the negative photosensitive composition layer 17, so that the thermoplastic resin layer 13 and the negative photosensitive composition layer 17 are coated and formed. It is possible to suppress the mixing of components that may occur during storage at the time of coating and after coating formation.
  • a water-soluble resin layer containing a water-soluble resin can be used.
  • an oxygen blocking layer having an oxygen blocking function which is described as a “separation layer” in JP-A-5-07724, can also be used.
  • the intermediate layer is an oxygen blocking layer, the sensitivity at the time of exposure is improved, the time load of the exposure machine is reduced, and the productivity is improved, which is preferable.
  • the oxygen blocking layer used as the intermediate layer may be appropriately selected from the known layers described in the above publications and the like. Of these, an oxygen blocking layer that exhibits low oxygen permeability and is dispersed or dissolved in water or an alkaline aqueous solution (1% by mass aqueous solution of sodium carbonate at 22 ° C.) is preferable.
  • the water-soluble resin layer contains a resin.
  • the resin contains a water-soluble resin in part or in whole.
  • the resin that can be used as the water-soluble resin include polyvinyl alcohol-based resin, polyvinylpyrrolidone-based resin, cellulose-based resin, acrylamide-based resin, polyethylene oxide-based resin, gelatin, vinyl ether-based resin, polyamide resin, and their co-weight. Examples include resins such as coalescing.
  • a (meth) acrylic acid / vinyl compound copolymer or the like can also be used as the water-soluble resin.
  • the copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid / vinyl compound a copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid / allyl (meth) acrylic acid is preferable, and a copolymer of methacrylic acid / allyl methacrylate is more preferable.
  • the water-soluble resin is a copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid / vinyl compound
  • the composition ratio (mol%) is preferably 90/10 to 20/80, preferably 80/20 to 30/70. More preferred.
  • the lower limit of the weight average molecular weight of the water-soluble resin is preferably 5,000 or more, more preferably 7,000 or more, and even more preferably 10,000 or more.
  • the upper limit thereof is preferably 200,000 or less, more preferably 100,000 or less, and even more preferably 50,000 or less.
  • the dispersity (Mw / Mn) of the water-soluble resin is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5.
  • the resin in the water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer) is arranged on one surface side of the water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer) in order to further improve the ability to suppress the interlayer mixing of the water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer). It is preferable that the resin is different from the resin contained in the layer to be formed and the resin contained in the layer arranged on the other surface side.
  • the resin of the water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer) 15 is contained. Is preferably a resin different from the polymer A and the thermoplastic resin (alkali-soluble resin).
  • the water-soluble resin preferably contains polyvinyl alcohol, and more preferably contains both polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinylpyrrolidone, in terms of further improving the oxygen blocking property and the ability to suppress interlayer mixing.
  • the water-soluble resin may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the water-soluble resin is not particularly limited, but is preferably 50% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer) in terms of further improving the oxygen blocking property and the ability to suppress interlayer mixing. , 70% by mass or more is more preferable, 80% by mass or more is further preferable, and 90% by mass or more is particularly preferable.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 99.9% by mass or less, and more preferably 99.8% by mass or less.
  • the intermediate layer may contain a known additive such as a surfactant, if necessary.
  • the layer thickness of the water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer) is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 to 5 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.5 to 3 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer) is within the above range, the oxygen blocking property is not lowered and the ability to suppress interlaminar mixing is excellent. Further, it is possible to suppress an increase in the time for removing the water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer) during development.
  • the method for producing the transfer film of the second embodiment is not particularly limited, and a known method can be used.
  • a method for producing the transfer film 20 for example, a thermoplastic resin composition is applied to the surface of the temporary support 11 to form a coating film, and the coating film is further dried to form a thermoplastic resin layer 13.
  • Examples thereof include a step of applying a photosensitive composition to form a coating film, and further drying the coating film to form a negative photosensitive composition layer 17.
  • the transfer film 20 is manufactured by crimping the protective film 19 onto the negative photosensitive composition layer 17 of the laminate manufactured by the above-mentioned manufacturing method.
  • the method for producing the transfer film of the second embodiment includes a step of providing the protective film 19 so as to be in contact with the surface of the negative photosensitive composition layer 17 opposite to the side having the temporary support 11. It is preferable to produce a transfer film 20 including a temporary support 11, a thermoplastic resin layer 13, an intermediate layer 15, a negative photosensitive composition layer 17, and a protective film 19.
  • the transfer film 20 may be wound up to prepare and store the transfer film in the form of a roll.
  • the roll-type transfer film can be provided as it is in the bonding process with the substrate in the roll-to-roll method described later.
  • the negative type photosensitive composition layer 17 and the intermediate layer 15 are formed on the cover film 19, and then the thermoplastic resin layer 13 is formed on the surface of the intermediate layer 15. It may be a method.
  • the method for forming the thermoplastic resin layer on the temporary support is not particularly limited, and a known method can be used. For example, it can be formed by applying a composition for forming a thermoplastic resin layer on a temporary support and drying it if necessary.
  • the composition for forming the thermoplastic resin layer preferably contains the above-mentioned various components for forming the thermoplastic resin layer and a solvent.
  • the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total solid content of the composition is the same as the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer described above. be.
  • the solvent is not particularly limited as long as each component other than the solvent can be dissolved or dispersed, and a known solvent can be used.
  • the solvent include the same solvents as those contained in the composition for forming a negative photosensitive composition layer described later, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
  • the content of the solvent is preferably 50 to 1,900 parts by mass, more preferably 100 to 900 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the composition.
  • thermoplastic resin layer is not particularly limited as long as it can form a layer containing the above components, and for example, known coating methods (slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, inkjet coating, etc.) can be used. Can be mentioned.
  • the water-soluble resin composition preferably contains various components forming the above-mentioned intermediate layer (water-soluble resin layer) and a solvent.
  • the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total solid content of the composition is the same as the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total mass of the water-soluble resin layer described above.
  • the solvent is not particularly limited as long as it can dissolve or disperse the water-soluble resin, and at least one selected from the group consisting of water and water-miscible organic solvents is preferable, and water or water-miscible organic. A mixed solvent with a solvent is more preferable.
  • water-miscible organic solvent examples include alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, acetone, ethylene glycol, and glycerin, and alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms are preferable, and methanol or ethanol is more preferable.
  • the solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the solvent is preferably 50 to 2,500 parts by mass, more preferably 50 to 1,900 parts by mass, and even more preferably 100 to 900 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the composition.
  • the method for forming the water-soluble resin layer is not particularly limited as long as it can form a layer containing the above components, and for example, known coating methods (slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, inkjet coating, etc.) can be used. Can be mentioned.
  • a negative photosensitive composition layer containing the above-mentioned components for example, a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound, a polymerization initiator, etc.
  • a solvent that constitute the above-mentioned negative photosensitive composition layer in terms of excellent productivity It is preferably formed by a coating method using a forming composition.
  • a negative-type photosensitive composition layer-forming composition is applied onto an intermediate layer to form a coating film, and the coating film is subjected to a drying treatment. It is preferable to apply the method to form a negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • the composition for forming the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains various components and a solvent for forming the negative photosensitive composition layer described above.
  • the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total solid content of the composition is the content of each component with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer described above. It is the same as the preferable range of.
  • the solvent is not particularly limited as long as each component other than the solvent can be dissolved or dispersed, and a known solvent can be used.
  • alkylene glycol ether solvent for example, alkylene glycol ether solvent, alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent, alcohol solvent (methanol, ethanol, etc.), ketone solvent (acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, etc.), aromatic hydrocarbon solvent (toluene, etc.), aprotonic polarity.
  • examples thereof include a solvent (N, N-dimethylformamide, etc.), a cyclic ether solvent (tetratetra, etc.), an ester solvent (npropyl acetate, etc.), an amide solvent, a lactone solvent, and a mixed solvent containing two or more of these.
  • the solvent preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of an alkylene glycol ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent.
  • a mixed solvent containing at least one selected from the group consisting of an alkylene glycol ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent and at least one selected from the group consisting of a ketone solvent and a cyclic ether solvent is more preferable.
  • a mixed solvent containing at least one selected from the group consisting of an alkylene glycol ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent, a ketone solvent, and at least three types of a cyclic ether solvent is more preferable.
  • alkylene glycol ether solvent examples include ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether, ethylene glycol dialkyl ether, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether (propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, etc.), propylene glycol dialkyl ether, diethylene glycol dialkyl ether, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether, and the like. And dipropylene glycol dialkyl ether.
  • alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent examples include ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate, and dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate.
  • the solvent described in paragraphs 0092 to 0094 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 and the solvent described in paragraph 0014 of JP-A-2018-177789 may be used, and the contents thereof are described in the present specification. Will be incorporated into.
  • the solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the solvent is preferably 50 to 1,900 parts by mass, more preferably 100 to 1200 parts by mass, still more preferably 100 to 900 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the composition.
  • Examples of the method for applying the negative photosensitive composition layer forming composition include a printing method, a spray method, a roll coating method, a bar coating method, a curtain coating method, a spin coating method, and a die coating method (that is, a slit coating method). Law).
  • the drying temperature is preferably 80 ° C. or higher, more preferably 90 ° C. or higher.
  • the upper limit thereof is preferably 130 ° C. or lower, more preferably 120 ° C. or lower. It can also be dried by continuously changing the temperature.
  • the drying time is preferably 20 seconds or longer, more preferably 40 seconds or longer, and even more preferably 60 seconds or longer.
  • the upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 600 seconds or less, and more preferably 300 seconds or less.
  • the transfer film of the second embodiment can be produced by adhering the protective film to the negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • the method of adhering the protective film to the negative photosensitive composition layer is not particularly limited, and known methods can be mentioned.
  • Examples of the device for adhering the protective film to the negative photosensitive composition layer include a vacuum laminator and a known laminator such as an auto-cut laminator. It is preferable that the laminator is provided with an arbitrary heatable roller such as a rubber roller and can be pressurized and heated.
  • the composition layer can be transferred to the transferred body.
  • the transfer film of the present invention is preferably used for manufacturing a touch panel.
  • the surface of the transfer film on the opposite side of the temporary support is brought into contact with a substrate having a conductive portion and bonded to the substrate, the conductive layer, the composition layer, and , A bonding step of obtaining a substrate with a composition layer having a temporary support in this order,
  • An exposure process for pattern exposure of the composition layer and It comprises a developing step of developing an exposed composition layer to form a protective film pattern that protects the conductive layer.
  • a method for manufacturing a laminated body which comprises a peeling step of peeling a temporary support from a substrate with a composition layer between a bonding step and an exposure step, or between an exposure step and a developing step. Is preferable.
  • the method for manufacturing the laminate and the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring of the present invention are carried out by a roll tool process using a roll-shaped transfer film. That is, the bonding step is a step of bonding the transfer film and the substrate having the conductive layer described later by roll-to-roll, and at least the above-mentioned long-shaped laminate formed by the above-mentioned bonding step. It is preferable to carry out the exposure step and the development step. Hereinafter, the procedure of the above process will be described in detail.
  • the bonding step the surface of the transfer film opposite to the temporary support is brought into contact with the substrate having the conductive portion and bonded, and the substrate, the conductive layer, the negative photosensitive composition layer, and the temporary support are bonded. Is a step of obtaining a substrate with a composition layer having the above in this order. If the transfer film has a protective film, the protective film is peeled off and then the bonding step is performed.
  • the conductive layer and the surface of the composition layer are pressure-bonded so as to be in contact with each other.
  • the crimping method is not particularly limited, and a known transfer method and laminating method can be used. Above all, it is preferable that the surface of the composition layer is superposed on a substrate having a conductive portion, and pressure and heating are performed by a roll or the like.
  • a known laminator such as a vacuum laminator and an auto-cut laminator can be used for bonding.
  • the laminating temperature is not particularly limited, but is preferably 70 to 130 ° C., for example.
  • the substrate having a conductive layer has a conductive layer on the substrate, and any layer may be formed if necessary. That is, the substrate having the conductive layer is a conductive substrate having at least a substrate and a conductive layer arranged on the substrate.
  • the substrate examples include a resin substrate, a glass substrate, and a semiconductor substrate. Preferred embodiments of the substrate are described, for example, in paragraph [0140] of WO 2018/155193, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • the material of the resin substrate cycloolefin polymer and polyimide are preferable.
  • the thickness of the resin substrate is preferably 5 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m, more preferably 10 to 100 ⁇ m.
  • the conductive layer is at least one layer selected from the group consisting of a metal layer, a conductive metal oxide layer, a graphene layer, a carbon nanotube layer, and a conductive polymer layer from the viewpoint of conductivity and fine wire forming property. It is preferable to have it. Further, only one conductive layer may be arranged on the substrate, or two or more layers may be arranged. When two or more conductive layers are arranged, it is preferable to have conductive layers made of different materials. Preferred embodiments of the conductive layer are described, for example, in paragraph [0141] of WO 2018/155193, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
  • a substrate having at least one of a transparent electrode and a routing wire is preferable.
  • the above-mentioned substrate can be suitably used as a touch panel substrate.
  • the transparent electrode may function suitably as a touch panel electrode.
  • the transparent electrode is preferably composed of a metal oxide film such as ITO (indium tin oxide) and IZO (indium zinc oxide), a metal mesh, and a fine metal wire such as a metal nanowire.
  • the thin metal wire include thin wires such as silver and copper. Of these, silver conductive materials such as silver mesh and silver nanowires are preferable.
  • Metal is preferable as the material of the routing wiring.
  • the metal that is the material of the routing wiring include gold, silver, copper, molybdenum, aluminum, titanium, chromium, zinc, and manganese, and alloys composed of two or more of these metal elements.
  • copper, molybdenum, aluminum, or titanium is preferable, and copper is particularly preferable.
  • the protective film for a touch panel formed by using the negative photosensitive composition layer in the transfer film of the present invention has the electrode and / or the wiring directly or via another layer for the purpose of protecting the electrode and / or the wiring. It may be provided so as to cover the electrodes, or it may be provided as a protective film for insulating the electrodes (specifically, a protective film for insulating the electrodes such as bridge wiring).
  • the exposure step is a step of pattern-exposing the composition layer.
  • the "pattern exposure” refers to an exposure in a form of exposure in a pattern, that is, a form in which an exposed portion and a non-exposed portion are present.
  • the positional relationship between the exposed area and the unexposed area in the pattern exposure is not particularly limited and is appropriately adjusted. It may be exposed from the side opposite to the substrate of the composition layer, or may be exposed from the substrate side of the composition layer.
  • any light source in a wavelength range capable of curing at least the negative photosensitive composition layer (for example, 365 nm or 405 nm) can be appropriately selected and used.
  • the main wavelength of the exposure light for pattern exposure is preferably 365 nm.
  • the main wavelength is the wavelength having the highest intensity.
  • Examples of the light source include various lasers, light emitting diodes (LEDs), ultra-high pressure mercury lamps, high pressure mercury lamps, and metal halide lamps.
  • the exposure amount is preferably 5 to 200 mJ / cm 2 , more preferably 10 to 200 mJ / cm 2 .
  • a protective film pattern that protects at least a part of the conductive layer is formed on the conductive layer on the substrate.
  • the peeling step is a step of peeling the temporary support from the substrate with the composition layer between the bonding step and the exposure step, or between the exposure step and the development step described later.
  • the peeling method is not particularly limited, and a mechanism similar to the cover film peeling mechanism described in paragraphs [0161] to [0162] of JP2010-072589 can be used.
  • the developing step is a step of developing the exposed composition layer to form a pattern.
  • the development of the composition layer can be carried out using a developing solution.
  • An alkaline aqueous solution is preferable as the developing solution.
  • the alkaline compound that can be contained in the alkaline aqueous solution include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, sodium hydrogencarbonate, potassium hydrogencarbonate, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, and tetrapropylammonium hydroxy.
  • Do tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, and choline (2-hydroxyethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide).
  • Examples of the development method include paddle development, shower development, spin development, and dip development, and shower development is preferable.
  • a preferred embodiment of the developer used in the developing step is, for example, the developer described in paragraph [0194] of International Publication No. 2015/093271. Further, as a preferable aspect of the developing method for carrying out the developing step, for example, the developing method described in paragraph [0195] of International Publication No. 2015/093271 can be mentioned.
  • the developing step is preferably a step of repeatedly using the developing solution by circulating the developing solution, the developing method is shower development, and the developing solution is circulated by circulating the developing solution. It is preferable that the process is used repeatedly.
  • Specific embodiments for carrying out the above-mentioned development step include, for example, the development method described in JP-A-2012-137574.
  • the method for producing the laminate may include a step of exposing the pattern obtained by the development step (post-exposure step) and / or a step of heating (post-baking step).
  • post-exposure step a step of exposing the pattern obtained by the development step
  • post-baking step a step of heating
  • the exposure amount of the post exposure is preferably 100 to 5000 mJ / cm 2 , more preferably 200 to 3000 mJ / cm 2 .
  • the post-bake temperature is preferably 80 to 250 ° C, more preferably 90 to 160 ° C.
  • the post-baking time is preferably 1 to 180 minutes, more preferably 10 to 60 minutes.
  • the laminate produced by the method for producing a laminate of the present invention can be applied to various devices.
  • the device provided with the laminated body include an input device and the like, preferably a touch panel, and more preferably a capacitive touch panel.
  • the input device can be applied to a display device such as an organic electroluminescence display device and a liquid crystal display device.
  • the pattern formed from the composition layer is preferably used as a touch panel electrode or a protective film for the touch panel wiring. That is, the composition layer contained in the transfer film is preferably used for forming the electrode protective film for the touch panel or the wiring protective film for the touch panel.
  • Circuit wiring can also be manufactured by using the transfer film described above.
  • the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring is not particularly limited as long as it is the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring using the transfer film described above.
  • the surface of the transfer film on the opposite side of the temporary support is brought into contact with the substrate having the conductive layer, and the substrate, the conductive layer, the composition layer, and the temporary support are provided.
  • a developing process that develops the exposed composition layer to form a resin pattern Temporarily from the substrate with the composition layer between the etching process of etching the conductive layer in the region where the resin pattern is not arranged, and further between the bonding process and the exposure process, or between the exposure process and the developing process. It is preferable that the manufacturing method includes a peeling step of peeling the support.
  • the bonding step, the exposure process, the developing process, and the peeling step in the circuit wiring manufacturing method are the same as the bonding step, the exposure step, the developing step, and the peeling step in the above-mentioned laminated body manufacturing method, and are preferred embodiments. Is the same.
  • the circuit wiring is manufactured by a manufacturing method including a substrate, a conductive layer (conductive layer of the substrate), and a resin pattern (more preferably, the bonding step, the exposure step, and the developing step.
  • the step (etching step) of etching the conductive layer in the region where the resin pattern is not arranged is included.
  • the resin pattern obtained from the negative photosensitive composition layer by the developing step is used as an etching resist, and the conductive layer is etched.
  • a method of etching treatment a known method can be applied.
  • an acidic or alkaline etching solution may be appropriately selected according to the etching target.
  • the acidic etching solution include an aqueous solution of an acidic component alone selected from hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, acetic acid, hydrofluoric acid, oxalic acid and phosphoric acid, an acidic component, ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride and Examples thereof include a mixed aqueous solution with a salt selected from potassium permanganate.
  • the acidic component may be a component in which a plurality of acidic components are combined.
  • the alkaline etching solution includes an aqueous solution of an alkaline component alone selected from sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, an organic amine, and a salt of an organic amine (tetramethylammonium hydroxide, etc.), and an alkaline component and a salt. Examples thereof include a mixed aqueous solution with (potassium permanganate, etc.).
  • the alkaline component may be a component in which a plurality of alkaline components are combined.
  • the removing step is not particularly limited and can be performed as needed, but it is preferably performed after the etching step.
  • the method for removing the remaining resin pattern is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a method for removing by chemical treatment, and a method for removing with a removing liquid is preferable.
  • a method for removing the negative photosensitive composition layer a substrate having a resin pattern remaining in the removing liquid during stirring having a liquid temperature of preferably 30 to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 to 80 ° C. is 1 to 1 to 1. A method of soaking for 30 minutes can be mentioned.
  • the removing liquid examples include a removing liquid in which an inorganic alkaline component or an organic alkaline component is dissolved in water, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, or a mixed solution thereof.
  • examples of the inorganic alkaline component include sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide.
  • examples of the organic alkali component include a primary amine compound, a secondary amine compound, a tertiary amine compound and a quaternary ammonium salt compound.
  • the removing liquid may be used and removed by a known method such as a spray method, a shower method and a paddle method.
  • the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring may include any process (other process) other than the above-mentioned process.
  • a step of reducing the visible light reflectance described in paragraph [0172] of International Publication No. 2019/022089 a new conductive layer is provided on the insulating film described in paragraph [0172] of International Publication No. 2019/022089. Examples thereof include steps of forming, but the process is not limited to these steps.
  • the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring may include a step of reducing the visible light reflectance of a part or all of the plurality of conductive layers of the base material.
  • the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance include an oxidation treatment.
  • the visible light reflectance of the conductive layer can be lowered by oxidizing copper to obtain copper oxide and blackening the conductive layer.
  • the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance is described in paragraphs 0017 to 0025 of JP-A-2014-150118 and paragraphs 0041, 0042, 0048 and 0058 of JP-2013-206315. , The contents of these publications are incorporated herein.
  • the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring preferably includes a step of forming an insulating film on the surface of the circuit wiring and a step of forming a new conductive layer on the surface of the insulating film.
  • a second electrode pattern insulated from the first electrode pattern can be formed.
  • the step of forming the insulating film is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a known method of forming a permanent film.
  • an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having an insulating property.
  • the step of forming the new conductive layer on the insulating film is not particularly limited, and for example, a new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity.
  • a substrate having a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces of the base material it is also preferable to use a substrate having a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces of the base material, and to form a circuit sequentially or simultaneously on the conductive layers formed on both surfaces of the base material.
  • a circuit wiring for a touch panel in which a first conductive pattern is formed on one surface of a base material and a second conductive pattern is formed on the other surface. It is also preferable to form the touch panel circuit wiring having such a configuration from both sides of the base material by roll-to-roll.
  • the circuit wiring manufactured by the method of manufacturing the circuit wiring can be applied to various devices.
  • Examples of the device provided with the circuit wiring manufactured by the above manufacturing method include an input device, a touch panel is preferable, and a capacitance type touch panel is more preferable.
  • the input device can be applied to a display device such as an organic EL display device and a liquid crystal display device.
  • photosensitive composition a negative-type photosensitive composition layer-forming composition
  • photosensitive composition various components contained in a negative-type photosensitive composition layer-forming composition
  • MFG propylene glycol monomethyl ether
  • V-601 (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) 16.7 parts by mass of a mixed solution was added dropwise over 3 hours. After the dropping, the mixture is stirred at 90 ° C. for 1 hour, a mixture of V-601 (2.1 parts by mass) and MFG (5.2 parts by mass) is added, and after stirring for 1 hour, V-601 (2.1 parts by mass) is added. Part) and MFG (5.2 parts by mass) were further added. After stirring for 1 hour, a mixture of V-601 (2.1 parts by mass) and MFG (5.2 parts by mass) was further added.
  • an MFG / PGMEA mixed solution of the binder polymer B3 100 g of the MFG / PGMEA mixed solution of the binder polymer B3 was added dropwise to 1000 g of ion-exchanged water at 30 ° C. over 30 minutes for reprecipitation treatment, and the binder polymer B3 precipitated as a solid substance was taken out by filtration and used.
  • the weight average molecular weight of the binder polymer B3 measured by GPC was 17,000 (in terms of polystyrene), and the acid value was 124 mgKOH / g.
  • Table 1 summarizes the main feature points of the above-mentioned binder.
  • A-NOD-N 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate ("A-NOD-N” manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., bifunctional acrylate)
  • A-DCP Tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate ("A-DCP” manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., bifunctional acrylate)
  • BPE-200 Ethoxylated bisphenol A dimethacrylate (“BPE-200” manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., bifunctional acrylate)
  • A-TMPT Trimethylolpropane triacrylate ("A-TMPT” manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., trifunctional acrylate)
  • A-TMMT Pentaerythritol tetraacrylate
  • A-TMMT Pentaerythritol tetraacrylate
  • Omni379 Alkylphenone-based compound (“Omnirad 379” manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.)
  • OXE-02 Oxime ester-based photopolymerization initiator (BASF's "Irgacure OXE02")
  • OXE-03 Oxime ester-based photopolymerization initiator (BASF's "Irgacure OXE03")
  • Omni 907 ⁇ -Aminoalkylphenone-based Photopolymerization Initiator (“Omnirad 907” manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.)
  • HABI 2,2'-bis (2-chlorophenyl) -4,4', 5,5'-tetraphenyl-1,2'-biimidazole (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
  • API-307 1- (biphenyl-4-yl) -2-methyl-2-morpholinopropane-1-one (Omnirad
  • Phenothiazine Made by Tokyo Chemical Industry
  • Phenoxazine Made by Tokyo Chemical Industry
  • p-Methoxyphenol Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.
  • Transfer films were prepared so as to have the configurations shown in Table 2. Specifically, it is as follows.
  • the photosensitive composition (coating liquid 1) was dried on a 16 ⁇ m-thick polyethylene terephthalate film (temporary support, 16KS40 (manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.)) using a slit-shaped nozzle, and the film shown in Table 2 was dried.
  • the film was adjusted to a thickness and applied, and dried with a hot air convection dryer having a temperature gradient of 75 ° C. to 120 ° C. to remove the solvent to form a negative photosensitive composition layer.
  • a polypropylene film having a thickness of 25 ⁇ m (protective film, Trefan 25A-KW37 (manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.)) was pressure-bonded onto the negative photosensitive composition layer to prepare a transfer film of Example 1.
  • a developing process and a cleaning process were carried out using a developing machine YCD-500WA manufactured by Yamagata Machinery Co., Ltd.
  • a shower development process shown nozzle: full cone nozzle, shower pressure: 0.10 MPa, shower
  • the flow rate was 1000 mL / min).
  • the development time was 30 seconds.
  • a cleaning treatment was performed using pure water.
  • the cleaning conditions were shower cleaning treatment using pure water at a temperature of 30 ° C.
  • the film thickness of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer at each exposure amount was measured using a stylus type film thickness meter (DekTak150). Next, the points corresponding to the film thickness and the exposure amount at each exposed portion are plotted on the Cartesian coordinates with the film thickness of the cured film as the vertical axis and the exposure amount as the horizontal axis, and the film thickness does not substantially change.
  • the film thickness at the exposure amount is used as the reference film thickness, and from the Cartesian coordinates, the exposure amount E10 is 10% of the reference film thickness, and the exposure is 90% of the reference film thickness.
  • the quantity E90 was calculated. The values of E10 / E90 were calculated based on the obtained numerical values.
  • the mass increase rate in the developing solution was determined by the QCM method (RDA-Qz3 manufactured by Lithotech Japan Co., Ltd.).
  • the transfer film from which the protective film was peeled off was transferred onto the crystal oscillator for measurement under the conditions of a temperature of 100 ° C. and a speed of 4 m / min.
  • Ultraviolet irradiation was performed through the temporary support of the transferred material using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp with an exposure amount twice that of the above-mentioned E90.
  • the UV-irradiated sample was kept in an environment of 25 ° C. and 60% for 24 hours.
  • the temporary support of the sample was peeled off, the crystal oscillator was attached to the sample holder, and the crystal oscillator was mounted on the QCM development unit.
  • a developer 1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at a temperature of 30 ° C.
  • the mass change was monitored, and the mass increase rate (mass%) of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer was measured 30 seconds after being immersed in the above solution.
  • the UV-irradiated sample was kept in an environment of 25 ° C. and 60% for 24 hours. Then, the temporary support of the sample was peeled off, and development treatment was performed using a 1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution.
  • the development process was carried out by a roll-to-roll process of a developer circulation system, and the development conditions were a temperature of 30 ° C., a time of 30 seconds, and a shower pressure of 0.10 MPa.
  • a rinsing treatment was performed using pure water.
  • the pure water rinsing conditions were a temperature of 30 ° C., a time of 30 seconds, and a shower pressure of 0.10 MPa.
  • a film equivalent to a length of 1000 m was processed.
  • a substrate having a line-and-space pattern formed of copper having a thickness of 200 nm and a width of 10 ⁇ m was prepared on PET (polyethylene terephthalate) having a thickness of 75 ⁇ m and a width of 500 mm.
  • the transfer films of Examples and Comparative Examples were laminated in a direction orthogonal to the line of this substrate.
  • the film width was 500 mm.
  • the laminating conditions were a transparent film substrate temperature of 100 ° C., a rubber roller temperature of 100 ° C., a linear pressure of 100 N / cm, and a transport speed of 4 m / min.
  • Table 2 is shown below.
  • P is a configuration in which the binder polymer has a radically polymerizable group. It represents having a unit, and “N” means that the binder polymer does not have a structural unit having a radically polymerizable group.
  • N means that the binder polymer does not have a structural unit having a radically polymerizable group.
  • P is the radical polymerizable in the binder polymer.
  • the content of the structural unit having a group is 20% by mass or more with respect to all the structural units, and "N” means that the content is less than 20% by mass.
  • “P” indicates that the polymerizable compound has four or more functionalities.
  • “N” means that it does not have a polyfunctional compound having four or more functionalities.
  • the content of the polymerization inhibitor is the content of the photopolymerization initiator.
  • the binder polymer prefferably, it represents 5 to 15% by mass, and "N” means that the content is less than 5% by mass or more than 15% by mass.
  • the "purification treatment of the binder polymer (presence or absence of reprecipitation)" in the "characteristic points of the negative photosensitive composition layer” means whether the binder polymer was purified by reprecipitation after the polymerization. Indicates whether or not. "P” indicates that purification by reprecipitation was performed, and "N” indicates that purification by reprecipitation was not performed.
  • Step of forming the refractive index adjusting layer The coating liquid A shown in Table 3 is applied onto the negative photosensitive composition layer using a slit-shaped nozzle after adjusting the thickness to 70 nm after drying, and has a temperature gradient of 40 ° C to 95 ° C. It was dried with a hot air convection dryer to remove the solvent, and a refractive index adjusting layer was formed.
  • the refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer was 1.68 at a wavelength of 550 nm at 25 ° C.
  • Example 2 except that a step of forming a refractive index adjusting layer on the negative photosensitive composition layer after forming the negative photosensitive composition layer and before crimping the protective film was carried out by the following procedure.
  • the transfer films of Examples 2A to 36A (transfer film having a temporary support, a negative photosensitive composition layer, a refractive index adjusting layer, and a protective film) were prepared by the same method as in ⁇ 36.
  • Step of forming the refractive index adjusting layer The coating liquid A shown in Table 3 is applied onto the negative photosensitive composition layer using a slit-shaped nozzle after adjusting the thickness to 70 nm after drying, and has a temperature gradient of 40 ° C to 95 ° C. It was dried with a hot air convection dryer to remove the solvent, and a refractive index adjusting layer was formed.
  • the refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer was 1.68 at a wavelength of 550 nm at 25 ° C.
  • Compound B is the following polymer.
  • the ratio of the repeating units in the formula was 50: 4: 38: 8 in order from the repeating unit on the left side (based on mass).
  • Step of forming the refractive index adjusting layer The above-mentioned coating liquid A shown in Table 3 is applied onto the negative photosensitive composition layer so that the thickness after drying is 81 nm using a slit-shaped nozzle, and the temperature gradient is 40 ° C to 95 ° C. The solvent was removed by drying with a hot air convection dryer, and a refractive index adjusting layer was formed. The refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer was 1.68 at a wavelength of 550 nm at 25 ° C.
  • Example 2 except that a step of forming a refractive index adjusting layer on the negative photosensitive composition layer after forming the negative photosensitive composition layer and before crimping the protective film was carried out by the following procedure.
  • the transfer films of Examples 2B to 36B (transfer film having a temporary support, a negative photosensitive composition layer, a refractive index adjusting layer, and a protective film) were prepared by the same method as in ⁇ 36.
  • Step of forming the refractive index adjusting layer The above-mentioned coating liquid A shown in Table 3 is applied onto the negative photosensitive composition layer so that the thickness after drying is 81 nm using a slit-shaped nozzle, and the temperature gradient is 40 ° C to 95 ° C. The solvent was removed by drying with a hot air convection dryer, and a refractive index adjusting layer was formed. The refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer was 1.68 at a wavelength of 550 nm at 25 ° C.
  • Step of forming the refractive index adjusting layer The above-mentioned coating liquid A shown in Table 3 is applied onto the negative photosensitive composition layer so that the thickness after drying is 59 nm using a slit-shaped nozzle, and the temperature gradient is 40 ° C to 95 ° C.
  • the solvent was removed by drying with a hot air convection dryer, and a refractive index adjusting layer was formed.
  • the refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer was 1.68 at a wavelength of 550 nm at 25 ° C.
  • Example 2 except that a step of forming a refractive index adjusting layer on the negative photosensitive composition layer after forming the negative photosensitive composition layer and before crimping the protective film was carried out by the following procedure.
  • the transfer films of Examples 2C to 36C (transfer film having a temporary support, a negative photosensitive composition layer, a refractive index adjusting layer, and a protective film) were prepared by the same method as in ⁇ 36.
  • Step of forming the refractive index adjusting layer The above-mentioned coating liquid A shown in Table 3 is applied onto the negative photosensitive composition layer so that the thickness after drying is 59 nm using a slit-shaped nozzle, and the temperature gradient is 40 ° C to 95 ° C.
  • the solvent was removed by drying with a hot air convection dryer, and a refractive index adjusting layer was formed.
  • the refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer was 1.68 at a wavelength of 550 nm at 25 ° C.
  • Examples 1D to 36D Fabrication and evaluation of a liquid crystal display device provided with a touch panel]
  • Preparation of transparent laminate A substrate having a refractive index adjusting layer, an ITO transparent electrode pattern, and copper routing wiring formed on a cycloolefin transparent film was prepared.
  • the transfer films of Examples 1A to 36A, Examples 1B to 36B, and Examples 1C to 36C from which the protective film was peeled off were transferred to the transfer film. Laminated at the position covered by.
  • Lamination was performed using a vacuum laminator manufactured by MCK under the conditions of a cycloolefin transparent film temperature: 40 ° C., a rubber roller temperature of 100 ° C., a linear pressure of 3 N / cm, and a transport speed of 4 m / min.
  • a proximity type exposure machine manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Electronics Engineering Co., Ltd.
  • the surface of the exposure mask quartz exposure mask having a pattern for forming an overcoat
  • Pattern exposure was performed with an exposure amount of 100 mJ / cm 2 (i-line) via a temporary support.
  • a liquid crystal display device provided with a touch panel was manufactured by attaching the manufactured touch panel to a liquid crystal display element manufactured by the method described in paragraphs 097 to 0119 of JP2009-47936A. It was confirmed that the liquid crystal display device equipped with a touch panel has excellent display characteristics and operates without problems.

Abstract

A first problem to be addressed by the present invention is to provide a transfer film that can form a pattern in which a defect caused by re-adhesion failure is suppressed. In addition, a second problem to be addressed by the present invention is to provide a method for producing a laminate and a method for producing a circuit wiring. This transfer film has a temporary support and a composition layer. The composition layer includes a negative photosensitive composition layer. The negative photosensitive composition layer contains a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group, and a photopolymerization initiator, and satisfies requirements 1 and 2.

Description

転写フィルム、積層体の製造方法、回路配線の製造方法Manufacturing method of transfer film, laminate, manufacturing method of circuit wiring
 本発明は、転写フィルム、積層体の製造方法、及び回路配線の製造方法に関する。 The present invention relates to a method for manufacturing a transfer film, a laminate, and a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring.
 タッチセンサーの製造工程の際、エッチングレジスト膜及び各種保護膜(電極保護膜、配線保護膜、及び層間絶縁膜)は、通常、フォトレジストを使用したフォトリソグラフィープロセスによって形成されている。
 フォトリソグラフィープロセスとは、フォトレジストに対してマスクを介して露光した後、現像によって現像液に可溶な部分を除去するプロセスである。例えば、フォトレジストが露光により硬化するフォトレジスト(ネガ型フォトレジスト)である場合、マスク開口部においては硬化反応が進む一方、マスクで遮蔽された未露光部においては硬化反応が抑制される。このため、露光部と未露光部とでは現像液に対する溶解性が異なり、現像処理の際に、現像液に対する溶解性の高い未露光部のみが除去される。
During the manufacturing process of the touch sensor, the etching resist film and various protective films (electrode protective film, wiring protective film, and interlayer insulating film) are usually formed by a photolithography process using a photoresist.
The photolithography process is a process of exposing a photoresist through a mask and then removing a portion soluble in a developer by development. For example, when the photoresist is a photoresist (negative type photoresist) that is cured by exposure, the curing reaction proceeds in the mask opening, while the curing reaction is suppressed in the unexposed portion shielded by the mask. Therefore, the exposed portion and the unexposed portion have different solubility in the developing solution, and only the unexposed portion having high solubility in the developing solution is removed during the developing process.
 昨今、所定のパターンを得るための工程数が少ないことから、転写フィルムを用いて任意の基板上にネガ型感光性組成物層を配置して、このネガ型感光性組成物層に対してマスクを介して露光した後に現像する方法が広く使用されている。 Since the number of steps for obtaining a predetermined pattern is small these days, a negative photosensitive composition layer is arranged on an arbitrary substrate by using a transfer film, and a mask is applied to the negative photosensitive composition layer. A method of developing after exposure through a film is widely used.
 例えば、特許文献1では、仮支持体と、上記仮支持体上に、第1の透明層、第2の透明層、及び第3の透明層とをこの順に有する転写フィルムを開示している。
 特許文献1では、具体的に、仮支持体/バインダーポリマー、重合性モノマー、及び重合開始剤を含むネガ型感光性組成物層(第1の透明層)/金属酸化物粒子を含む樹脂組成物層(第2の透明層)/上記第1の透明層に含まれる低分子量成分(具体的には、重合性モノマー及び重合開始剤等の硬化反応に寄与し得る成分)を含むネガ型感光性組成物層(第3の透明層)を備えた転写フィルムを開示している。
For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a temporary support and a transfer film having a first transparent layer, a second transparent layer, and a third transparent layer on the temporary support in this order.
In Patent Document 1, specifically, a negative photosensitive composition layer (first transparent layer) containing a temporary support / binder polymer, a polymerizable monomer, and a polymerization initiator / a resin composition containing metal oxide particles. Negative photosensitive layer (second transparent layer) / negative-type photosensitive component containing a low molecular weight component (specifically, a component capable of contributing to a curing reaction such as a polymerizable monomer and a polymerization initiator) contained in the first transparent layer. A transfer film provided with a composition layer (third transparent layer) is disclosed.
特開2018-024225公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-0242525
 本発明者は、特許文献1を参照して転写フィルムを作製してそのパターン形成プロセスについて検討したところ、現像工程の際、現像液に溶解しない成分(以下「現像液未溶解物」ともいう。)が処理対象物に付着することに起因して、パターンに欠陥が発生していることを明らかとした。
 更に、本発明者は検討を進めたところ、処理対象物への現像液未溶解物の付着(以下「再付着故障」ともいう。)は、露光部と未露光部の境界域において生じるハーフ露光部の現像液への溶解性の低さが要因となって生じていることも明らかとした。ハーフ露光部とは、本来マスクで遮蔽された領域であるにもかかわらず、光源光の拡散や回折によって生じる光漏れによって硬化反応が生じた領域を意図する。図1を示して具体的に説明すると、基材40上に配置されたネガ型感光性組成物層41を、所定領域に開口部を有するマスク42を介して光(図1中の矢印)を照射することにより、マスク42の開口部が露光部43となり、マスク42で遮蔽された領域が未露光部44となる。ハーフ露光部45は、本来マスク42で遮蔽された領域であるにもかかわらず、光源光の拡散や回折によって生じる光漏れによって硬化反応が生じた領域である。
 すなわち、このハーフ露光部において硬化した成分が、現像液への溶解性が低く、現像液未溶解物となって再付着故障の原因となっていることを明らかとした。
The present inventor prepared a transfer film with reference to Patent Document 1 and examined the pattern forming process. As a result, a component that does not dissolve in a developing solution during the developing step (hereinafter, also referred to as "development undissolved substance"). ) Adhered to the object to be treated, and it was clarified that a defect occurred in the pattern.
Further, as a result of further studies by the present inventor, the adhesion of the undissolved developer to the object to be processed (hereinafter, also referred to as “reattachment failure”) is a half exposure that occurs in the boundary region between the exposed portion and the unexposed portion. It was also clarified that the cause was the low solubility of the part in the developer. The half-exposed portion is intended as a region where a curing reaction occurs due to light leakage caused by diffusion or diffraction of light source light, although the region is originally shielded by a mask. More specifically, FIG. 1 will show that the negative photosensitive composition layer 41 arranged on the substrate 40 is exposed to light (arrows in FIG. 1) through a mask 42 having an opening in a predetermined region. By irradiating, the opening portion of the mask 42 becomes the exposed portion 43, and the region shielded by the mask 42 becomes the unexposed portion 44. The half-exposed unit 45 is a region where a curing reaction occurs due to light leakage caused by diffusion or diffraction of light source light, although it is originally a region shielded by the mask 42.
That is, it was clarified that the component cured in this half-exposed portion has low solubility in the developing solution and becomes an undissolved substance in the developing solution, which causes a reattachment failure.
 そこで、本発明は、再付着故障に起因した欠陥が抑制されたパターンを形成できる転写フィルムを提供することを課題とする。
 また、本発明は、積層体の製造方法及び回路配線の製造方法を提供することを課題とする。
Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a transfer film capable of forming a pattern in which defects caused by reattachment failure are suppressed.
Another object of the present invention is to provide a method for manufacturing a laminated body and a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring.
 本発明者は、鋭意検討した結果、以下の構成により上記課題を解決できることを見出した。 As a result of diligent studies, the present inventor has found that the above problems can be solved by the following configuration.
 〔1〕 仮支持体と、組成物層と、を有する転写フィルムであり、
 上記組成物層は、ネガ型感光性組成物層を含み、
 上記ネガ型感光性組成物層は、バインダーポリマー、エチレン性不飽和基を有する重合性化合物、及び、光重合開始剤を含み、
 下記要件1及び要件2を満たす、転写フィルム。
 要件1:上記転写フィルムの仮支持体側とは反対側の表面をガラス基板に接触させて、上記ガラス基板、上記組成物層、及び上記仮支持体をこの順に有する積層体を形成し、上記積層体に対して、露光量を増加させながら複数の箇所において露光を行い、下記条件Aを満たす現像及び洗浄処理を実施した後の露光部におけるネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜の膜厚を測定し、上記硬化膜の膜厚を縦軸とし露光量を横軸とした直交座標に、各露光箇所での膜厚及び露光量に対応する点をプロットし、膜厚が実質的に変化しなくなる露光量での膜厚を基準膜厚とし、上記直交座標から、上記硬化膜の膜厚が上記基準膜厚に対して10%の膜厚となる露光量E10、上記硬化膜の膜厚が上記基準膜厚に対して90%の膜厚となる露光量E90を算出したとき、下記式(1)の関係を満たす。
 条件A:温度30℃の1.0質量%濃度の炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を使用して30秒間の現像処理を実施し、その後、温度30℃の純水を使用して30秒間の洗浄処理を実施する。上記現像処理は、シャワー方式による現像であり、シャワー圧力は0.10MPaであり、シャワー流量は1000mL/minである。また、上記洗浄処理は、シャワー方式による洗浄であり、シャワー圧力は0.10MPaであり、シャワー流量は1000mL/minである。
 式(1): E10/E90≧0.5
要件2:上記転写フィルムの仮支持体側とは反対側の表面を水晶振動子に接触させて、上記水晶振動子、上記組成物層、及び上記仮支持体をこの順に有する積層体を形成し、上記積層体に対して上記E90の2倍の露光量で紫外線を照射した後、露光後の上記積層体を温度30℃の1.0質量%濃度の炭酸ナトリウム水溶液中に浸漬したとき、水晶振動子マイクロバランス法に基づいて求められる、浸漬開始から30秒後における上記ネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜の質量増加率が、20質量%以下である。
 〔2〕 更に、下記式(1-1)を満たす、〔1〕に記載の転写フィルム。
 式(1-1):E10/E90≧0.8
 式(1-1)中、上記E10及び上記E90は、各々、上記式(1)中の上記E10及び上記E90と同義である。
 〔3〕 上記バインダーポリマーに対する上記重合性化合物の質量含有量比が、0.5以上である、〔1〕又は〔2〕に記載の転写フィルム。
 〔4〕 上記ネガ型感光性組成物層が、4官能以上の重合性化合物を含む、〔1〕~〔3〕のいずれかに記載の転写フィルム。
 〔5〕 上記バインダーポリマーが、ラジカル重合性基を有する、〔1〕~〔4〕のいずれかに記載の転写フィルム。
 〔6〕 上記バインダーポリマーが、上記ラジカル重合性基を有する構成単位を含み、
 上記ラジカル重合性基を有する構成単位の含有量が、上記バインダーポリマー中の全構成単位に対して、20質量%以上である、〔5〕に記載の転写フィルム。
 〔7〕 上記ネガ型感光性組成物層が、更に重合禁止剤を含み、
 上記重合禁止剤の含有量が、上記光重合開始剤の含有量に対して、5~15質量%である、〔1〕~〔6〕のいずれかに記載の転写フィルム。
 〔8〕 上記組成物層が、屈折率調整層を含む、〔1〕~〔7〕のいずれかに記載の転写フィルム。
 〔9〕 タッチパネル用保護膜形成用である、〔1〕~〔8〕のいずれかに記載の転写フィルム。
 〔10〕 タッチパネル電極パターン形成エッチングレジスト用である、〔1〕~〔8〕のいずれかに記載の転写フィルム。
 〔11〕 〔1〕~〔8〕のいずれかに記載の転写フィルムの上記仮支持体とは反対側の表面を、導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせ、上記基板、上記導電層、上記組成物層、及び、上記仮支持体をこの順に有する組成物層付き基板を得る貼合工程と、
 上記組成物層をパターン露光する露光工程と、
 露光された上記組成物層を現像して、上記導電層を保護する保護膜パターンを形成する現像工程と、
 更に、上記貼合工程と上記露光工程との間、又は、上記露光工程と上記現像工程との間に、上記組成物層付き基板から上記仮支持体を剥離する剥離工程と、を有する、積層体の製造方法。
 〔12〕 上記現像工程が、現像液を循環させることによって、現像液を繰り返して使用する工程である、〔11〕に記載の積層体の製造方法。
 〔13〕 上記貼合工程が、上記転写フィルムと上記導電層を有する基板とをロールトゥロールで貼り合せる工程であり、上記貼合工程により形成される長尺状の積層体に対して、少なくとも上記露光工程及び上記現像工程を実施する、〔11〕又は〔12〕に記載の積層体の製造方法。
 〔14〕 上記導電層を有する基板が、タッチパネル用電極及びタッチパネル用配線の少なくとも一方を有する基板である、〔11〕~〔13〕のいずれかに記載の積層体の製造方法。
 〔15〕 〔1〕~〔8〕のいずれかに記載の転写フィルムの上記仮支持体とは反対側の表面を、導電層を有する基板に接触させ、上記基板、上記導電層、上記組成物層、及び、上記仮支持体をこの順に有する組成物層付き基板を得る貼合工程と、
 上記組成物層をパターン露光する露光工程と、
 露光された上記組成物層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する現像工程と、
 上記樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における上記導電層をエッチング処理するエッチング工程と、
 更に、貼合工程と露光工程との間、又は、露光工程と現像工程との間に、上記組成物層付き基板から仮支持体を剥離する剥離工程と、を含む、回路配線の製造方法。
[1] A transfer film having a temporary support and a composition layer.
The composition layer includes a negative photosensitive composition layer, and includes a negative photosensitive composition layer.
The negative photosensitive composition layer contains a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group, and a photopolymerization initiator.
A transfer film that meets the following requirements 1 and 2.
Requirement 1: The surface of the transfer film opposite to the temporary support side is brought into contact with the glass substrate to form a laminate having the glass substrate, the composition layer, and the temporary support in this order, and the laminate is formed. The thickness of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer in the exposed portion after the body is exposed to a plurality of locations while increasing the exposure amount and the development and cleaning treatment satisfying the following condition A is performed. The measurement was performed, and the points corresponding to the film thickness and the exposure amount at each exposure point were plotted on the orthogonal coordinates with the film thickness of the cured film as the vertical axis and the exposure amount as the horizontal axis, and the film thickness changed substantially. The film thickness at the exposure amount that disappears is used as the reference film thickness, and from the orthogonal coordinates, the exposure amount E10 at which the film thickness of the cured film is 10% of the reference film thickness, and the film thickness of the cured film are When the exposure amount E90, which is 90% of the reference film thickness, is calculated, the relationship of the following formula (1) is satisfied.
Condition A: A development treatment is carried out for 30 seconds using a 1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution having a temperature of 30 ° C., and then a cleaning treatment is carried out for 30 seconds using pure water having a temperature of 30 ° C. .. The development process is a shower method, the shower pressure is 0.10 MPa, and the shower flow rate is 1000 mL / min. The washing process is a shower method, the shower pressure is 0.10 MPa, and the shower flow rate is 1000 mL / min.
Equation (1): E10 / E90 ≧ 0.5
Requirement 2: The surface of the transfer film opposite to the temporary support side is brought into contact with the quartz crystal to form a laminate having the quartz crystal, the composition layer, and the temporary support in this order. After irradiating the laminate with ultraviolet rays at twice the exposure amount of E90, when the exposed laminate is immersed in a 1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution having a temperature of 30 ° C., crystal vibration occurs. The mass increase rate of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer 30 seconds after the start of immersion, which is determined based on the child microbalance method, is 20% by mass or less.
[2] Further, the transfer film according to [1], which satisfies the following formula (1-1).
Equation (1-1): E10 / E90 ≧ 0.8
In the formula (1-1), the E10 and the E90 are synonymous with the E10 and the E90 in the formula (1), respectively.
[3] The transfer film according to [1] or [2], wherein the mass content ratio of the polymerizable compound to the binder polymer is 0.5 or more.
[4] The transfer film according to any one of [1] to [3], wherein the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a tetrafunctional or higher polymerizable compound.
[5] The transfer film according to any one of [1] to [4], wherein the binder polymer has a radically polymerizable group.
[6] The binder polymer contains a structural unit having a radically polymerizable group.
The transfer film according to [5], wherein the content of the structural unit having a radically polymerizable group is 20% by mass or more with respect to all the structural units in the binder polymer.
[7] The negative photosensitive composition layer further contains a polymerization inhibitor and contains a polymerization inhibitor.
The transfer film according to any one of [1] to [6], wherein the content of the polymerization inhibitor is 5 to 15% by mass with respect to the content of the photopolymerization initiator.
[8] The transfer film according to any one of [1] to [7], wherein the composition layer includes a refractive index adjusting layer.
[9] The transfer film according to any one of [1] to [8], which is used for forming a protective film for a touch panel.
[10] The transfer film according to any one of [1] to [8], which is used for a touch panel electrode pattern forming etching resist.
[11] The surface of the transfer film according to any one of [1] to [8] opposite to the temporary support is brought into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer and bonded to the substrate, the conductive layer, and the like. A bonding step of obtaining a substrate with a composition layer having the composition layer and the temporary support in this order, and
An exposure process for pattern exposure of the composition layer and
A developing step of developing the exposed composition layer to form a protective film pattern that protects the conductive layer.
Further, laminating including a peeling step of peeling the temporary support from the substrate with the composition layer between the bonding step and the exposure step, or between the exposure step and the developing step. How to make a body.
[12] The method for producing a laminate according to [11], wherein the developing step is a step of repeatedly using the developing solution by circulating the developing solution.
[13] The bonding step is a step of bonding the transfer film and the substrate having the conductive layer by roll-to-roll, and at least the long laminated body formed by the bonding step is bonded. The method for producing a laminate according to [11] or [12], wherein the exposure step and the development step are carried out.
[14] The method for manufacturing a laminate according to any one of [11] to [13], wherein the substrate having the conductive layer is a substrate having at least one of a touch panel electrode and a touch panel wiring.
[15] The surface of the transfer film according to any one of [1] to [8] opposite to the temporary support is brought into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer, and the substrate, the conductive layer, and the composition are brought into contact with each other. A bonding step of obtaining a substrate with a layer and a composition layer having the temporary support in this order, and
An exposure process for pattern exposure of the composition layer and
A developing step of developing the exposed composition layer to form a resin pattern,
An etching process for etching the conductive layer in a region where the resin pattern is not arranged, and an etching process.
Further, a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring, comprising a peeling step of peeling the temporary support from the substrate with the composition layer between the bonding step and the exposure step, or between the exposure step and the developing step.
 本発明によれば、再付着故障に起因した欠陥が抑制されたパターンを形成できる転写フィルムを提供できる。
 また、本発明は、積層体の製造方法及び回路配線の製造方法を提供できる。
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a transfer film capable of forming a pattern in which defects caused by reattachment failure are suppressed.
Further, the present invention can provide a method for manufacturing a laminated body and a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring.
ハーフ露光部を説明するための模式図である。It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the half-exposure part. 本発明の転写フィルムの感度曲線(横軸:露光量、縦軸:ネガ型感光性組成物層の膜厚)を説明するための模式図である。It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the sensitivity curve (horizontal axis: exposure amount, vertical axis: film thickness of a negative type photosensitive composition layer) of the transfer film of this invention. 比較例の転写フィルムの感度曲線(横軸:露光量、縦軸:ネガ型感光性組成物層の膜厚)を説明するための模式図である。It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the sensitivity curve (horizontal axis: exposure amount, vertical axis: film thickness of a negative type photosensitive composition layer) of the transfer film of the comparative example. 感度曲線の作成に使用されるサンプルの断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the sample used for making a sensitivity curve. 図3のサンプルに露光を行う図である。It is a figure which exposes the sample of FIG. 図4の露光されたサンプルを現像処理した際の図である。FIG. 4 is a diagram when the exposed sample of FIG. 4 is developed. 感度曲線を説明するための模式図である。It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating a sensitivity curve. 第1実施形態の転写フィルムの構成の一例を示す概略図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the structure of the transfer film of 1st Embodiment. 第2実施形態の転写フィルムの構成の一例を示す概略図である。It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the structure of the transfer film of 2nd Embodiment.
 以下、本発明について詳細に説明する。
 本明細書において、「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
 本明細書において、段階的に記載されている数値範囲において、ある数値範囲で記載された上限値又は下限値は、他の段階的な記載の数値範囲の上限値又は下限値に置き換えてもよい。また、本明細書に記載されている数値範囲において、ある数値範囲で記載された上限値又は下限値は、実施例に示されている値に置き換えてもよい。
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail.
In the present specification, the numerical range represented by using "-" means a range including the numerical values before and after "-" as the lower limit value and the upper limit value.
In the present specification, in the numerical range described in stages, the upper limit value or the lower limit value described in one numerical range may be replaced with the upper limit value or the lower limit value in another numerical range described in stages. .. Further, in the numerical range described in the present specification, the upper limit value or the lower limit value described in a certain numerical range may be replaced with the value shown in the examples.
 本明細書において、「工程」の用語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であっても、その工程の所期の目的が達成されれば本用語に含まれる。 In the present specification, the term "process" is included in this term not only as an independent process but also as long as the intended purpose of the process is achieved even if it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. ..
 本明細書において、「透明」とは、波長400~700nmの可視光の平均透過率が、80%以上であることを意味し、90%以上であることが好ましい。
 本明細書において、可視光の平均透過率は、分光光度計を用いて測定される値であり、例えば、日立製作所株式会社製の分光光度計U-3310を用いて測定できる。
As used herein, "transparent" means that the average transmittance of visible light having a wavelength of 400 to 700 nm is 80% or more, and is preferably 90% or more.
In the present specification, the average transmittance of visible light is a value measured by using a spectrophotometer, and can be measured by, for example, a spectrophotometer U-3310 manufactured by Hitachi, Ltd.
 本明細書において、特段の断りのない限り、重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、カラムとして、TSKgel GMHxL、TSKgel G4000HxL、若しくは、TSKgel G2000HxL(いずれも東ソー株式会社製の商品名)、溶離液としてTHF(テトラヒドロフラン)、検出器として示差屈折計、及び、標準物質としてポリスチレンを使用し、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)分析装置により測定した標準物質のポリスチレンを用いて換算した値である。
 本明細書において、特段の断りがない限り、分子量分布がある化合物の分子量は、重量平均分子量(Mw)である。
 本明細書において、特段の断りがない限り、ポリマーの構成単位の比は質量比である。
 本明細書において、特段の断りがない限り、金属元素の含有量は、誘導結合プラズマ(ICP:Inductively Coupled Plasma)分光分析装置を用いて測定した値である。
 本明細書において、特段の断りがない限り、屈折率は、波長550nmでエリプソメーターを用いて測定した値である。
 本明細書において、特段の断りがない限り、色相は、色差計(CR-221、ミノルタ株式会社製)を用いて測定した値である。
In the present specification, unless otherwise specified, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) are TSKgel GMHxL, TSKgel G4000HxL, or TSKgel G2000HxL (all trade names manufactured by Toso Co., Ltd.) as columns. ), THF (tetrahydrofuran) as the eluent, polystyrene as the standard material, and polystyrene as the standard material measured by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) analyzer. be.
In the present specification, unless otherwise specified, the molecular weight of a compound having a molecular weight distribution is the weight average molecular weight (Mw).
In the present specification, unless otherwise specified, the ratio of the constituent units of the polymer is the mass ratio.
In the present specification, unless otherwise specified, the content of the metal element is a value measured by using an inductively coupled plasma (ICP) spectroscopic analyzer.
In the present specification, unless otherwise specified, the refractive index is a value measured using an ellipsometer at a wavelength of 550 nm.
In the present specification, unless otherwise specified, the hue is a value measured using a color difference meter (CR-221, manufactured by Minolta Co., Ltd.).
 本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリル」は、アクリル及びメタクリルの両方を包含する概念であり、「(メタ)アクリロキシ基」は、アクリロキシ基及びメタアクリロキシ基の両方を包含する概念である。 In the present specification, "(meth) acrylic" is a concept that includes both acrylic and methacrylic, and "(meth) acryloxy group" is a concept that includes both an acryloxy group and a metaacryloxy group.
 なお、本明細書において、「アルカリ可溶性」とは、22℃において炭酸ナトリウムの1質量%水溶液100gへの溶解度が0.1g以上であることを意味する。 In the present specification, "alkali-soluble" means that the solubility of sodium carbonate in 100 g of a 1% by mass aqueous solution at 22 ° C. is 0.1 g or more.
 本明細書において「水溶性」とは、液温が22℃であるpH7.0の水100gへの溶解度が0.1g以上であることを意味する。したがって、例えば、水溶性樹脂とは、上述の溶解度条件を満たす樹脂を意図する。 As used herein, the term "water-soluble" means that the solubility in 100 g of water having a liquid temperature of 22 ° C. and a pH of 7.0 is 0.1 g or more. Therefore, for example, the water-soluble resin is intended to be a resin satisfying the above-mentioned solubility conditions.
 本明細書において、組成物の「固形分」とは、組成物を用いて形成される組成物層を形成する成分を意味し、組成物が溶剤(有機溶剤、水等)を含む場合、溶剤を除いたすべての成分を意味する。また、組成物層を形成する成分であれば、液体状の成分も固形分とみなす。 As used herein, the "solid content" of a composition means a component forming a composition layer formed by using the composition, and when the composition contains a solvent (organic solvent, water, etc.), the solvent is used. Means all ingredients except. Further, if the component forms a composition layer, the liquid component is also regarded as a solid content.
[転写フィルム]
 本発明の転写フィルムは、
 仮支持体と、組成物層と、を有する転写フィルムであり、
 上記組成物層は、ネガ型感光性組成物層を含み、
 上記ネガ型感光性組成物層は、バインダーポリマー、エチレン性不飽和基を有する重合性化合物、及び、光重合開始剤を含み、
 後述する要件1及び要件2を満たす。
 本発明の転写フィルムは、上記構成により、再付着故障に起因した欠陥が抑制されたパターンを形成できる。
[Transfer film]
The transfer film of the present invention is
A transfer film having a temporary support and a composition layer.
The composition layer includes a negative photosensitive composition layer, and includes a negative photosensitive composition layer.
The negative photosensitive composition layer contains a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group, and a photopolymerization initiator.
Satisfy Requirement 1 and Requirement 2 described later.
With the above configuration, the transfer film of the present invention can form a pattern in which defects caused by reattachment failure are suppressed.
 以下において、従来技術の転写フィルムと比較しながら本発明の転写フィルムの推定される作用機序について説明する。
 なお、以下の例では、組成物層がネガ型感光性組成物層のみからなる(ネガ型感光性組成物層のみの単層構成)である形態を一例に挙げて説明する。
 仮支持体及びネガ型感光性組成物層を備えた転写フィルムを基板に転写して形成される積層体(基板/ネガ型感光性組成物層/仮支持体からなる積層体)に対して、露光量を増加させながら複数の箇所において露光を行い、所定条件にて現像及び洗浄処理を実施した後の露光部におけるネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜の膜厚を測定し、上記硬化膜の膜厚を縦軸とし露光量を横軸とした直交座標に、各露光箇所での膜厚及び露光量に対応する点をプロットし(以下、上記硬化膜の膜厚を縦軸とし露光量を横軸とした直交座標に、各露光箇所での膜厚及び露光量に対応する点をプロットして得られる曲線を「感度曲線」ともいう。)、膜厚が実質的に変化しなくなる露光量での膜厚を基準膜厚とし、上記直交座標から、上記基準膜厚に対して10%の膜厚となる露光量E10、上記基準膜厚に対して90%の膜厚となる露光量E90を算出したとき、本発明の転写フィルムは、図2Aに示すように、E10とE90の差が小さい点が特徴である。すなわち、露光処理の際に、所定の露光量に達するまでは硬化が抑制されており、所定の露光量に達すると連鎖的な硬化反応が生じて急峻な傾きの感度曲線を示す。本発明の転写フィルムは、この結果として、露光処理の際に、マスクによる遮蔽領域において光源光の拡散や回折によって生じる光漏れが生じても、所定の露光量に達していない限りにおいては硬化反応の進行が抑制され、現像未溶解物が形成されにくい。特に、発明者らは今般の検討により、E10/E90≧1.5である場合、顕著に再付着故障を抑制できることを明らかとしている。
 一方で、従来技術の転写フィルムでは、図2Bに示すように、E10とE90の差が大きく、緩やかな傾きの感度曲線を示す。このような感度曲線の転写フィルムでは、露光処理の際に、マスクによる遮蔽領域において光源光の拡散や回折によって生じる光漏れでも硬化反応が生じやすく、現像未溶解物が形成されやすい。
Hereinafter, the presumed mechanism of action of the transfer film of the present invention will be described in comparison with the transfer film of the prior art.
In the following example, a mode in which the composition layer is composed of only the negative photosensitive composition layer (single layer configuration of only the negative photosensitive composition layer) will be described as an example.
For a laminate formed by transferring a transfer film provided with a temporary support and a negative photosensitive composition layer to a substrate (a laminate composed of a substrate / a negative photosensitive composition layer / a temporary support). The thickness of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer in the exposed portion after exposure was performed at a plurality of locations while increasing the exposure amount and development and cleaning treatment were performed under predetermined conditions, and the cured film was measured. The points corresponding to the film thickness and the exposure amount at each exposed point are plotted on the orthogonal coordinates with the film thickness as the vertical axis and the exposure amount as the horizontal axis (hereinafter, the exposure amount with the film thickness of the cured film as the vertical axis). The curve obtained by plotting the points corresponding to the film thickness and the amount of exposure at each exposure point on the orthogonal coordinates with the horizontal axis as the horizontal axis is also called a "sensitivity curve"), and the exposure that the film thickness does not change substantially The film thickness in the amount is used as the reference film thickness, and from the orthogonal coordinates, the exposure amount E10 is 10% of the reference film thickness, and the exposure amount is 90% of the reference film thickness. When E90 is calculated, the transfer film of the present invention is characterized in that the difference between E10 and E90 is small, as shown in FIG. 2A. That is, during the exposure process, curing is suppressed until a predetermined exposure amount is reached, and when the predetermined exposure amount is reached, a chain curing reaction occurs and a sensitivity curve with a steep slope is shown. As a result, the transfer film of the present invention undergoes a curing reaction even if light leakage occurs due to diffusion or diffraction of light source light in a shielded region by a mask during exposure processing, as long as the exposure amount does not reach a predetermined level. Progression is suppressed, and undeveloped undissolved material is less likely to be formed. In particular, the inventors have clarified by this study that when E10 / E90 ≧ 1.5, the reattachment failure can be remarkably suppressed.
On the other hand, in the transfer film of the prior art, as shown in FIG. 2B, the difference between E10 and E90 is large, and a sensitivity curve with a gentle inclination is shown. In a transfer film having such a sensitivity curve, a curing reaction is likely to occur even with light leakage caused by diffusion or diffraction of light source light in a shielded region by a mask during an exposure process, and a developed undissolved substance is likely to be formed.
 また、本発明者は今般の検討において、露光されたネガ型感光性組成物層(硬化膜)の現像液による膨潤率(質量増加率)を所定値以下に抑制することも、再付着故障を抑える要因の一つであることも知見している。膨潤率(質量増加率)が大きすぎると、硬化が不十分なハーフ露光部は、現像液で膨潤して変形して脱離を生じやすく、これが再付着故障の原因となり得る。また、硬化膜は膨潤すると弾性率が低下するため、膨潤した硬化膜の表面に現像液未溶解物が付着しやすくなり、再付着故障が発生し易くなる。
 本発明者は今般の検討において、上記の質量増加率が20質量%以下である場合、顕著に再付着故障を抑制できることを明らかとしている。
Further, in this study, the present inventor also suppresses the swelling rate (mass increase rate) of the exposed negative photosensitive composition layer (cured film) by the developer to a predetermined value or less, which also causes a reattachment failure. We also know that it is one of the factors that suppress it. If the swelling rate (mass increase rate) is too large, the half-exposed portion, which is insufficiently cured, swells with the developing solution and is easily deformed to cause desorption, which may cause a reattachment failure. Further, when the cured film is swollen, the elastic modulus is lowered, so that the undissolved developer liquid is likely to adhere to the surface of the swollen cured film, and a reattachment failure is likely to occur.
In this study, the present inventor has clarified that when the above-mentioned mass increase rate is 20% by mass or less, the reattachment failure can be remarkably suppressed.
 また、本発明の転写フィルムは、現像液を循環させて、現像液を繰り返して使用する現像工程に適している。
 現像液を繰り返して使用した場合、通常、現像液疲労によって現像液の溶解性が低下し、現像液未溶解物による再付着故障が発生しやすくなる。これに対して、本発明の転写フィルムは、上述のとおりハーフ露光部を起因とする現像液未溶解物の発生が抑制されているため、現像液を繰り返して使用しても、現像液中に現像液未溶解物が発生しにくい。
Further, the transfer film of the present invention is suitable for a developing process in which a developing solution is circulated and the developing solution is repeatedly used.
When the developer is used repeatedly, the solubility of the developer is usually lowered due to the developer fatigue, and reattachment failure due to the undissolved developer is likely to occur. On the other hand, in the transfer film of the present invention, as described above, the generation of undissolved developer in the developing solution due to the half-exposed portion is suppressed, so that even if the developing solution is used repeatedly, it is contained in the developing solution. Undissolved developer is less likely to occur.
 また、本発明の転写フィルムは、ロールトゥールプロセスでの積層体の製造方法に適している。ロールトゥロールプロセスでは、搬送ローラーがワークに接触する面積が広い。このため、現像処理後のワークに現像液未溶解物が付着していると、この現像液未溶解物がワークに押し付けられることに起因して、再付着故障が発生しやすい。
 これに対して、本発明の転写フィルムは、上述のとおりハーフ露光部を起因とする現像液未溶解物の発生が抑制されているため、現像処理後のワークへの現像液未溶解物の付着が生じにくい。
Further, the transfer film of the present invention is suitable for a method for producing a laminate in a roll tool process. In the roll-to-roll process, the area in which the transport roller contacts the work is large. Therefore, if the undissolved developer solution adheres to the work after the development process, the undissolved developer solution is pressed against the work, and a reattachment failure is likely to occur.
On the other hand, in the transfer film of the present invention, as described above, the generation of undissolved developer due to the half-exposed portion is suppressed, so that the undissolved developer adheres to the work after the development process. Is unlikely to occur.
 以下において、本発明の転写フィルムにより形成されるパターンの再付着故障がより優れることを「本発明の効果がより優れる」ということもある。 In the following, the fact that the pattern reattachment failure formed by the transfer film of the present invention is more excellent may be referred to as "the effect of the present invention is more excellent".
 以下において、本発明の転写フィルムについて説明する。
 本発明の転写フィルムは、仮支持体と、仮支持体上に配置された組成物層と、を有し、上記組成物層は、ネガ型感光性組成物層を含む。
 上記組成物層は、ネガ型感光性組成物層を含めば特に制限されない。
 また、上記組成物層は、単層構成であってもよいし、2層以上の構成であってもよい。上記組成物層がネガ型感光性組成物層以外の他の組成物層を含む場合、他の組成物層としては、屈折率調整層、熱可塑性樹脂層、及び中間層等が挙げられる。
 また、転写フィルムは、組成物層上に保護フィルム(以下「カバーフィルム」ということもある。)を有する構成であってもよい。なお、組成物層に、保護フィルムは含まれない。
Hereinafter, the transfer film of the present invention will be described.
The transfer film of the present invention has a temporary support and a composition layer arranged on the temporary support, and the composition layer includes a negative photosensitive composition layer.
The composition layer is not particularly limited as long as it includes a negative photosensitive composition layer.
Further, the composition layer may have a single layer structure or may have a structure of two or more layers. When the composition layer contains a composition layer other than the negative photosensitive composition layer, examples of the other composition layer include a refractive index adjusting layer, a thermoplastic resin layer, and an intermediate layer.
Further, the transfer film may have a structure in which a protective film (hereinafter, also referred to as “cover film”) is provided on the composition layer. The composition layer does not contain a protective film.
 本発明の転写フィルムは、下記要件1及び要件2を満たす。
 要件1:上記転写フィルムの仮支持体側とは反対側の表面をガラス基板に接触させて、上記ガラス基板、上記組成物層、及び上記仮支持体をこの順に有する積層体を形成し、上記積層体に対して、露光量を増加させながら複数の箇所において露光を行い、下記条件Aを満たす現像及び洗浄処理を実施した後の露光部におけるネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜の膜厚を測定し、上記硬化膜の膜厚を縦軸とし露光量を横軸とした直交座標に、各露光箇所での膜厚及び露光量に対応する点をプロットし、膜厚が実質的に変化しなくなる露光量での膜厚を基準膜厚とし、上記直交座標から、上記基準膜厚に対して10%の膜厚となる露光量E10、上記基準膜厚に対して90%の膜厚となる露光量E90を算出したとき、下記式(1)の関係を満たす。膜厚が実質的に変化しなくなるとは、例えば、下記条件Aの処理前後での膜厚変化が3.0%以下であることを挙げることができる。
 条件A:温度30℃の1.0質量%濃度の炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を使用して30秒間の現像処理を実施し、その後、温度30℃の純水を使用して30秒間の洗浄処理を実施する。上記現像処理は、シャワー方式による現像であり、シャワー圧力は0.10MPaであり、シャワー流量は1000mL/minである。また、上記洗浄処理は、シャワー方式による洗浄であり、シャワー圧力は0.10MPaであり、シャワー流量は1000mL/minである。
 式(1): E10/E90≧0.5
The transfer film of the present invention satisfies the following requirements 1 and 2.
Requirement 1: The surface of the transfer film opposite to the temporary support side is brought into contact with the glass substrate to form a laminate having the glass substrate, the composition layer, and the temporary support in this order, and the laminate is formed. The thickness of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer in the exposed portion after the body is exposed to a plurality of locations while increasing the exposure amount and the development and cleaning treatment satisfying the following condition A is performed. The measurement was performed, and the points corresponding to the film thickness and the exposure amount at each exposure point were plotted on the orthogonal coordinates with the film thickness of the cured film as the vertical axis and the exposure amount as the horizontal axis, and the film thickness changed substantially. The reference film thickness is the film thickness at the exposure amount that disappears, and from the orthogonal coordinates, the exposure amount E10 is 10% of the reference film thickness, and the film thickness is 90% of the reference film thickness. When the exposure amount E90 is calculated, the relationship of the following formula (1) is satisfied. The fact that the film thickness does not substantially change can be mentioned, for example, that the change in film thickness before and after the treatment under the following condition A is 3.0% or less.
Condition A: A development treatment is carried out for 30 seconds using a 1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution having a temperature of 30 ° C., and then a cleaning treatment is carried out for 30 seconds using pure water having a temperature of 30 ° C. .. The development process is a shower method, the shower pressure is 0.10 MPa, and the shower flow rate is 1000 mL / min. The washing process is a shower method, the shower pressure is 0.10 MPa, and the shower flow rate is 1000 mL / min.
Equation (1): E10 / E90 ≧ 0.5
 なお、ネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜等の膜厚の測定方法としては、触針式膜厚計(例えば、ブルッカー社製の「DekTak150」等)を使用して測定できる。
 また、転写フィルムが保護フィルムを有する場合、保護フィルムを剥離してから、保護フィルム剥離後の転写フィルムをガラス基板に転写する。
 また、転写フィルムが、仮支持体とネガ型感光性組成物層との間に他の組成物層(例えば、熱可塑性樹脂層及び中間層等)を有する場合、ガラス基板上に転写フィルムを転写して得られる積層体に対して所定の紫外線照射を実施した後に、積層体から上記他の組成物層を除去する工程を有する。例えば、アルカリ現像処理、溶剤洗浄、及びテープ剥離等の処理により、積層体から上記他の組成物層を除去できる。
 また、転写フィルムが、ネガ型感光性組成物層の仮支持体側とは反対側に他の組成物層(例えば、屈折率調整層等)を有する場合、ネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜と上記他の組成物層との合計の膜厚を縦軸とし露光量を横軸とした直交座標に、各露光箇所での膜厚及び露光量に対応する点をプロットして感度曲線を作製し、この感度曲線から他の組成物層の膜厚の分を差し引く補正を行うことによって、ネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜の残膜率を測定できる。
 また、積層体に対して、紫外線を照射した後であって、上述の条件Aを満たす現像及び洗浄処理を実施する前に、仮支持体を剥離するのが好ましい。
 また、紫外線照射された積層体は、上述の条件Aを満たす現像及び洗浄処理を実施される前に、25℃60%の環境で24時間保持されるのが好ましい。
As a method for measuring the film thickness of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer, a stylus type film thickness meter (for example, "DekTak150" manufactured by Bruker Co., Ltd.) can be used for the measurement.
When the transfer film has a protective film, the protective film is peeled off, and then the transfer film after the protective film is peeled off is transferred to the glass substrate.
Further, when the transfer film has another composition layer (for example, a thermoplastic resin layer and an intermediate layer) between the temporary support and the negative photosensitive composition layer, the transfer film is transferred onto the glass substrate. This comprises a step of removing the other composition layer from the laminated body after subjecting the laminated body to a predetermined ultraviolet irradiation. For example, the other composition layer can be removed from the laminate by treatments such as alkaline development treatment, solvent cleaning, and tape peeling.
When the transfer film has another composition layer (for example, a refractive index adjusting layer) on the side opposite to the temporary support side of the negative photosensitive composition layer, the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer. A sensitivity curve is created by plotting the points corresponding to the film thickness and the exposure amount at each exposure point on the orthogonal coordinates with the total film thickness of the above and the other composition layers as the vertical axis and the exposure amount as the horizontal axis. However, by making a correction by subtracting the thickness of the other composition layer from this sensitivity curve, the residual film ratio of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer can be measured.
Further, it is preferable to peel off the temporary support after the laminated body is irradiated with ultraviolet rays and before the development and cleaning treatment satisfying the above-mentioned condition A is performed.
Further, it is preferable that the laminated body irradiated with ultraviolet rays is kept in an environment of 25 ° C. and 60% for 24 hours before the development and cleaning treatment satisfying the above-mentioned condition A is carried out.
 以下、要件1における感度曲線の求め方について、図面を用いて説明する。
 なお、以下においては、仮支持体、ネガ型感光性組成物層、及び保護フィルムからなる構成の転写フィルムの感度曲線の求め方を一例として説明する。
 まず、転写フィルムを仮支持体側とは反対側の表面をガラス基板に接触させて、転写フィルムをガラス基板に転写(ラミネート)して積層体を作製する。なお、転写フィルムが保護フィルムを有する場合、保護フィルムを剥離した転写フィルムをガラス基板に転写する。このようにして得られる積層体(サンプル)は、図3に示すように、ガラス基板30の上に厚みTのネガ型感光性組成物層32と仮支持体34とを有する。
Hereinafter, how to obtain the sensitivity curve in Requirement 1 will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following, a method of obtaining a sensitivity curve of a transfer film composed of a temporary support, a negative photosensitive composition layer, and a protective film will be described as an example.
First, the surface of the transfer film opposite to the temporary support side is brought into contact with the glass substrate, and the transfer film is transferred (laminated) to the glass substrate to prepare a laminated body. When the transfer film has a protective film, the transfer film from which the protective film has been peeled off is transferred to the glass substrate. As shown in FIG. 3, the laminate (sample) thus obtained has a negative photosensitive composition layer 32 having a thickness T and a temporary support 34 on a glass substrate 30.
 転写は市販の装置(例えば、真空ラミネーター及びオートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネーター)を使用して実施できる。
 転写フィルムをガラス基板上に転写する際の温度としては特に制限されないが、例えば、80~150℃であるのが好ましく、90~120℃であるのがより好ましい。
 また、転写フィルムをガラス基板に転写する際には、ロールトゥロールにて実施することが好ましく、その際の搬送速度としては、例えば、0.5~5m/分であるのが好ましく、1.5~3m/分であるのがより好ましい。
 また、ガラス基板としては特に制限されないが、例えば、ソーダガラス、無アルカリガラス、及び石英ガラス等を使用できる。
The transfer can be carried out using a commercially available device (for example, a known laminator such as a vacuum laminator and an auto-cut laminator).
The temperature at which the transfer film is transferred onto the glass substrate is not particularly limited, but is preferably 80 to 150 ° C, more preferably 90 to 120 ° C, for example.
Further, when the transfer film is transferred to the glass substrate, it is preferably carried out by roll-to-roll, and the transport speed at that time is preferably, for example, 0.5 to 5 m / min. More preferably, it is 5 to 3 m / min.
Further, the glass substrate is not particularly limited, but for example, soda glass, non-alkali glass, quartz glass and the like can be used.
 次に、所定の光源を用い、仮支持体34越しに、ネガ型感光性組成物層に対して、露光量を増やしながら、紫外線照射を行う。具体的には、露光量を10mJ/cmから5mJ/cm毎増加させながら、ネガ型感光性組成物層の異なる位置に露光を20箇所以上行う。つまり、ネガ型感光性組成物層表面の異なる20箇所以上の位置に対して、異なる露光量の露光をそれぞれ行う。より具体的には、図4に示すように、白抜き矢印で表されるように、ネガ型感光性組成物層の異なる箇所に露光量を変えた露光を行う。なお、図4では、ネガ型感光性組成物層32の3か所の異なる位置に、露光を行っている。図4中の一番左側の露光では露光量ZmJ/cmでの露光が行われ、真ん中の露光では露光量(Z+5)mJ/cmでの露光が行われ、一番右側の露光では露光量(Z+5×2)mJ/cmでの露光が行われる。このように、露光箇所毎に、露光量を5mJ/cm毎増加させながら、露光を行う。
 なお、上記露光箇所の面積は特に制限されないが、例えば、縦10mm×横20mm程度が挙げられる。
 また、露光箇所としては20箇所以上実施される。露光箇所の数の上限は特に制限されないが、膜厚が一旦最大値となって略一定となるまで露光を実施することが好ましく、50箇所以下がより好ましい。
 露光装置としては、紫外線を照射可能であれば特に制限されないが、例えば、超高圧水銀灯ランプを使用するのが好ましい。
Next, using a predetermined light source, ultraviolet irradiation is performed on the negative photosensitive composition layer through the temporary support 34 while increasing the exposure amount. Specifically, while increasing the exposure amount by 10 mJ / cm 2 to 5 mJ / cm 2 , exposure is performed at 20 or more locations on different positions of the negative photosensitive composition layer. That is, different exposure amounts are exposed to 20 or more different positions on the surface of the negative photosensitive composition layer. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, as shown by the white arrows, different parts of the negative photosensitive composition layer are exposed to different exposure amounts. In FIG. 4, exposure is performed at three different positions of the negative photosensitive composition layer 32. The leftmost exposure in FIG. 4 is exposed at an exposure amount of ZmJ / cm 2 , the middle exposure is exposed at an exposure amount (Z + 5) mJ / cm 2 , and the rightmost exposure is exposed. Exposure is performed in an amount (Z + 5 × 2) mJ / cm 2 . In this way, exposure is performed while increasing the exposure amount by 5 mJ / cm 2 for each exposed portion.
The area of the exposed portion is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a length of about 10 mm and a width of about 20 mm.
In addition, 20 or more exposure points are carried out. The upper limit of the number of exposed points is not particularly limited, but it is preferable to carry out the exposure until the film thickness reaches the maximum value and becomes substantially constant, and more preferably 50 or less.
The exposure apparatus is not particularly limited as long as it can irradiate ultraviolet rays, but for example, it is preferable to use an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp.
 露光後、露光後の積層体から仮支持体34を剥がし、露光されたネガ型感光性組成物層に対して、上記条件Aを満たす現像及び洗浄処理を実施する。
 上記条件Aを満たす現像及び洗浄処理は、山縣機械社製の現像機「YCD-500WA」を使用し、シャワーノズルとして「フルコーンノズル」を使用して実施できる。具体的には、山縣機械社製の現像機「YCD-500WA」を使用して、温度30℃の1.0質量%濃度の炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を使用して30秒間の現像処理(現像方式:シャワー現像、シャワーノズル:「フルコーンノズル」、シャワー圧力:0.10MPa、シャワー流量は1000mL/min)を実施し、その後、温度30℃の純水を使用して30秒間の洗浄処理(洗浄方式:シャワー洗浄、シャワーノズル:「フルコーンノズル」、シャワー圧力:0.10MPa、シャワー流量は1000mL/min)を実施する。
 上記条件Aを満たす現像及び洗浄処理を実施後、乾燥を実施する。
 乾燥温度としては特に制限されないが、例えば、30~80℃であるのが好ましく、30~60℃であるのがより好ましい。
 乾燥時間としては特に制限されないが、例えば、5~30分であるのが好ましく、5~10分であるのがより好ましい。
After the exposure, the temporary support 34 is peeled off from the exposed laminate, and the exposed negative photosensitive composition layer is subjected to development and cleaning treatment satisfying the above condition A.
The developing and cleaning treatment satisfying the above condition A can be carried out by using a developing machine "YCD-500WA" manufactured by Yamagata Machinery Co., Ltd. and using a "full cone nozzle" as a shower nozzle. Specifically, a development process (development method: shower) for 30 seconds using a developer "YCD-500WA" manufactured by Yamagata Machinery Co., Ltd. and a 1.0 mass% concentration sodium carbonate aqueous solution at a temperature of 30 ° C. Development, shower nozzle: "full cone nozzle", shower pressure: 0.10 MPa, shower flow rate is 1000 mL / min), and then cleaning treatment for 30 seconds using pure water at a temperature of 30 ° C. (cleaning method: Shower washing, shower nozzle: "full cone nozzle", shower pressure: 0.10 MPa, shower flow rate is 1000 mL / min).
After the development and cleaning treatment satisfying the above condition A, drying is performed.
The drying temperature is not particularly limited, but is preferably 30 to 80 ° C, more preferably 30 to 60 ° C, for example.
The drying time is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 to 30 minutes, more preferably 5 to 10 minutes, for example.
 条件Aを満たす現像及び洗浄処理を行うと、露光箇所においてネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜が得られる。その際の硬化膜の膜厚は露光量によって異なる。例えば、図5は図4で示された膜に対して条件Aを満たす現像及び洗浄処理を実施した後の図であり、一番左側の露光箇所の硬化膜32Aの厚みが最も薄く、一番右側の露光箇所の硬化膜32Aの厚みが最も厚くなる。つまり、T1<T2<T3の関係となる。図5においては、3点の膜厚のみを記載しているが、実際は20点以上の露光箇所での膜厚を測定する。 When the development and cleaning treatment satisfying the condition A is performed, a cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer is obtained at the exposed portion. The film thickness of the cured film at that time varies depending on the exposure amount. For example, FIG. 5 is a view after the film shown in FIG. 4 is subjected to development and cleaning treatment satisfying the condition A, and the cured film 32A at the leftmost exposed portion has the thinnest thickness and the most. The thickness of the cured film 32A at the exposed portion on the right side is the thickest. That is, the relationship is T1 <T2 <T3. In FIG. 5, only the film thicknesses at three points are shown, but in reality, the film thicknesses at 20 or more exposed points are measured.
 次に、各露光箇所での露光量と膜厚とのデータを用いて、プロット図を作成する。具体的には、膜厚を縦軸とし露光量を横軸とした直交座標に、各露光箇所での膜厚及び露光量に対応する点をプロットする。つまり、各露光箇所での膜厚を縦軸に、各露光箇所での露光量を横軸にして、グラフ(感度曲線)を作成する。なお、縦軸の単位はμmであり、露光量の単位はmJ/cmである。図6に、プロット図の一例を示す。なお、図6中の各黒丸が、各露光箇所での結果(膜厚と露光量)に該当する。図6では、説明を容易にするため、黒丸のプロット数は実際の20点よりも少なくしている。また、得られたプロット図中の各プロットされた点を結んで線を作成してもよい。 Next, a plot diagram is created using the data of the exposure amount and the film thickness at each exposed portion. Specifically, the points corresponding to the film thickness and the exposure amount at each exposed portion are plotted on the orthogonal coordinates with the film thickness as the vertical axis and the exposure amount as the horizontal axis. That is, a graph (sensitivity curve) is created with the film thickness at each exposed point on the vertical axis and the exposure amount at each exposed point on the horizontal axis. The unit of the vertical axis is μm, and the unit of the exposure amount is mJ / cm 2 . FIG. 6 shows an example of a plot diagram. Each black circle in FIG. 6 corresponds to the result (film thickness and exposure amount) at each exposed portion. In FIG. 6, the number of plots of black circles is smaller than the actual 20 points for the sake of simplicity. Further, a line may be created by connecting the plotted points in the obtained plot diagram.
 図6に示すように、通常、プロット図においては、領域Aにおいては露光量が増加するに従って膜厚が増加し、領域Bにおいては露光量が増えても膜厚が最大値で略一定となる。
 これは、まず、領域Aにおいては、露光量が増加するにつれて、露光領域において光重合開始剤の分解量が増加し、発生する活性種(例えばラジカル)の量が増える。その結果、発生した活性種(例えばラジカル)がエチレン性不飽和基を有する重合性化合物等の重合成分に作用して、連鎖的な重合反応が生起する。重合反応が進むほど、重合反応により形成される硬化膜がアルカリ現像液に溶解しにくくなり、露光量が多い露光箇所において硬化膜が除去されにくくなり、膜厚が増加していく。
 その後、ある一定露光量以上である領域Bに達すると、硬化膜がほぼ残存し、膜厚は最大値で略一定となる。つまり、膜厚が実質的に変化しなくなる。なお、通常、膜厚が最大値を示す点は複数存在する。
 ここで、「膜厚が実質的に変化しなくなる」とは、隣接するプロット点2点での膜厚の変化率が3%以下となることを意味する。具体的には、図6中の領域Bに位置し、隣接するプロットP1、P2における各膜厚(各々TP1、P2、不図示)の関係において説明すると、{(TP2-TP1)/TP1}×100で表される変化率が3%以下となることを意味する。
 露光量を増加しても膜厚が実質的に変化しなくなる領域Bにおける硬化膜の膜厚を基準膜厚T100として、硬化膜の膜厚が基準膜厚T100に対して10%の膜厚T10となる露光量E10、硬化膜の膜厚が基準膜厚T100に対して90%の膜厚T90となる露光量E90を算出し、得られた数値に基づいて、E10/E90の値を算出する。
As shown in FIG. 6, in the plot diagram, the film thickness usually increases as the exposure amount increases in the region A, and the film thickness becomes substantially constant at the maximum value even if the exposure amount increases in the region B. ..
First, in the region A, as the exposure amount increases, the decomposition amount of the photopolymerization initiator increases in the exposure region, and the amount of active species (for example, radicals) generated increases. As a result, the generated active species (for example, radicals) act on the polymerization components such as the polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group, and a chain polymerization reaction occurs. As the polymerization reaction progresses, the cured film formed by the polymerization reaction becomes less likely to dissolve in the alkaline developer, the cured film becomes more difficult to be removed at the exposed portion where the exposure amount is large, and the film thickness increases.
After that, when the region B having a certain exposure amount or more is reached, the cured film remains almost, and the film thickness becomes substantially constant at the maximum value. That is, the film thickness does not substantially change. Normally, there are a plurality of points where the film thickness shows the maximum value.
Here, "the film thickness does not substantially change" means that the rate of change in the film thickness at two adjacent plot points is 3% or less. Specifically, it is located in the region B in FIG. 6, and will be described in relation to the film thicknesses ( TP1, T P2 , and not shown, respectively) in the adjacent plots P1 and P2. {( TP2 - TP1 ) It means that the rate of change represented by / T P1 } × 100 is 3% or less.
The thickness of the cured film in the region B where the film thickness does not substantially change even if the exposure amount is increased is set as the reference film thickness T100, and the film thickness of the cured film is 10% of the reference film thickness T100. The exposure amount E10 is calculated, and the exposure amount E90 at which the film thickness of the cured film is 90% of the reference film thickness T90 is calculated, and the value of E10 / E90 is calculated based on the obtained numerical values. ..
 要件2:上記転写フィルムの仮支持体側とは反対側の表面を水晶振動子に接触させて、上記水晶振動子、上記組成物層、及び上記仮支持体をこの順に有する積層体を形成し、上記積層体に対して上記E90の2倍の露光量で紫外線を照射した後、露光後の上記積層体を温度30℃の1.0質量%濃度の炭酸ナトリウム水溶液中に浸漬したとき、水晶振動子マイクロバランス法(QCM法)に基づいて求められる、浸漬開始から30秒後における上記ネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜の質量増加率が、20質量%以下である。
 なお、質量増加率は、{(浸漬後のネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜の重さ-浸漬前のネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜の重さ)/浸漬前のネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜の重さ}×100で表される。
Requirement 2: The surface of the transfer film opposite to the temporary support side is brought into contact with the crystal oscillator to form a laminate having the crystal oscillator, the composition layer, and the temporary support in this order. After irradiating the laminate with ultraviolet rays at twice the exposure amount of E90, the crystal vibration when the exposed laminate is immersed in a 1.0% by mass concentration sodium carbonate aqueous solution at a temperature of 30 ° C. The mass increase rate of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer 30 seconds after the start of immersion, which is obtained based on the child microbalance method (QCM method), is 20% by mass or less.
The mass increase rate is {(weight of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer after immersion-weight of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer before immersion) / negative photosensitive before immersion. Weight of the cured film of the sex composition layer} × 100.
 なお、QCM法に基づく質量増加率の測定は、リソテックジャパン社製「RDA-Qz3」等のレジスト現像アナライザにより実施できる。
 また、転写フィルムが、仮支持体とネガ型感光性組成物層との間に他の組成物層(例えば、熱可塑性樹脂層及び中間層等)を有する場合、ガラス基板上に転写フィルムを転写して得られる積層体に対して所定の紫外線照射を実施した後に、積層体から上記他の組成物層を除去する工程を有する。例えば、アルカリ現像処理、溶剤洗浄、及びテープ剥離等の処理により、積層体から上記他の組成物層を除去できる。
 また、紫外線照射された積層体は、温度30℃の1.0質量%濃度の炭酸ナトリウム水溶液への浸漬処理を実施される前に、25℃60%の環境で24時間保持されるのが好ましい。
 なお、転写フィルムが、ネガ型感光性組成物層の仮支持体側とは反対側に他の組成物層(例えば、屈折率調整層等)を有する場合、ガラス基板上に転写フィルムを転写して得られる積層体において、上記他の組成物層は、硬化後のネガ型感光性組成物層とガラス基板との間に位置する。このため、積層体に対して上述の質量増加率の測定を実施した際、上記他の組成物層に由来する質量増加は、通常、実質的に生じないか、又は、生じても極僅かである。特に、他の組成物層が屈折率調整層である場合、屈折率調整層は、通常、硬化後のネガ型感光性組成物層に対して極めて薄膜であり、積層体に対して上述の質量増加率の測定を実施した際において、屈折率調整層に由来する質量増加は、通常、実質的に生じない。
The mass increase rate based on the QCM method can be measured by a resist development analyzer such as "RDA-Qz3" manufactured by Lithotech Japan.
Further, when the transfer film has another composition layer (for example, a thermoplastic resin layer and an intermediate layer) between the temporary support and the negative photosensitive composition layer, the transfer film is transferred onto the glass substrate. The above-mentioned other composition layer is removed from the laminated body after subjecting the laminated body to the predetermined ultraviolet irradiation. For example, the other composition layer can be removed from the laminate by treatments such as alkaline development treatment, solvent cleaning, and tape peeling.
Further, it is preferable that the laminated body irradiated with ultraviolet rays is kept in an environment of 25 ° C. and 60% for 24 hours before being immersed in a 1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution having a temperature of 30 ° C. ..
When the transfer film has another composition layer (for example, a refractive index adjusting layer) on the side opposite to the temporary support side of the negative photosensitive composition layer, the transfer film is transferred onto the glass substrate. In the obtained laminate, the other composition layer is located between the cured negative photosensitive composition layer and the glass substrate. Therefore, when the above-mentioned mass increase rate is measured for the laminate, the mass increase derived from the other composition layers is usually substantially nonexistent or even slight. be. In particular, when the other composition layer is a refractive index adjusting layer, the refractive index adjusting layer is usually extremely thin with respect to the cured negative photosensitive composition layer, and has the above-mentioned mass with respect to the laminate. When the increase rate is measured, the mass increase derived from the refractive index adjusting layer usually does not occur substantially.
 本発明の転写フィルムは、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、下記式(1-1)を満たすのが好ましい。
 式(1-1):E10/E90≧0.8
 式(1-1)中、E10及びE90は、各々、式(1)中のE10及びE90と同義である。
The transfer film of the present invention preferably satisfies the following formula (1-1) in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
Equation (1-1): E10 / E90 ≧ 0.8
In formula (1-1), E10 and E90 are synonymous with E10 and E90 in formula (1), respectively.
 本発明の転写フィルムが要件1及び要件2を満たす達成手段の一例としては、ネガ型感光性組成物層中の重合禁止剤と光重合開始剤との配合比を所定範囲に調整し、且つ、バインダーポリマーに再沈精製を実施して残存モノマーの含有量を低減する方法、ネガ型感光性組成物層中の重合禁止剤と光重合開始剤との配合比を所定範囲に調整し、且つ、バインダポリマー中にラジカル重合性基を多く導入する方法、及び、ネガ型感光性組成物層中の重合禁止剤と光重合開始剤との配合比を所定範囲に調整し、バインダーポリマーに再沈精製を実施して残存モノマーの含有量を低減し、且つ、バインダポリマー中にラジカル重合性基を多く導入する方法等が挙げられる。 As an example of the means for achieving the requirements 1 and 2 by the transfer film of the present invention, the compounding ratio of the polymerization inhibitor and the photopolymerization initiator in the negative photosensitive composition layer is adjusted within a predetermined range, and A method of reprecipitating the binder polymer to reduce the content of the residual monomer, adjusting the compounding ratio of the polymerization inhibitor and the photopolymerization initiator in the negative photosensitive composition layer to a predetermined range, and The method of introducing a large amount of radically polymerizable groups into the binder polymer and the compounding ratio of the polymerization inhibitor and the photopolymerization initiator in the negative photosensitive composition layer are adjusted within a predetermined range, and reprecipitated into the binder polymer. Examples thereof include a method of reducing the content of the residual monomer and introducing a large amount of radically polymerizable groups into the binder polymer.
 本発明の転写フィルムの態様の一例を以下に示すが、これに制限されない。
(1)「仮支持体/ネガ型感光性組成物層/屈折率調整層/保護フィルム」
(2)「仮支持体/ネガ型感光性組成物層/保護フィルム」
(3)「仮支持体/中間層/ネガ型感光性組成物層/保護フィルム」
(4)「仮支持体/熱可塑性樹脂層/中間層/ネガ型感光性組成物層/保護フィルム」
 なお、上記各構成において、ネガ型感光性組成物層が着色樹脂層であることも好ましい。
 本発明の転写フィルムは、後述するように保護膜用の転写フィルムとして使用されてもよいし、エッチングレジスト用の転写フィルムとして使用されてもよい。
 なお、「保護膜用」とは、電極及び/又は配線を保護する目的で、電極及び/又は配線を覆うように設けられる保護膜、及び、電極間を絶縁するための保護膜(具体的にはブリッジ配線等の電極間を絶縁するための保護膜)を意図する。
 保護膜用の転写フィルムとする場合、転写フィルムの構成としては、例えば、上述した(1)又は(2)の構成であるのが好ましい。また、エッチングレジスト用の転写フィルムとする場合、転写フィルムの構成としては、例えば、上述した(2)~(4)の構成であるのが好ましい。
An example of the aspect of the transfer film of the present invention is shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
(1) "Temporary support / Negative photosensitive composition layer / Refractive index adjusting layer / Protective film"
(2) "Temporary support / Negative photosensitive composition layer / Protective film"
(3) "Temporary support / intermediate layer / negative photosensitive composition layer / protective film"
(4) "Temporary support / thermoplastic resin layer / intermediate layer / negative photosensitive composition layer / protective film"
In each of the above configurations, it is also preferable that the negative photosensitive composition layer is a colored resin layer.
The transfer film of the present invention may be used as a transfer film for a protective film or as a transfer film for an etching resist, as will be described later.
The term "for protective film" means a protective film provided to cover the electrodes and / or the wiring for the purpose of protecting the electrodes and / or the wiring, and a protective film for insulating the electrodes (specifically). Is intended as a protective film for insulating electrodes such as bridge wiring).
In the case of a transfer film for a protective film, the structure of the transfer film is preferably, for example, the above-mentioned structure (1) or (2). Further, in the case of using a transfer film for an etching resist, the composition of the transfer film is preferably, for example, the above-mentioned configurations (2) to (4).
 転写フィルムの組成物層が、ネガ型感光性組成物層の仮支持体側とは反対側に他の組成物層(例えば、屈折率調整層)を更に有する構成の場合、上記他の層の合計厚みは、ネガ型感光性組成物層の厚みに対して、0.1~30%であるのが好ましく、0.1~20%であるのがより好ましい。特に、他の組成物層が屈折率調整層の単層である場合、なかでも、0.1~10%であるのが好ましく、0.1~5%であるのがより好ましい。 When the composition layer of the transfer film further has another composition layer (for example, a refractive index adjusting layer) on the side opposite to the temporary support side of the negative photosensitive composition layer, the sum of the other layers is described above. The thickness is preferably 0.1 to 30%, more preferably 0.1 to 20%, based on the thickness of the negative photosensitive composition layer. In particular, when the other composition layer is a single layer of the refractive index adjusting layer, it is preferably 0.1 to 10%, more preferably 0.1 to 5%.
 後述する貼合工程における気泡発生抑止の観点から、転写フィルムのうねりの最大幅は、300μm以下が好ましく、200μm以下がより好ましく、60μm以下が更に好ましい。なお、うねりの最大幅の下限値としては、0μm以上であり、0.1μm以上が好ましく、1μm以上がより好ましい。
 転写フィルムのうねりの最大幅は、以下の手順により測定される値である。
 まず、転写フィルムを縦20cm×横20cmのサイズとなるように主面に垂直な方向に裁断し、試験サンプルを作製する。なお、転写フィルムが保護フィルムを有する場合には、保護フィルムを剥離する。次いで、表面が平滑で且つ水平なステージ上に、上記試験サンプルを仮支持体の表面がステージに対向するように静置する。静置後、試験サンプルの中心10cm角の範囲について、試料サンプルの表面をレーザー顕微鏡(例えば、(株)キーエンス社製 VK-9700SP)で走査して3次元表面画像を取得し、得られた3次元表面画像で観察される最大凸高さから最低凹高さを引き算する。上記操作を10個の試験サンプルについて行い、その算術平均値を「転写フィルムのうねり最大幅」とする。
From the viewpoint of suppressing the generation of bubbles in the bonding step described later, the maximum width of the undulation of the transfer film is preferably 300 μm or less, more preferably 200 μm or less, still more preferably 60 μm or less. The lower limit of the maximum width of the swell is 0 μm or more, preferably 0.1 μm or more, and more preferably 1 μm or more.
The maximum width of the waviness of the transfer film is a value measured by the following procedure.
First, the transfer film is cut in a direction perpendicular to the main surface so as to have a size of 20 cm in length × 20 cm in width to prepare a test sample. If the transfer film has a protective film, the protective film is peeled off. Next, the test sample is placed on a stage having a smooth and horizontal surface so that the surface of the temporary support faces the stage. After standing still, the surface of the sample sample was scanned with a laser microscope (for example, VK-9700SP manufactured by Keyence Co., Ltd.) for a range of 10 cm square in the center of the test sample to obtain a three-dimensional surface image, and the obtained 3 Subtract the minimum concave height from the maximum convex height observed in the 3D surface image. The above operation is performed on 10 test samples, and the arithmetic mean value is defined as the "maximum undulation width of the transfer film".
 以下において、具体的な実施形態の一例を挙げて、本発明の転写フィルムについて説明する。なお、以下の第1実施形態の転写フィルムは、保護膜用の転写フィルムに好適に使用できる構成であり、以下の第2実施形態の転写フィルムは、エッチングレジスト用の転写フィルムに好適に使用できる構成である。 Hereinafter, the transfer film of the present invention will be described with reference to an example of a specific embodiment. The transfer film of the first embodiment below can be suitably used as a transfer film for a protective film, and the transfer film of the second embodiment below can be suitably used as a transfer film for an etching resist. It is a composition.
〔第1実施形態の転写フィルム〕
 以下において、第1実施形態の転写フィルムの実施形態の一例について説明する。
 図7に示す転写フィルム10は、仮支持体1と、ネガ型感光性組成物層3及び屈折率調整層5を含む組成物層2と、保護フィルム7とを、この順に有する。
 なお、図7で示す転写フィルム10は保護フィルム7を配置した形態であるが、保護フィルム7は、配置されなくてもよい。
 また、図7で示す転写フィルム10は屈折率調整層5を配置した形態であるが、屈折率調整層5は、配置されなくてもよい。
 以下において、転写フィルムを構成する各要素について説明する。
[Transfer film of the first embodiment]
Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment of the transfer film of the first embodiment will be described.
The transfer film 10 shown in FIG. 7 has a temporary support 1, a composition layer 2 including a negative photosensitive composition layer 3 and a refractive index adjusting layer 5, and a protective film 7 in this order.
The transfer film 10 shown in FIG. 7 has a form in which the protective film 7 is arranged, but the protective film 7 may not be arranged.
Further, the transfer film 10 shown in FIG. 7 has a form in which the refractive index adjusting layer 5 is arranged, but the refractive index adjusting layer 5 may not be arranged.
Hereinafter, each element constituting the transfer film will be described.
<<仮支持体>>
 転写フィルムは、仮支持体を有する。
 仮支持体は、組成物層を支持する部材であり、最終的には剥離処理により除去される。
<< Temporary support >>
The transfer film has a temporary support.
The temporary support is a member that supports the composition layer, and is finally removed by a peeling treatment.
 仮支持体は、単層構造であっても、複層構造であってもよい。
 仮支持体は、フィルムであることが好ましく、樹脂フィルムであることがより好ましい。仮支持体としては、可撓性を有し、かつ、加圧下、又は、加圧及び加熱下において、著しい変形、収縮、又は、伸びを生じないフィルムが好ましい。
 上記フィルムとしては、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(例えば、2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム)、ポリメチルメタクリレートフィルム、トリ酢酸セルロースフィルム、ポリスチレンフィルム、ポリイミドフィルム、及び、ポリカーボネートフィルムが挙げられる。
 なかでも、仮支持体としては、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが好ましい。
 また、仮支持体として使用するフィルムには、シワ等の変形、及び、傷等がないことが好ましい。
The temporary support may have a single-layer structure or a multi-layer structure.
The temporary support is preferably a film, more preferably a resin film. The temporary support is preferably a film that is flexible and does not undergo significant deformation, shrinkage, or elongation under pressure, or under pressure and heating.
Examples of the film include a polyethylene terephthalate film (for example, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film), a polymethylmethacrylate film, a cellulose triacetate film, a polystyrene film, a polyimide film, and a polycarbonate film.
Among them, a polyethylene terephthalate film is preferable as the temporary support.
Further, it is preferable that the film used as the temporary support is free from deformation such as wrinkles and scratches.
 仮支持体は、仮支持体を介してパターン露光できるという点から、透明性が高いことが好ましく、365nmの透過率は60%以上が好ましく、70%以上がより好ましい。
 仮支持体を介するパターン露光時のパターン形成性、及び、仮支持体の透明性の点から、仮支持体のヘイズは小さい方が好ましい。具体的には、仮支持体のヘイズ値が、2%以下が好ましく、0.5%以下がより好ましく、0.1%以下が更に好ましい。
 仮支持体を介するパターン露光時のパターン形成性、及び、仮支持体の透明性の点から、仮支持体に含まれる微粒子、異物、及び、欠陥の数は少ない方が好ましい。仮支持体中における直径1μm以上の微粒子、異物、及び、欠陥の数は、50個/10mm以下が好ましく、10個/10mm以下がより好ましく、3個/10mm以下が更に好ましく、0個/10mmが特に好ましい。
The temporary support is preferably highly transparent from the viewpoint that the pattern can be exposed through the temporary support, and the transmittance at 365 nm is preferably 60% or more, more preferably 70% or more.
From the viewpoint of pattern formation during pattern exposure via the temporary support and transparency of the temporary support, it is preferable that the haze of the temporary support is small. Specifically, the haze value of the temporary support is preferably 2% or less, more preferably 0.5% or less, still more preferably 0.1% or less.
From the viewpoint of pattern formation during pattern exposure via the temporary support and transparency of the temporary support, it is preferable that the number of fine particles, foreign substances, and defects contained in the temporary support is small. The number of fine particles, foreign matter, and defects having a diameter of 1 μm or more in the temporary support is preferably 50 pieces / 10 mm 2 or less, more preferably 10 pieces / 10 mm 2 or less, further preferably 3 pieces / 10 mm 2 or less, and 0. Pieces / 10 mm 2 are particularly preferred.
 仮支持体の厚みは特に制限されないが、5~200μmが好ましく、取り扱いやすさ及び汎用性の点から、5~150μmがより好ましく、5~50μmが更に好ましく、5~25μmが最も好ましい。
 仮支持体の厚みは、SEM(走査型電子顕微鏡:Scanning Electron Microscope)による断面観察により測定した任意の5点の平均値として算出する。
The thickness of the temporary support is not particularly limited, but is preferably 5 to 200 μm, more preferably 5 to 150 μm, still more preferably 5 to 50 μm, and most preferably 5 to 25 μm from the viewpoint of ease of handling and versatility.
The thickness of the temporary support is calculated as an average value of any five points measured by cross-sectional observation with an SEM (Scanning Electron Microscope).
 仮支持体と組成物層との密着性を向上させることを目的として、仮支持体の組成物層と接する側がUV照射、コロナ放電、及びプラズマ等により表面改質されていてもよい。 For the purpose of improving the adhesion between the temporary support and the composition layer, the side of the temporary support in contact with the composition layer may be surface-modified by UV irradiation, corona discharge, plasma, or the like.
 仮支持体の表面改質をUV照射によって実施する場合、露光量は10~2000mJ/cmであるのが好ましく、50~1000mJ/cmであることがより好ましい。なお、光源としては、150~450nm波長帯域の光を発する低圧水銀ランプ、高圧水銀ランプ、超高圧水銀灯、カーボンアーク灯、メタルハライドランプ、キセノンランプ、ケミカルランプ、無電極放電ランプ、及び、発光ダイオード(LED)等が挙げられる。光照射量がこの範囲にできる限り、ランプ出力や照度は特に制限はない。 When the surface modification of the temporary support is carried out by UV irradiation, the exposure amount is preferably 10 to 2000 mJ / cm 2 , and more preferably 50 to 1000 mJ / cm 2 . The light sources include low-pressure mercury lamps, high-pressure mercury lamps, ultra-high-pressure mercury lamps, carbon arc lamps, metal halide lamps, xenon lamps, chemical lamps, electrodeless discharge lamps, and light-emitting diodes that emit light in the wavelength band of 150 to 450 nm. LED) and the like. As long as the amount of light irradiation is within this range, the lamp output and illuminance are not particularly limited.
 仮支持体としては、例えば、膜厚16μmの2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、膜厚12μmの2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、及び、膜厚9μmの2軸延伸ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルムが挙げられる。 Examples of the temporary support include a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 16 μm, a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 12 μm, and a biaxially stretched polyethylene terephthalate film having a thickness of 9 μm.
 仮支持体の好ましい形態としては、例えば、特開2014-085643号公報の段落[0017]~[0018]、特開2016-027363号公報の段落[0019]~[0026]、国際公開第2012/081680号の段落[0041]~[0057]、及び、国際公開第2018/179370号の段落[0029]~[0040]に記載が挙げられ、これらの公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Preferred forms of the temporary support include, for example, paragraphs [0017] to [0018] of JP-A-2014-085643, paragraphs [0019]-[0026] of JP-A-2016-0273363, and International Publication No. 2012 /. The description is given in paragraphs [0041] to [0057] of No. 081680 and paragraphs [0029] to [0040] of International Publication No. 2018/179370, and the contents of these publications are incorporated in the present specification.
 ハンドリング性を付与する点で、仮支持体の表面に、微小な粒子を含む層(滑剤層)を設けてもよい。滑剤層は仮支持体の片面に設けてもよいし、両面に設けてもよい。滑剤層に含まれる粒子の直径は、0.05~0.8μmが好ましい。
 また、滑剤層の膜厚は、0.05~1.0μmが好ましい。仮支持体の市販品としては、ルミラー16KS40、ルミラー16FB40(以上、東レ株式会社製)、コスモシャインA4100、コスモシャインA4300、及びコスモシャインA8300(以上、東洋紡株式会社製)が挙げられる。
A layer containing fine particles (lubricant layer) may be provided on the surface of the temporary support from the viewpoint of imparting handleability. The lubricant layer may be provided on one side of the temporary support or on both sides. The diameter of the particles contained in the lubricant layer is preferably 0.05 to 0.8 μm.
The film thickness of the lubricant layer is preferably 0.05 to 1.0 μm. Examples of commercially available temporary supports include Lumirror 16KS40, Lumirror 16FB40 (above, manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.), Cosmoshine A4100, Cosmoshine A4300, and Cosmoshine A8300 (above, manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd.).
<<ネガ型感光性組成物層>>
 転写フィルムは、ネガ型感光性組成物層を有する。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層を被転写体上に転写した後、露光及び現像を行うことにより、被転写体上にパターンを形成できる。なお、ネガ型感光性組成物層では、露光により露光部が硬化膜となって現像液に対する溶解性が低下する。
 以下、ネガ型感光性組成物層が含み得る成分について述べる。
<< Negative Photosensitive Composition Layer >>
The transfer film has a negative photosensitive composition layer.
A pattern can be formed on the transferred body by transferring the negative photosensitive composition layer onto the transferred body and then exposing and developing the layer. In the negative photosensitive composition layer, the exposed portion becomes a cured film due to exposure, and the solubility in a developing solution is lowered.
Hereinafter, the components that can be contained in the negative photosensitive composition layer will be described.
<バインダーポリマー>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、バインダーポリマーを含む。
 バインダーポリマーとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル樹脂、スチレン樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、アミド樹脂、アミドエポキシ樹脂、アルキド樹脂、フェノール樹脂、エステル樹脂、ウレタン樹脂、エポキシ樹脂と(メタ)アクリル酸との反応で得られるエポキシアクリレート樹脂、及び、エポキシアクリレート樹脂と酸無水物との反応で得られる酸変性エポキシアクリレート樹脂が挙げられる。
<Binder polymer>
The negative photosensitive composition layer contains a binder polymer.
Examples of the binder polymer include (meth) acrylic resin, styrene resin, epoxy resin, amide resin, amide epoxy resin, alkyd resin, phenol resin, ester resin, urethane resin, and the reaction of epoxy resin with (meth) acrylic acid. Examples thereof include the obtained epoxy acrylate resin and the acid-modified epoxy acrylate resin obtained by reacting the epoxy acrylate resin with the acid anhydride.
 バインダーポリマーの好適態様の一つとして、アルカリ現像性及びフィルム形成性に優れる点で、(メタ)アクリル樹脂が挙げられる。
 なお、本明細書において、(メタ)アクリル樹脂とは、(メタ)アクリル化合物に由来する構成単位を有する樹脂を意味する。(メタ)アクリル化合物に由来する構成単位の含有量は、(メタ)アクリル樹脂の全構成単位に対して、50質量%以上が好ましく、70質量%以上がより好ましく、90質量%以上が更に好ましい。
 (メタ)アクリル樹脂は、(メタ)アクリル化合物に由来する構成単位のみで構成されていてもよく、(メタ)アクリル化合物以外の重合性単量体に由来する構成単位を有していてもよい。すなわち、(メタ)アクリル化合物に由来する構成単位の含有量の上限は、(メタ)アクリル樹脂の全構成単位に対して、100質量%以下である。
One of the preferred embodiments of the binder polymer is a (meth) acrylic resin in that it is excellent in alkali developability and film forming property.
In the present specification, the (meth) acrylic resin means a resin having a structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound. The content of the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound is preferably 50% by mass or more, more preferably 70% by mass or more, still more preferably 90% by mass or more, based on all the structural units of the (meth) acrylic resin. ..
The (meth) acrylic resin may be composed of only a structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound, or may have a structural unit derived from a polymerizable monomer other than the (meth) acrylic compound. .. That is, the upper limit of the content of the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound is 100% by mass or less with respect to all the structural units of the (meth) acrylic resin.
 (メタ)アクリル化合物としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸、(メタ)アクリル酸エステル、(メタ)アクリルアミド、及び、(メタ)アクリロニトリルが挙げられる。
 (メタ)アクリル酸エステルとしては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸テトラヒドロフルフリルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸ジメチルアミノエチルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸ジエチルアミノエチルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸グリシジルエステル、(メタ)アクリル酸ベンジルエステル、2,2,2-トリフルオロエチル(メタ)アクリレート、及び、2,2,3,3-テトラフルオロプロピル(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられ、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが好ましい。
 (メタ)アクリルアミドとしては、例えば、ジアセトンアクリルアミド等のアクリルアミドが挙げられる。
Examples of the (meth) acrylic compound include (meth) acrylic acid, (meth) acrylic acid ester, (meth) acrylamide, and (meth) acrylonitrile.
Examples of the (meth) acrylic acid ester include (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid tetrahydrofurfuryl ester, (meth) acrylic acid dimethylaminoethyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid diethylaminoethyl ester, and (meth) acrylic acid ester. ) Acrylic acid glycidyl ester, (meth) acrylic acid benzyl ester, 2,2,2-trifluoroethyl (meth) acrylate, and 2,2,3,3-tetrafluoropropyl (meth) acrylate. Meta) Acrylic acid alkyl esters are preferred.
Examples of the (meth) acrylamide include acrylamide such as diacetone acrylamide.
 (メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルのアルキル基としては、直鎖状でも分岐を有していてもよい。具体例としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル、(メタ)アクリル酸エチル、(メタ)アクリル酸プロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸ペンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸ヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸ヘプチル、(メタ)アクリル酸オクチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチルヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸ノニル、(メタ)アクリル酸デシル、(メタ)アクリル酸ウンデシル、及び、(メタ)アクリル酸ドデシル等の炭素数が1~12のアルキル基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが挙げられる。
 また、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルのアルキル基としては、環状であってもよい。環状アルキル基としては、単環でも多環でもよい。具体例としては、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル等が挙げられる。
 (メタ)アクリル酸エステルとしては、炭素数1~4のアルキル基を有する(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸メチル又は(メタ)アクリル酸エチルがより好ましい。
The alkyl group of the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester may be linear or may have a branch. Specific examples include, for example, methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, pentyl (meth) acrylate, hexyl (meth) acrylate, ( Heptyl acrylate, octyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, nonyl (meth) acrylate, decyl (meth) acrylate, undecyl (meth) acrylate, and (meth) acrylate. Examples thereof include (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters having an alkyl group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms such as dodecyl.
Further, the alkyl group of the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester may be cyclic. The cyclic alkyl group may be monocyclic or polycyclic. Specific examples include cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
As the (meth) acrylic acid ester, a (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester having an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is preferable, and methyl (meth) acrylate or ethyl (meth) acrylate is more preferable.
 (メタ)アクリル樹脂は、(メタ)アクリル化合物に由来する構成単位以外の構成単位を有していてもよい。
 上記構成単位を形成する重合性単量体としては、(メタ)アクリル化合物と共重合可能な(メタ)アクリル化合物以外の化合物であれば特に制限されず、例えば、スチレン、ビニルトルエン、及び、α-メチルスチレン等のα位又は芳香族環に置換基を有してもよいスチレン化合物、アクリロニトリル及びビニル-n-ブチルエーテル等のビニルアルコールエステル、マレイン酸、マレイン酸無水物、マレイン酸モノメチル、マレイン酸モノエチル、及び、マレイン酸モノイソプロピル等のマレイン酸モノエステル、フマル酸、ケイ皮酸、α-シアノケイ皮酸、イタコン酸、並びに、クロトン酸が挙げられる。
 これらの重合性単量体は、1種又は2種以上を組み合わせて用いてもよい。
The (meth) acrylic resin may have a structural unit other than the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound.
The polymerizable monomer forming the structural unit is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound other than the (meth) acrylic compound that can be copolymerized with the (meth) acrylic compound, and is, for example, styrene, vinyltoluene, and α. -Styrene compounds such as methylstyrene which may have a substituent on the α-position or aromatic ring, vinyl alcohol esters such as acrylonitrile and vinyl-n-butyl ether, maleic acid, maleic acid anhydride, monomethyl maleate, maleic acid. Examples thereof include maleic acid monoesters such as monoethyl and monoisopropyl maleic acid, fumaric acid, cinnamic acid, α-cyanocinnamic acid, itaconic acid, and crotonic acid.
These polymerizable monomers may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 また、(メタ)アクリル樹脂は、アルカリ現像性をより良好にする点から、酸基を有する構成単位を有することが好ましい。酸基としては、例えば、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基、及び、ホスホン酸基が挙げられる。
 なかでも、(メタ)アクリル樹脂は、カルボキシ基を有する構成単位を有することがより好ましく、上記の(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位を有することが更に好ましい。
Further, the (meth) acrylic resin preferably has a structural unit having an acid group from the viewpoint of improving the alkali developability. Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, and a phosphonic acid group.
Among them, the (meth) acrylic resin more preferably has a structural unit having a carboxy group, and further preferably has a structural unit derived from the above-mentioned (meth) acrylic acid.
 (メタ)アクリル樹脂における酸基を有する構成単位(好ましくは(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位)の含有量は、現像性に優れる点で、(メタ)アクリル樹脂の全質量に対して、10質量%以上が好ましい。また、上限値は特に制限されないが、アルカリ耐性に優れる点で、50質量%以下が好ましく、40質量%以下がより好ましい。 The content of the structural unit having an acid group (preferably the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid) in the (meth) acrylic resin is excellent in developability, and is based on the total mass of the (meth) acrylic resin. 10% by mass or more is preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 50% by mass or less, more preferably 40% by mass or less, in terms of excellent alkali resistance.
 また、(メタ)アクリル樹脂は、上述した(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位を有することがより好ましい。
 (メタ)アクリル樹脂における(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位の含有量は、(メタ)アクリル樹脂の全構成単位に対して、50~90質量%が好ましく、60~90質量%がより好ましく、65~90質量%が更に好ましい。
Further, it is more preferable that the (meth) acrylic resin has a structural unit derived from the above-mentioned (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester.
The content of the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester in the (meth) acrylic resin is preferably 50 to 90% by mass, preferably 60 to 90% by mass, based on all the structural units of the (meth) acrylic resin. More preferably, 65 to 90% by mass is further preferable.
 (メタ)アクリル樹脂としては、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位及び(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位の両者を有する樹脂が好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位及び(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位のみで構成されている樹脂がより好ましい。
 また、(メタ)アクリル樹脂としては、メタクリル酸に由来する構成単位、メタクリル酸メチルに由来する構成単位、及び、アクリル酸エチルに由来する構成単位を有するアクリル樹脂も好ましい。
As the (meth) acrylic resin, a resin having both a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is preferable, and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid are preferable. A resin composed only of structural units derived from the (meth) acrylic acid alkyl ester is more preferable.
Further, as the (meth) acrylic resin, an acrylic resin having a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid, a structural unit derived from methyl methacrylate, and a structural unit derived from ethyl acrylate is also preferable.
 また、(メタ)アクリル樹脂は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、メタクリル酸に由来する構成単位及びメタクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種を有することが好ましく、メタクリル酸に由来する構成単位及びメタクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位の両者を有することが好ましい。
 (メタ)アクリル樹脂におけるメタクリル酸に由来する構成単位及びメタクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位の合計含有量は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、(メタ)アクリル樹脂の全構成単位に対して、40質量%以上が好ましく、60質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は特に制限されず、100質量%以下であってもよく、80質量%以下が好ましい。
Further, the (meth) acrylic resin may have at least one selected from the group consisting of a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid and a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid alkyl ester from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. It is preferable to have both a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid and a structural unit derived from an alkyl methacrylate ester.
The total content of the constituent units derived from methacrylic acid and the constituent units derived from methacrylic acid alkyl ester in the (meth) acrylic resin is higher than that of all the constituent units of the (meth) acrylic resin because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. 40% by mass or more is preferable, and 60% by mass or more is more preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, and may be 100% by mass or less, preferably 80% by mass or less.
 また、(メタ)アクリル樹脂は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、メタクリル酸に由来する構成単位及びメタクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種と、アクリル酸に由来する構成単位及びアクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種とを有することも好ましい。
 本発明の効果がより優れる点から、メタクリル酸に由来する構成単位及びメタクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位の合計含有量は、アクリル酸に由来する構成単位及びアクリル酸アルキルエステルに由来する構成単位の合計含有量に対して、質量比で60/40~80/20が好ましい。
Further, the (meth) acrylic resin is at least one selected from the group consisting of a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid and a structural unit derived from methacrylic acid, and acrylic acid, because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. It is also preferable to have at least one selected from the group consisting of the structural unit derived from the acrylic acid alkyl ester and the structural unit derived from the acrylic acid alkyl ester.
From the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent, the total content of the structural unit derived from methacrylic acid and the structural unit derived from methacrylic acid alkyl ester is the structural unit derived from acrylic acid and the structural unit derived from acrylic acid alkyl ester. The mass ratio is preferably 60/40 to 80/20 with respect to the total content of the ester.
 (メタ)アクリル樹脂は、転写後のネガ型感光性組成物層の現像性に優れる点で、末端にエステル基を有することが好ましい。
 なお、(メタ)アクリル樹脂の末端部は、合成に用いた重合開始剤に由来する部位により構成される。末端にエステル基を有する(メタ)アクリル樹脂は、エステル基を有するラジカルを発生する重合開始剤を用いることにより合成できる。
The (meth) acrylic resin preferably has an ester group at the terminal in that the negative photosensitive composition layer after transfer is excellent in developability.
The terminal portion of the (meth) acrylic resin is composed of a site derived from the polymerization initiator used in the synthesis. A (meth) acrylic resin having an ester group at the terminal can be synthesized by using a polymerization initiator that generates a radical having an ester group.
 また、バインダーポリマーの別の好適態様としては、アルカリ可溶性樹脂が挙げられる。
 バインダーポリマーは、例えば、現像性の点から、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のバインダーポリマーであることが好ましい。
 また、バインダーポリマーは、例えば、加熱により架橋成分と熱架橋し、強固な膜を形成しやすいという点から、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基を有する樹脂(いわゆる、カルボキシ基含有樹脂)であることがより好ましく、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基を有する(メタ)アクリル樹脂(いわゆる、カルボキシ基含有(メタ)アクリル樹脂)であることが更に好ましい。
 バインダーポリマーがカルボキシ基を有する樹脂であると、例えば、ブロックイソシアネート化合物等の熱架橋性化合物を添加して熱架橋することで、3次元架橋密度を高めることができる。また、カルボキシ基を有する樹脂のカルボキシ基が無水化され、疎水化すると、湿熱耐性が改善し得る。
Further, another preferred embodiment of the binder polymer is an alkali-soluble resin.
The binder polymer is preferably, for example, a binder polymer having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more from the viewpoint of developability.
Further, the binder polymer is, for example, a resin having a carboxy group having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more (so-called carboxy group-containing resin) from the viewpoint that it is easily crosslinked with the crosslinked component by heating to form a strong film. More preferably, it is a (meth) acrylic resin having a carboxy group having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more (so-called carboxy group-containing (meth) acrylic resin).
When the binder polymer is a resin having a carboxy group, the three-dimensional crosslink density can be increased by adding a thermally crosslinkable compound such as a blocked isocyanate compound and thermally crosslinking the binder polymer. Further, when the carboxy group of the resin having a carboxy group is dehydrated and made hydrophobic, the wet heat resistance can be improved.
 酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有(メタ)アクリル樹脂としては、上記酸価の条件を満たす限りにおいて、特に制限はなく、公知の(メタ)アクリル樹脂から適宜選択できる。
 例えば、特開2011-095716号公報の段落[0025]に記載のポリマーのうち、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂、特開2010-237589号公報の段落[0033]~[0052]に記載のポリマーのうち、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂等を好ましく使用できる。
The carboxy group-containing (meth) acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more is not particularly limited as long as the above acid value conditions are satisfied, and can be appropriately selected from known (meth) acrylic resins.
For example, among the polymers described in paragraph [0025] of JP-A-2011-095716, carboxy group-containing acrylic resins having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more, paragraphs [0033] to [0052] of JP-A-2010-237589. Among the polymers described in the above, a carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more can be preferably used.
 バインダーポリマーの他の好適態様としてはスチレン-アクリル共重合体が挙げられる。
 なお、本明細書において、スチレン-アクリル共重合体とは、スチレン化合物に由来する構成単位と、(メタ)アクリル化合物に由来する構成単位とを有する樹脂を指し、上記スチレン化合物に由来する構成単位、及び、上記(メタ)アクリル化合物に由来する構成単位の合計含有量は、上記共重合体の全構成単位に対して、30質量%以上が好ましく、50質量%以上がより好ましい。
 また、スチレン化合物に由来する構成単位の含有量の下限値としては、上記共重合体の全構成単位に対して、1質量%以上が好ましく、5質量%以上がより好ましく、20質量%以上が更に好ましい。また、上限値としては、80質量%以下が好ましく、60質量%がより好ましく、50質量%以下が更に好ましい。
 また、上記(メタ)アクリル化合物に由来する構成単位の含有量の下限値としては、上記共重合体の全構成単位に対して、1質量%以上が好ましく、5質量%以上がより好ましく、10質量%以上が更に好ましく、20質量%以上が特に好ましい。また、その上限値としては、95質量%以下が好ましく、60質量%がより好ましく、30質量%以下が更に好ましい。
Another preferred embodiment of the binder polymer is a styrene-acrylic copolymer.
In the present specification, the styrene-acrylic copolymer refers to a resin having a structural unit derived from a styrene compound and a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylic compound, and is a structural unit derived from the styrene compound. The total content of the structural units derived from the (meth) acrylic compound is preferably 30% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, based on all the structural units of the copolymer.
The lower limit of the content of the structural unit derived from the styrene compound is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and 20% by mass or more, based on all the structural units of the copolymer. More preferred. The upper limit is preferably 80% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass, and even more preferably 50% by mass or less.
The lower limit of the content of the structural unit derived from the (meth) acrylic compound is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, based on 10% by mass, based on all the structural units of the copolymer. By mass or more is more preferable, and 20% by mass or more is particularly preferable. The upper limit thereof is preferably 95% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass, and even more preferably 30% by mass or less.
 バインダーポリマーは、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、芳香環構造を有することが好ましく、芳香環構造を有する構成単位を有することがより好ましい。
 芳香環構造を有する構成単位を形成するモノマーとしては、アラルキル基を有するモノマー、スチレン、及び重合可能なスチレン誘導体(例えば、メチルスチレン、ビニルトルエン、tert-ブトキシスチレン、アセトキシスチレン、4-ビニル安息香酸、スチレンダイマー、及びスチレントリマー等)が挙げられる。なかでも、アラルキル基を有するモノマー、又はスチレンが好ましい。アラルキル基としては、置換又は非置換のフェニルアルキル基(ベンジル基を除く)、及び置換又は非置換のベンジル基等が挙げられ、置換又は非置換のベンジル基が好ましい。
The binder polymer preferably has an aromatic ring structure, and more preferably has a structural unit having an aromatic ring structure, from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
The monomers forming the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure include a monomer having an aralkyl group, styrene, and a polymerizable styrene derivative (for example, methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, tert-butoxystyrene, acetoxystyrene, 4-vinylbenzoic acid). , Styrene dimer, styrene trimmer, etc.). Of these, a monomer having an aralkyl group or styrene is preferable. Examples of the aralkyl group include a substituted or unsubstituted phenylalkyl group (excluding a benzyl group), a substituted or unsubstituted benzyl group and the like, and a substituted or unsubstituted benzyl group is preferable.
 フェニルアルキル基を有する単量体としては、フェニルエチル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。 Examples of the monomer having a phenylalkyl group include phenylethyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
 ベンジル基を有する単量体としては、ベンジル基を有する(メタ)アクリレート、例えば、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、及びクロロベンジル(メタ)アクリレート等;ベンジル基を有するビニルモノマー、例えば、ビニルベンジルクロライド、及びビニルベンジルアルコール等が挙げられる。なかでも、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレートが好ましい。 Examples of the monomer having a benzyl group include (meth) acrylate having a benzyl group, for example, benzyl (meth) acrylate, and chlorobenzyl (meth) acrylate; a vinyl monomer having a benzyl group, for example, vinylbenzyl chloride, and the like. Examples include vinylbenzyl alcohol. Of these, benzyl (meth) acrylate is preferable.
 また、バインダーポリマーは、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、下記式(S)で表される構成単位(スチレンに由来する構成単位)を有することがより好ましい。 Further, it is more preferable that the binder polymer has a structural unit (constituent unit derived from styrene) represented by the following formula (S) from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
 バインダーポリマーが芳香環構造を有する構成単位を有する場合、芳香環構造を有する構成単位の含有量は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5~90質量%が好ましく、10~70質量%より好ましく、20~60質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、バインダーポリマーにおける芳香環構造を有する構成単位の含有量は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5~70モル%が好ましく、10~60モル%がより好ましく、20~60モル%が更に好ましい。
 更に、バインダーポリマーにおける上記式(S)で表される構成単位の含有量は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5~70モル%が好ましく、10~60モル%がより好ましく、20~60モル%が更に好ましく、20~50モル%が特に好ましい。
 なお、本明細書において、「構成単位」の含有量をモル比で規定する場合、上記「構成単位」は「モノマー単位」と同義であるものとする。また、本明細書において、上記「モノマー単位」は、高分子反応等により重合後に修飾されていてもよい。以下においても同様である。
When the binder polymer has a structural unit having an aromatic ring structure, the content of the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure is 5 to 90 mass with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. % Is preferred, more preferably 10 to 70% by mass, still more preferably 20 to 60% by mass.
Further, the content of the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure in the binder polymer is preferably 5 to 70 mol%, preferably 10 to 60 mol%, based on all the structural units of the binder polymer, from the viewpoint of further excellent effect of the present invention. Is more preferable, and 20 to 60 mol% is further preferable.
Further, the content of the structural unit represented by the above formula (S) in the binder polymer is preferably 5 to 70 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of further excellent effect of the present invention. From 20 to 60 mol% is more preferable, 20 to 60 mol% is further preferable, and 20 to 50 mol% is particularly preferable.
In the present specification, when the content of the "constituent unit" is specified by the molar ratio, the above "constituent unit" shall be synonymous with the "monomer unit". Further, in the present specification, the above-mentioned "monomer unit" may be modified after polymerization by a polymer reaction or the like. The same applies to the following.
 バインダーポリマーは、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有することが好ましい。つまり、バインダーポリマーは、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位を有することが好ましい。脂肪族炭化水素環構造としては単環でも多環でもよい。なかでも、バインダーポリマーは、2環以上の脂肪族炭化水素環が縮環した環構造を有することがより好ましい。 The binder polymer preferably has an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. That is, the binder polymer preferably has a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure. The aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure may be monocyclic or polycyclic. Above all, it is more preferable that the binder polymer has a ring structure in which two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are fused.
 脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位における脂肪族炭化水素環構造を構成する環としては、トリシクロデカン環、シクロヘキサン環、シクロペンタン環、ノルボルナン環、及び、イソボロン環が挙げられる。
 なかでも、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、2環以上の脂肪族炭化水素環が縮環した環が好ましく、テトラヒドロジシクロペンタジエン環(トリシクロ[5.2.1.02,6]デカン環)がより好ましい。
 脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位を形成するモノマーとしては、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、及び、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
 また、バインダーポリマーは、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、下記式(Cy)で表される構成単位を有することがより好ましく、上記式(S)で表される構成単位、及び、下記式(Cy)で表される構成単位を有することがより好ましい。
Examples of the ring constituting the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in the structural unit having the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure include a tricyclodecane ring, a cyclohexane ring, a cyclopentane ring, a norbornane ring, and an isoborone ring.
Among them, a ring in which two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are condensed is preferable because the effect of the present invention is more excellent, and a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring (tricyclo [5.2.1.0 2,6 ] decane) is preferable. Ring) is more preferred.
Examples of the monomer forming a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure include dicyclopentanyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, and isobornyl (meth) acrylate.
Further, the binder polymer more preferably has a structural unit represented by the following formula (Cy), and the structural unit represented by the above formula (S) and the following formula. It is more preferable to have a structural unit represented by (Cy).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 式(Cy)中、Rは水素原子又はメチル基を表し、RCyは脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する一価の基を表す。 In the formula (Cy), RM represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and RCy represents a monovalent group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure.
 式(Cy)におけるRは、メチル基であることが好ましい。
 式(Cy)におけるRCyは、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、炭素数5~20の脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する一価の基であることが好ましく、炭素数6~16の脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する一価の基であることがより好ましく、炭素数8~14の脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する一価の基であることが更に好ましい。
 また、式(Cy)のRCyにおける脂肪族炭化水素環構造は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、シクロペンタン環構造、シクロヘキサン環構造、テトラヒドロジシクロペンタジエン環構造、ノルボルナン環構造、又は、イソボロン環構造であることが好ましく、シクロヘキサン環構造、又は、テトラヒドロジシクロペンタジエン環構造であることがより好ましく、テトラヒドロジシクロペンタジエン環構造であることが更に好ましい。
 更に、式(Cy)のRCyにおける脂肪族炭化水素環構造は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、2環以上の脂肪族炭化水素環が縮環した環構造であることが好ましく、2~4環の脂肪族炭化水素環が縮環した環であることがより好ましい。
 更に、式(Cy)におけるRCyは、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、式(Cy)における-C(=O)O-の酸素原子と脂肪族炭化水素環構造とが直接結合する基、すなわち、脂肪族炭化水素環基であることが好ましく、シクロヘキシル基、又は、ジシクロペンタニル基であることがより好ましく、ジシクロペンタニル基であることが更に好ましい。
The RM in the formula ( Cy ) is preferably a methyl group.
The RCy in the formula ( Cy ) is preferably a monovalent group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure having 5 to 20 carbon atoms, and a fat having 6 to 16 carbon atoms, because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. It is more preferably a monovalent group having a group hydrocarbon ring structure, and even more preferably a monovalent group having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure having 8 to 14 carbon atoms.
Further, the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in RCy of the formula ( Cy ) has a cyclopentane ring structure, a cyclohexane ring structure, a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring structure, a norbornane ring structure, or a norbornane ring structure, because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. It is preferably an isoborone ring structure, more preferably a cyclohexane ring structure or a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring structure, and even more preferably a tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene ring structure.
Further, the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in RCy of the formula ( Cy ) is preferably a ring structure in which two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are fused, from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. It is more preferable that the ring is a condensed ring of ~ 4 aliphatic hydrocarbon rings.
Further, RCy in the formula ( Cy ) is a group in which the oxygen atom of —C (= O) O— in the formula (Cy) and the aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure are directly bonded, because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. That is, it is preferably an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring group, more preferably a cyclohexyl group or a dicyclopentanyl group, and even more preferably a dicyclopentanyl group.
 バインダーポリマーは、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位を1種単独で有していても、2種以上有していてもよい。
 バインダーポリマーが脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位を有する場合、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位の含有量は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5~90質量%が好ましく、10~80質量%がより好ましく、20~70質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、バインダーポリマーにおける脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位の含有量は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5~70モル%が好ましく、10~60モル%がより好ましく、20~50モル%が更に好ましい。
 更に、バインダーポリマーにおける上記式(Cy)で表される構成単位の含有量は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5~70モル%が好ましく、10~60モル%がより好ましく、20~50モル%が更に好ましい。
The binder polymer may have one type of structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure alone, or may have two or more types.
When the binder polymer has a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, the content of the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure is higher than that of all the structural units of the binder polymer because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. 5 to 90% by mass is preferable, 10 to 80% by mass is more preferable, and 20 to 70% by mass is further preferable.
Further, the content of the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in the binder polymer is preferably 5 to 70 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. 60 mol% is more preferable, and 20 to 50 mol% is even more preferable.
Further, the content of the structural unit represented by the above formula (Cy) in the binder polymer is preferably 5 to 70 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of further excellent effect of the present invention. -60 mol% is more preferred, and 20-50 mol% is even more preferred.
 バインダーポリマーが芳香環構造を有する構成単位及び脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位を有する場合、芳香環構造を有する構成単位及び脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位の総含有量は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、10~90質量%が好ましく、20~80質量%がより好ましく、40~75質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、バインダーポリマーにおける芳香環構造を有する構成単位及び脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する構成単位の総含有量は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、10~80モル%が好ましく、20~70モル%がより好ましく、40~60モル%が更に好ましい。
 更に、バインダーポリマーにおける上記式(S)で表される構成単位及び上記式(Cy)で表される構成単位の総含有量は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、10~80モル%が好ましく、20~70モル%がより好ましく、40~60モル%が更に好ましい。
 また、バインダーポリマーにおける上記式(S)で表される構成単位のモル量nSと上記式(Cy)で表される構成単位のモル量nCyは、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、下記式(SCy)に示す関係を満たすことが好ましく、下記式(SCy-1)を満たすことがより好ましく、下記式(SCy-2)を満たすことが更に好ましい。
  0.2≦nS/(nS+nCy)≦0.8   式(SCy)
  0.30≦nS/(nS+nCy)≦0.75   式(SCy-1)
  0.40≦nS/(nS+nCy)≦0.70   式(SCy-2)
When the binder polymer has a structural unit having an aromatic ring structure and a structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, the total content of the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure and the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure is the present. From the viewpoint of further excellent effect of the invention, 10 to 90% by mass is preferable, 20 to 80% by mass is more preferable, and 40 to 75% by mass is further preferable, based on all the structural units of the binder polymer.
Further, the total content of the structural unit having an aromatic ring structure and the structural unit having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure in the binder polymer is 10 with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. It is preferably -80 mol%, more preferably 20-70 mol%, still more preferably 40-60 mol%.
Further, the total content of the structural unit represented by the above formula (S) and the structural unit represented by the above formula (Cy) in the binder polymer is the total structural unit of the binder polymer from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. On the other hand, 10 to 80 mol% is preferable, 20 to 70 mol% is more preferable, and 40 to 60 mol% is further preferable.
Further, the molar amount nS of the structural unit represented by the above formula (S) and the molar amount nCy of the structural unit represented by the above formula (Cy) in the binder polymer are given by the following formulas because the effects of the present invention are more excellent. It is preferable to satisfy the relationship shown in (SCy), more preferably to satisfy the following formula (SCy-1), and further preferably to satisfy the following formula (SCy-2).
0.2 ≤ nS / (nS + nCy) ≤ 0.8 Equation (SCy)
0.30 ≤ nS / (nS + nCy) ≤ 0.75 Equation (SCy-1)
0.40 ≤ nS / (nS + nCy) ≤ 0.70 Equation (SCy-2)
 バインダーポリマーは、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、酸基を有する構成単位を有することが好ましい。
 上記酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、ホスホン酸基、及び、リン酸基が挙げられ、カルボキシ基が好ましい。
 上記酸基を有する構成単位としては、下記に示す、(メタ)アクリル酸由来の構成単位が好ましく、メタクリル酸由来の構成単位がより好ましい。
The binder polymer preferably has a structural unit having an acid group because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group, and a carboxy group is preferable.
As the structural unit having the acid group, the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid shown below is preferable, and the structural unit derived from methacrylic acid is more preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
 バインダーポリマーは、酸基を有する構成単位を1種単独で有していても、2種以上有していてもよい。
 バインダーポリマーが酸基を有する構成単位を有する場合、酸基を有する構成単位の含有量は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5~50質量%が好ましく、5~40質量%がより好ましく、10~30質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、バインダーポリマーにおける酸基を有する構成単位の含有量は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5~70モル%が好ましく、10~50モル%がより好ましく、20~40モル%が更に好ましい。
 更に、バインダーポリマーにおける(メタ)アクリル酸由来の構成単位の含有量は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5~70モル%が好ましく、10~50モル%がより好ましく、20~40モル%が更に好ましい。
The binder polymer may have one type of structural unit having an acid group alone or two or more types.
When the binder polymer has a structural unit having an acid group, the content of the structural unit having an acid group is 5 to 50% by mass with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. It is preferable, 5 to 40% by mass is more preferable, and 10 to 30% by mass is further preferable.
Further, the content of the constituent unit having an acid group in the binder polymer is preferably 5 to 70 mol%, preferably 10 to 50 mol%, based on all the constituent units of the binder polymer, from the viewpoint of further excellent effect of the present invention. More preferably, 20-40 mol% is even more preferable.
Further, the content of the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid in the binder polymer is preferably 5 to 70 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of further excellent effect of the present invention, and is preferably 10 to 50. More preferably, mol%, more preferably 20-40 mol%.
 バインダーポリマーは、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、反応性基を有することが好ましく、反応性基を有する構成単位を有することがより好ましい。
 反応性基としては、ラジカル重合性基が好ましく、エチレン性不飽和基がより好ましい。また、バインダーポリマーがエチレン性不飽和基を有している場合、バインダーポリマーは、側鎖にエチレン性不飽和基を有する構成単位を有することが好ましい。
 本明細書において、「主鎖」とは、樹脂を構成する高分子化合物の分子中で相対的に最も長い結合鎖を表し、「側鎖」とは、主鎖から枝分かれしている原子団を表す。
 エチレン性不飽和基としては、アリル基又は(メタ)アクリロキシ基がより好ましい。
 反応性基を有する構成単位の一例としては、下記に示すものが挙げられるが、これらに限定されない。
The binder polymer preferably has a reactive group, and more preferably has a structural unit having a reactive group, from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
As the reactive group, a radically polymerizable group is preferable, and an ethylenically unsaturated group is more preferable. When the binder polymer has an ethylenically unsaturated group, the binder polymer preferably has a structural unit having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain.
In the present specification, the "main chain" represents a relatively longest binding chain among the molecules of the polymer compound constituting the resin, and the "side chain" refers to an atomic group branched from the main chain. show.
As the ethylenically unsaturated group, an allyl group or a (meth) acryloxy group is more preferable.
Examples of structural units having a reactive group include, but are not limited to, those shown below.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
 バインダーポリマーは、反応性基を有する構成単位を1種単独で有していても、2種以上有していてもよい。
 バインダーポリマーが反応性基を有する構成単位を有する場合、反応性基を有する構成単位の含有量の下限値としては、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5質量%以上が好ましく、10質量%以上がより好ましく、20質量%以上が更に好ましく、35質量%以上が特に好ましく、40質量%以上が最も好ましい。また、その上限値としては、70質量%以下が好ましく、60質量%以下がより好ましく、50質量%以下が更に好ましい。
 また、バインダーポリマーにおける反応性基を有する構成単位の含有量の下限値は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、バインダーポリマーの全構成単位に対して、5モル%以上が好ましく、10モル%以上がより好ましく、20モル%以上が更に好ましく、35モル%以上が特に好ましく、40モル%以上が最も好ましい。また、その上限値としては、70モル%以下が好ましく、60モル%以下がより好ましく、50モル%以下が更に好ましい。
The binder polymer may have one type of structural unit having a reactive group alone or two or more types.
When the binder polymer has a structural unit having a reactive group, the lower limit of the content of the structural unit having a reactive group is set with respect to all the structural units of the binder polymer because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. 5% by mass or more is preferable, 10% by mass or more is more preferable, 20% by mass or more is further preferable, 35% by mass or more is particularly preferable, and 40% by mass or more is most preferable. The upper limit is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and further preferably 50% by mass or less.
Further, the lower limit of the content of the structural unit having a reactive group in the binder polymer is preferably 5 mol% or more, preferably 10 mol%, based on all the structural units of the binder polymer, from the viewpoint of further improving the effect of the present invention. The above is more preferable, 20 mol% or more is further preferable, 35 mol% or more is particularly preferable, and 40 mol% or more is most preferable. The upper limit thereof is preferably 70 mol% or less, more preferably 60 mol% or less, still more preferably 50 mol% or less.
 反応性基をバインダーポリマーに導入する手段としては、ヒドロキシ基、カルボキシ基、第一級アミノ基、第二級アミノ基、アセトアセチル基、及び、スルホ基等の官能基に、エポキシ化合物、ブロックイソシアネート化合物、イソシアネート化合物、ビニルスルホン化合物、アルデヒド化合物、メチロール化合物、及び、カルボン酸無水物等の化合物を反応させる方法が挙げられる。
 反応性基をバインダーポリマーに導入する手段の好ましい例としては、カルボキシ基を有するポリマーを重合反応により合成した後、高分子反応により、得られたポリマーのカルボキシ基の一部にグリシジル(メタ)アクリレートを反応させて、(メタ)アクリロキシ基をポリマーに導入する手段が挙げられる。この手段により、側鎖に(メタ)アクリロキシ基を有するバインダーポリマーを得ることができる。
 上記重合反応は、70~100℃の温度条件で行うことが好ましく、80~90℃の温度条件で行うことがより好ましい。上記重合反応に用いる重合開始剤としては、アゾ系開始剤が好ましく、例えば、富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製のV-601(商品名)又はV-65(商品名)がより好ましい。上記高分子反応は、80~110℃の温度条件で行うことが好ましい。上記高分子反応においては、アンモニウム塩等の触媒を用いることが好ましい。
As a means for introducing a reactive group into a binder polymer, a functional group such as a hydroxy group, a carboxy group, a primary amino group, a secondary amino group, an acetoacetyl group, and a sulfo group, an epoxy compound, and a blocked isocyanate are used. Examples thereof include a method of reacting a compound such as a compound, an isocyanate compound, a vinyl sulfone compound, an aldehyde compound, a methylol compound, and a carboxylic acid anhydride.
A preferred example of a means for introducing a reactive group into a binder polymer is that a polymer having a carboxy group is synthesized by a polymerization reaction and then glycidyl (meth) acrylate is added to a part of the carboxy group of the obtained polymer by the polymer reaction. Is mentioned as a means for introducing a (meth) acryloxy group into a polymer by reacting with the polymer. By this means, a binder polymer having a (meth) acryloxy group in the side chain can be obtained.
The polymerization reaction is preferably carried out under a temperature condition of 70 to 100 ° C., and more preferably carried out under a temperature condition of 80 to 90 ° C. As the polymerization initiator used in the above polymerization reaction, an azo-based initiator is preferable, and for example, V-601 (trade name) or V-65 (trade name) manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd. is more preferable. The polymer reaction is preferably carried out under temperature conditions of 80 to 110 ° C. In the above polymer reaction, it is preferable to use a catalyst such as an ammonium salt.
 バインダーポリマーとしては、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、以下に示すポリマーX1~X4が好ましい。なお、以下に示す各構成単位の含有比率(a~d)及び重量平均分子量Mw等は目的に応じて適宜変更できるが、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、なかでも、以下の構成であるのが好ましい。
 (ポリマーX1) a:20~60質量%、b:10~50質量%、c:5.0~25質量%、d:10~50質量%。
 (ポリマーX2) a:20~60質量%、b:10~50質量%、c:5.0~25質量%、d:10~50質量%。
 (ポリマーX3) a:25~65質量%、b:1.0~20質量%、c:5.0~25質量%、d:10~50質量%。
 (ポリマーX4) a:1.0~20質量%、b:20~60質量%、c:5.0~25質量%、d:10~50質量%。
As the binder polymer, the polymers X1 to X4 shown below are preferable from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. The content ratios (a to d) and the weight average molecular weight Mw of each structural unit shown below can be appropriately changed depending on the intended purpose, but the following configuration is particularly effective in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. Is preferable.
(Polymer X1) a: 20 to 60% by mass, b: 10 to 50% by mass, c: 5.0 to 25% by mass, d: 10 to 50% by mass.
(Polymer X2) a: 20 to 60% by mass, b: 10 to 50% by mass, c: 5.0 to 25% by mass, d: 10 to 50% by mass.
(Polymer X3) a: 25 to 65% by mass, b: 1.0 to 20% by mass, c: 5.0 to 25% by mass, d: 10 to 50% by mass.
(Polymer X4) a: 1.0 to 20% by mass, b: 20 to 60% by mass, c: 5.0 to 25% by mass, d: 10 to 50% by mass.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000006

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000007

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000006

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000007

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-I000008
 また、バインダーポリマーとしては、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、スチレンに由来する構成単位、メタアクリル酸メチルに由来する構成単位、メタクリル酸-2-ヒドロキシエチルに由来する構成単位、及び、メタクリル酸にグリシジルメタクリレートを付加させてなる構成単位を含むポリマーであるのもの好ましい。 Further, as the binder polymer, since the effect of the present invention is more excellent, a structural unit derived from styrene, a structural unit derived from methyl methacrylic acid, a structural unit derived from -2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate, and methacrylic acid. A polymer containing a structural unit obtained by adding glycidyl methacrylate to an acid is preferable.
 また、バインダーポリマーは、カルボン酸無水物構造を有する構成単位を有する重合体(以下、「重合体X」ともいう。)を含んでいてもよい。
 カルボン酸無水物構造は、鎖状カルボン酸無水物構造、及び、環状カルボン酸無水物構造のいずれであってもよいが、環状カルボン酸無水物構造であることが好ましい。
 環状カルボン酸無水物構造の環としては、5~7員環が好ましく、5員環又は6員環がより好ましく、5員環が更に好ましい。
Further, the binder polymer may contain a polymer having a structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure (hereinafter, also referred to as “polymer X”).
The carboxylic acid anhydride structure may be either a chain carboxylic acid anhydride structure or a cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride structure, but a cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride structure is preferable.
As the ring having a cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride structure, a 5- to 7-membered ring is preferable, a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring is more preferable, and a 5-membered ring is further preferable.
 カルボン酸無水物構造を有する構成単位は、下記式P-1で表される化合物から水素原子を2個除いた2価の基を主鎖中に含む構成単位、又は、下記式P-1で表される化合物から水素原子を1個除いた1価の基が主鎖に対して直接又は2価の連結基を介して結合している構成単位であることが好ましい。 The structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure is a structural unit containing a divalent group obtained by removing two hydrogen atoms from the compound represented by the following formula P-1 in the main chain, or the following formula P-1. It is preferable that the monovalent group obtained by removing one hydrogen atom from the represented compound is a structural unit bonded directly to the main chain or via a divalent linking group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
 式P-1中、RA1aは、置換基を表し、n1a個のRA1aは、同一でも異なっていてもよく、Z1aは、-C(=O)-O-C(=O)-を含む環を形成する2価の基を表し、n1aは、0以上の整数を表す。 In the formula P-1, RA1a represents a substituent, n1a RA1a may be the same or different, and Z1a is −C (= O) −OC (= O) −. Represents a divalent group forming a ring containing, and n 1a represents an integer of 0 or more.
 RA1aで表される置換基としては、例えば、アルキル基が挙げられる。
 Z1aとしては、炭素数2~4のアルキレン基が好ましく、炭素数2又は3のアルキレン基がより好ましく、炭素数2のアルキレン基が更に好ましい。
 n1aは、0以上の整数を表す。Z1aが炭素数2~4のアルキレン基を表す場合、n1aは、0~4の整数であることが好ましく、0~2の整数であることがより好ましく、0であることが更に好ましい。
 n1aが2以上の整数を表す場合、複数存在するRA1aは、同一でも異なっていてもよい。また、複数存在するRA1aは、互いに結合して環を形成してもよいが、互いに結合して環を形成していないことが好ましい。
Examples of the substituent represented by RA1a include an alkyl group.
As Z 1a , an alkylene group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms is preferable, an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms is more preferable, and an alkylene group having 2 carbon atoms is further preferable.
n 1a represents an integer of 0 or more. When Z 1a represents an alkylene group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms, n 1a is preferably an integer of 0 to 4, more preferably an integer of 0 to 2, and even more preferably 0.
When n 1a represents an integer of 2 or more, a plurality of RA1a may be the same or different. Further, although a plurality of RA1a may be bonded to each other to form a ring, it is preferable that the RA1a are not bonded to each other to form a ring.
 カルボン酸無水物構造を有する構成単位としては、不飽和カルボン酸無水物に由来する構成単位が好ましく、不飽和環式カルボン酸無水物に由来する構成単位がより好ましく、不飽和脂肪族環式カルボン酸無水物に由来する構成単位が更に好ましく、無水マレイン酸又は無水イタコン酸に由来する構成単位が特に好ましく、無水マレイン酸に由来する構成単位が最も好ましい。 As the structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure, a structural unit derived from an unsaturated carboxylic acid anhydride is preferable, a structural unit derived from an unsaturated cyclic carboxylic acid anhydride is more preferable, and an unsaturated aliphatic cyclic carboxylic acid is preferable. A structural unit derived from an acid anhydride is more preferable, a structural unit derived from maleic anhydride or an itaconic acid anhydride is particularly preferable, and a structural unit derived from maleic anhydride is most preferable.
 以下、カルボン酸無水物構造を有する構成単位の具体例を挙げるが、カルボン酸無水物構造を有する構成単位は、これらの具体例に限定されるものではない。下記の構成単位中、Rxは、水素原子、メチル基、CHOH基、又は、CF基を表し、Meは、メチル基を表す。 Hereinafter, specific examples of the structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure will be given, but the structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure is not limited to these specific examples. In the following structural units, Rx represents a hydrogen atom, a methyl group, a CH 2 OH group, or CF 3 groups, and Me represents a methyl group.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
 重合体Xにおけるカルボン酸無水物構造を有する構成単位は、1種単独であってもよく、2種以上であってもよい。 The structural unit having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure in the polymer X may be one kind alone or two or more kinds.
 カルボン酸無水物構造を有する構成単位の総含有量は、重合体Xの全構成単位に対して、0~60モル%が好ましく、5~40モル%がより好ましく、10~35モル%が更に好ましい。 The total content of the structural units having a carboxylic acid anhydride structure is preferably 0 to 60 mol%, more preferably 5 to 40 mol%, and further preferably 10 to 35 mol% with respect to all the structural units of the polymer X. preferable.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、重合体Xを1種のみ含んでいてもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層が重合体Xを含む場合、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、重合体Xの含有量は、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、0.1~30質量%が好ましく、0.2~20質量%がより好ましく、0.5~20質量%が更に好ましく、1~20質量%が更に好ましい。
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain only one kind of polymer X, or may contain two or more kinds of polymer X.
When the negative photosensitive composition layer contains the polymer X, the content of the polymer X is 0.1 with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. It is preferably from 30% by mass, more preferably 0.2 to 20% by mass, still more preferably 0.5 to 20% by mass, still more preferably 1 to 20% by mass.
 バインダーポリマーの重量平均分子量(Mw)は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、5,000以上が好ましく、10,000以上がより好ましい。また、その上限値としては、120,000以下が好ましく、60,000以下がより好ましく、35,000以下が更に好ましく、30,000以下が特に好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the binder polymer is preferably 5,000 or more, more preferably 10,000 or more, because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. The upper limit thereof is preferably 120,000 or less, more preferably 60,000 or less, further preferably 35,000 or less, and particularly preferably 30,000 or less.
 バインダーポリマーの酸価は、10~200mgKOH/gが好ましく、60~200mgKOH/gがより好ましく、60~150mgKOH/gが更に好ましく、70~1150mgKOH/gが特に好ましく、70~125mgKOH/gが最も好ましい。
 なお、バインダーポリマーの酸価は酸価は、例えば、JIS K0070:1992に記載の方法に従って、化合物中における酸基の平均含有量から算出できる。バインダーポリマーの分散度は、現像性の観点から、1.0~6.0が好ましく、1.0~5.0がより好ましく、1.0~4.0が更に好ましく、1.0~3.0が特に好ましい。
The acid value of the binder polymer is preferably 10 to 200 mgKOH / g, more preferably 60 to 200 mgKOH / g, further preferably 60 to 150 mgKOH / g, particularly preferably 70 to 1150 mgKOH / g, and most preferably 70 to 125 mgKOH / g. ..
The acid value of the binder polymer can be calculated from, for example, the average content of acid groups in the compound according to the method described in JIS K0070: 1992. The dispersity of the binder polymer is preferably 1.0 to 6.0, more preferably 1.0 to 5.0, further preferably 1.0 to 4.0, and 1.0 to 3 from the viewpoint of developability. .0 is particularly preferred.
 バインダーポリマーとしては、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、バインダーポリマーの重量平均分子量(Mw)が60,000以下であり、且つバインダーポリマー中のラジカル重合性基を有する構成単位の割合が20質量%以上であるのが好ましく、バインダーポリマーの重量平均分子量(Mw)が35,000以下であり、且つバインダーポリマー中のラジカル重合性基を有する構成単位の割合が35質量%以上であるのがより好ましく、バインダーポリマーの重量平均分子量(Mw)が30,000以下であり、且つバインダーポリマー中のラジカル重合性基を有する構成単位の割合が40質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。 As the binder polymer, in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the binder polymer is 60,000 or less, and the proportion of the structural unit having a radically polymerizable group in the binder polymer is 20 mass. % Or more, more preferably, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the binder polymer is 35,000 or less, and the proportion of the structural unit having a radically polymerizable group in the binder polymer is 35% by mass or more. It is more preferable that the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the binder polymer is 30,000 or less, and the proportion of the structural unit having a radically polymerizable group in the binder polymer is 40% by mass or more.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、バインダーポリマーを1種のみ含んでいてもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。
 バインダーポリマーの含有量は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、10~90質量%が好ましく、20~80質量%がより好ましく、30~70質量%が更に好ましく、30~60質量%が更に好ましい。
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain only one kind of binder polymer, or may contain two or more kinds of binder polymers.
The content of the binder polymer is preferably 10 to 90% by mass, more preferably 20 to 80% by mass, and 30 to 30 to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. 70% by mass is more preferable, and 30 to 60% by mass is further preferable.
<重合性化合物>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、エチレン性不飽和基を有する重合性化合物(以下、単に「エチレン性不飽和化合物」ともいう。)を含む。
 エチレン性不飽和化合物は、ラジカル重合性化合物であるのが好ましい。エチレン性不飽和基としては、(メタ)アクリロキシ基が好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和化合物中のエチレン性不飽和基の個数としては特に制限されないが、1個以上が好ましく、2個以上がより好ましい。上限値は特に制限されないが、例えば、20個以下である。
 なお、本明細書におけるエチレン性不飽和化合物は、上記バインダーポリマー以外の化合物であり、分子量5,000未満であることが好ましい。
<Polymerizable compound>
The negative photosensitive composition layer contains a polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “ethylenically unsaturated compound”).
The ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably a radically polymerizable compound. As the ethylenically unsaturated group, a (meth) acryloxy group is preferable.
The number of ethylenically unsaturated groups in the ethylenically unsaturated compound is not particularly limited, but one or more is preferable, and two or more are more preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 20 or less.
The ethylenically unsaturated compound in the present specification is a compound other than the binder polymer, and preferably has a molecular weight of less than 5,000.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物の好適態様の一つとして、下記式(M)で表される化合物(単に、「化合物M」ともいう。)が挙げられる。
  Q-R-Q   式(M)
 式(M)中、Q及びQはそれぞれ独立に、(メタ)アクリロイルオキシ基を表し、Rは鎖状構造を有する二価の連結基を表す。
As one of the preferred embodiments of the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a compound represented by the following formula (M) (simply referred to as “Compound M”) can be mentioned.
Q2 - R1 - Q1 formula (M)
In formula (M), Q 1 and Q 2 each independently represent a (meth) acryloyloxy group, and R 1 represents a divalent linking group having a chain structure.
 式(M)におけるQ及びQは、合成容易性の点から、Q及びQは同じ基であることが好ましい。
 また、式(M)におけるQ及びQは、反応性の点から、アクリロイルオキシ基であることが好ましい。
 式(M)におけるRとしては、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、アルキレン基、アルキレンオキシアルキレン基(-L-O-L-)、又は、ポリアルキレンオキシアルキレン基(-(L-O)-L-)が好ましく、炭素数2~20の炭化水素基、又は、ポリアルキレンオキシアルキレン基がより好ましく、炭素数4~20のアルキレン基が更に好ましく、炭素数6~18の直鎖アルキレン基が特に好ましい。
 上記炭化水素基は、少なくとも一部に鎖状構造を有していればよく、上記鎖状構造以外の部分としては、特に制限はなく、例えば、分岐鎖状、環状、又は、炭素数1~5の直鎖状アルキレン基、アリーレン基、エーテル結合、及び、それらの組み合わせのいずれであってもよく、アルキレン基、又は、2以上のアルキレン基と1以上のアリーレン基とを組み合わせた基が好ましく、アルキレン基がより好ましく、直鎖アルキレン基が更に好ましい。
 なお、上記Lは、それぞれ独立に、アルキレン基を表し、エチレン基、プロピレン基、又は、ブチレン基が好ましく、エチレン基又は1,2-プロピレン基がより好ましい。pは2以上の整数を表し、2~10の整数であることが好ましい。
It is preferable that Q 1 and Q 2 in the formula (M) have the same group as Q 1 and Q 2 from the viewpoint of ease of synthesis.
Further, Q 1 and Q 2 in the formula (M) are preferably acryloyloxy groups from the viewpoint of reactivity.
As R 1 in the formula (M), an alkylene group, an alkyleneoxyalkylene group (-L 1 -OL 1- ), or a polyalkylene oxyalkylene group (-(L)" is used because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. 1 -O) p -L 1- ) is preferable, a hydrocarbon group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms or a polyalkyleneoxyalkylene group is more preferable, an alkylene group having 4 to 20 carbon atoms is further preferable, and an alkylene group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms is more preferable. Eighteen linear alkylene groups are particularly preferred.
The hydrocarbon group may have a chain structure at least partially, and the portion other than the chain structure is not particularly limited, and is, for example, a branched chain, cyclic, or having 1 to 1 to carbon atoms. It may be any of 5 linear alkylene groups, arylene groups, ether bonds, and combinations thereof, and alkylene groups or groups in which two or more alkylene groups and one or more arylene groups are combined are preferable. , The alkylene group is more preferable, and the linear alkylene group is further preferable.
The above L 1 independently represents an alkylene group, and an ethylene group, a propylene group, or a butylene group is preferable, and an ethylene group or a 1,2-propylene group is more preferable. p represents an integer of 2 or more, and is preferably an integer of 2 to 10.
 また、化合物MにおけるQとQとの間を連結する最短の連結鎖の原子数は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、3~50個が好ましく、4~40個がより好ましく、6~20個が更に好ましく、8~12個が特に好ましい。
 本明細書において、「QとQの間を連結する最短の連結鎖の原子数」とは、Qに連結するRにおける原子からQに連結するRにおける原子までを連結する最短の原子数である。
Further, the number of atoms of the shortest connecting chain connecting between Q1 and Q2 in the compound M is preferably 3 to 50, more preferably 4 to 40, from the viewpoint of further excellent effect of the present invention. 6 to 20 are more preferable, and 8 to 12 are particularly preferable.
In the present specification, "the number of atoms in the shortest connecting chain connecting between Q1 and Q2 " means the atoms in R1 connected to Q1 to the atoms in R1 connected to Q2 . The shortest number of atoms.
 化合物Mの具体例としては、1,3-ブタンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、テトラメチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,7-ヘプタンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,8-オクタンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,9-ノナンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,10-デカンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、水添ビスフェノールAのジ(メタ)アクリレート、水添ビスフェノールFのジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレンレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリ(エチレングリコール/プロピレングリコール)ジ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、ポリブチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。上記エステルモノマーは混合物としても使用できる。
 上記化合物のなかでも、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,9-ノナンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,10-デカンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレートからなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物であることが好ましく、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,9-ノナンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、1,10-デカンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレートからなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物であることがより好ましく、1,9-ノナンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、1,10-デカンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレートからなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物であることが更に好ましい。
Specific examples of the compound M include 1,3-butanediol di (meth) acrylate, tetramethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate, and 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate. 1,7-Heptanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,8-octanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate, hydrogenated Di (meth) acrylate of bisphenol A, di (meth) acrylate of hydrogenated bisphenol F, polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polypropylenelen glycol di (meth) acrylate, poly (ethylene glycol / propylene glycol) di (meth) acrylate , And polybutylene glycol di (meth) acrylate. The ester monomer can also be used as a mixture.
Among the above compounds, 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate, because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. It is preferably at least one compound selected from the group consisting of acrylates and neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylates, preferably 1,6-hexanediol di (meth) acrylates and 1,9-nonanediol di (1) -nonanediol di (meth) acrylates. More preferably, it is at least one compound selected from the group consisting of a meta) acrylate and a 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate, and the 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, and More preferably, it is at least one compound selected from the group consisting of 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate.
 また、エチレン性不飽和化合物の好適態様の一つとして、2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物が挙げられる。
 本明細書において、「2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物」とは、一分子中にエチレン性不飽和基を2個以上有する化合物を意味する。上記エチレン性不飽和基としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基が好ましい。2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、(メタ)アクリレート化合物が好ましい。
Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound can be mentioned.
As used herein, the term "bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound" means a compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule. As the ethylenically unsaturated group, a (meth) acryloyl group is preferable. As the bifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound, a (meth) acrylate compound is preferable.
 2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、特に制限はなく、公知の化合物の中から適宜選択できる。
 上記化合物M以外の2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、1,4-シクロヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
The bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known compounds.
Examples of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound other than the compound M include tricyclodecanedimethanol di (meth) acrylate and 1,4-cyclohexanediol di (meth) acrylate.
 2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物の市販品としては、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレート(商品名:NKエステル A-DCP、新中村化学工業(株)製)、トリシクロデカンジメナノールジメタクリレート(商品名:NKエステル DCP、新中村化学工業(株)製)、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレート(商品名:NKエステル A-NOD-N、新中村化学工業(株)製)、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(商品名:NKエステル A-HD-N、新中村化学工業(株)製)が挙げられる。 Commercially available products of bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds include tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate (trade name: NK ester A-DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and tricyclodecanedimenanol dimethacrylate (trade name: NK ester A-DCP). Product name: NK ester DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., 1,9-nonandiol diacrylate (trade name: NK ester A-NOD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), 1,6 -Hexanediol diacrylate (trade name: NK ester A-HD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) can be mentioned.
 3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、特に制限はなく、公知の化合物の中から適宜選択できる。
 3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、ジペンタエリスリトール(トリ/テトラ/ペンタ/ヘキサ)(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトール(トリ/テトラ)(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジトリメチロールプロパンテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、イソシアヌル酸(メタ)アクリレート、及び、グリセリントリ(メタ)アクリレート骨格の(メタ)アクリレート化合物が挙げられる。
The trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known compounds.
Examples of the trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound include dipentaerythritol (tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol (tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate, and trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate. Examples thereof include ditrimethylolpropane tetra (meth) acrylate, isocyanuric acid (meth) acrylate, and (meth) acrylate compound having a glycerintri (meth) acrylate skeleton.
 ここで、「(トリ/テトラ/ペンタ/ヘキサ)(メタ)アクリレート」は、トリ(メタ)アクリレート、テトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、ヘキサ(メタ)アクリレートを包含する概念であり、「(トリ/テトラ)(メタ)アクリレート」は、トリ(メタ)アクリレート及びテトラ(メタ)アクリレートを包含する概念である。
 3官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物の市販品としては、例えば、トリメチロールプロパントリアクリレート(新中村化学工業社製「A-TMPT」等が挙げられる。
 また、4官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物の市販品としては、例えば、ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(新中村化学工業社製「A-TMMT」)等が挙げられる。
 また、5又は6官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物の市販品としては、ジペンタエリスリトールポリアクリレート(新中村化学工業社製「A-DPH」)等が挙げられる。
Here, "(tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate" is a concept including tri (meth) acrylate, tetra (meth) acrylate, penta (meth) acrylate, and hexa (meth) acrylate. Yes, "(tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate" is a concept that includes tri (meth) acrylate and tetra (meth) acrylate.
Examples of commercially available trifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds include trimethylolpropane triacrylate (“A-TMPT” manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
Examples of commercially available products of the tetrafunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound include pentaerythritol tetraacrylate (“A-TMMT” manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
Examples of commercially available products of 5- or hexafunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds include dipentaerythritol polyacrylate (“A-DPH” manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、(メタ)アクリレート化合物のカプロラクトン変性化合物(日本化薬(株)製KAYARAD(登録商標) DPCA-20、新中村化学工業(株)製A-9300-1CL等)、(メタ)アクリレート化合物のアルキレンオキサイド変性化合物(日本化薬(株)製KAYARAD(登録商標) RP-1040、新中村化学工業(株)製ATM-35E、A-9300、ダイセル・オルネクス社のEBECRYL(登録商標) 135等)、及び、エトキシル化グリセリントリアクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製NKエステル A-GLY-9E等)等も挙げられる。 Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include caprolactone-modified compounds of (meth) acrylate compounds (KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., A-9300-1CL manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., etc.). (Meta) acrylate compound alkylene oxide modified compound (KAYARAD (registered trademark) RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., ATM-35E, A-9300 manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., EBECRYL manufactured by Dycel Ornex Co., Ltd. ( (Registered trademark) 135, etc.), ethoxylated glycerin triacrylate (NK ester A-GLY-9E, etc. manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and the like can also be mentioned.
 また、エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、ウレタン(メタ)アクリレート化合物も挙げられる。
 ウレタン(メタ)アクリレートとしては、ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられ、例えば、プロピレンオキサイド変性ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレート、並びに、エチレンオキサイド及びプロピレンオキサイド変性ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
 また、ウレタン(メタ)アクリレートとしては、3官能以上のウレタン(メタ)アクリレートも挙げられる。官能基数の下限としては、6官能以上がより好ましく、8官能以上が更に好ましい。なお、官能基数の上限としては、20官能以下が好ましい。3官能以上のウレタン(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、8UX-015A(大成ファインケミカル(株)製)、UA-32P(新中村化学工業(株)製)、U-15HA(新中村化学工業(株)製)、UA-1100H(新中村化学工業(株)製)、共栄社化学(株)製のAH-600(商品名)、並びに、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、UA-510H、及びUX-5000(いずれも日本化薬(株)製)等が挙げられる。
Further, examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include urethane (meth) acrylate compounds.
Examples of the urethane (meth) acrylate include urethane di (meth) acrylate, and examples thereof include propylene oxide-modified urethane di (meth) acrylate, and ethylene oxide and propylene oxide-modified urethane di (meth) acrylate.
Further, as the urethane (meth) acrylate, a urethane (meth) acrylate having trifunctionality or higher can also be mentioned. As the lower limit of the number of functional groups, 6-functionality or more is more preferable, and 8-functionality or more is further preferable. The upper limit of the number of functional groups is preferably 20 or less. Examples of trifunctional or higher functional urethane (meth) acrylates include 8UX-015A (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Co., Ltd.), UA-32P (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and U-15HA (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). ), UA-1100H (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), AH-600 (trade name) manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd., and UA-306H, UA-306T, UA-306I, UA-510H. , And UX-5000 (both manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.) and the like.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物の好適態様の一つとして、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物が挙げられる。酸基としては、リン酸基、スルホ基、及び、カルボキシ基が挙げられ、なかでも、カルボキシ基が好ましい。
 酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、酸基を有する3~4官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物〔ペンタエリスリトールトリ及びテトラアクリレート(PETA)骨格にカルボキシ基を導入したもの(酸価:80~120mgKOH/g)〕、酸基を有する5~6官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物(ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ及びヘキサアクリレート(DPHA)骨格にカルボキシ基を導入したもの〔酸価:25~70mgKOH/g)〕等が挙げられる。
 これら酸基を有する3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物は、必要に応じ、酸基を有する2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物と併用してもよい。
One of the preferred embodiments of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group. Examples of the acid group include a phosphoric acid group, a sulfo group, and a carboxy group, and among them, a carboxy group is preferable.
As the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, a 3- to 4-functional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group [pentaerythritol tri and a tetraacrylate (PETA) skeleton introduced with a carboxy group (acid value: 80 to 80). 120 mgKOH / g)], a 5- to 6-functional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group (dipentaerythritol penta and hexaacrylate (DPHA) skeleton with a carboxy group introduced [acid value: 25 to 70 mgKOH / g)] And so on.
These trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compounds having an acid group may be used in combination with a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, if necessary.
 酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、カルボキシ基を有する2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物及びそのカルボン酸無水物からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種が好ましい。
 酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物が、カルボキシ基を有する2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物及びそのカルボン酸無水物からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種であると、現像性及び膜強度がより高まる。
 カルボキシ基を有する2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物は、特に制限されず、公知の化合物の中から適宜選択できる。
 カルボキシ基を有する2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、アロニックス(登録商標)TO-2349(東亞合成(株)製)、アロニックス(登録商標)M-520(東亞合成(株)製)、アロニックス(登録商標)M-510(東亞合成(株)製)が挙げられる。
As the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, at least one selected from the group consisting of a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxy group and a carboxylic acid anhydride thereof is preferable.
When the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group is at least one selected from the group consisting of a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxy group and a carboxylic acid anhydride thereof, the developability and film strength are further improved. It will increase.
The bifunctional or higher functional unsaturated compound having a carboxy group is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known compounds.
Examples of the bifunctional or higher functional unsaturated compound having a carboxy group include Aronix (registered trademark) TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Aronix (registered trademark) M-520 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and the like. Aronix (registered trademark) M-510 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) can be mentioned.
 酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、特開2004-239942号公報の段落[0025]~[0030]に記載の化合物も好ましく、この公報に記載の内容は、本明細書に組み込まれる。 As the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, the compounds described in paragraphs [0025] to [0030] of JP-A-2004-239942 are also preferable, and the contents described in this publication are incorporated in the present specification.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、多価アルコールにα,β-不飽和カルボン酸を反応させて得られる化合物、グリシジル基含有化合物にα,β-不飽和カルボン酸を反応させて得られる化合物、ウレタン結合を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物等のウレタンモノマー、γ-クロロ-β-ヒドロキシプロピル-β’-(メタ)アクリロイルオキシエチル-o-フタレート、β-ヒドロキシエチル-β’-(メタ)アクリロイルオキシエチル-o-フタレート、及び、β-ヒドロキシプロピル-β’-(メタ)アクリロイルオキシエチル-o-フタレート等のフタル酸系化合物、並びに、(メタ)アクリル酸アルキルエステルも挙げられる。
 これらは単独で又は2種類以上を組み合わせて使用される。
Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include a compound obtained by reacting a polyhydric alcohol with an α, β-unsaturated carboxylic acid, and a compound obtained by reacting a glycidyl group-containing compound with an α, β-unsaturated carboxylic acid. , Urethane monomers such as (meth) acrylate compounds with urethane bonds, γ-chloro-β-hydroxypropyl-β'-(meth) acryloyloxyethyl-o-phthalate, β-hydroxyethyl-β'-(meth) acryloyl Examples thereof include phthalic acid compounds such as oxyethyl-o-phthalate and β-hydroxypropyl-β'-(meth) acryloyloxyethyl-o-phthalate, and (meth) acrylic acid alkyl esters.
These may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 多価アルコールにα,β-不飽和カルボン酸を反応させて得られる化合物としては、例えば、2,2-ビス(4-((メタ)アクリロキシポリエトキシ)フェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(4-((メタ)アクリロキシポリプロポキシ)フェニル)プロパン、及び、2,2-ビス(4-((メタ)アクリロキシポリエトキシポリプロポキシ)フェニル)プロパン等のビスフェノールA系(メタ)アクリレート化合物、エチレンオキサイド基の数が2~14であるポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、プロピレンオキサイド基の数が2~14であるポリプロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、エチレンオキサイド基の数が2~14であり、かつ、プロピレンオキサイド基の数が2~14であるポリエチレンポリプロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンエトキシトリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンジエトキシトリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリエトキシトリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンテトラエトキシトリ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンペンタエトキシトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジ(トリメチロールプロパン)テトラアクリレート、テトラメチロールメタントリ(メタ)アクリレート、テトラメチロールメタンテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、並びに、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
 なかでも、テトラメチロールメタン構造又はトリメチロールプロパン構造を有するエチレン不飽和化合物が好ましく、テトラメチロールメタントリ(メタ)アクリレート、テトラメチロールメタンテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、又は、ジ(トリメチロールプロパン)テトラアクリレートがより好ましい。
Examples of the compound obtained by reacting a polyvalent alcohol with an α, β-unsaturated carboxylic acid include 2,2-bis (4-((meth) acrylamide polyethoxy) phenyl) propane and 2,2-bis. Bisphenol A-based (meth) acrylate compounds such as (4-((meth) acrylamide polypropoxy) phenyl) propane and 2,2-bis (4-((meth) acrylamide polyethoxypolypropoxy) phenyl) propane , Polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate having 2 to 14 ethylene oxide groups, polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate having 2 to 14 propylene oxide groups, and 2 to 14 ethylene oxide groups. And, polyethylene polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane di (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane ethoxytri (meth) acrylate having 2 to 14 propylene oxide groups. , Trimethylolpropane diethoxytri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane triethoxytri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane tetraethoxytri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane pentaethoxytri (meth) acrylate, trimethylolpropane ) Tetra acrylate, tetramethylol methanetri (meth) acrylate, tetramethylol methanetetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol tetra (meth) acrylate, dipentaerythritol penta (meth) acrylate, and dipentaerythritol hexa (meth) acrylate. Can be mentioned.
Among them, an ethylene unsaturated compound having a tetramethylolmethane structure or a trimethylolpropane structure is preferable, and a tetramethylolmethanetri (meth) acrylate, a tetramethylolmethanetetra (meth) acrylate, a trimethylolpropanetri (meth) acrylate, or a trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylate is preferable. Di (trimethylolpropane) tetraacrylate is more preferred.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、エチレン性不飽和化合物のカプロラクトン変性化合物(例えば、日本化薬(株)製KAYARAD(登録商標)DPCA-20、新中村化学工業(株)製A-9300-1CL等)、エチレン性不飽和化合物のアルキレンオキサイド変性化合物(例えば、日本化薬(株)製KAYARAD RP-1040、新中村化学工業(株)製ATM-35E、A-9300、ダイセル・オルネクス社製 EBECRYL(登録商標)135等)、エトキシル化グリセリントリアクリレート(新中村化学工業(株)製A-GLY-9E等)等も挙げられる。 Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound include a caprolactone-modified compound of an ethylenically unsaturated compound (for example, KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., A-9300-1CL manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., etc. ), An alkylene oxide-modified compound of an ethylenically unsaturated compound (for example, KAYARAD RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., ATM-35E, A-9300 manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., EBECRYL manufactured by Daicel Ornex Co., Ltd. (Registered trademark) 135, etc.), ethoxylated glycerin triacrylate (A-GLY-9E, etc. manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and the like can also be mentioned.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、転写後のネガ型感光性組成物層の現像性に優れる点で、なかでも、エステル結合を含むものも好ましい。
 エステル結合を含むエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、分子内にエステル結合を含むものであれば特に制限されないが、本発明の効果が優れる点で、テトラメチロールメタン構造又はトリメチロールプロパン構造を有するエチレン不飽和化合物が好ましく、テトラメチロールメタントリ(メタ)アクリレート、テトラメチロールメタンテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、又は、ジ(トリメチロールプロパン)テトラアクリレートがより好ましい。
As the ethylenically unsaturated compound, those containing an ester bond are particularly preferable in that the negative photosensitive composition layer after transfer is excellent in developability.
The ethylenically unsaturated compound containing an ester bond is not particularly limited as long as it contains an ester bond in the molecule, but is not ethylene-free having a tetramethylolmethane structure or a trimethylolpropane structure in that the effect of the present invention is excellent. Saturated compounds are preferred, and tetramethylolmethanetri (meth) acrylates, trimethylolmethanetetra (meth) acrylates, trimethylolpropane tri (meth) acrylates, or di (trimethylolpropane) tetraacrylates are more preferred.
 信頼性付与の点からは、エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、炭素数6~20の脂肪族基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物と、上記のテトラメチロールメタン構造又はトリメチロールプロパン構造を有するエチレン不飽和化合物と、を含むことが好ましい。
 炭素数6以上の脂肪族構造を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、1,9-ノナンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,10-デカンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、及び、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
From the viewpoint of imparting reliability, the ethylenically unsaturated compound includes an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic group having 6 to 20 carbon atoms and the above-mentioned ethylene unsaturated compound having a tetramethylol methane structure or a trimethylol propane structure. It is preferable to contain a compound.
Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic structure having 6 or more carbon atoms include 1,9-nonanediol di (meth) acrylate, 1,10-decanediol di (meth) acrylate, and tricyclodecanedimethanoldi. Examples include (meth) acrylate.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物の好適態様の一つとしては、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物が挙げられる。
 上記脂肪族炭化水素環構造としては、2環以上の脂肪族炭化水素環が縮環した環構造(好ましくは、トリシクロデカン構造及びトリシクロデセン構造からなる群から選択される構造)であるのが好ましく、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、シクロペンタン構造、シクロヘキサン構造、トリシクロデカン構造、トリシクロデセン構造、ノルボルナン構造、又は、イソボロン構造が好ましい。
 脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、なかでも、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジ(メタ)アクリレートが好ましい。
One of the preferred embodiments of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure.
The aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure is a ring structure in which two or more aliphatic hydrocarbon rings are fused (preferably a structure selected from the group consisting of a tricyclodecane structure and a tricyclodecene structure). Is preferable, and a cyclopentane structure, a cyclohexane structure, a tricyclodecane structure, a tricyclodecene structure, a norbornan structure, or an isoborone structure is preferable from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
As the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, tricyclodecanedimethanol di (meth) acrylate is particularly preferable.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物の分子量は、200~3,000が好ましく、250~2,600がより好ましく、280~2,200が更に好ましく、300~2,200が特に好ましい。 The molecular weight of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 200 to 3,000, more preferably 250 to 2,600, further preferably 280 to 2,200, and particularly preferably 300 to 2,200.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層の好適態様の一つとして、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むのが好ましく、3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むのがより好ましく、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、4官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むのが更に好ましい。 As one of the preferred embodiments of the negative photosensitive composition layer, the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains a bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound and preferably contains a trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound. It is more preferable to contain a tetrafunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
 また、ネガ型感光性組成物層の好適態様の一つとして、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物と、脂肪族炭化水素環を有する構成単位を有するバインダーポリマーとを含むことが好ましい。 Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the negative photosensitive composition layer, the negative photosensitive composition layer has a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure and an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring. It preferably contains a binder polymer having a structural unit.
 また、ネガ型感光性組成物層の好適態様の一つとして、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、式(M)で表される化合物と、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物とを含むことが好ましく、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレートと、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレートと、カルボン酸基を有する多官能エチレン性不飽和化合物とを含むことがより好ましく、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレートと、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレートと、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタアクリレートのコハク酸変性体とを含むことが更に好ましい。 Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the negative photosensitive composition layer, the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a compound represented by the formula (M) and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group. , And more preferably 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate, tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate, and a polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxylic acid group. And, it is more preferable to contain tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate and a succinic acid-modified form of dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate.
 また、ネガ型感光性組成物層の好適態様の一つとして、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、式(M)で表される化合物と、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物と、後述する熱架橋性化合物とを含むことが好ましく、式(M)で表される化合物と、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物と、後述するブロックイソシアネート化合物とを含むことがより好ましい。 Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the negative photosensitive composition layer, the negative photosensitive composition layer includes a compound represented by the formula (M) and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, which will be described later. It preferably contains a thermally crosslinkable compound, and more preferably contains a compound represented by the formula (M), an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, and a blocked isocyanate compound described later.
 また、ネガ型感光性組成物層の好適態様の一つとして、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、現像残渣抑制性、及び、防錆性の点から、2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物(好ましくは、2官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物)と、3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物(好ましくは、3官能以上の(メタ)アクリレート化合物)と、を含むこと好ましい。
 2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物と、3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量の質量比は10:90~90:10が好ましく、30:70~70:30がより好ましい。
 全てのエチレン性不飽和化合物の合計量に対する、2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、20~80質量%が好ましく、30~70質量%がより好ましい。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層における2官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物は、10~60質量%が好ましく、15~40質量%がより好ましい。
Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the negative photosensitive composition layer, the negative photosensitive composition layer is a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound (preferably) from the viewpoint of suppressing development residue and rust resistance. Is preferably a bifunctional (meth) acrylate compound) and a trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound (preferably a trifunctional or higher (meth) acrylate compound).
The mass ratio of the content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound and the trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 10:90 to 90:10, more preferably 30:70 to 70:30.
The content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 20 to 80% by mass, more preferably 30 to 70% by mass, based on the total amount of all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds.
The bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 10 to 60% by mass, more preferably 15 to 40% by mass.
 また、ネガ型感光性組成物層の好適態様の一つとして、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、防錆性の点から、化合物M、及び、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましい。
 また、ネガ型感光性組成物層の好適態様の一つとして、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、基板密着性、現像残渣抑制性、及び、防錆性の点から、化合物M、及び、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましく、化合物M、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物、及び、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことがより好ましく、化合物M、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物、3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物、及び、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが更に好ましく、化合物M、脂肪族炭化水素環構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物、3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物、酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物、及び、ウレタン(メタ)アクリレート化合物を含むことが特に好ましい。
 また、ネガ型感光性組成物層の好適態様の一つとして、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、基板密着性、現像残渣抑制性、及び、防錆性の点から、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレート、及び、カルボン酸基を有する多官能エチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましく、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレート、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレート、及び、カルボン酸基を有する多官能エチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましく、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレート、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート、及び、カルボン酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが更に好ましく、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレート、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレート、カルボン酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物、及び、ウレタンアクリレート化合物を含むことが特に好ましい。
Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the negative photosensitive composition layer, the negative photosensitive composition layer is bifunctional ethylenically having compound M and an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure from the viewpoint of rust resistance. It preferably contains an unsaturated compound.
Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the negative-type photosensitive composition layer, the negative-type photosensitive composition layer contains the compound M and an acid from the viewpoints of substrate adhesion, development residue inhibitory property, and rust resistance. It is preferable to contain an ethylenically unsaturated compound having a group, and more preferably to contain a compound M, a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group. , Compound M, a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, a trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound, and an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group are more preferably contained. In particular, it contains a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having an aliphatic hydrocarbon ring structure, a trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound, an ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, and a urethane (meth) acrylate compound. preferable.
Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the negative type photosensitive composition layer, the negative type photosensitive composition layer has a negative type photosensitive composition layer, and the negative type photosensitive composition layer has substrate adhesion, development residue suppressing property, and rust resistance. From the point of view, it is preferable to contain 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate and a polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxylic acid group, and 1,9-nonandiol diacrylate, tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate, and , Polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds having a carboxylic acid group, preferably 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate, tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, and ethylene having a carboxylic acid group. It is more preferable to contain a sex unsaturated compound, and it is particularly preferable to contain a 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate, a tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate, an ethylenically unsaturated compound having a carboxylic acid group, and a urethane acrylate compound. ..
 また、ネガ型感光性組成物層の好適態様の一つとして、ネガ型感光性組成物層に含まれる重合性化合物のうち、分子量300以下の重合性化合物の含有量の割合が、ネガ型感光性組成物層に含まれる全ての重合性化合物の含有量に対して、30質量%以下が好ましく、25質量%以下がより好ましく、20質量%以下が更に好ましい。 Further, as one of the preferred embodiments of the negative photosensitive composition layer, the ratio of the content of the polymerizable compound having a molecular weight of 300 or less among the polymerizable compounds contained in the negative photosensitive composition layer is the negative photosensitive composition layer. With respect to the content of all the polymerizable compounds contained in the sex composition layer, 30% by mass or less is preferable, 25% by mass or less is more preferable, and 20% by mass or less is further preferable.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、エチレン性不飽和化合物として、単官能エチレン性不飽和化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 上記エチレン性不飽和化合物における2官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、ネガ型感光性組成物層に含まれる全てのエチレン性不飽和化合物の総含有量に対し、60~100質量%が好ましく、80~100質量%がより好ましく、90~100質量%が更に好ましい。
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound as the ethylenically unsaturated compound.
The content of the bifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound in the ethylenically unsaturated compound is 60 to 100% by mass with respect to the total content of all the ethylenically unsaturated compounds contained in the negative photosensitive composition layer. Is preferable, 80 to 100% by mass is more preferable, and 90 to 100% by mass is further preferable.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用することもできる。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層におけるエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量の下限値としては、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、1質量%以上が好ましく、5質量%以上がより好ましく、20質量%以上が更に好ましく、35質量%以上が更に好ましく、40質量%以上が特に好ましい。また、その上限値としては特に制限されないが、70質量%以下が好ましく、60質量%以下がより好ましく、55質量%以下が更に好ましい。
 また、ネガ型感光性組成物層において、バインダーポリマーに対するエチレン性不飽和化合物の質量含有量比(エチレン性不飽和化合物/バインダーポリマー)は、0.4以上であるのが好ましく、0.5以上であるのがより好ましく、0.6以上であるのが更に好ましく、0.7以上であるのが特に好ましく、0.8以上であるのが最も好ましい。なお、上限値としては特に制限されないが、1.5以下が好ましく、1.2以下であるのが更に好ましい。
The ethylenically unsaturated compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The lower limit of the content of the ethylenically unsaturated compound in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. , 20% by mass or more is further preferable, 35% by mass or more is further preferable, and 40% by mass or more is particularly preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and further preferably 55% by mass or less.
Further, in the negative photosensitive composition layer, the mass content ratio of the ethylenically unsaturated compound to the binder polymer (ethylenically unsaturated compound / binder polymer) is preferably 0.4 or more, preferably 0.5 or more. Is more preferable, 0.6 or more is further preferable, 0.7 or more is particularly preferable, and 0.8 or more is most preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1.5 or less, and more preferably 1.2 or less.
 また、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、エチレン性不飽和化合物以外の他の重合性化合物(以下「他の重合性化合物」ともいう。)を含んでいてもよい。
 なお、他の重合性化合物は、エチレン不飽和基以外の重合性基を有する化合物である。エチレン不飽和基以外の重合性基としては、例えば、ラジカル重合性基、及び、カチオン重合性基が挙げられ、ラジカル重合性基が好ましい。
 他の重合性化合物中の重合性基の個数としては特に制限されないが、1個以上が好ましく、2個以上がより好ましい。上限値は特に制限されないが、例えば、20個以下である。
 また、本明細書における他の重合性化合物は、上記バインダーポリマー以外の化合物であり、分子量5,000未満であることが好ましい。
Further, the negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a polymerizable compound other than the ethylenically unsaturated compound (hereinafter, also referred to as “another polymerizable compound”).
The other polymerizable compound is a compound having a polymerizable group other than the ethylene unsaturated group. Examples of the polymerizable group other than the ethylene unsaturated group include a radically polymerizable group and a cationically polymerizable group, and a radically polymerizable group is preferable.
The number of polymerizable groups in the other polymerizable compounds is not particularly limited, but one or more is preferable, and two or more are more preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 20 or less.
Further, the other polymerizable compound in the present specification is a compound other than the binder polymer, and preferably has a molecular weight of less than 5,000.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層が、他の重合性化合物を含む場合、エチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量としては、重合性化合物の全質量(エチレン性不飽和化合物及び他の重合性化合物の合計質量)に対して、60~100質量%が好ましく、80~100質量%がより好ましく、90~100質量%が更に好ましく、95~100質量%が特に好ましい。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層中の重合性化合物の含有量(エチレン性不飽和化合物及び他の重合性化合物の合計質量)の下限値としては、重合性化合物の全質量(エチレン性不飽和化合物及び他の重合性化合物の合計質量)に対して、1質量%以上が好ましく、5質量%以上がより好ましく、20質量%以上が更に好ましく、35質量%以上が更に好ましく、40質量%以上が特に好ましい。また、その上限値としては特に制限されないが、70質量%以下が好ましく、60質量%以下がより好ましく、55質量%以下が更に好ましい。
When the negative photosensitive composition layer contains other polymerizable compounds, the content of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is the total mass of the polymerizable compound (total mass of the ethylenically unsaturated compound and other polymerizable compounds). ), 60 to 100% by mass is preferable, 80 to 100% by mass is more preferable, 90 to 100% by mass is further preferable, and 95 to 100% by mass is particularly preferable.
The lower limit of the content of the polymerizable compound (total mass of the ethylenically unsaturated compound and other polymerizable compounds) in the negative photosensitive composition layer is the total mass of the polymerizable compound (ethylene unsaturated compound and 1% by mass or more is preferable, 5% by mass or more is more preferable, 20% by mass or more is further preferable, 35% by mass or more is further preferable, and 40% by mass or more is particularly preferable. preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and further preferably 55% by mass or less.
 本発明の転写フィルムは、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、4官能以上の重合性化合物を含んでいるのが好ましい。4官能以上の重合性化合物としては、4官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物(4個以上のエチレン性不飽和基を有する重合性化合物)であるのが好ましい。
 4官能以上の重合性化合物の含有量としては、重合性化合物の全質量(エチレン性不飽和化合物及び他の重合性化合物の合計質量)に対して、35質量%以上であるのが好ましく、40質量%以上であるのがより好ましく、65質量%以上であるのが更に好ましく、70質量%以上であるのが特に好ましい。なお、上限値としては特に制限されないが、例えば、100質量%以下が好ましく、90質量%以下がより好ましく、80質量%以下が更に好ましい。
The transfer film of the present invention preferably contains a polyfunctional or higher functional compound in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. The tetrafunctional or higher functional polymerizable compound is preferably a tetrafunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound (a polymerizable compound having four or more ethylenically unsaturated groups).
The content of the tetrafunctional or higher-functional polymerizable compound is preferably 35% by mass or more, preferably 35% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the polymerizable compound (total mass of the ethylenically unsaturated compound and other polymerizable compounds). It is more preferably 7% by mass or more, further preferably 65% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 70% by mass or more. The upper limit value is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100% by mass or less, more preferably 90% by mass or less, and further preferably 80% by mass or less.
<光重合開始剤>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、光重合開始剤を含む。光重合開始剤としては特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤を使用できる。
 光重合開始剤としては、オキシムエステル構造を有する光重合開始剤(以下、「オキシム系光重合開始剤」ともいう。)、α-アミノアルキルフェノン構造を有する光重合開始剤(以下、「α-アミノアルキルフェノン系光重合開始剤」ともいう。)、α-ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン構造を有する光重合開始剤(以下、「α-ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン系重合開始剤」ともいう。)、アシルフォスフィンオキサイド構造を有する光重合開始剤(以下、「アシルフォスフィンオキサイド系光重合開始剤」ともいう。)、及び、N-フェニルグリシン構造を有する光重合開始剤(以下、「N-フェニルグリシン系光重合開始剤」ともいう。)等が挙げられる。
<Photopolymerization initiator>
The negative photosensitive composition layer contains a photopolymerization initiator. The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, and a known photopolymerization initiator can be used.
Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include a photopolymerization initiator having an oxime ester structure (hereinafter, also referred to as “oxym-based photopolymerization initiator”) and a photopolymerization initiator having an α-aminoalkylphenone structure (hereinafter, “α-”. Aminoalkylphenone-based photopolymerization initiator "), photopolymerization initiator having an α-hydroxyalkylphenone structure (hereinafter, also referred to as" α-hydroxyalkylphenone-based polymerization initiator "), acylphosphine oxide structure. Photopolymerization initiator (hereinafter, also referred to as “acylphosphine oxide-based photopolymerization initiator”) and photopolymerization initiator having an N-phenylglycine structure (hereinafter, “N-phenylglycine-based photopolymerization initiator”). Also referred to as "agent").
 光重合開始剤は、オキシム系光重合開始剤、α-アミノアルキルフェノン系光重合開始剤、α-ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン系重合開始剤、及び、N-フェニルグリシン系光重合開始剤よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましく、オキシム系光重合開始剤、α-アミノアルキルフェノン系光重合開始剤、及び、N-フェニルグリシン系光重合開始剤よりなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種を含むことがより好ましい。 The photopolymerization initiator is selected from the group consisting of an oxime-based photopolymerization initiator, an α-aminoalkylphenone-based photopolymerization initiator, an α-hydroxyalkylphenone-based polymerization initiator, and an N-phenylglycine-based photopolymerization initiator. It is preferable to contain at least one selected from the group consisting of an oxime-based photopolymerization initiator, an α-aminoalkylphenone-based photopolymerization initiator, and an N-phenylglycine-based photopolymerization initiator. Is more preferable.
 また、光重合開始剤としては、例えば、特開2011-95716号公報の段落[0031]~[0042]、及び、特開2015-014783号公報の段落[0064]~[0081]に記載された重合開始剤を用いてもよい。 Further, the photopolymerization initiator is described in, for example, paragraphs [0031] to [0042] of JP-A-2011-95716 and paragraphs [0064]-[0081] of JP-A-2015-014783. A polymerization initiator may be used.
 光重合開始剤の市販品としては、1-[4-(フェニルチオ)フェニル]-1,2-オクタンジオン-2-(O-ベンゾイルオキシム)〔商品名:IRGACURE(登録商標) OXE-01、BASF社製〕、1-[9-エチル-6-(2-メチルベンゾイル)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]エタノン-1-(O-アセチルオキシム)〔商品名:IRGACURE(登録商標) OXE-02、BASF社製〕、IRGACURE(登録商標)OXE03(BASF社製)、IRGACURE(登録商標)OXE04(BASF社製)、2-(ジメチルアミノ)-2-[(4-メチルフェニル)メチル]-1-[4-(4-モルホリニル)フェニル]-1-ブタノン〔商品名:Omnirad(登録商標)379EG、IGM Resins B.V社製〕、2-メチル-1-(4-メチルチオフェニル)-2-モルフォリノプロパン-1-オン〔商品名:Omnirad(登録商標)907、IGM Resins B.V社製〕、2-ヒドロキシ-1-{4-[4-(2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチルプロピオニル)ベンジル]フェニル}-2-メチルプロパン-1-オン〔商品名:Omnirad(登録商標)127、IGM Resins B.V社製〕、2-ベンジル-2-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルフォリノフェニル)ブタノン-1〔商品名:Omnirad(登録商標)369、IGM Resins B.V社製〕、2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチル-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン〔商品名:Omnirad(登録商標)1173、IGM Resins B.V社製〕、1-ヒドロキシシクロヘキシルフェニルケトン〔商品名:Omnirad(登録商標)184、IGM Resins B.V社製〕、2,2-ジメトキシ-1,2-ジフェニルエタン-1-オン〔商品名:Omnirad(登録商標)651、IGM Resins B.V社製〕等、オキシムエステル系の〔商品名:Lunar(登録商標) 6、DKSHジャパン(株)製〕、1-[4-(フェニルチオ)フェニル]-3-シクロペンチルプロパン-1,2-ジオン-2-(O-ベンゾイルオキシム)(商品名:TR-PBG-305、常州強力電子新材料社製)、1,2-プロパンジオン,3-シクロヘキシル-1-[9-エチル-6-(2-フラニルカルボニル)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]-,2-(O-アセチルオキシム)(商品名:TR-PBG-326、常州強力電子新材料社製)、3-シクロヘキシル-1-(6-(2-(ベンゾイルオキシイミノ)ヘキサノイル)-9-エチル-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル)-プロパン-1,2-ジオン-2-(O-ベンゾイルオキシム)(商品名:TR-PBG-391、常州強力電子新材料社製)、APi-307(1-(ビフェニル-4-イル)-2-メチル-2-モルホリノプロパン-1-オン、Shenzhen UV-ChemTech Ltd.製)等が挙げられる。 Commercially available photopolymerization initiators include 1- [4- (phenylthio) phenyl] -1,2-octanedione-2- (O-benzoyloxime) [trade name: IRGACURE (registered trademark) OXE-01, BASF. Manufactured by], 1- [9-ethyl-6- (2-methylbenzoyl) -9H-carbazole-3-yl] etanone-1- (O-acetyloxime) [trade name: IRGACURE (registered trademark) OXE-02 , BASF], IRGACURE (registered trademark) OXE03 (BASF), IRGACURE (registered trademark) OXE04 (BASF), 2- (dimethylamino) -2-[(4-methylphenyl) methyl] -1 -[4- (4-morpholinyl) phenyl] -1-butanone [trade name: Omnirad (registered trademark) 379EG, IGM Resins B. V company], 2-methyl-1- (4-methylthiophenyl) -2-morpholinopropane-1-one [trade name: Omnirad (registered trademark) 907, IGM Resins B. V company], 2-hydroxy-1- {4- [4- (2-hydroxy-2-methylpropionyl) benzyl] phenyl} -2-methylpropane-1-one [trade name: Omnirad (registered trademark) 127 , IGM Resins B. V company], 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) butanone-1 [trade name: Omnirad (registered trademark) 369, IGM Resins B. V company], 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenylpropane-1-one [trade name: Omnirad (registered trademark) 1173, IGM Resins B. V company], 1-hydroxycyclohexylphenyl ketone [trade name: Omnirad (registered trademark) 184, IGM Resins B. V company], 2,2-dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethane-1-one [trade name: Omnirad (registered trademark) 651, IGM Resins B.I. Oxime ester-based [Product name: Lunar (registered trademark) 6, DKSH Japan Co., Ltd.], 1- [4- (phenylthio) phenyl] -3-cyclopentylpropane-1,2-dione, etc. -2- (O-benzoyloxime) (trade name: TR-PBG-305, manufactured by Changzhou Strong Electronics New Materials Co., Ltd.), 1,2-propanedione, 3-cyclohexyl-1- [9-ethyl-6- (2) -Franylcarbonyl) -9H-carbazole-3-yl]-, 2- (O-acetyloxime) (trade name: TR-PBG-326, manufactured by Changzhou Strong Electronics New Materials Co., Ltd.), 3-Cyclohexyl-1- ( 6- (2- (benzoyloxyimino) hexanoyl) -9-ethyl-9H-carbazole-3-yl) -propane-1,2-dione-2- (O-benzoyloxime) (trade name: TR-PBG- 391, manufactured by Changzhou Strong Electronics New Materials Co., Ltd.), APi-307 (1- (biphenyl-4-yl) -2-methyl-2-morpholinopropane-1-one, manufactured by Shenzhen UV-ChemTech Ltd.) and the like. ..
 光重合開始剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を使用してもよい。2種以上を併用する場合は、オキシム系光重合開始剤と、α-アミノアルキルフェノン系光重合開始剤及びα-ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン系重合開始剤から選ばれる少なくとも1種と、を使用することが好ましい。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層において、光重合開始剤の含有量は、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、0.1質量%以上であるのが好ましく、0.5質量%以上であるのがより好ましく、1.0質量%以上であるのが更に好ましい。また、その上限値としては、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、10質量%以下であるのが好ましく、5質量%以下であるのより好ましい。
The photopolymerization initiator may be used alone or in combination of two or more. When two or more kinds are used in combination, an oxime-based photopolymerization initiator and at least one selected from an α-aminoalkylphenone-based photopolymerization initiator and an α-hydroxyalkylphenone-based polymerization initiator may be used. preferable.
In the negative photosensitive composition layer, the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, preferably 0.5% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. Is more preferable, and 1.0% by mass or more is further preferable. The upper limit thereof is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer.
<重合禁止剤>
 本発明の転写フィルムが本発明の効果を奏する上では、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、重合禁止剤を含むのが好ましい。
 重合禁止剤とは、重合反応を遅延又は禁止させる機能を有する化合物を意味する。重合禁止剤としては、例えば、重合禁止剤として用いられる公知の化合物を使用できる。
<Polymerization inhibitor>
In order for the transfer film of the present invention to exert the effect of the present invention, it is preferable that the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a polymerization inhibitor.
The polymerization inhibitor means a compound having a function of delaying or prohibiting a polymerization reaction. As the polymerization inhibitor, for example, a known compound used as a polymerization inhibitor can be used.
 重合禁止剤としては、例えば、フェノチアジン、ビス-(1-ジメチルベンジル)フェノチアジン、及び、3,7-ジオクチルフェノチアジン等のフェノチアジン化合物;フェノキサジン等のフェノキサジン化合物;ビス[3-(3-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシ-5-メチルフェニル)プロピオン酸][エチレンビス(オキシエチレン)]2,4-ビス〔(ラウリルチオ)メチル〕-o-クレゾール、1,3,5-トリス(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンジル)、1,3,5-トリス(4-t-ブチル-3-ヒドロキシ-2,6-ジメチルベンジル)、2,4-ビス-(n-オクチルチオ)-6-(4-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ジ-t-ブチルアニリノ)-1,3,5-トリアジン、及び、ペンタエリスリトールテトラキス3-(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート等のヒンダードフェノール化合物;4-ニトロソフェノール、N-ニトロソジフェニルアミン、N-ニトロソシクロヘキシルヒドロキシルアミン、及び、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミン等のニトロソ化合物又はその塩;メチルハイドロキノン、t-ブチルハイドロキノン、2,5-ジ-t-ブチルハイドロキノン、及び、4-ベンゾキノン等のキノン化合物;4-メトキシフェノール、4-メトキシ-1-ナフトール、及び、t-ブチルカテコール等のフェノール化合物;ジブチルジチオカルバミン酸銅、ジエチルジチオカルバミン酸銅、ジエチルジチオカルバミン酸マンガン、及び、ジフェニルジチオカルバミン酸マンガン等の金属塩化合物が挙げられる。
 また、重合禁止剤としては、例えば、特許第4502784号公報の段落0018に記載された熱重合防止剤、ナフチルアミン及び塩化第一銅等も挙げられる。
 なかでも、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、重合禁止剤としては、フェノチアジン化合物(フェノチアジン及びその誘導体)、フェノキサジン等のフェノキサジン化合物;ニトロソ化合物又はその塩、及び、ヒンダードフェノール化合物からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種が好ましく、フェノチアジン、フェノキサジン、ビス[3-(3-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシ-5-メチルフェニル)プロピオン酸]、[エチレンビス(オキシエチレン)]2,4-ビス〔(ラウリルチオ)メチル〕-o-クレゾール、1,3,5-トリス(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンジル)、p-メトキシフェノール、又は、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミンアルミニウム塩がより好ましく、フェノチアジン、フェノキサジン、又は、、p-メトキシフェノールが更に好ましい。
Examples of the polymerization inhibitor include phenothiazine compounds such as phenothiazine, bis- (1-dimethylbenzyl) phenothiazine, and 3,7-dioctylphenothiazine; phenoxazine compounds such as phenoxazine; bis [3- (3-tert- Butyl-4-hydroxy-5-methylphenyl) propionic acid] [ethylenebis (oxyethylene)] 2,4-bis [(laurylthio) methyl] -o-cresol, 1,3,5-tris (3,5-) Di-t-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl), 1,3,5-tris (4-t-butyl-3-hydroxy-2,6-dimethylbenzyl), 2,4-bis- (n-octylthio)- 6- (4-Hydroxy-3,5-di-t-butylanilino) -1,3,5-triazine and pentaerythritol tetrakis 3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate Hindered phenolic compounds such as: 4-nitrosophenol, N-nitrosodiphenylamine, N-nitrosocyclohexylhydroxylamine, and nitroso compounds such as N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine or salts thereof; methylhydroquinone, t-butylhydroquinone, 2, Phenolic compounds such as 5-di-t-butylhydroquinone and 4-benzoquinone; phenolic compounds such as 4-methoxyphenol, 4-methoxy-1-naphthol, and t-butylcatechol; copper dibutyldithiocarbamate, diethyldithiocarbamine. Examples thereof include metal salt compounds such as copper acid, manganese diethyldithiocarbamate, and manganese diphenyldithiocarbamate.
Further, examples of the polymerization inhibitor include thermal polymerization inhibitors, naphthylamines, cuprous chloride and the like described in paragraph 0018 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784.
Among them, the polymerization inhibitor is composed of a phenothiazine compound (phenothiazine and its derivative), a phenoxazine compound such as phenoxazine; a nitroso compound or a salt thereof, and a hindered phenol compound in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. At least one selected from the group is preferable, and phenolthiazine, phenoxazine, bis [3- (3-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy-5-methylphenyl) propionic acid], [ethylenebis (oxyethylene)] 2,4 -Bis [(laurylthio) methyl] -o-cresol, 1,3,5-tris (3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl), p-methoxyphenol, or N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine Aluminum salts are more preferred, and phenothiazine, phenoxazine, or p-methoxyphenol is even more preferred.
 重合禁止剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 また、本発明の転写フィルムが本発明の効果を奏する上では、ネガ型感光性組成物層における重合禁止剤の含有量は、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、0.10~5.0質量%が好ましく、0.10~3.0質量%がより好ましく、0.10~2.0質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、本発明の転写フィルムが本発明の効果を奏する上では、重合禁止剤の含有量は、光重合開始剤の含有量に対して、5~15質量%であるのが好ましい。
The polymerization inhibitor may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
Further, in order for the transfer film of the present invention to exert the effect of the present invention, the content of the polymerization inhibitor in the negative type photosensitive composition layer is 0.10 with respect to the total mass of the negative type photosensitive composition layer. It is preferably ~ 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.10 to 3.0% by mass, still more preferably 0.10 to 2.0% by mass.
Further, in order for the transfer film of the present invention to exert the effect of the present invention, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 5 to 15% by mass with respect to the content of the photopolymerization initiator.
 また、重合禁止剤の含有量は、重合性化合物の全質量に対しては、0.005~5.0質量%が好ましく、0.01~3.0質量%がより好ましく、0.01~1.0質量%が更に好ましい。 The content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.005 to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 3.0% by mass, and 0.01 to 0.01% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymerizable compound. 1.0% by mass is more preferable.
<複素環化合物>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、複素環化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 複素環化合物が有する複素環は、単環及び多環のいずれの複素環でもよい。
 複素環化合物が有するヘテロ原子としては、窒素原子、酸素原子、及び、硫黄原子が挙げられる。複素環化合物は、窒素原子、酸素原子、及び、硫黄原子からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の原子を有することが好ましく、窒素原子を有することがより好ましい。
<Heterocyclic compound>
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a heterocyclic compound.
The heterocycle contained in the heterocyclic compound may be either a monocyclic or polycyclic complex.
Examples of the hetero atom contained in the heterocyclic compound include a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom. The heterocyclic compound preferably has at least one atom selected from the group consisting of a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, and a sulfur atom, and more preferably has a nitrogen atom.
 複素環化合物としては、例えば、トリアゾール化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物、テトラゾール化合物、チアジアゾール化合物、トリアジン化合物、ローダニン化合物、チアゾール化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾイミダゾール化合物、ベンゾオキサゾール化合物、及び、ピリミジン化合物が挙げられる。
 上記のなかでも、複素環化合物としては、トリアゾール化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物、テトラゾール化合物、チアジアゾール化合物、トリアジン化合物、ローダニン化合物、チアゾール化合物、ベンゾイミダゾール化合物、及び、ベンゾオキサゾール化合物からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の化合物が好ましく、トリアゾール化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール化合物、テトラゾール化合物、チアジアゾール化合物、チアゾール化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、ベンゾイミダゾール化合物、及び、ベンゾオキサゾール化合物からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の化合物がより好ましい。
Examples of the heterocyclic compound include a triazole compound, a benzotriazole compound, a tetrazole compound, a thiadiazole compound, a triazine compound, a rhonin compound, a thiazole compound, a benzothiazole compound, a benzoimidazole compound, a benzoxazole compound, and a pyrimidine compound.
Among the above, the heterocyclic compound is at least one selected from the group consisting of a triazole compound, a benzotriazole compound, a tetrazole compound, a thiaziazole compound, a triazine compound, a rhonin compound, a thiazole compound, a benzimidazole compound, and a benzoxazole compound. Species compounds are preferred, and at least one compound selected from the group consisting of triazole compounds, benzotriazole compounds, tetrazole compounds, thiathazole compounds, thiazole compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzimidazole compounds, and benzoxazole compounds is more preferred.
 複素環化合物の好ましい具体例を以下に示す。
 トリアゾール化合物及びベンゾトリアゾール化合物としては、以下の化合物が挙げられる。
Preferred specific examples of the heterocyclic compound are shown below.
Examples of the triazole compound and the benzotriazole compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
 テトラゾール化合物としては、以下の化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the tetrazole compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
 チアジアゾール化合物としては、以下の化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of thiadiazole compounds include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
 トリアジン化合物としては、以下の化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the triazine compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
 ローダニン化合物としては、以下の化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the loadonin compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
 チアゾール化合物としては、以下の化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the thiazole compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000019
 ベンゾチアゾール化合物としては、以下の化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the benzothiazole compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000020
 ベンゾイミダゾール化合物としては、以下の化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the benzimidazole compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000022
 ベンゾオキサゾール化合物としては、以下の化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the benzoxazole compound include the following compounds.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000023
 複素環化合物は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用することもできる。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層が複素環化合物を含む場合、複素環化合物の含有量は、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、0.01~20.0質量%が好ましく、0.10~10.0質量%がより好ましく、0.30~8.0質量%が更に好ましく、0.50~5.0質量%が特に好ましい。
The heterocyclic compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a heterocyclic compound, the content of the heterocyclic compound is preferably 0.01 to 20.0% by mass, preferably 0, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. .10 to 10.0% by mass is more preferable, 0.30 to 8.0% by mass is further preferable, and 0.50 to 5.0% by mass is particularly preferable.
<脂肪族チオール化合物>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、脂肪族チオール化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層が、脂肪族チオール化合物を含む場合、脂肪族チオール化合物とエチレン性不飽和化合物との間でエン-チオール反応が生じ得る。この結果として、形成される膜の硬化収縮が抑えられ、応力が緩和される。
<Alphatic thiol compound>
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain an aliphatic thiol compound.
When the negative photosensitive composition layer contains an aliphatic thiol compound, an en-thiol reaction can occur between the aliphatic thiol compound and the ethylenically unsaturated compound. As a result, the curing shrinkage of the formed film is suppressed and the stress is relieved.
 脂肪族チオール化合物としては、単官能の脂肪族チオール化合物、又は、多官能の脂肪族チオール化合物(すなわち、2官能以上の脂肪族チオール化合物)が好ましい。 As the aliphatic thiol compound, a monofunctional aliphatic thiol compound or a polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound (that is, a bifunctional or higher functional aliphatic thiol compound) is preferable.
 上記のなかでも、脂肪族チオール化合物としては、形成されるパターンの密着性(特に、露光後における密着性)の点から、多官能の脂肪族チオール化合物が好ましい。 Among the above, as the aliphatic thiol compound, a polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound is preferable from the viewpoint of adhesion of the formed pattern (particularly, adhesion after exposure).
 本明細書において、「多官能の脂肪族チオール化合物」とは、チオール基(「メルカプト基」ともいう。)を分子内に2個以上有する脂肪族化合物を意味する。 In the present specification, the "polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound" means an aliphatic compound having two or more thiol groups (also referred to as "mercapto groups") in the molecule.
 多官能の脂肪族チオール化合物としては、分子量が100以上の低分子化合物が好ましい。具体的には、多官能の脂肪族チオール化合物の分子量は、100~1,500がより好ましく、150~1,000が更に好ましい。 As the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound, a low molecular weight compound having a molecular weight of 100 or more is preferable. Specifically, the molecular weight of the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound is more preferably 100 to 1,500, and even more preferably 150 to 1,000.
 多官能の脂肪族チオール化合物の官能基数としては、例えば、形成されるパターンの密着性の点から、2~10官能が好ましく、2~8官能がより好ましく、2~6官能が更に好ましい。 As the number of functional groups of the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound, for example, 2 to 10 functionalities are preferable, 2 to 8 functionalities are more preferable, and 2 to 6 functionalities are further preferable, from the viewpoint of adhesion of the formed pattern.
 多官能の脂肪族チオール化合物としては、例えば、トリメチロールプロパントリス(3-メルカプトブチレート)、1,4-ビス(3-メルカプトブチリルオキシ)ブタン、ペンタエリスリトールテトラキス(3-メルカプトブチレート)、1,3,5-トリス(3-メルカプトブチリルオキシエチル)-1,3,5-トリアジン-2,4,6(1H,3H,5H)-トリオン、トリメチロールエタントリス(3-メルカプトブチレート)、トリス[(3-メルカプトプロピオニルオキシ)エチル]イソシアヌレート、トリメチロールプロパントリス(3-メルカプトプロピオネート)、ペンタエリスリトールテトラキス
(3-メルカプトプロピオネート)、テトラエチレングリコールビス(3-メルカプトプロピオネート)、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサキス(3-メルカプトプロピオネート)、エチレングリコールビスチオプロピオネート、1,4-ビス(3-メルカプトブチリルオキシ)ブタン、1,2-エタンジチオール、1,3-プロパンジチオール、1,6-ヘキサメチレンジチオール、2,2’-(エチレンジチオ)ジエタンチオール、meso-2,3-ジメルカプトコハク酸、及び、ジ(メルカプトエチル)エーテルが挙げられる。
Examples of the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compound include trimethylolpropanetris (3-mercaptobutyrate), 1,4-bis (3-mercaptobutyryloxy) butane, pentaerythritol tetrakis (3-mercaptobutyrate), and the like. 1,3,5-Tris (3-mercaptobutyryloxyethyl) -1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6 (1H, 3H, 5H) -trione, trimethylol ethanetris (3-mercaptobutyrate) ), Tris [(3-mercaptopropionyloxy) ethyl] isocyanurate, trimethylolpropanthris (3-mercaptopropionate), pentaerythritol tetrakis (3-mercaptopropionate), tetraethylene glycol bis (3-mercaptopropionate) Pionate), Dipentaerythritol hexakis (3-mercaptopropionate), ethylene glycol bisthiopropionate, 1,4-bis (3-mercaptobutyryloxy) butane, 1,2-ethanedithiol, 1, Examples thereof include 3-propanedithiol, 1,6-hexamethylenedithiol, 2,2'-(ethylenedithio) dietanethiol, meso-2,3-dimercaptosuccinic acid, and di (mercaptoethyl) ether.
 上記のなかでも、多官能の脂肪族チオール化合物としては、トリメチロールプロパントリス(3-メルカプトブチレート)、1,4-ビス(3-メルカプトブチリルオキシ)ブタン、及び、1,3,5-トリス(3-メルカプトブチリルオキシエチル)-1,3,5-トリアジン-2,4,6(1H,3H,5H)-トリオンからなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種の化合物が好ましい。 Among the above, the polyfunctional aliphatic thiol compounds include trimethylolpropane tris (3-mercaptobutyrate), 1,4-bis (3-mercaptobutylyloxy) butane, and 1,3,5-. At least one compound selected from the group consisting of tris (3-mercaptobutylyloxyethyl) -1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6 (1H, 3H, 5H) -trione is preferred.
 単官能の脂肪族チオール化合物としては、例えば、1-オクタンチオール、1-ドデカンチオール、β-メルカプトプロピオン酸、メチル-3-メルカプトプロピオネート、2-エチルヘキシル-3-メルカプトプロピオネート、n-オクチル-3-メルカプトプロピオネート、メトキシブチル-3-メルカプトプロピオネート、及び、ステアリル-3-メルカプトプロピオネートが挙げられる。 Examples of the monofunctional aliphatic thiol compound include 1-octanethiol, 1-dodecanethiol, β-mercaptopropionic acid, methyl-3-mercaptopropionate, 2-ethylhexyl-3-mercaptopropionate, and n-. Examples thereof include octyl-3-mercaptopropionate, methoxybutyl-3-mercaptopropionate, and stearyl-3-mercaptopropionate.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、1種単独の脂肪族チオール化合物を含んでいてもよく、2種以上の脂肪族チオール化合物を含んでいてもよい。 The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain one type of aliphatic thiol compound alone, or may contain two or more types of aliphatic thiol compounds.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層が脂肪族チオール化合物を含む場合、脂肪族チオール化合物の含有量は、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、5質量%以上が好ましく、5~50質量%がより好ましく、5~30質量%が更に好ましく、8~20質量%が特に好ましい。 When the negative photosensitive composition layer contains an aliphatic thiol compound, the content of the aliphatic thiol compound is preferably 5% by mass or more, preferably 5 to 50% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. % Is more preferable, 5 to 30% by mass is further preferable, and 8 to 20% by mass is particularly preferable.
<熱架橋性化合物>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の点から、熱架橋性化合物を含むことが好ましい。なお、本明細書においては、後述するエチレン性不飽和基を有する熱架橋性化合物は、エチレン性不飽和化合物としては扱わず、熱架橋性化合物として扱うものとする。
 熱架橋性化合物としては、エポキシ化合物、オキセタン化合物、メチロール化合物、及び、ブロックイソシアネート化合物が挙げられる。なかでも、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び、得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の点から、ブロックイソシアネート化合物が好ましい。
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物は、ヒドロキシ基及びカルボキシ基と反応するため、例えば、バインダーポリマー及びエチレン性不飽和基を有するラジカル重合性化合物の少なくとも一方が、ヒドロキシ基及びカルボキシ基の少なくとも一方を有する場合には、形成される膜の親水性が下がり、保護膜としての機能が強化される傾向がある。
 なお、ブロックイソシアネート化合物とは、「イソシアネートのイソシアネート基をブロック剤で保護(いわゆる、マスク)した構造を有する化合物」を指す。
<Thermal crosslinkable compound>
The negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains a heat-crosslinkable compound from the viewpoint of the strength of the obtained cured film and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film. In this specification, the heat-crosslinkable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group, which will be described later, is not treated as an ethylenically unsaturated compound, but is treated as a heat-crosslinkable compound.
Examples of the heat-crosslinkable compound include an epoxy compound, an oxetane compound, a methylol compound, and a blocked isocyanate compound. Among them, the blocked isocyanate compound is preferable from the viewpoint of the strength of the obtained cured film and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film.
Since the blocked isocyanate compound reacts with a hydroxy group and a carboxy group, for example, when at least one of the binder polymer and the radically polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group has at least one of the hydroxy group and the carboxy group, The hydrophilicity of the formed film tends to decrease, and the function as a protective film tends to be strengthened.
The blocked isocyanate compound refers to "a compound having a structure in which the isocyanate group of isocyanate is protected (so-called masked) with a blocking agent".
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物の解離温度は、特に制限されないが、100~160℃が好ましく、130~150℃がより好ましい。
 ブロックイソシアネートの解離温度とは、「示差走査熱量計を用いて、DSC(Differential scanning calorimetry)分析にて測定した場合における、ブロックイソシアネートの脱保護反応に伴う吸熱ピークの温度」を意味する。
 示差走査熱量計としては、例えば、セイコーインスツルメンツ(株)製の示差走査熱量計(型式:DSC6200)を好適に使用できる。但し、示差走査熱量計は、これに限定されない。
The dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate compound is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 to 160 ° C, more preferably 130 to 150 ° C.
The dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate means "the temperature of the endothermic peak associated with the deprotection reaction of the blocked isocyanate when measured by DSC (Differential scanning calorimetry) analysis using a differential scanning calorimeter".
As the differential scanning calorimeter, for example, a differential scanning calorimeter (model: DSC6200) manufactured by Seiko Instruments, Inc. can be preferably used. However, the differential scanning calorimeter is not limited to this.
 解離温度が100~160℃であるブロック剤としては、活性メチレン化合物〔マロン酸ジエステル(マロン酸ジメチル、マロン酸ジエチル、マロン酸ジn-ブチル、マロン酸ジ2-エチルヘキシル等)〕、オキシム化合物(ホルムアルドオキシム、アセトアルドオキシム、アセトオキシム、メチルエチルケトオキシム、及び、シクロヘキサノンオキシム等の分子内に-C(=N-OH)-で表される構造を有する化合物)が挙げられる。
 これらのなかでも、解離温度が100~160℃であるブロック剤としては、例えば、保存安定性の点から、オキシム化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種が好ましい。
Examples of the blocking agent having a dissociation temperature of 100 to 160 ° C. include an active methylene compound [malonic acid diester (dimethyl malonate, diethyl malonate, din-butyl malonate, di2-ethylhexyl malonic acid, etc.)] and an oxime compound ( Examples thereof include formaldehyde, acetaldoxime, acetoxime, methylethylketooxime, cyclohexanone oxime and the like, which have a structure represented by -C (= N-OH) -in the molecule).
Among these, as the blocking agent having a dissociation temperature of 100 to 160 ° C., for example, at least one selected from oxime compounds is preferable from the viewpoint of storage stability.
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物は、例えば、膜の脆性改良、被転写体との密着力向上等の点から、イソシアヌレート構造を有することが好ましい。
 イソシアヌレート構造を有するブロックイソシアネート化合物は、例えば、ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネートをイソシアヌレート化して保護することにより得られる。
 イソシアヌレート構造を有するブロックイソシアネート化合物のなかでも、オキシム化合物をブロック剤として用いたオキシム構造を有する化合物が、オキシム構造を有さない化合物よりも解離温度を好ましい範囲にしやすく、かつ、現像残渣を少なくしやすいという点から好ましい。
The blocked isocyanate compound preferably has an isocyanurate structure, for example, from the viewpoint of improving the brittleness of the membrane and improving the adhesion to the transferred body.
The blocked isocyanate compound having an isocyanurate structure can be obtained, for example, by subjecting hexamethylene diisocyanate to isocyanurate to protect it.
Among the blocked isocyanate compounds having an isocyanurate structure, a compound having an oxime structure using an oxime compound as a blocking agent is easier to set the dissociation temperature in a preferable range than a compound having no oxime structure, and has less development residue. It is preferable because it is easy to do.
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物は、重合性基を有していてもよい。
 重合性基としては、特に制限はなく、公知の重合性基を用いることができ、ラジカル重合性基が好ましい。
 重合性基としては、(メタ)アクリロキシ基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、及び、スチリル基等のエチレン性不飽和基、並びに、グリシジル基等のエポキシ基を有する基が挙げられる。
 なかでも、重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和基が好ましく、(メタ)アクリロキシ基がより好ましく、アクリロキシ基が更に好ましい。
The blocked isocyanate compound may have a polymerizable group.
The polymerizable group is not particularly limited, and a known polymerizable group can be used, and a radically polymerizable group is preferable.
Examples of the polymerizable group include a (meth) acryloxy group, a (meth) acrylamide group, an ethylenically unsaturated group such as a styryl group, and a group having an epoxy group such as a glycidyl group.
Among them, as the polymerizable group, an ethylenically unsaturated group is preferable, a (meth) acryloxy group is more preferable, and an acryloxy group is further preferable.
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物としては、市販品を使用できる。
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物の市販品の例としては、カレンズ(登録商標) AOI-BM、カレンズ(登録商標) MOI-BM、カレンズ(登録商標) MOI-BP等(以上、昭和電工(株)製)、ブロック型のデュラネートシリーズ(例えば、デュラネート(登録商標) TPA-B80E、デュラネート(登録商標) WT32-B75P等、旭化成ケミカルズ(株)製)が挙げられる。
As the blocked isocyanate compound, a commercially available product can be used.
Examples of commercially available blocked isocyanate compounds include Karenz (registered trademark) AOI-BM, Karenz (registered trademark) MOI-BM, Karenz (registered trademark) MOI-BP (all manufactured by Showa Denko KK), and blocks. Examples thereof include the Duranate series of molds (for example, Duranate (registered trademark) TPA-B80E, Duranate (registered trademark) WT32-B75P, etc., manufactured by Asahi Kasei Chemicals Co., Ltd.).
 熱架橋性化合物は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用することもできる。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層が熱架橋性化合物を含む場合、熱架橋性化合物の含有量は、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、1~50質量%が好ましく、5~30質量%がより好ましい。
The heat-crosslinkable compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the negative-type photosensitive composition layer contains a heat-crosslinkable compound, the content of the heat-crosslinkable compound is preferably 1 to 50% by mass, preferably 5 to 30% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative-type photosensitive composition layer. % By mass is more preferred.
<界面活性剤>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、界面活性剤を含んでいてもよい。
 界面活性剤としては、例えば、特許第4502784号公報の段落[0017]、及び、特開2009-237362号公報の段落[0060]~[0071]に記載の界面活性剤が挙げられる。
<Surfactant>
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a surfactant.
Examples of the surfactant include the surfactants described in paragraph [0017] of Japanese Patent No. 4502784 and paragraphs [0060] to [0071] of JP-A-2009-237362.
 界面活性剤としては、ノニオン系界面活性剤、フッ素系界面活性剤、又はシリコーン系界面活性剤が好ましい。
 フッ素系界面活性剤の市販品としては、例えば、メガファック F-171、F-172、F-173、F-176、F-177、F-141、F-142、F-143、F-144、F-437、F-475、F-477、F-479、F-482、F-551-A、F-552、F-554、F-555-A、F-556、F-557、F-558、F-559、F-560、F-561、F-565、F-563、F-568、F-575、F-780、EXP、MFS-330、MFS-578、MFS-579、MFS-586、MFS-587、R-41、R-41-LM、R-01、R-40、R-40-LM、RS-43、TF-1956、RS-90、R-94、RS-72-K、DS-21(以上、DIC株式会社製)、フロラード FC430、FC431、FC171(以上、住友スリーエム(株)製)、サーフロンS-382、SC-101、SC-103、SC-104、SC-105、SC-1068、SC-381、SC-383、S-393、KH-40(以上、AGC(株)製)、PolyFox PF636、PF656、PF6320、PF6520、PF7002(以上、OMNOVA社製)、フタージェント 710FL、710FM、610FM、601AD、601ADH2、602A、215M、245F、251、212M、250、209F、222F、208G、710LA、710FS、730LM、650AC、681、683(以上、(株)NEOS製)等が挙げられる。
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤としては、フッ素原子を含有する官能基を持つ分子構造を有し、熱を加えるとフッ素原子を含有する官能基の部分が切断されてフッ素原子が揮発するアクリル系化合物も好適に使用できる。このようなフッ素系界面活性剤としては、DIC(株)製のメガファック DSシリーズ(化学工業日報(2016年2月22日)、日経産業新聞(2016年2月23日))、例えばメガファック DS-21が挙げられる。
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤としては、フッ素化アルキル基またはフッ素化アルキレンエーテル基を有するフッ素原子含有ビニルエーテル化合物と、親水性のビニルエーテル化合物との重合体を用いることも好ましい。
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤としては、ブロックポリマーも使用できる。
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤としては、フッ素原子を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する構成単位と、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくはエチレンオキシ基、プロピレンオキシ基)を2以上(好ましくは5以上)有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する構成単位と、を含む含フッ素高分子化合物も好ましく使用できる。
 また、フッ素系界面活性剤としては、エチレン性不飽和基を側鎖に有する含フッ素重合体も使用できる。メガファック RS-101、RS-102、RS-718K、RS-72-K(以上、DIC株式会社製)等が挙げられる。
As the surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a fluorine-based surfactant, or a silicone-based surfactant is preferable.
Commercially available products of fluorine-based surfactants include, for example, Megafuck F-171, F-172, F-173, F-176, F-177, F-141, F-142, F-143, F-144. , F-437, F-475, F-477, F-479, F-482, F-551-A, F-552, F-554, F-555-A, F-556, F-557, F -558, F-559, F-560, F-561, F-565, F-563, F-568, F-575, F-780, EXP, MFS-330, MFS-578, MFS-579, MFS -586, MFS-587, R-41, R-41-LM, R-01, R-40, R-40-LM, RS-43, TF-1956, RS-90, R-94, RS-72 -K, DS-21 (above, manufactured by DIC Co., Ltd.), Fluorard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, manufactured by Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.), Surflon S-382, SC-101, SC-103, SC-104, SC -105, SC-1068, SC-381, SC-383, S-393, KH-40 (above, manufactured by AGC Co., Ltd.), FluorFox PF636, PF656, PF6320, PF6520, PF7002 (above, manufactured by OMNOVA), Fluorine 710FL, 710FM, 610FM, 601AD, 601ADH2, 602A, 215M, 245F, 251, 212M, 250, 209F, 222F, 208G, 710LA, 710FS, 730LM, 650AC, 681, 683 (manufactured by NEOS Co., Ltd.) And so on.
Further, the fluorine-based surfactant has a molecular structure having a functional group containing a fluorine atom, and when heat is applied, the portion of the functional group containing the fluorine atom is cut off and the fluorine atom volatilizes. Can also be suitably used. Examples of such fluorine-based surfactants include the Megafuck DS series manufactured by DIC Corporation (The Chemical Daily (February 22, 2016), Nikkei Sangyo Shimbun (February 23, 2016)), for example, Megafuck. DS-21 can be mentioned.
Further, as the fluorine-based surfactant, it is also preferable to use a polymer of a fluorine atom-containing vinyl ether compound having a fluorinated alkyl group or a fluorinated alkylene ether group and a hydrophilic vinyl ether compound.
Further, as the fluorine-based surfactant, a block polymer can also be used.
Further, the fluorine-based surfactant has a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and two or more (preferably five or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy groups and propyleneoxy groups). A fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a structural unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound can also be preferably used.
Further, as the fluorine-based surfactant, a fluorine-containing polymer having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain can also be used. Examples thereof include Megafuck RS-101, RS-102, RS-718K, RS-72-K (all manufactured by DIC Corporation) and the like.
 フッ素系界面活性剤としては、環境適性向上の観点から、パーフルオロオクタン酸(PFOA)及びパーフルオロオクタンスルホン酸(PFOS)等の炭素数が7以上の直鎖状パーフルオロアルキル基を有する化合物の代替材料に由来する界面活性剤であることが好ましい。
 ノニオン系界面活性剤としては、グリセロール、トリメチロールプロパン、トリメチロールエタン並びにそれらのエトキシレート及びプロポキシレート(例えば、グリセロールプロポキシレート、グリセロールエトキシレート等)、ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンステアリルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオレイルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンオクチルフェニルエーテル、ポリオキシエチレンノニルフェニルエーテル、ポリエチレングリコールジラウレート、ポリエチレングリコールジステアレート、ソルビタン脂肪酸エステル、プルロニック(登録商標) L10、L31、L61、L62、10R5、17R2、25R2(以上、BASF社製)、テトロニック 304、701、704、901、904、150R1(以上、BASF社製)、ソルスパース 20000(以上、日本ルーブリゾール(株)製)、NCW-101、NCW-1001、NCW-1002(以上、富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)、パイオニン D-6112、D-6112-W、D-6315(以上、竹本油脂(株)製)、オルフィンE1010、サーフィノール104、400、440(以上、日信化学工業(株)製)等が挙げられる。
As the fluorine-based surfactant, from the viewpoint of improving environmental suitability, a compound having a linear perfluoroalkyl group having 7 or more carbon atoms, such as perfluorooctanoic acid (PFOA) and perfluorooctanesulfonic acid (PFOS), may be used. It is preferably a surfactant derived from an alternative material.
Examples of the nonionic surfactant include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane, their ethoxylates and propoxylates (eg, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene stearyl ether, and the like. Polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester, Pluronic® L10, L31, L61, L62, 10R5, 17R2 , 25R2 (above, manufactured by BASF), Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1 (above, manufactured by BASF), Solsparse 20000 (above, manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd.), NCW-101, NCW -1001, NCW-1002 (above, manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Junyaku Co., Ltd.), Pionin D-6112, D-6112-W, D-6315 (above, manufactured by Takemoto Yushi Co., Ltd.), Orfin E1010, Surfinol 104, 400, 440 (all manufactured by Nissin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and the like can be mentioned.
 シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、シロキサン結合からなる直鎖状ポリマー、及び、側鎖や末端に有機基を導入した変性シロキサンポリマーが挙げられる。 Examples of the silicone-based surfactant include a linear polymer composed of a siloxane bond and a modified siloxane polymer having an organic group introduced into a side chain or a terminal.
 界面活性剤の具体例としては、DOWSIL 8032 ADDITIVE、トーレシリコーンDC3PA、トーレシリコーンSH7PA、トーレシリコーンDC11PA、トーレシリコーンSH21PA、トーレシリコーンSH28PA、トーレシリコーンSH29PA、トーレシリコーンSH30PA、トーレシリコーンSH8400(以上、東レ・ダウコーニング(株)製)並びに、X-22-4952、X-22-4272、X-22-6266、KF-351A、K354L、KF-355A、KF-945、KF-640、KF-642、KF-643、X-22-6191、X-22-4515、KF-6004、KP-341、KF-6001、KF-6002(以上、信越シリコーン株式会社製)、F-4440、TSF-4300、TSF-4445、TSF-4460、TSF-4452(以上、モメンティブ・パフォーマンス・マテリアルズ社製)、BYK307、BYK323、BYK330(以上、ビックケミー社製)等が挙げられる。 Specific examples of the surfactant include DOWSIL 8032 ADDITIVE, Torre Silicone DC3PA, Torre Silicone SH7PA, Torre Silicone DC11PA, Torre Silicone SH21PA, Torre Silicone SH28PA, Torre Silicone SH29PA, Torre Silicone SH30PA, Torre Silicone SH8400 (above, Toray Dow). (Made by Corning Co., Ltd.), X-22-4952, X-22-4272, X-22-6266, KF-351A, K354L, KF-355A, KF-945, KF-640, KF-642, KF- 643, X-22-6191, X-22-4515, KF-6004, KP-341, KF-6001, KF-6002 (all manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.), F-4440, TSF-4300, TSF-4445 , TSF-4460, TSF-4452 (above, manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), BYK307, BYK323, BYK330 (above, manufactured by Big Chemie) and the like.
 界面活性剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用することもできる。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層が界面活性剤を含む場合、界面活性剤の含有量は、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、0.01~3.0質量%が好ましく、0.01~1.0質量%がより好ましく、0.05~0.80質量%が更に好ましい。
The surfactant may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a surfactant, the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.01 to 3.0% by mass, preferably 0, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. 0.01 to 1.0% by mass is more preferable, and 0.05 to 0.80% by mass is further preferable.
<水素供与性化合物>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、水素供与性化合物を含んでいてもよい。
 水素供与性化合物は、光重合開始剤の活性光線に対する感度を一層向上させる、及び、酸素による重合性化合物の重合阻害を抑制する等の作用を有する。
<Hydrogen donating compound>
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a hydrogen donating compound.
The hydrogen donating compound has an action of further improving the sensitivity of the photopolymerization initiator to active light rays and suppressing the inhibition of the polymerization of the polymerizable compound by oxygen.
 水素供与性化合物としては、例えば、アミン類、及び、アミノ酸化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the hydrogen donating compound include amines and amino acid compounds.
 アミン類としては、例えば、M.R.Sanderら著「Journal of Polymer Society」第10巻3173頁(1972)、特公昭44-020189号公報、特開昭51-082102号公報、特開昭52-134692号公報、特開昭59-138205号公報、特開昭60-084305号公報、特開昭62-018537号公報、特開昭64-033104号公報、及び、Research Disclosure 33825号等に記載の化合物が挙げられる。より具体的には、4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、トリス(4-ジメチルアミノフェニル)メタン(別名:ロイコクリスタルバイオレット)、トリエタノールアミン、p-ジメチルアミノ安息香酸エチルエステル、p-ホルミルジメチルアニリン、及び、p-メチルチオジメチルアニリンが挙げられる。
 なかでも、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、アミン類としては、4,4’-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、及び、トリス(4-ジメチルアミノフェニル)メタンからなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種が好ましい。
Examples of amines include M.I. R. "Journal of Polymer Society" by Sander et al., Vol. 10, pp. 3173 (1972), JP-A-44-020189, JP-A-51-081022, JP-A-52-134692, JP-A-59-138205. Examples thereof include the compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 60-0843305, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 62-018537, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 64-033104, and Research Disclosure No. 33825. More specifically, 4,4'-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone, tris (4-dimethylaminophenyl) methane (also known as leucocrystal violet), triethanolamine, p-dimethylaminobenzoic acid ethyl ester, p-formyl. Examples thereof include dimethylaniline and p-methylthiodimethylaniline.
Among them, at least one selected from the group consisting of 4,4'-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone and tris (4-dimethylaminophenyl) methane is used as amines because the effect of the present invention is more excellent. preferable.
 アミノ酸化合物としては、例えば、N-フェニルグリシン、N-メチル-N-フェニルグリシン、N-エチル-N-フェニルグリシンが挙げられる。
 なかでも、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、アミノ酸化合物としては、N-フェニルグリシンが好ましい。
Examples of the amino acid compound include N-phenylglycine, N-methyl-N-phenylglycine, and N-ethyl-N-phenylglycine.
Among them, N-phenylglycine is preferable as the amino acid compound because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
 また、水素供与性化合物としては、例えば、特公昭48-042965号公報に記載の有機金属化合物(トリブチル錫アセテート等)、特公昭55-034414号公報に記載の水素供与体、及び、特開平6-308727号公報に記載のイオウ化合物(トリチアン等)も挙げられる。 Examples of the hydrogen donor compound include an organometallic compound (tributyltin acetate, etc.) described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 48-042965, a hydrogen donor described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 55-0344414, and JP-A-6. Sulfur compounds (Tritian and the like) described in JP-A-308727 can also be mentioned.
 水素供与性化合物は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用することもできる。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層が水素供与性化合物を含む場合、水素供与性化合物の含有量は、重合成長速度と連鎖移動のバランスとによる硬化速度の向上の点から、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、0.01~10.0質量%が好ましく、0.01~8.0質量%がより好ましく、0.03~5.0質量%が更に好ましい。
The hydrogen donating compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a hydrogen donating compound, the content of the hydrogen donating compound is such that the curing rate is improved by the balance between the polymerization growth rate and the chain transfer. 0.01 to 10.0% by mass is preferable, 0.01 to 8.0% by mass is more preferable, and 0.03 to 5.0% by mass is further preferable, based on the total mass of the above.
<不純物等>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、所定量の不純物を含んでいてもよい。
 不純物の具体例としては、ナトリウム、カリウム、マグネシウム、カルシウム、鉄、マンガン、銅、アルミニウム、チタン、クロム、コバルト、ニッケル、亜鉛、スズ、ハロゲン及びこれらのイオンが挙げられる。なかでも、ハロゲン化物イオン、ナトリウムイオン、及び、カリウムイオンは不純物として混入し易いため、下記の含有量にすることが好ましい。
<Impurities, etc.>
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a predetermined amount of impurities.
Specific examples of impurities include sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, manganese, copper, aluminum, titanium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, zinc, tin, halogen and ions thereof. Among them, halide ions, sodium ions, and potassium ions are easily mixed as impurities, so the following content is preferable.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層における不純物の含有量は、質量基準で、80ppm以下が好ましく、10ppm以下がより好ましく、2ppm以下が更に好ましい。ネガ型感光性組成物層における不純物の含有量は、質量基準で、1ppb以上又は0.1ppm以上とすることができる。 The content of impurities in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 80 ppm or less, more preferably 10 ppm or less, still more preferably 2 ppm or less on a mass basis. The content of impurities in the negative photosensitive composition layer can be 1 ppb or more or 0.1 ppm or more on a mass basis.
 不純物を上記範囲にする方法としては、ネガ型感光性組成物層の原料として不純物の含有量が少ないものを選択すること、及び、ネガ型感光性組成物層の形成時に不純物の混入を防ぐこと、洗浄して除去することが挙げられる。このような方法により、不純物量を上記範囲内とすることができる。 As a method of setting impurities in the above range, a material having a low impurity content is selected as a raw material for the negative photosensitive composition layer, and contamination of the negative photosensitive composition layer is prevented during formation of the negative photosensitive composition layer. , Cleaning and removal. By such a method, the amount of impurities can be kept within the above range.
 不純物は、例えば、ICP(Inductively Coupled Plasma)発光分光分析法、原子吸光分光法、及び、イオンクロマトグラフィー法等の公知の方法で定量できる。 The impurities can be quantified by known methods such as ICP (Inductively Coupled Plasma) emission spectroscopy, atomic absorption spectroscopy, and ion chromatography.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層における、ベンゼン、ホルムアルデヒド、トリクロロエチレン、1,3-ブタジエン、四塩化炭素、クロロホルム、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、及び、ヘキサン等の化合物の含有量は、少ないことが好ましい。これら化合物のネガ型感光性組成物層中における含有量としては、質量基準で、100ppm以下が好ましく、20ppm以下がより好ましく、4ppm以下が更に好ましい。下限は質量基準で、10ppb以上とすることができ、100ppb以上とすることができる。これら化合物は、上記の金属の不純物と同様の方法で含有量を抑制できる。また、公知の測定法により定量できる。 Content of compounds such as benzene, formaldehyde, trichlorethylene, 1,3-butadiene, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, and hexane in the negative photosensitive composition layer. Is preferably less. The content of these compounds in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 100 ppm or less, more preferably 20 ppm or less, still more preferably 4 ppm or less on a mass basis. The lower limit is based on mass and can be 10 ppb or more, and can be 100 ppb or more. The content of these compounds can be suppressed in the same manner as the above-mentioned metal impurities. Further, it can be quantified by a known measurement method.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層における水の含有量は、信頼性及びラミネート性を向上させる点から、0.01~1.0質量%が好ましく、0.05~0.5質量%がより好ましい。 The water content in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 0.01 to 1.0% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 0.5% by mass, from the viewpoint of improving reliability and laminating property.
<残存モノマー>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、上述したバインダーポリマー(例えば、アルカリ可溶性樹脂)の各構成単位の残存モノマーを含む場合がある。
 残存モノマーの含有量は、パターニング性、及び、信頼性の点から、バインダーポリマーの全質量に対して、5,000質量ppm以下が好ましく、2,000質量ppm以下がより好ましく、500質量ppm以下が更に好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、1質量ppm以上が好ましく、10質量ppm以上がより好ましい。
 バインダーポリマーの各構成単位の残存モノマーは、パターニング性、及び、信頼性の点から、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、3,000質量ppm以下が好ましく、600質量ppm以下がより好ましく、100質量ppm以下が更に好ましい。下限は特に制限されないが、0.1質量ppm以上が好ましく、1質量ppm以上がより好ましい。
<Residual monomer>
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain residual monomers of each structural unit of the binder polymer (eg, alkali-soluble resin) described above.
The content of the residual monomer is preferably 5,000 mass ppm or less, more preferably 2,000 mass ppm or less, and 500 mass ppm or less with respect to the total mass of the binder polymer from the viewpoint of patterning property and reliability. Is more preferable. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but 1 mass ppm or more is preferable, and 10 mass ppm or more is more preferable.
The residual monomer of each structural unit of the binder polymer is preferably 3,000 mass ppm or less, preferably 600 mass ppm or less, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer from the viewpoint of patterning property and reliability. More preferably, 100 mass ppm or less is further preferable. The lower limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 mass ppm or more, and more preferably 1 mass ppm or more.
 高分子反応でバインダーポリマーを合成する際のモノマーの残存モノマー量も、上記範囲とすることが好ましい。例えば、カルボン酸側鎖にアクリル酸グリシジルを反応させてバインダーポリマーを合成する場合には、アクリル酸グリシジルの含有量を上記範囲にすることが好ましい。
 残存モノマーの量は、液体クロマトグラフィー、及び、ガスクロマトグラフィー等の公知の方法で測定できる。
 残存モノマーの量は、バインダーポリマーを再沈等の手法により精製処理をすることで低減できる。
The amount of residual monomer of the monomer when synthesizing the binder polymer by the polymer reaction is also preferably in the above range. For example, when glycidyl acrylate is reacted with the carboxylic acid side chain to synthesize a binder polymer, the content of glycidyl acrylate is preferably in the above range.
The amount of the residual monomer can be measured by a known method such as liquid chromatography and gas chromatography.
The amount of the residual monomer can be reduced by purifying the binder polymer by a method such as reprecipitation.
<他の成分>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、既述の成分以外の成分(以下、「他の成分」ともいう。)を含んでいてもよい。他の成分としては、例えば、着色剤、酸化防止剤、及び、粒子(例えば、金属酸化物粒子)が挙げられる。また、他の成分としては、特開2000-310706号公報の段落[0058]~[0071]に記載のその他の添加剤も挙げられる。
<Other ingredients>
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a component other than the above-mentioned components (hereinafter, also referred to as “other component”). Other components include, for example, colorants, antioxidants, and particles (eg, metal oxide particles). Further, as other components, other additives described in paragraphs [0058] to [0071] of JP-A-2000-310706 can also be mentioned.
-粒子-
 粒子としては、金属酸化物粒子が好ましい。
 金属酸化物粒子における金属には、B、Si、Ge、As、Sb、及び、Te等の半金属も含まれる。
 粒子の平均一次粒子径は、例えば、硬化膜の透明性の点から、1~200nmが好ましく、3~80nmがより好ましい。
 粒子の平均一次粒子径は、電子顕微鏡を用いて任意の粒子200個の粒子径を測定し、測定結果を算術平均することにより算出される。なお、粒子の形状が球形でない場合には、最も長い辺を粒子径とする。
-particle-
As the particles, metal oxide particles are preferable.
The metal in the metal oxide particles also includes metalloids such as B, Si, Ge, As, Sb, and Te.
The average primary particle size of the particles is, for example, preferably 1 to 200 nm, more preferably 3 to 80 nm, from the viewpoint of transparency of the cured film.
The average primary particle size of the particles is calculated by measuring the particle size of 200 arbitrary particles using an electron microscope and arithmetically averaging the measurement results. When the shape of the particle is not spherical, the longest side is the particle diameter.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層が粒子を含む場合、金属種、及び、大きさ等の異なる粒子を1種のみ含んでいてもよく、2種以上含んでいてもよい。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、粒子を含まないか、或いは、ネガ型感光性組成物層が粒子を含む場合には、粒子の含有量がネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、0質量%超35質量%以下が好ましく、粒子を含まないか、或いは、粒子の含有量がネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、0質量%超10質量%以下がより好ましく、粒子を含まないか、或いは、粒子の含有量がネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して0質量%超5質量%以下が更に好ましく、粒子を含まないか、或いは、粒子の含有量がネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して0質量%超1質量%以下が更に好ましく、粒子を含まないことが特に好ましい。
When the negative photosensitive composition layer contains particles, it may contain only one kind of particles having different metal species and sizes, or two or more kinds.
The negative photosensitive composition layer does not contain particles, or when the negative photosensitive composition layer contains particles, the content of the particles is relative to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. , 0% by mass and 35% by mass or less, and more preferably 0% by mass or more and 10% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer, which does not contain particles or contains particles. , Particles are not contained, or the content of the particles is more preferably more than 0% by mass and 5% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer, and the particles are not contained or the particles are contained. The amount is more preferably more than 0% by mass and 1% by mass or less with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer, and it is particularly preferable that the amount does not contain particles.
-着色剤-
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、微量の着色剤(顔料、染料等)を含んでいてもよいが、例えば、透明性の点からは、着色剤を実質的に含まないことが好ましい。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層が着色剤を含む場合、着色剤の含有量は、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、1質量%未満が好ましく、0.1質量%未満がより好ましい。
-Colorant-
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a trace amount of a colorant (pigment, dye, etc.), but for example, from the viewpoint of transparency, it is preferable that the layer does not contain a colorant substantially.
When the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a colorant, the content of the colorant is preferably less than 1% by mass, more preferably less than 0.1% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. preferable.
-酸化防止剤-
 酸化防止剤としては、例えば、1-フェニル-3-ピラゾリドン(別名:フェニドン)、1-フェニル-4,4-ジメチル-3-ピラゾリドン、及び、1-フェニル-4-メチル-4-ヒドロキシメチル-3-ピラゾリドン等の3-ピラゾリドン類;ハイドロキノン、カテコール、ピロガロール、メチルハイドロキノン、及び、クロルハイドロキノン等のポリヒドロキシベンゼン類;パラメチルアミノフェノール、パラアミノフェノール、パラヒドロキシフェニルグリシン、及び、パラフェニレンジアミンが挙げられる。
 なかでも、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、酸化防止剤としては、3-ピラゾリドン類が好ましく、1-フェニル-3-ピラゾリドンがより好ましい。
-Antioxidant-
Examples of the antioxidant include 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidone (also known as phenidone), 1-phenyl-4,4-dimethyl-3-pyrazolidone, and 1-phenyl-4-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-. 3-Pyrazoridones such as 3-pyrazolidone; polyhydroxybenzenes such as hydroquinone, catechol, pyrogallol, methylhydroquinone, and chlorhydroquinone; paramethylaminophenol, paraaminophenol, parahydroxyphenylglycine, and paraphenylenediamine. Be done.
Among them, 3-pyrazolidones are preferable, and 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidone is more preferable as the antioxidant because the effect of the present invention is more excellent.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層が酸化防止剤を含む場合、酸化防止剤の含有量は、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、0.001質量%以上が好ましく、0.005質量%以上がより好ましく、0.01質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、1質量%以下が好ましい。 When the negative photosensitive composition layer contains an antioxidant, the content of the antioxidant is preferably 0.001% by mass or more, preferably 0.005% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. % Or more is more preferable, and 0.01% by mass or more is further preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1% by mass or less.
<ネガ型感光性組成物層の厚み>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層の厚みは、特に制限されないが30μm以下の場合が多く、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、20μm以下が好ましく、15μm以下がより好ましく、10μm以下が更に好ましく、3.0μm以下が特に好ましい。下限としては、ネガ型感光性組成物層を硬化して得られる膜の強度が優れる点で、0.60μm以上が好ましく、1.5μm以上がより好ましい。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層の厚みは、例えば、走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)による断面観察により測定した任意の5点の平均値として算出できる。
<Thickness of negative photosensitive composition layer>
The thickness of the negative photosensitive composition layer is not particularly limited, but is often 30 μm or less, and is preferably 20 μm or less, more preferably 15 μm or less, still more preferably 10 μm or less, in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. 9.0 μm or less is particularly preferable. As the lower limit, 0.60 μm or more is preferable, and 1.5 μm or more is more preferable, because the strength of the film obtained by curing the negative photosensitive composition layer is excellent.
The thickness of the negative photosensitive composition layer can be calculated as, for example, an average value of any five points measured by cross-sectional observation with a scanning electron microscope (SEM).
<ネガ型感光性組成物層の屈折率>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層の屈折率は、1.47~1.56が好ましく、1.49~1.54がより好ましい。
<Refractive index of negative photosensitive composition layer>
The refractive index of the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 1.47 to 1.56, more preferably 1.49 to 1.54.
<ネガ型感光性組成物層の色>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は無彩色であることが好ましい。具体的には、全反射(入射角8°、光源:D-65(2°視野))が、CIE1976(L*,a*,b*)色空間において、L値は10~90であることが好ましく、a値は-1.0~1.0であることが好ましく、b値は-1.0~1.0であることが好ましい。
<Color of negative photosensitive composition layer>
The negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably achromatic. Specifically, the total reflection (incident angle 8 °, light source: D-65 (2 ° field)) has an L * value of 10 to 90 in the CIE1976 (L *, a *, b *) color space. The a * value is preferably −1.0 to 1.0, and the b * value is preferably −1.0 to 1.0.
 なお、ネガ型感光性組成物層を硬化して得られるパターン(ネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜)は、無彩色であることが好ましい。
 具体的には、全反射(入射角8°、光源:D-65(2°視野))が、CIE1976(L*,a*,b*)色空間において、パターンのL値は10~90であることが好ましく、パターンのa値は-1.0~1.0であることが好ましく、パターンのb値は-1.0~1.0であることが好ましい。
The pattern (cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer) obtained by curing the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably achromatic.
Specifically, the total reflection (incident angle 8 °, light source: D-65 (2 ° field)) has a pattern L * value of 10 to 90 in the CIE1976 (L *, a *, b *) color space. The a * value of the pattern is preferably −1.0 to 1.0, and the b * value of the pattern is preferably −1.0 to 1.0.
<ネガ型感光性組成物層の透湿度>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層を硬化して得られるパターン(ネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜)の膜厚40μmでの透湿度は、防錆性の観点から、500g/m/24hr以下であることが好ましく、300g/m/24hr以下であることがより好ましく、100g/m/24hr以下であることが更に好ましい。
 なお、透湿度は、ネガ型感光性組成物層を、i線によって露光量300mJ/cmにて露光した後、145℃、30分間のポストベークを行うことにより、ネガ型感光性組成物層を硬化させた硬化膜で測定する。
<Humidity permeability of negative photosensitive composition layer>
The moisture permeability of the pattern (cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer) obtained by curing the negative photosensitive composition layer at a film thickness of 40 μm is 500 g / m 2/24 hr or less from the viewpoint of rust prevention. It is preferably 300 g / m 2/24 hr or less, and even more preferably 100 g / m 2/24 hr or less.
The moisture permeability is determined by exposing the negative photosensitive composition layer with an i-line at an exposure amount of 300 mJ / cm 2 and then post-baking at 145 ° C. for 30 minutes to obtain a negative photosensitive composition layer. Is measured with a cured film.
<ネガ型感光性組成物層の溶解速度>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層の炭酸ナトリウム1.0%水溶液に対する溶解速度は、現像時の残渣抑制の観点から、0.01μm/秒以上が好ましく、0.10μm/秒以上がより好ましく、0.20μm/秒以上がより好ましい。パターンのエッジ形状の観点から、5.0μm/秒以下が好ましく、4.0μm/秒以下がより好ましく、3.0μm/秒以下が更に好ましい。具体的な好ましい数値としては、例えば、1.0μm/秒、0.8μm/秒等である。1.0質量%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液に対するネガ型感光性組成物層の単位時間あたりの溶解速度は、以下のように測定するものとする。
 ガラス基板に形成した、溶剤を十分に除去したネガ型感光性組成物層(膜厚1.0~10μmの範囲内)に対し、25℃の1.0質量%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を用いて、ネガ型感光性組成物層が溶け切るまでシャワー現像を行う(但し、最長で2分までとする)。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層の膜厚を、ネガ型感光性組成物層が溶け切るまでに要した時間で割り算することで求める。なお、2分で溶け切らない場合は、それまでの膜厚変化量から同様に計算する。(株)いけうち製1/4MINJJX030PPのシャワーノズルを使用し、シャワーのスプレー圧は0.08MPaとする。上記条件の時、単位時間当たりのシャワー流量は1,800mL/minとする。
<Dissolution rate of negative photosensitive composition layer>
The dissolution rate of the negative photosensitive composition layer in a 1.0% aqueous solution of sodium carbonate is preferably 0.01 μm / sec or more, more preferably 0.10 μm / sec or more, and 0. 20 μm / sec or more is more preferable. From the viewpoint of the edge shape of the pattern, 5.0 μm / sec or less is preferable, 4.0 μm / sec or less is more preferable, and 3.0 μm / sec or less is further preferable. Specific preferable numerical values are, for example, 1.0 μm / sec, 0.8 μm / sec and the like. The dissolution rate of the negative photosensitive composition layer in a 1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution per unit time shall be measured as follows.
A negative-type photosensitive composition layer (within a film thickness of 1.0 to 10 μm) formed on a glass substrate from which the solvent has been sufficiently removed is subjected to a negative solution using a 1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at 25 ° C. Shower development is performed until the type photosensitive composition layer is completely melted (however, the maximum is 2 minutes).
It is obtained by dividing the film thickness of the negative photosensitive composition layer by the time required for the negative photosensitive composition layer to melt completely. If it does not melt completely in 2 minutes, calculate in the same way from the amount of change in film thickness up to that point. A shower nozzle of 1/4 MINJJX030PP manufactured by Ikeuchi Co., Ltd. is used, and the shower pressure is 0.08 MPa. Under the above conditions, the shower flow rate per unit time is 1,800 mL / min.
<ネガ型感光性組成物層中の異物>
 パターン形成性の観点から、ネガ型感光性組成物層中の直径1.0μm以上の異物の数は、10個/mm以下であることが好ましく、5個/mm以下であることがより好ましい。異物個数は以下のように測定するものとする。ネガ型感光性組成物層の表面の法線方向から、ネガ型感光性組成物層の面上の任意の5か所の領域(1mm×1mm)を、光学顕微鏡を用いて目視にて観察して、各領域中の直径1.0μm以上の異物の数を測定して、それらを算術平均して異物の数として算出する。
<Foreign matter in the negative photosensitive composition layer>
From the viewpoint of pattern formation, the number of foreign substances having a diameter of 1.0 μm or more in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 10 pieces / mm 2 or less, and more preferably 5 pieces / mm 2 or less. preferable. The number of foreign substances shall be measured as follows. From the normal direction of the surface of the negative photosensitive composition layer, any five regions (1 mm × 1 mm) on the surface of the negative photosensitive composition layer are visually observed using an optical microscope. Then, the number of foreign substances having a diameter of 1.0 μm or more in each region is measured, and they are arithmetically averaged to calculate the number of foreign substances.
<<保護フィルム>>
 転写フィルムは、保護フィルムを有していてもよい。
 保護フィルムとしては、耐熱性及び耐溶剤性を有する樹脂フィルムを用いることができ、例えば、ポリプロピレンフィルム及びポリエチレンフィルム等のポリオレフィンフィルム、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム等のポリエステルフィルム、ポリカーボネートフィルム、並びに、ポリスチレンフィルムが挙げられる。
 また、保護フィルムとして上述の仮支持体と同じ材料で構成された樹脂フィルムを用いてもよい。
 なかでも、保護フィルムとしては、ポリオレフィンフィルムが好ましく、ポリプロピレンフィルム又はポリエチレンフィルムがより好ましく、ポリエチレンフィルムが更に好ましい。
<< Protective film >>
The transfer film may have a protective film.
As the protective film, a resin film having heat resistance and solvent resistance can be used, and examples thereof include a polyolefin film such as a polypropylene film and a polyethylene film, a polyester film such as a polyethylene terephthalate film, a polycarbonate film, and a polystyrene film. Be done.
Further, as the protective film, a resin film made of the same material as the above-mentioned temporary support may be used.
Among them, as the protective film, a polyolefin film is preferable, a polypropylene film or a polyethylene film is more preferable, and a polyethylene film is further preferable.
 保護フィルムの厚みは、1~100μmが好ましく、5~50μmがより好ましく、5~40μmが更に好ましく、15~30μmが特に好ましい。
 保護フィルムの厚みは、機械的強度に優れる点で、1μm以上が好ましく、比較的安価となる点で、100μm以下が好ましい。
The thickness of the protective film is preferably 1 to 100 μm, more preferably 5 to 50 μm, further preferably 5 to 40 μm, and particularly preferably 15 to 30 μm.
The thickness of the protective film is preferably 1 μm or more in terms of excellent mechanical strength, and preferably 100 μm or less in terms of relatively low cost.
 また、保護フィルムにおいては、保護フィルム中に含まれる直径80μm以上のフィッシュアイ数が、5個/m以下であることが好ましい。
 なお、「フィッシュアイ」とは、材料を熱溶融し、混練、押し出し、2軸延伸及びキャスティング法等の方法によりフィルムを製造する際に、材料の異物、未溶解物、及び、酸化劣化物等がフィルム中に取り込まれたものである。
Further, in the protective film, it is preferable that the number of fish eyes having a diameter of 80 μm or more contained in the protective film is 5 / m 2 or less.
The term "fish eye" refers to foreign substances, undissolved substances, oxidative deterioration substances, etc. of the material when the material is thermally melted, kneaded, extruded, and used to produce a film by a biaxial stretching method, a casting method, or the like. Was incorporated into the film.
 保護フィルムに含まれる直径3μm以上の粒子の数は、30個/mm以下が好ましく、10個/mm以下がより好ましく、5個/mm以下が更に好ましい。
 これにより、保護フィルムに含まれる粒子に起因する凹凸がネガ型感光性組成物層又は導電層に転写されることにより生じる欠陥を抑制することができる。
The number of particles having a diameter of 3 μm or more contained in the protective film is preferably 30 particles / mm 2 or less, more preferably 10 particles / mm 2 or less, and further preferably 5 particles / mm 2 or less.
As a result, it is possible to suppress defects caused by the unevenness caused by the particles contained in the protective film being transferred to the negative photosensitive composition layer or the conductive layer.
 巻き取り性を付与する点から、保護フィルムの組成物層と接する面とは反対側の表面の算術平均粗さRaは、0.01μm以上が好ましく、0.02μm以上がより好ましく、0.03μm以上が更に好ましい。一方で、0.50μm未満が好ましく、0.40μm以下がより好ましく、0.30μm以下が更に好ましい。
 保護フィルムは、転写時の欠陥抑制の点から、組成物層と接する面の表面粗さRa、0.01μm以上が好ましく、0.02μm以上がより好ましく、0.03μm以上が更に好ましい。一方で、0.50μm未満が好ましく、0.40μm以下がより好ましく、0.30μm以下が更に好ましい。
The arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the protective film opposite to the surface in contact with the composition layer is preferably 0.01 μm or more, more preferably 0.02 μm or more, and more preferably 0.03 μm from the viewpoint of imparting windability. The above is more preferable. On the other hand, less than 0.50 μm is preferable, 0.40 μm or less is more preferable, and 0.30 μm or less is further preferable.
The protective film has a surface roughness Ra of the surface in contact with the composition layer of preferably 0.01 μm or more, more preferably 0.02 μm or more, still more preferably 0.03 μm or more, from the viewpoint of suppressing defects during transfer. On the other hand, less than 0.50 μm is preferable, 0.40 μm or less is more preferable, and 0.30 μm or less is further preferable.
<<仮支持体、ネガ型感光性組成物層、及び保護フィルムの好適な関係>>
 転写フィルムは、仮支持体、ネガ型感光性組成物層、及び保護フィルムの各物性が以下の態様を示すのが好ましい。
 転写フィルムは、好適態様1、好適態様2、好適態様3、好適態様4、及び好適態様5の1つ以上を満たすのが好ましく、いずれも満たすのがより好ましい。
<< Preferable relationship between temporary support, negative photosensitive composition layer, and protective film >>
As for the transfer film, it is preferable that the physical characteristics of the temporary support, the negative photosensitive composition layer, and the protective film show the following aspects.
The transfer film preferably satisfies one or more of preferred embodiments 1, preferred embodiments 2, preferred embodiments 3, preferred embodiments 4, and preferred embodiments 5, and more preferably all of them.
 「ネガ型感光性組成物層を硬化した硬化膜の破断伸び」は、厚み20μmのネガ型感光性組成物層を超高圧水銀ランプで120mJ/cm露光して硬化した後、高圧水銀ランプで400mJ/cmでさらに追加露光し、145℃で30分間加熱した後の硬化膜について、引っ張り試験によって測定する。
 「仮支持体のネガ型感光性組成物層側の表面の算術平均粗さRa」は以下の方法によって測定できる。3次元光学プロファイラー(New View7300、Zygo社)を用いて、以下の条件にて測定対象物の表面プロファイルを得る。測定及び解析ソフトウェアとしては、MetroPro ver8.3.2のMicroscope Applicationを用いる。次に、上記ソフトウェアを用いてSurface Map画面を表示し、Surface Map画面中でヒストグラムデータを得る。得られたヒストグラムデータから、測定対象物の表面の算術平均粗さRaを得る。
 「保護フィルムのネガ型感光性組成物層側の表面の算術平均粗さRa」の測定方法は、「仮支持体のネガ型感光性組成物層側の表面の算術平均粗さRa」の測定方法と同様にして実施される。
"Breaking elongation of the cured film obtained by curing the negative photosensitive composition layer" is performed by exposing the negative photosensitive composition layer having a thickness of 20 μm to 120 mJ / cm 2 with an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp and curing it, and then using a high pressure mercury lamp. The cured film after further exposure at 400 mJ / cm 2 and heated at 145 ° C. for 30 minutes is measured by a tensile test.
The "arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the temporary support on the negative photosensitive composition layer side" can be measured by the following method. Using a three-dimensional optical profiler (New View7300, Zygo), a surface profile of the object to be measured is obtained under the following conditions. As the measurement and analysis software, Microscope Application of MetroPro ver8.3.2 is used. Next, the Surface Map screen is displayed using the above software, and histogram data is obtained in the Surface Map screen. From the obtained histogram data, the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the object to be measured is obtained.
The method for measuring the "arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the protective film on the negative photosensitive composition layer side" is the measurement of the "arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the temporary support on the negative photosensitive composition layer side". It is carried out in the same way as the method.
・・・好適態様1
 転写フィルム1は、仮支持体、ネガ型感光性組成物層、及び保護フィルムの各物性は、下記(P1)~(P3)の各条件をいずれも満たすのが好ましい。
 (P1)ネガ型感光性組成物層を硬化した硬化膜の120℃における破断伸びが15%以上である。
 (P2)仮支持体のネガ型感光性組成物層側の表面の算術平均粗さRaが50nm以下である。
 (P3)保護フィルムのネガ型感光性組成物層側の表面の算術平均粗さRaが150nm以下である。
... preferred embodiment 1
It is preferable that the physical characteristics of the temporary support, the negative photosensitive composition layer, and the protective film of the transfer film 1 satisfy all of the following conditions (P1) to (P3).
(P1) The breaking elongation of the cured film obtained by curing the negative photosensitive composition layer at 120 ° C. is 15% or more.
(P2) The arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the temporary support on the negative photosensitive composition layer side is 50 nm or less.
(P3) The arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the protective film on the negative photosensitive composition layer side is 150 nm or less.
・・・好適態様2
 転写フィルム1の仮支持体及びネガ型感光性組成物層の各物性は、下記式(1)を満たすことが好ましい。
 X×Y<1500   式(1)
 ここで、式(1)中、Xは、ネガ型感光性組成物層を硬化した硬化膜の120℃における破断伸びの値(%)を表し、Yは、仮支持体のネガ型感光性組成物層側の表面の算術平均粗さRaの値(nm)を表す。
 上記式(1)において、X×Yで表される値は、750以下であるのが好ましい。
... preferred embodiment 2
The physical characteristics of the temporary support of the transfer film 1 and the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably satisfy the following formula (1).
X × Y <1500 formula (1)
Here, in the formula (1), X represents the value (%) of the elongation at break at 120 ° C. of the cured film obtained by curing the negative photosensitive composition layer, and Y represents the negative photosensitive composition of the temporary support. It represents the value (nm) of the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface on the material layer side.
In the above formula (1), the value represented by X × Y is preferably 750 or less.
・・・好適態様3
 転写フィルム1の感光性の物性は、下記条件(P4)を満たすことが好ましい。
 (P4)ネガ型感光性組成物層を硬化した硬化膜の23℃での破断伸びに対し、120℃での破断伸びが2倍以上大きい。
... preferred embodiment 3
The photosensitive physical properties of the transfer film 1 preferably satisfy the following condition (P4).
(P4) The breaking elongation at 120 ° C. is more than twice as large as the breaking elongation at 23 ° C. of the cured film obtained by curing the negative photosensitive composition layer.
・・・好適態様4
 転写フィルム1の仮支持体及びネガ型感光性組成物層の各物性は、下記式(2)を満たすことが好ましい。
 Y ≦ Z   式(2)
 ここで、式(2)中、Yは、仮支持体のネガ型感光性組成物層側の表面の算術平均粗さRaの値(nm)を表し、Zは、保護フィルムのネガ型感光性組成物層側の表面の算術平均粗さRaの値(nm)を表す。
... preferred embodiment 4
The physical characteristics of the temporary support of the transfer film 1 and the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably satisfy the following formula (2).
Y ≤ Z formula (2)
Here, in the formula (2), Y represents the value (nm) of the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface of the surface of the temporary support on the negative photosensitive composition layer side, and Z represents the negative photosensitive of the protective film. It represents the value (nm) of the arithmetic mean roughness Ra of the surface on the composition layer side.
<<屈折率調整層>>
 転写フィルムは、屈折率調整層を有しているのが好ましい。
 屈折率調整層としては、公知の屈折率調整層を適用できる。屈折率調整層に含まれる材料としては、例えば、バインダーポリマー、重合性化合物、金属塩、及び、粒子が挙げられる。
 屈折率調整層の屈折率を制御する方法は、特に制限されず、例えば、所定の屈折率の樹脂を単独で用いる方法、樹脂と粒子とを用いる方法、及び、金属塩と樹脂との複合体を用いる方法が挙げられる。
<< Refractive index adjustment layer >>
The transfer film preferably has a refractive index adjusting layer.
As the refractive index adjusting layer, a known refractive index adjusting layer can be applied. Examples of the material contained in the refractive index adjusting layer include a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound, a metal salt, and particles.
The method for controlling the refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer is not particularly limited, and for example, a method using a resin having a predetermined refractive index alone, a method using a resin and particles, and a composite of a metal salt and a resin are used. Is mentioned.
 バインダーポリマー及び重合性化合物としては、例えば、上記「ネガ型感光性組成物層」の項において説明したバインダーポリマー及び重合性化合物が挙げられる。 Examples of the binder polymer and the polymerizable compound include the binder polymer and the polymerizable compound described in the section of the above-mentioned "negative photosensitive composition layer".
 粒子としては、例えば、金属酸化物粒子、及び、金属粒子が挙げられる。
 金属酸化物粒子の種類は特に制限はなく、公知の金属酸化物粒子が挙げられる。金属酸化物粒子における金属には、B、Si、Ge、As、Sb、及び、Te等の半金属も含まれる。
Examples of the particles include metal oxide particles and metal particles.
The type of the metal oxide particles is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include known metal oxide particles. The metal in the metal oxide particles also includes metalloids such as B, Si, Ge, As, Sb, and Te.
 粒子の平均一次粒子径は、例えば、硬化膜の透明性の点から、1~200nmが好ましく、3~80nmがより好ましい。
 粒子の平均一次粒子径は、電子顕微鏡を用いて任意の粒子200個の粒子径を測定し、測定結果を算術平均することにより算出される。なお、粒子の形状が球形でない場合には、最も長い辺を粒子径とする。
The average primary particle size of the particles is, for example, preferably 1 to 200 nm, more preferably 3 to 80 nm, from the viewpoint of transparency of the cured film.
The average primary particle size of the particles is calculated by measuring the particle size of 200 arbitrary particles using an electron microscope and arithmetically averaging the measurement results. When the shape of the particle is not spherical, the longest side is the particle diameter.
 金属酸化物粒子としては、具体的には、酸化ジルコニウム粒子(ZrO粒子)、Nb粒子、酸化チタン粒子(TiO粒子)、二酸化珪素粒子(SiO粒子)、及び、これらの複合粒子からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種が好ましい。
 これらのなかでも、金属酸化物粒子としては、例えば、屈折率を調整しやすいという点から、酸化ジルコニウム粒子及び酸化チタン粒子からなる群から選ばれる少なくとも1種がより好ましい。
Specific examples of the metal oxide particles include zirconium oxide particles (ZrO 2 particles), Nb 2 O 5 particles, titanium oxide particles (TiO 2 particles), silicon dioxide particles (SiO 2 particles), and a composite thereof. At least one selected from the group consisting of particles is preferred.
Among these, as the metal oxide particles, for example, at least one selected from the group consisting of zirconium oxide particles and titanium oxide particles is more preferable because the refractive index can be easily adjusted.
 金属酸化物粒子の市販品としては、焼成酸化ジルコニウム粒子(CIKナノテック株式会社製、製品名:ZRPGM15WT%-F04)、焼成酸化ジルコニウム粒子(CIKナノテック株式会社製、製品名:ZRPGM15WT%-F74)、焼成酸化ジルコニウム粒子(CIKナノテック株式会社製、製品名:ZRPGM15WT%-F75)、焼成酸化ジルコニウム粒子(CIKナノテック株式会社製、製品名:ZRPGM15WT%-F76)、酸化ジルコニウム粒子(ナノユースOZ-S30M、日産化学工業(株)製)、及び、酸化ジルコニウム粒子(ナノユースOZ-S30K、日産化学工業(株)製)が挙げられる。 Commercially available metal oxide particles include calcined zirconium oxide particles (manufactured by CIK Nanotech Co., Ltd., product name: ZRPGM15WT% -F04), calcined zirconium oxide particles (manufactured by CIK Nanotech Co., Ltd., product name: ZRPGM15WT% -F74). Fired Zirconium Oxide Particles (CIK Nanotech Co., Ltd., Product Name: ZRPGM15WT% -F75), Fired Zirconium Oxide Particles (CIK Nanotech Co., Ltd., Product Name: ZRPGM15WT% -F76), Zirconium Oxide Particles (Nano Youth OZ-S30M, Nissan) Examples include (manufactured by Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and zirconium oxide particles (Nano Youth OZ-S30K, manufactured by Nissan Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
 粒子は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用することもできる。
 屈折率調整層における粒子の含有量は、屈折率調整層全質量に対し、1~95質量%が好ましく、20~90質量%がより好ましく、40~85質量%が更に好ましい。
 金属酸化物粒子として酸化チタンを用いる場合、酸化チタン粒子の含有量は、屈折率調整層全質量に対して、1~95質量%が好ましく、20~90質量%がより好ましく、40~85質量%が更に好ましい。
The particles may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the particles in the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 1 to 95% by mass, more preferably 20 to 90% by mass, still more preferably 40 to 85% by mass, based on the total mass of the refractive index adjusting layer.
When titanium oxide is used as the metal oxide particles, the content of the titanium oxide particles is preferably 1 to 95% by mass, more preferably 20 to 90% by mass, and 40 to 85% by mass with respect to the total mass of the refractive index adjusting layer. % Is more preferable.
 屈折率調整層の屈折率は、ネガ型感光性組成物層の屈折率よりも高いことが好ましい。
 屈折率調整層の屈折率は、1.50以上が好ましく、1.55以上がより好ましく、1.60以上が更に好ましく、1.65以上が特に好ましい。屈折率調整層の屈折率の上限は、2.10以下が好ましく、1.85以下がより好ましく、1.78以下が更に好ましい。
 なお、上記屈折率は、25℃における波長550nmの屈折率である。
The refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably higher than that of the negative photosensitive composition layer.
The refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 1.50 or more, more preferably 1.55 or more, further preferably 1.60 or more, and particularly preferably 1.65 or more. The upper limit of the refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 2.10 or less, more preferably 1.85 or less, and even more preferably 1.78 or less.
The refractive index is a refractive index having a wavelength of 550 nm at 25 ° C.
 屈折率調整層の厚みは、50~500nmが好ましく、55~110nmがより好ましく、60~100nmが更に好ましい。
 屈折率調整層の厚みは、走査型電子顕微鏡(SEM)による断面観察により測定した任意の5点の平均値として算出する。
The thickness of the refractive index adjusting layer is preferably 50 to 500 nm, more preferably 55 to 110 nm, and even more preferably 60 to 100 nm.
The thickness of the refractive index adjusting layer is calculated as an average value of any five points measured by cross-sectional observation with a scanning electron microscope (SEM).
<<第1実施形態の転写フィルムの製造方法>>
 第1実施形態の転写フィルムの製造方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法を使用できる。
 上記の転写フィルム10の製造方法としては、例えば、仮支持体1の表面にネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物を塗布して塗膜を形成し、更にこの塗膜を乾燥してネガ型感光性組成物層3を形成する工程と、ネガ型感光性組成物層3の表面に屈折率調整層形成用組成物を塗布して塗膜を形成し、更にこの塗膜を乾燥して屈折率調整層5を形成する工程と、を含む方法が挙げられる。
<< Method for Producing Transfer Film of First Embodiment >>
The method for producing the transfer film of the first embodiment is not particularly limited, and a known method can be used.
As a method for producing the transfer film 10, for example, a negative-type photosensitive composition layer-forming composition is applied to the surface of the temporary support 1 to form a coating film, and the coating film is further dried to make a negative. The step of forming the mold photosensitive composition layer 3 and the composition for forming a refractive index adjusting layer are applied to the surface of the negative photosensitive composition layer 3 to form a coating film, and the coating film is further dried. A method including a step of forming the refractive index adjusting layer 5 and a method including the step of forming the refractive index adjusting layer 5 can be mentioned.
 上述の製造方法により製造された積層体の屈折率調整層5上に、保護フィルム7を圧着させることにより、転写フィルム10が製造される。
 第1実施形態の転写フィルムの製造方法としては、屈折率調整層5の仮支持体1を有する側とは反対側の面に接するように保護フィルム7を設ける工程を含むことにより、仮支持体1、ネガ型感光性組成物層3、屈折率調整層5、及び保護フィルム7を備える転写フィルム10を製造することが好ましい。
 上記の製造方法により転写フィルム10を製造した後、転写フィルム10を巻き取ることにより、ロール形態の転写フィルムを作製及び保管してもよい。ロール形態の転写フィルムは、後述するロールツーロール方式での基板との貼合工程にそのままの形態で提供できる。
The transfer film 10 is manufactured by crimping the protective film 7 onto the refractive index adjusting layer 5 of the laminate manufactured by the above-mentioned manufacturing method.
The method for producing the transfer film of the first embodiment includes a step of providing the protective film 7 so as to be in contact with the surface of the refractive index adjusting layer 5 opposite to the side having the temporary support 1. 1. It is preferable to manufacture a transfer film 10 including a negative photosensitive composition layer 3, a refractive index adjusting layer 5, and a protective film 7.
After the transfer film 10 is manufactured by the above-mentioned manufacturing method, the transfer film 10 may be wound up to prepare and store the transfer film in the form of a roll. The roll-type transfer film can be provided as it is in the bonding process with the substrate in the roll-to-roll method described later.
 また、上記の転写フィルム10の製造方法としては、保護フィルム7上に、屈折率調整層5を形成した後、屈折率調整層5の表面にネガ型感光性組成物層3を形成する方法であってもよい。
 また、上記の転写フィルム10の製造方法としては、仮支持体1上にネガ型感光性組成物層3を形成し、別途、保護フィルム7上に屈折率調整層5を形成し、ネガ型感光性組成物層3とに屈折率調整層5とを貼り合わせて形成する方法であってもよい。
The method for producing the transfer film 10 is to form the refractive index adjusting layer 5 on the protective film 7 and then form the negative photosensitive composition layer 3 on the surface of the refractive index adjusting layer 5. There may be.
Further, as a method for producing the transfer film 10, the negative type photosensitive composition layer 3 is formed on the temporary support 1, and the refractive index adjusting layer 5 is separately formed on the protective film 7, and the negative type photosensitive is formed. A method may be used in which the refractive index adjusting layer 5 is bonded to the sex composition layer 3.
<ネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物及びネガ型感光性組成物層の形成方法>
 生産性に優れる点で、転写フィルム中のネガ型感光性組成物層は、上述したネガ型感光性組成物層を構成する成分(例えば、バインダーポリマー、エチレン性不飽和化合物、及び、光重合開始剤等)、及び、溶剤を含むネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物を使用して塗布法により形成されるのが望ましい。第1実施形態の転写フィルムの製造方法としては、具体的には、仮支持体上にネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物を塗布して塗膜を形成し、この塗膜に乾燥処理を施してネガ型感光性組成物層を形成する方法であるのが好ましい。
<Composition for forming a negative photosensitive composition layer and a method for forming a negative photosensitive composition layer>
In terms of excellent productivity, the negative photosensitive composition layer in the transfer film has components (for example, a binder polymer, an ethylenically unsaturated compound, and photopolymerization initiation) constituting the negative photosensitive composition layer described above. It is desirable that the film is formed by a coating method using a composition for forming a negative photosensitive composition layer containing an agent, etc.) and a solvent. Specifically, as a method for producing a transfer film of the first embodiment, a composition for forming a negative photosensitive composition layer is applied onto a temporary support to form a coating film, and the coating film is dried. Is preferable in this method to form a negative photosensitive composition layer.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物に含まれ得る溶剤としては、有機溶剤が好ましい。有機溶剤としては、例えば、メチルエチルケトン、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(別名:1-メトキシ-2-プロピルアセテート)、ジエチレングリコールエチルメチルエーテル、シクロヘキサノン、メチルイソブチルケトン、乳酸エチル、乳酸メチル、カプロラクタム、n-プロパノール、及び、2-プロパノールが挙げられる。 An organic solvent is preferable as the solvent that can be contained in the composition for forming the negative photosensitive composition layer. Examples of the organic solvent include methyl ethyl ketone, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (also known as 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate), diethylene glycol ethyl methyl ether, cyclohexanone, methyl isobutyl ketone, ethyl lactate, methyl lactate, and caprolactam. , N-Propanol, and 2-Propanol.
 また、溶剤としては、必要に応じ、沸点が180~250℃である有機溶剤(高沸点溶剤)を用いることもできる。 Further, as the solvent, an organic solvent (high boiling point solvent) having a boiling point of 180 to 250 ° C. can be used, if necessary.
 溶剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用することもできる。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物の全固形分量は、ネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物の全質量に対して、5~80質量%が好ましく、5~40質量%がより好ましく、5~30質量%が更に好ましい。
 つまり、ネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物中の溶剤の含有量としては、ネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物の全質量に対して、20~95質量%が好ましく、60~95質量%がより好ましく、70~95質量%が更に好ましい。
The solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The total solid content of the negative-type photosensitive composition layer-forming composition is preferably 5 to 80% by mass, more preferably 5 to 40% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative-type photosensitive composition layer-forming composition. It is preferable, and 5 to 30% by mass is more preferable.
That is, the content of the solvent in the composition for forming the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 20 to 95% by mass, preferably 60 to 95% by mass, based on the total mass of the composition for forming the negative photosensitive composition layer. 95% by mass is more preferable, and 70 to 95% by mass is further preferable.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物の25℃における粘度は、例えば、塗布性の点から、1~50mPa・sが好ましく、2~40mPa・sがより好ましく、3~30mPa・sが更に好ましい。粘度は、粘度計を用いて測定する。粘度計としては、例えば、東機産業株式会社製の粘度計(商品名:VISCOMETER TV-22)を好適に使用できる。ただし、粘度計は、上記した粘度計に制限されない。 The viscosity of the composition for forming a negative photosensitive composition layer at 25 ° C. is, for example, preferably 1 to 50 mPa · s, more preferably 2 to 40 mPa · s, and further preferably 3 to 30 mPa · s from the viewpoint of coatability. preferable. Viscosity is measured using a viscometer. As the viscometer, for example, a viscometer manufactured by Toki Sangyo Co., Ltd. (trade name: VISCOMETER TV-22) can be preferably used. However, the viscometer is not limited to the above-mentioned viscometer.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物の25℃における表面張力は、例えば、塗布性の点から、5~100mN/mが好ましく、10~80mN/mがより好ましく、15~40mN/mが更に好ましい。表面張力は、表面張力計を用いて測定する。表面張力計としては、例えば、協和界面科学株式会社製の表面張力計(商品名:Automatic Surface Tensiometer CBVP-Z)を好適に使用できる。ただし、表面張力計は、上記した表面張力計に制限されない。 The surface tension of the negative photosensitive composition layer forming composition at 25 ° C. is, for example, preferably 5 to 100 mN / m, more preferably 10 to 80 mN / m, and 15 to 40 mN / m from the viewpoint of coatability. More preferred. Surface tension is measured using a tensiometer. As the surface tension meter, for example, a surface tension meter manufactured by Kyowa Interface Science Co., Ltd. (trade name: Acoustic Surface Tensiometer CBVP-Z) can be preferably used. However, the tensiometer is not limited to the above-mentioned tensiometer.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物の塗布方法としては、例えば、印刷法、スプレー法、ロールコート法、バーコート法、カーテンコート法、スピンコート法、及び、ダイコート法(すなわち、スリットコート法)が挙げられる。 Examples of the method for applying the negative photosensitive composition layer forming composition include a printing method, a spray method, a roll coating method, a bar coating method, a curtain coating method, a spin coating method, and a die coating method (that is, a slit coating method). Law).
 ネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物の塗膜の乾燥方法としては、加熱乾燥及び減圧乾燥が好ましい。なお、本明細書において、「乾燥」とは、組成物に含まれる溶剤の少なくとも一部を除去することを意味する。乾燥方法としては、例えば、自然乾燥、加熱乾燥、及び、減圧乾燥が挙げられる。上記した方法を単独で又は複数組み合わせて適用することができる。
 乾燥温度としては、80℃以上が好ましく、90℃以上がより好ましい。また、その上限値としては130℃以下が好ましく、120℃以下がより好ましい。温度を連続的に変化させて乾燥させることもできる。
 また、乾燥時間としては、20秒以上が好ましく、40秒以上がより好ましく、60秒以上が更に好ましい。また、その上限値としては特に制限されないが、600秒以下が好ましく、300秒以下がより好ましい。
As a method for drying the coating film of the negative photosensitive composition layer forming composition, heat drying and vacuum drying are preferable. In addition, in this specification, "drying" means removing at least a part of the solvent contained in a composition. Examples of the drying method include natural drying, heat drying, and vacuum drying. The above methods can be applied alone or in combination.
The drying temperature is preferably 80 ° C. or higher, more preferably 90 ° C. or higher. The upper limit thereof is preferably 130 ° C. or lower, more preferably 120 ° C. or lower. It can also be dried by continuously changing the temperature.
The drying time is preferably 20 seconds or longer, more preferably 40 seconds or longer, and even more preferably 60 seconds or longer. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 600 seconds or less, and more preferably 300 seconds or less.
<屈折率調整層形成用組成物及び屈折率調整層の形成方法>
 屈折率調整層形成用組成物としては、上述した屈折率調整層を形成する各種成分と溶剤とを含むのが好ましい。なお、屈折率調整層形成用組成物において、組成物の全固形分に対する各成分の含有量の好適範囲は、上述した屈折率調整層の全質量に対する各成分の含有量の好適範囲と同じである。
 溶剤としては、屈折率調整層に含まれる成分を溶解又は分散可能であれば特に制限されず、水及び水混和性の有機溶剤からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種が好ましく、水又は水と水混和性の有機溶剤との混合溶剤がより好ましい。
 水混和性の有機溶剤としては、例えば、炭素数1~3のアルコール、アセトン、エチレングリコール、及びグリセリンが挙げられ、炭素数1~3のアルコールが好ましく、メタノール又はエタノールがより好ましい。
 溶剤は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 溶剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分100質量部に対して、50~2,500質量部が好ましく、50~1,900質量部がより好ましく、100~900質量部が更に好ましい。
<Composition for forming a refractive index adjusting layer and a method for forming the refractive index adjusting layer>
The composition for forming the refractive index adjusting layer preferably contains various components forming the above-mentioned refractive index adjusting layer and a solvent. In the composition for forming a refractive index adjusting layer, the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total solid content of the composition is the same as the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total mass of the refractive index adjusting layer described above. be.
The solvent is not particularly limited as long as it can dissolve or disperse the components contained in the refractive index adjusting layer, and at least one selected from the group consisting of water and a water-miscible organic solvent is preferable, with water or water. A mixed solvent with a water-miscible organic solvent is more preferable.
Examples of the water-miscible organic solvent include alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, acetone, ethylene glycol, and glycerin, and alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms are preferable, and methanol or ethanol is more preferable.
The solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the solvent is preferably 50 to 2,500 parts by mass, more preferably 50 to 1,900 parts by mass, and even more preferably 100 to 900 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the composition.
 屈折率調整層の形成方法は、上記の成分を含む層を形成可能な方法であれば特に制限されず、例えば、公知の塗布方法(スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、及びインクジェット塗布等)が挙げられる。 The method for forming the refractive index adjusting layer is not particularly limited as long as it can form a layer containing the above components, and for example, known coating methods (slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, inkjet coating, etc.) can be used. Can be mentioned.
 また、保護フィルムを屈折率調整層に貼り合わせることにより、第1実施形態の転写フィルムを製造できる。
 保護フィルムを屈折率調整層に貼り合わせる方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法が挙げられる。
 保護フィルムを屈折率調整層に貼り合わせる装置としては、真空ラミネーター、及び、オートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネーターが挙げられる。
 ラミネーターはゴムローラー等の任意の加熱可能なローラーを備え、加圧及び加熱ができるものであることが好ましい。
Further, the transfer film of the first embodiment can be manufactured by adhering the protective film to the refractive index adjusting layer.
The method of attaching the protective film to the refractive index adjusting layer is not particularly limited, and known methods can be mentioned.
Examples of the device for adhering the protective film to the refractive index adjusting layer include a vacuum laminator and a known laminator such as an auto-cut laminator.
It is preferable that the laminator is provided with an arbitrary heatable roller such as a rubber roller and can be pressurized and heated.
〔第2実施形態の転写フィルム〕
 以下において、第2実施形態の転写フィルムの実施形態の一例について説明する。
 図8に示す転写フィルム20は、仮支持体11と、熱可塑性樹脂層13、中間層15、及びネガ型感光性組成物層17を含む組成物層12と、保護フィルム19とを、この順に有する。
 なお、図8で示す転写フィルム20は保護フィルム19を配置した形態であるが、保護フィルム19は、配置されなくてもよい。
 また、図8で示す転写フィルム20は熱可塑性樹脂層13及び中間層15を配置した形態であるが、熱可塑性樹脂層13及び中間層15は、配置されなくてもよい。
 以下において、転写フィルムを構成する各要素について説明する。
 第2実施形態の転写フィルムにおいて、仮支持体11及び保護フィルム17としては、上述した第1実施形態の仮支持体1及び保護フィルム9と同じものが挙げられ、好適態様も同じである。
[Transfer film of the second embodiment]
Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment of the transfer film of the second embodiment will be described.
The transfer film 20 shown in FIG. 8 includes a temporary support 11, a composition layer 12 including a thermoplastic resin layer 13, an intermediate layer 15, and a negative photosensitive composition layer 17, and a protective film 19 in this order. Have.
The transfer film 20 shown in FIG. 8 has a form in which the protective film 19 is arranged, but the protective film 19 may not be arranged.
Further, the transfer film 20 shown in FIG. 8 has a form in which the thermoplastic resin layer 13 and the intermediate layer 15 are arranged, but the thermoplastic resin layer 13 and the intermediate layer 15 may not be arranged.
Hereinafter, each element constituting the transfer film will be described.
In the transfer film of the second embodiment, examples of the temporary support 11 and the protective film 17 are the same as those of the temporary support 1 and the protective film 9 of the first embodiment described above, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
<<ネガ型感光性組成物層>>
 静電容量型入力装置等のタッチパネルを備えた表示装置(有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(EL)表示装置及び液晶表示装置等)では、視認部のセンサーに相当する電極パターン、周辺配線部分及び取り出し配線部分の配線等の導電層パターンがタッチパネル内部に設けられている。一般的にパターン化した層の形成には、転写フィルム等を用いて基板上にネガ型感光性組成物層を設け、このネガ型感光性組成物層に対して所望のパターンを有するマスクを介して露光した後、現像する方法が広く採用されている。なお、ネガ型感光性組成物層では、露光により露光部が硬化膜となって現像液に対する溶解性が低下する。
<< Negative Photosensitive Composition Layer >>
In display devices equipped with a touch panel such as a capacitance type input device (organic electroluminescence (EL) display device, liquid crystal display device, etc.), the electrode pattern corresponding to the sensor of the visual recognition part, the peripheral wiring part, and the wiring of the take-out wiring part are wired. Etc. are provided inside the touch panel. Generally, for forming a patterned layer, a negative photosensitive composition layer is provided on a substrate using a transfer film or the like, and a mask having a desired pattern for the negative photosensitive composition layer is used. A method of developing after exposure is widely adopted. In the negative photosensitive composition layer, the exposed portion becomes a cured film due to exposure, and the solubility in a developing solution is lowered.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、バインダーポリマー、エチレン性不飽和基を有する重合性化合物(エチレン性不飽和化合物)、及び光重合開始剤を含む。また、バインダーポリマーは、その一部又は全部としてアルカリ可溶性樹脂(アルカリ可溶性樹脂である重合体A等)を含んでいるのも好ましい。
 つまり、一態様において、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、アルカリ可溶性樹脂を含むバインダーポリマー、エチレン性不飽和化合物、及び光重合開始剤を含むのが好ましい。このようなネガ型感光性組成物層は、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量を基準として、バインダーポリマー:10~90質量%;エチレン性不飽和化合物:5~70質量%;光重合開始剤:0.01~20質量%を含むことが好ましい。
 以下において、各成分を順に説明する。
The negative photosensitive composition layer contains a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group (ethylenically unsaturated compound), and a photopolymerization initiator. Further, it is also preferable that the binder polymer contains an alkali-soluble resin (polymer A or the like which is an alkali-soluble resin) as a part or the whole thereof.
That is, in one embodiment, the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains a binder polymer containing an alkali-soluble resin, an ethylenically unsaturated compound, and a photopolymerization initiator. Such a negative photosensitive composition layer has a binder polymer: 10 to 90% by mass; an ethylenically unsaturated compound: 5 to 70% by mass; photopolymerization initiation, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. Agent: It is preferable to contain 0.01 to 20% by mass.
Hereinafter, each component will be described in order.
<重合体A(樹脂)>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、バインダーポリマーとして、重合体Aを含むのが好ましい。
 重合体Aは、アルカリ可溶性樹脂であることが好ましい。
 重合体Aの酸価は、現像液によるネガ型感光性組成物層の膨潤を抑制することにより、解像性がより優れる観点から、220mgKOH/g以下が好ましく、200mgKOH/g未満がより好ましく、190mgKOH/g未満が更に好ましい。
 重合体Aの酸価の下限は特に制限されないが、60mgKOH/g以上が好ましい。現像性がより優れる点で、なかでも、120mgKOH/g以上がより好ましく、150mgKOH/g以上が更に好ましく、170mgKOH/g以上が特に好ましい。
<Polymer A (resin)>
The negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains the polymer A as the binder polymer.
The polymer A is preferably an alkali-soluble resin.
The acid value of the polymer A is preferably 220 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably less than 200 mgKOH / g, from the viewpoint of more excellent resolution by suppressing the swelling of the negative photosensitive composition layer due to the developing solution. More preferably less than 190 mgKOH / g.
The lower limit of the acid value of the polymer A is not particularly limited, but 60 mgKOH / g or more is preferable. In terms of more excellent developability, 120 mgKOH / g or more is more preferable, 150 mgKOH / g or more is further preferable, and 170 mgKOH / g or more is particularly preferable.
 なお、酸価(mgKOH/g)とは、試料1gを中和するのに必要な水酸化カリウムの質量[mg]である。酸価は、例えば、JIS K0070:1992に記載の方法に従って、化合物中における酸基の平均含有量から算出できる。
 重合体Aの酸価は、重合体Aを構成する構成単位の種類及び酸基を含む構成単位の含有量により調整すればよい。
The acid value (mgKOH / g) is the mass [mg] of potassium hydroxide required to neutralize 1 g of the sample. The acid value can be calculated from the average content of acid groups in the compound, for example, according to the method described in JIS K0070: 1992.
The acid value of the polymer A may be adjusted according to the type of the structural unit constituting the polymer A and the content of the structural unit containing the acid group.
 重合体Aの重量平均分子量は、5,000~500,000が好ましい。重量平均分子量が500,000以下の場合、解像性及び現像性を向上させる観点から好ましい。重量平均分子量は、100,000以下がより好ましく、60,000以下が更に好ましく、35,000以下が特に好ましく、30,000以下が最も好ましい。
 一方で、重量平均分子量が5,000以上の場合、現像凝集物の性状、並びにネガ型感光性樹脂積層体とした場合のエッジフューズ性及びカットチップ性等の未露光膜の性状を制御する観点から好ましい。重量平均分子量は、10,000以上がより好ましい。エッジフューズ性とは、ネガ型感光性樹脂積層体としてロール状に巻き取った場合に、ロールの端面からの、ネガ型感光性組成物層のはみ出し易さの程度をいう。カットチップ性とは、未露光膜をカッターで切断した場合に、チップの飛び易さの程度をいう。このチップがネガ型感光性樹脂積層体の上面等に付着すると、後の露光工程等でマスクに転写して、不良品の原因となる。重合体Aの分散度は、1.0~6.0が好ましく、1.0~5.0がより好ましく、1.0~4.0が更に好ましく、1.0~3.0が特に好ましい。なお、分散度とは、数平均分子量に対する重量平均分子量の比(重量平均分子量/数平均分子量)を意図する。また、重量平均分子量及び数平均分子量は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィを用いて測定される値である。
The weight average molecular weight of the polymer A is preferably 5,000 to 500,000. When the weight average molecular weight is 500,000 or less, it is preferable from the viewpoint of improving resolution and developability. The weight average molecular weight is more preferably 100,000 or less, further preferably 60,000 or less, particularly preferably 35,000 or less, and most preferably 30,000 or less.
On the other hand, when the weight average molecular weight is 5,000 or more, the viewpoint of controlling the properties of the developed aggregate and the properties of the unexposed film such as the edge fuse property and the cut chip property when the negative photosensitive resin laminate is used. Is preferable. The weight average molecular weight is more preferably 10,000 or more. The edge fuse property refers to the degree of ease with which the negative photosensitive composition layer protrudes from the end face of the roll when it is wound into a roll as a negative photosensitive resin laminate. The cut chip property refers to the degree of ease of chip flying when the unexposed film is cut with a cutter. When this chip adheres to the upper surface of the negative photosensitive resin laminate or the like, it is transferred to the mask in a later exposure process or the like, which causes a defective product. The dispersity of the polymer A is preferably 1.0 to 6.0, more preferably 1.0 to 5.0, still more preferably 1.0 to 4.0, and particularly preferably 1.0 to 3.0. .. The degree of dispersion is intended to be the ratio of the weight average molecular weight to the number average molecular weight (weight average molecular weight / number average molecular weight). The weight average molecular weight and the number average molecular weight are values measured by gel permeation chromatography.
 露光時の焦点位置がずれたときの線幅太りや解像度の悪化を抑制する観点から、重合体Aは、芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に基づく構成単位を含むことが好ましい。なお、このような芳香族炭化水素基としては、例えば、置換又は非置換のフェニル基、及び置換又は非置換のアラルキル基が挙げられる。重合体Aにおける芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に基づく構成単位の含有量は、重合体Aの全質量に対して、20質量%以上が好ましく、30質量%以上がより好ましい。上限としては特に限定されないが、95質量%以下が好ましく、85質量%以下がより好ましい。なお、重合体Aを複数種類含む場合、芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に基づく構成単位の含有量の平均値が上記範囲内になることが好ましい。 From the viewpoint of suppressing line width thickening and deterioration of resolution when the focal position is deviated during exposure, the polymer A preferably contains a structural unit based on a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group. Examples of such aromatic hydrocarbon groups include substituted or unsubstituted phenyl groups and substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl groups. The content of the structural unit based on the monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group in the polymer A is preferably 20% by mass or more, more preferably 30% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the polymer A. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 95% by mass or less, and more preferably 85% by mass or less. When a plurality of types of the polymer A are contained, it is preferable that the average value of the content of the structural unit based on the monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is within the above range.
 芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体としては、例えば、アラルキル基を有するモノマー、スチレン、及び重合可能なスチレン誘導体(例えば、メチルスチレン、ビニルトルエン、tert-ブトキシスチレン、アセトキシスチレン、4-ビニル安息香酸、スチレンダイマー、及びスチレントリマー等)が挙げられる。なかでも、アラルキル基を有するモノマー、又はスチレンが好ましい。一態様において、重合体Aにおける芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体成分がスチレンである場合、スチレンに基づく構成単位の含有量は、重合体Aの全質量に対して、20~70質量%が好ましく、25~65質量%がより好ましく、30~60質量%が更に好ましく、30~55質量%が特に好ましい。なお、ネガ型感光性組成物層が複数の種類の重合体Aを含む場合、芳香族炭化水素基を有する構成単位の含有率は、重量平均値として求められる。 Examples of the monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group include a monomer having an aralkyl group, styrene, and a polymerizable styrene derivative (for example, methylstyrene, vinyltoluene, tert-butoxystyrene, acetoxystyrene, 4-vinyl benzoic acid). Acids, styrene dimers, styrene trimers, etc.). Of these, a monomer having an aralkyl group or styrene is preferable. In one embodiment, when the monomer component having an aromatic hydrocarbon group in the polymer A is styrene, the content of the structural unit based on styrene is 20 to 70% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer A. Is preferable, 25 to 65% by mass is more preferable, 30 to 60% by mass is further preferable, and 30 to 55% by mass is particularly preferable. When the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a plurality of types of polymers A, the content of the structural unit having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is determined as a weight average value.
 アラルキル基としては、置換又は非置換のフェニルアルキル基(ベンジル基を除く)、及び置換又は非置換のベンジル基等が挙げられ、置換又は非置換のベンジル基が好ましい。 Examples of the aralkyl group include a substituted or unsubstituted phenylalkyl group (excluding a benzyl group), a substituted or unsubstituted benzyl group and the like, and a substituted or unsubstituted benzyl group is preferable.
 フェニルアルキル基を有する単量体としては、フェニルエチル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。 Examples of the monomer having a phenylalkyl group include phenylethyl (meth) acrylate and the like.
 ベンジル基を有する単量体としては、ベンジル基を有する(メタ)アクリレート、例えば、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、及びクロロベンジル(メタ)アクリレート等;ベンジル基を有するビニルモノマー、例えば、ビニルベンジルクロライド、及びビニルベンジルアルコール等が挙げられる。なかでも、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレートが好ましい。一態様において、重合体Aにおける芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体成分がベンジル(メタ)アクリレートである場合、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレートに基づく構成単位の含有量は、重合体Aの全質量に対して、25~95質量%が好ましく、50~95質量%がより好ましく、60~90質量%が更に好ましく、70~90質量%が特に好ましく、75~90質量%が最も好ましい。 Examples of the monomer having a benzyl group include (meth) acrylate having a benzyl group, for example, benzyl (meth) acrylate, and chlorobenzyl (meth) acrylate; a vinyl monomer having a benzyl group, for example, vinylbenzyl chloride, and the like. Examples include vinylbenzyl alcohol. Of these, benzyl (meth) acrylate is preferable. In one embodiment, when the monomer component having an aromatic hydrocarbon group in the polymer A is benzyl (meth) acrylate, the content of the structural unit based on the benzyl (meth) acrylate is the total mass of the polymer A. On the other hand, 25 to 95% by mass is preferable, 50 to 95% by mass is more preferable, 60 to 90% by mass is further preferable, 70 to 90% by mass is particularly preferable, and 75 to 90% by mass is most preferable.
 芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に基づく構成単位を含む重合体Aは、芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体と、後述する第一の単量体の少なくとも1種及び/又は後述する第二の単量体の少なくとも1種とを重合することにより得られることが好ましい。 The polymer A containing a structural unit based on a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group includes a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group, at least one of the first monomers described later, and / or described below. It is preferably obtained by polymerizing with at least one of the second monomers.
 芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に基づく構成単位を含まない重合体Aは、後述する第一の単量体の少なくとも1種を重合することにより得られることが好ましく、第一の単量体の少なくとも1種と後述する第二の単量体の少なくとも1種とを共重合することにより得られることがより好ましい。 The polymer A containing no structural unit based on a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably obtained by polymerizing at least one of the first monomers described later, and is preferably the first single amount. It is more preferable to obtain it by copolymerizing at least one kind of the body and at least one kind of the second monomer described later.
 第一の単量体は、分子中にカルボキシル基を有する単量体である。第一の単量体としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸、フマル酸、ケイ皮酸、クロトン酸、イタコン酸、4-ビニル安息香酸、マレイン酸無水物、及びマレイン酸半エステル等が挙げられる。これらのなかでも、(メタ)アクリル酸が好ましい。
 重合体Aにおける第一の単量体に基づく構成単位の含有量は、重合体Aの全質量に対して、5~50質量%が好ましく、10~40質量%がより好ましく、15~30質量%が更に好ましい。
 上記含有量を5質量%以上にすることは、良好な現像性を発現させる観点、エッジフューズ性を制御する等の観点から好ましい。上記含有量を50質量%以下にすることは、レジストパターンの高解像性及びスソ形状の観点から、更にはレジストパターンの耐薬品性の観点から好ましい。
The first monomer is a monomer having a carboxyl group in the molecule. Examples of the first monomer include (meth) acrylic acid, fumaric acid, cinnamic acid, crotonic acid, itaconic acid, 4-vinylbenzoic acid, maleic acid anhydride, maleic acid semi-ester and the like. .. Among these, (meth) acrylic acid is preferable.
The content of the structural unit based on the first monomer in the polymer A is preferably 5 to 50% by mass, more preferably 10 to 40% by mass, and 15 to 30% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymer A. % Is more preferable.
It is preferable that the content is 5% by mass or more from the viewpoint of developing good developability and controlling edge fuseability. It is preferable that the content is 50% by mass or less from the viewpoint of high resolution of the resist pattern and the shape of the resist pattern, and further from the viewpoint of chemical resistance of the resist pattern.
 第二の単量体は、非酸性であり、且つ、分子中に重合性不飽和基を少なくとも1個有する単量体である。第二の単量体としては、例えば、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、n-プロピル(メタ)アクリレート、イソプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソブチル(メタ)アクリレート、tert-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、及び2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート等の(メタ)アクリレート類;酢酸ビニル等のビニルアルコールのエステル類;並びに(メタ)アクリロニトリル等が挙げられる。なかでも、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、又はn-ブチル(メタ)アクリレートが好ましく、メチル(メタ)アクリレートがより好ましい。
 重合体Aにおける第二の単量体に基づく構成単位の含有量は、重合体Aの全質量に対して、1質量%以上が好ましく、5質量%以上がより好ましく、15質量%以上が更に好ましく、17質量%以上が特に好ましい。なお、上限値としては、60質量%以下が好ましく、50質量%以下がより好ましく、45質量%以下が更に好ましい。
 重合体Aにおける第二の単量体に基づく構成単位の含有量の一態様としては、1~60質量%が好ましく、5~60質量%がより好ましく、15~50質量%が更に好ましく、17~45質量%が特に好ましい。
The second monomer is a monomer that is non-acidic and has at least one polymerizable unsaturated group in the molecule. Examples of the second monomer include methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, n-propyl (meth) acrylate, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, n-butyl (meth) acrylate, and isobutyl (meth) acrylate. , Tart-butyl (meth) acrylates, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylates, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth) acrylates, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylates, and (meth) acrylates such as 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylates; acetic acid. Examples thereof include esters of vinyl alcohols such as vinyl; and (meth) acrylonitrile. Of these, methyl (meth) acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, or n-butyl (meth) acrylate is preferable, and methyl (meth) acrylate is more preferable.
The content of the structural unit based on the second monomer in the polymer A is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, and further preferably 15% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the polymer A. It is preferable, and 17% by mass or more is particularly preferable. The upper limit is preferably 60% by mass or less, more preferably 50% by mass or less, and further preferably 45% by mass or less.
As one aspect of the content of the structural unit based on the second monomer in the polymer A, 1 to 60% by mass is preferable, 5 to 60% by mass is more preferable, 15 to 50% by mass is further preferable, and 17 ~ 45% by mass is particularly preferable.
 重合体Aがアラルキル基を有する単量体に基づく構成単位及び/又はスチレンを単量体に基づく構成単位を含む場合、露光時の焦点位置がずれたときの線幅太りや解像度の悪化を抑制する観点から好ましい。例えば、メタクリル酸に基づく構成単位とベンジルメタクリレートに基づく構成単位とスチレンに基づく構成単位を含む共重合体、メタクリル酸に基づく構成単位とメチルメタクリレートに基づく構成単位とベンジルメタクリレートに基づく構成単位とスチレンに基づく構成単位を含む共重合体等が好ましい。
 一態様において、重合体Aは、芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に基づく構成単位を25~55質量%、第一の単量体に基づく構成単位を20~35質量%、第二の単量体に基づく構成単位を15~45質量%含む重合体であることが好ましい。また、別の態様において、芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に基づく構成単位を70~90質量%、第一の単量体に基づく構成単位を10~25質量%含む重合体であることが好ましい。また、別の態様において、芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に基づく構成単位を25~70質量%、第一の単量体に基づく構成単位を15~25質量%、第二の単量体に基づく構成単位を1~5質量%含む重合体であることが好ましい。
When the polymer A contains a monomer-based structural unit having an aralkyl group and / or a styrene-based monomer-based structural unit, it suppresses line width thickening and deterioration of resolution when the focal position shifts during exposure. It is preferable from the viewpoint of For example, a copolymer containing a methacrylic acid-based constituent unit, a benzyl methacrylate-based constituent unit, and a styrene-based constituent unit, a methacrylic acid-based constituent unit, a methyl methacrylate-based constituent unit, a benzyl methacrylate-based constituent unit, and a styrene. A copolymer or the like containing a structural unit based on the above is preferable.
In one embodiment, the polymer A has 25 to 55% by mass of a structural unit based on a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group, 20 to 35% by mass of a structural unit based on the first monomer, and a second. It is preferably a polymer containing 15 to 45% by mass of a constituent unit based on a monomer. In another embodiment, the polymer contains 70 to 90% by mass of a structural unit based on a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group and 10 to 25% by mass of a structural unit based on the first monomer. Is preferable. In another embodiment, the structural unit based on the monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is 25 to 70% by mass, the structural unit based on the first monomer is 15 to 25% by mass, and the second unit amount. It is preferably a polymer containing 1 to 5% by mass of a body-based structural unit.
 重合体Aは、側鎖に直鎖構造、分岐構造、及び、脂環構造のいずれかを有してもよい。側鎖に分岐構造を有する基を含むモノマー、又は側鎖に脂環構造を有する基を含むモノマーを使用することによって、重合体Aの側鎖に分岐構造や脂環構造を導入することができる。脂環構造を有する基は単環又は多環であってもよい。
 側鎖に分岐構造を有する基を含むモノマーの具体例としては、(メタ)アクリル酸イソプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸sec-ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸tert-ブチル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソアミル、(メタ)アクリル酸tert-アミル、(メタ)アクリル酸sec-アミル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-オクチル、(メタ)アクリル酸3-オクチル及び(メタ)アクリル酸tert-オクチル等が挙げられる。これらのなかでも、(メタ)アクリル酸イソプロピル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソブチル、メタクリル酸tert-ブチルが好ましく、メタクリル酸イソプロピル又はメタクリル酸tert-ブチルがより好ましい。
 側鎖に脂環構造を有する基を含むモノマーの具体例としては、単環の脂肪族炭化水素基を有するモノマー、及び、多環の脂肪族炭化水素基を有するモノマーが挙げられる。また、炭素原子数5~20個の脂環式炭化水素基を有する(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。より具体的な例としては、(メタ)アクリル酸(ビシクロ〔2.2.1]ヘプチル-2)、(メタ)アクリル酸-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-2-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3-メチル-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3,5-ジメチル-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3-エチルアダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3-メチル-5-エチル-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3,5,8-トリエチル-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3,5-ジメチル-8-エチル-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-メチル-2-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸2-エチル-2-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸3-ヒドロキシ-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸オクタヒドロ-4,7-メンタノインデン-5-イル、(メタ)アクリル酸オクタヒドロ-4,7-メンタノインデン-1-イルメチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-1-メンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸トリシクロデカン、(メタ)アクリル酸-3-ヒドロキシ-2,6,6-トリメチル-ビシクロ〔3.1.1〕ヘプチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-3,7,7-トリメチル-4-ヒドロキシ-ビシクロ〔4.1.0〕ヘプチル、(メタ)アクリル酸(ノル)ボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸フェンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-2,2,5-トリメチルシクロヘキシル、及び(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル等が挙げられる。これら(メタ)アクリル酸エステルのなかでも、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸(ノル)ボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸-1-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸-2-アダマンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸フェンチル、(メタ)アクリル酸1-メンチル、又は(メタ)アクリル酸トリシクロデカンが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸シクロヘキシル、(メタ)アクリル酸(ノル)ボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸イソボルニル、(メタ)アクリル酸-2-アダマンチル、又は(メタ)アクリル酸トリシクロデカンがより好ましい。
The polymer A may have any of a linear structure, a branched structure, and an alicyclic structure in the side chain. By using a monomer having a group having a branched structure in the side chain or a monomer having a group having an alicyclic structure in the side chain, a branched structure or an alicyclic structure can be introduced into the side chain of the polymer A. .. The group having an alicyclic structure may be a monocyclic ring or a polycyclic ring.
Specific examples of the monomer containing a group having a branched structure in the side chain include isopropyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, sec-butyl (meth) acrylate, tert-butyl (meth) acrylate, and (. Isoamyl (meth) acrylate, tert-amyl (meth) acrylate, sec-amyl (meth) acrylate, 2-octyl (meth) acrylate, 3-octyl (meth) acrylate and tert-octyl (meth) acrylate. And so on. Among these, isopropyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, and tert-butyl methacrylate are preferable, and isopropyl methacrylate or tert-butyl methacrylate are more preferable.
Specific examples of the monomer having a group having an alicyclic structure in the side chain include a monomer having a monocyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group and a monomer having a polycyclic aliphatic hydrocarbon group. Further, a (meth) acrylate having an alicyclic hydrocarbon group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms can be mentioned. More specific examples include (meth) acrylic acid (bicyclo [2.2.1] heptyl-2), (meth) acrylic acid-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid-2-adamantyl, (meth). -3-Methyl-1-adamantyl acrylate, -3,5-dimethyl-1-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, -3-ethyladamantyl (meth) acrylate, -3-methyl-5-methyl (meth) acrylate Ethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid-3,5,8-triethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid-3,5-dimethyl-8-ethyl-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid 2 -Methyl-2-adamantyl, 2-ethyl-2-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, 3-hydroxy-1-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, octahydro-4,7-mentanoindene (meth) acrylate-5- Il, Octahydro-4,7-mentanoinden-1-ylmethyl (meth) acrylate, -1-mentyl (meth) acrylate, tricyclodecane (meth) acrylate, -3-hydroxy- (meth) acrylate 2,6,6-trimethyl-bicyclo [3.1.1] heptyl, (meth) acrylic acid-3,7,7-trimethyl-4-hydroxy-bicyclo [4.1.0] heptyl, (meth) acrylic Examples thereof include acid (nor) bornyl, (meth) acrylate isobornyl, (meth) acrylate fentyl, (meth) acrylate-2,2,5-trimethylcyclohexyl, and (meth) acrylate cyclohexyl. Among these (meth) acrylic acid esters, (meth) acrylic acid cyclohexyl, (meth) acrylic acid (nor) boronyl, (meth) acrylic acid isobornyl, (meth) acrylic acid-1-adamantyl, (meth) acrylic acid -2-adamantyl, fentyl (meth) acrylate, 1-mentyl (meth) acrylate, or tricyclodecane (meth) acrylate is preferred, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, (nor) bornyl, (meth) acrylate, Isobornyl (meth) acrylate, -2-adamantyl (meth) acrylate, or tricyclodecane (meth) acrylate are more preferred.
 重合体Aの好適な態様の一例として、重合体Aは、反応性基を有することが好ましく、反応性基を有する構成単位を有することがより好ましい。
 反応性基としては、ラジカル重合性基が好ましく、エチレン性不飽和基がより好ましい。また、重合体Aがエチレン性不飽和基を有している場合、重合体Aは、側鎖にエチレン性不飽和基を有する構成単位を有することが好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和基としては、アリル基又は(メタ)アクリロキシ基がより好ましい。
As an example of a preferred embodiment of the polymer A, the polymer A preferably has a reactive group, and more preferably has a structural unit having a reactive group.
As the reactive group, a radically polymerizable group is preferable, and an ethylenically unsaturated group is more preferable. When the polymer A has an ethylenically unsaturated group, the polymer A preferably has a structural unit having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain.
As the ethylenically unsaturated group, an allyl group or a (meth) acryloxy group is more preferable.
 重合体Aは、反応性基を有する構成単位を1種単独で有していても、2種以上有していてもよい。
 重合体Aが反応性基を有する構成単位を有する場合、反応性基を有する構成単位の含有量の下限値としては、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、重合体Aの全構成単位に対して、5質量%以上が好ましく、10質量%以上がより好ましく、20質量%以上が更に好ましく、35質量%以上が特に好ましく、40質量%以上が最も好ましい。また、その上限値としては、70質量%以下が好ましく、50質量%以下がより好ましい。
 また、重合体Aにおける反応性基を有する構成単位の含有量の下限値は、本発明の効果がより優れる点から、重合体Aの全構成単位に対して、5モル%以上が好ましく、10モル%以上がより好ましく、20モル%以上が更に好ましく、35モル%以上が特に好ましく、40モル%以上が最も好ましい。また、その上限値としては、70モル%以下が好ましく、60モル%以下がより好ましく、50モル%以下が更に好ましい。
The polymer A may have one type of structural unit having a reactive group alone or two or more types.
When the polymer A has a structural unit having a reactive group, the lower limit of the content of the structural unit having a reactive group is set with respect to all the structural units of the polymer A from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. 5% by mass or more is preferable, 10% by mass or more is more preferable, 20% by mass or more is further preferable, 35% by mass or more is particularly preferable, and 40% by mass or more is most preferable. The upper limit is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 50% by mass or less.
Further, the lower limit of the content of the structural unit having a reactive group in the polymer A is preferably 5 mol% or more with respect to all the structural units of the polymer A from the viewpoint that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. More preferably, it is more preferably mol% or more, further preferably 20 mol% or more, particularly preferably 35 mol% or more, and most preferably 40 mol% or more. The upper limit thereof is preferably 70 mol% or less, more preferably 60 mol% or less, still more preferably 50 mol% or less.
 バインダーポリマーである重合体Aとしては、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、重合体Aの重量平均分子量(Mw)が60,000以下であり、且つ重合体A中のラジカル重合性基を有する構成単位の割合が20質量%以上であるのが好ましく、重合体Aの重量平均分子量(Mw)が35,000以下であり、且つ重合体A中のラジカル重合性基を有する構成単位の割合が35質量%以上であるのがより好ましく、重合体Aの重量平均分子量(Mw)が30,000以下であり、且つ重合体A中のラジカル重合性基を有する構成単位の割合が40質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。 The polymer A, which is a binder polymer, has a weight average molecular weight (Mw) of 60,000 or less and has a radical polymerizable group in the polymer A in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. The ratio of the structural units is preferably 20% by mass or more, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer A is 35,000 or less, and the ratio of the structural units having radical polymerizable groups in the polymer A is It is more preferably 35% by mass or more, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polymer A is 30,000 or less, and the proportion of the structural unit having a radical polymerizable group in the polymer A is 40% by mass or more. Is more preferable.
 重合体Aは、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 2種以上を使用する場合には、芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に基づく構成単位を含む重合体Aを2種類混合使用すること、又は芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に基づく構成単位を含む重合体Aと芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に基づく構成単位を含まない重合体Aとを混合使用することが好ましい。後者の場合、芳香族炭化水素基を有する単量体に基づく構成単位を含む重合体Aの使用割合は、重合体Aの全質量に対して、50質量%以上が好ましく、70質量%以上がより好ましく、80質量%以上が好ましく、90質量%以上がより好ましい。
The polymer A may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When two or more kinds are used, two kinds of polymer A containing a structural unit based on a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group may be mixed and used, or based on a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group. It is preferable to use a mixture of the polymer A containing a structural unit and the polymer A not containing a structural unit based on a monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group. In the latter case, the ratio of the polymer A containing the structural unit based on the monomer having an aromatic hydrocarbon group is preferably 50% by mass or more, preferably 70% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the polymer A. More preferably, 80% by mass or more is preferable, and 90% by mass or more is more preferable.
 重合体Aの合成は、上述された単数又は複数の単量体を、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、及びイソプロパノール等の溶剤で希釈した溶液に、過酸化ベンゾイル、及びアゾイソブチロニトリル等のラジカル重合開始剤を適量添加し、加熱攪拌することにより行われることが好ましい。混合物の一部を反応液に滴下しながら合成を行う場合もある。反応終了後、更に溶剤を加えて、所望の濃度に調整する場合もある。合成手段としては、溶液重合以外に、塊状重合、懸濁重合、又は乳化重合を用いてもよい。 In the synthesis of the polymer A, a radical polymerization initiator such as benzoyl peroxide and azoisobutyronitrile is prepared by diluting the above-mentioned one or more monomers with a solvent such as acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, and isopropanol. Is preferably added in an appropriate amount and heated and stirred. In some cases, a part of the mixture is added dropwise to the reaction solution for synthesis. After completion of the reaction, a solvent may be further added to adjust the concentration to a desired level. As the synthesis means, bulk polymerization, suspension polymerization, or emulsion polymerization may be used in addition to solution polymerization.
 重合体Aのガラス転移温度Tgは、30~135℃が好ましい。135℃以下のTgを有する重合体Aを使用することによって、露光時の焦点位置がずれたときの線幅太りや解像度の悪化を抑制できる。この観点から、重合体AのTgは、130℃以下より好ましく、120℃以下が更に好ましく、110℃以下が特に好ましい。また、30℃以上のTgを有する重合体Aを使用することは、耐エッジフューズ性を向上させる観点から好ましい。この観点から、重合体AのTgは、40℃以上がより好ましく、50℃以上が更に好ましく、60℃以上が特に好ましく、70℃以上が最も好ましい。 The glass transition temperature Tg of the polymer A is preferably 30 to 135 ° C. By using the polymer A having a Tg of 135 ° C. or lower, it is possible to suppress the line width thickening and the deterioration of the resolution when the focal position at the time of exposure is deviated. From this viewpoint, the Tg of the polymer A is preferably 130 ° C. or lower, more preferably 120 ° C. or lower, and particularly preferably 110 ° C. or lower. Further, it is preferable to use the polymer A having a Tg of 30 ° C. or higher from the viewpoint of improving the edge fuse resistance. From this viewpoint, the Tg of the polymer A is more preferably 40 ° C. or higher, further preferably 50 ° C. or higher, particularly preferably 60 ° C. or higher, and most preferably 70 ° C. or higher.
 重合体Aとして、後述する熱可塑性樹脂層の説明で述べるアルカリ可溶性樹脂を使用してもよい。 As the polymer A, the alkali-soluble resin described in the description of the thermoplastic resin layer described later may be used.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、上述以外のその他の樹脂を重合体Aとして含んでもよい。
 その他の樹脂としては、アクリル樹脂、スチレン-アクリル系共重合体、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール、ポリビニルホルマール、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、ポリアセタール樹脂、ポリヒドロキシスチレン樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリベンゾオキサゾール樹脂、ポリシロキサン樹脂、ポリエチレンイミン、ポリアリルアミン、及びポリアルキレングリコールが挙げられる。
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a resin other than the above as the polymer A.
Other resins include acrylic resin, styrene-acrylic copolymer, polyurethane resin, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl formal, polyamide resin, polyester resin, polyamide resin, epoxy resin, polyacetal resin, polyhydroxystyrene resin, polyimide resin, and poly. Examples thereof include benzoxazole resin, polysiloxane resin, polyethyleneimine, polyallylamine, and polyalkylene glycol.
 発明の効果を奏する上で、重合体Aは、再沈による精製が実施されるのが好ましい。重合体Aに再沈による精製を実施することで、残存モノマーの量を低減できる。この結果として、ハーフ露光部が形成されにくい。 In order to achieve the effect of the invention, it is preferable that the polymer A is purified by reprecipitation. By purifying the polymer A by reprecipitation, the amount of residual monomers can be reduced. As a result, it is difficult to form a half-exposed portion.
 重合体Aの含有量は、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、10~90質量%が好ましく、20~80質量%がより好ましく、30~70質量%が更に好ましく、40~60質量%が特に好ましい。重合体Aの含有量を90質量%以下にすることは、現像時間を制御する観点から好ましい。一方で、重合体Aの含有量を10質量%以上にすることは、耐エッジフューズ性を向上させる観点から好ましい。 The content of the polymer A is preferably 10 to 90% by mass, more preferably 20 to 80% by mass, further preferably 30 to 70% by mass, and even more preferably 40 to 40% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. 60% by mass is particularly preferable. It is preferable that the content of the polymer A is 90% by mass or less from the viewpoint of controlling the developing time. On the other hand, it is preferable that the content of the polymer A is 10% by mass or more from the viewpoint of improving the edge fuse resistance.
<重合性化合物>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、重合性化合物を含む。
 ここで、重合性化合物とは、上記重合体A以外の化合物であり、分子量5,000未満であることが好ましい。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、重合性化合物として、エチレン性不飽和基を有する重合性化合物(以下、単に「エチレン性不飽和化合物」ともいう。)を含む。
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、ラジカル重合性化合物であるのが好ましい。エチレン性不飽和基としては、例えば、ビニル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基、スチリル基、及びマレイミド基等が挙げられ、(メタ)アクリロキシ基が好ましい。
 エチレン性不飽和化合物中のエチレン性不飽和基の個数としては特に制限されないが、1個以上が好ましく、2個以上がより好ましい。上限値は特に制限されないが、例えば、20個以下である。
<Polymerizable compound>
The negative photosensitive composition layer contains a polymerizable compound.
Here, the polymerizable compound is a compound other than the above-mentioned polymer A, and preferably has a molecular weight of less than 5,000.
The negative photosensitive composition layer contains a polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “ethylenically unsaturated compound”) as a polymerizable compound.
The ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably a radically polymerizable compound. Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated group include a vinyl group, a (meth) acryloyl group, a styryl group, a maleimide group and the like, and a (meth) acryloyl group is preferable.
The number of ethylenically unsaturated groups in the ethylenically unsaturated compound is not particularly limited, but one or more is preferable, and two or more are more preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is, for example, 20 or less.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、ネガ型感光性組成物層の感光性がより優れる点で、1個以上のエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物(エチレン性不飽和化合物)が好ましく、一分子中に2個以上のエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物(多官能エチレン性不飽和化合物)がより好ましい。
 また、解像性及び剥離性により優れる点で、エチレン性不飽和化合物が一分子中に有するエチレン性不飽和基の数は、6個以下が好ましく、3個以下がより好ましく、2個以下が更に好ましい。
As the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a compound having one or more ethylenically unsaturated groups (ethylenically unsaturated compound) is preferable in that the photosensitivity of the negative photosensitive composition layer is more excellent, and the ethylenically unsaturated compound is contained in one molecule. A compound having two or more ethylenically unsaturated groups (polyfunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound) is more preferable.
Further, the number of ethylenically unsaturated groups contained in one molecule of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is preferably 6 or less, more preferably 3 or less, and 2 or less in terms of excellent resolution and peelability. More preferred.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層の感光性と解像性及び剥離性とのバランスがより優れる点で、一分子中に2個又は3個のエチレン性不飽和基を有する2官能又は3官能エチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましく、一分子中に2個のエチレン性不飽和基を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことがより好ましい。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層中、重合性化合物の全質量に対する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量は、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、剥離性に優れる観点から、20質量%以上が好ましく、40質量%超がより好ましく、55質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は特に制限されず、100質量%であってもよい。即ち、重合性化合物が全て2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物であってもよい。
 エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、重合性基として(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物が好ましい。
Bifunctional or trifunctional ethylenically having two or three ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule in that the balance between photosensitivity, resolution and releasability of the negative photosensitive composition layer is better. It is preferable to contain an unsaturated compound, and more preferably to contain a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having two ethylenically unsaturated groups in one molecule.
The content of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound in the negative photosensitive composition layer with respect to the total mass of the polymerizable compound is 20 from the viewpoint of excellent peelability with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. By mass or more is preferable, more than 40% by mass is more preferable, and 55% by mass or more is further preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited and may be 100% by mass. That is, all the polymerizable compounds may be bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds.
As the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a (meth) acrylate compound having a (meth) acryloyl group as a polymerizable group is preferable.
(重合性化合物B1)
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、芳香環及び2個のエチレン性不飽和基を有する重合性化合物B1を含むことも好ましい。重合性化合物B1は、上述した重合性化合物Bのうち、一分子中に1個以上の芳香環を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物である。
(Polymerizable compound B1)
The negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains a polymerizable compound B1 having an aromatic ring and two ethylenically unsaturated groups. The polymerizable compound B1 is a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having one or more aromatic rings in one molecule among the above-mentioned polymerizable compounds B.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層中、重合性化合物の全質量に対する重合性化合物B1の含有量の質量比は、解像性がより優れる観点から、40%以上が好ましく、50質量%以上がより好ましく、55質量%以上が更に好ましく、60質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、剥離性の観点から、例えば100質量%以下であり、99質量%以下が好ましく、95質量%以下がより好ましく、90質量%以下が更に好ましく、85質量%以下が特に好ましい。 The mass ratio of the content of the polymerizable compound B1 to the total mass of the polymerizable compound in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 40% or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, from the viewpoint of better resolution. , 55% by mass or more is more preferable, and 60% by mass or more is particularly preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of peelability, for example, it is 100% by mass or less, preferably 99% by mass or less, more preferably 95% by mass or less, further preferably 90% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 85% by mass or less. preferable.
 重合性化合物B1が有する芳香環としては、例えば、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環及びアントラセン環等の芳香族炭化水素環、チオフェン環、フラン環、ピロール環、イミダゾール環、トリアゾール環及びピリジン環等の芳香族複素環、並びに、それらの縮合環が挙げられ、芳香族炭化水素環が好ましく、ベンゼン環がより好ましい。なお、上記芳香環は、置換基を有してもよい。
 重合性化合物B1は、芳香環を1個のみ有してもよく、2個以上の芳香環を有してもよい。
Examples of the aromatic ring contained in the polymerizable compound B1 include aromatic hydrocarbon rings such as benzene ring, naphthalene ring and anthracene ring, thiophene ring, furan ring, pyrrole ring, imidazole ring, triazole ring and pyridine ring. Heterocycles and fused rings thereof are mentioned, and aromatic hydrocarbon rings are preferable, and benzene rings are more preferable. The aromatic ring may have a substituent.
The polymerizable compound B1 may have only one aromatic ring or may have two or more aromatic rings.
 重合性化合物B1は、現像液によるネガ型感光性組成物層の膨潤を抑制することにより、解像性が向上する観点から、ビスフェノール構造を有することが好ましい。
 ビスフェノール構造としては、例えば、ビスフェノールA(2,2-ビス(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロパン)に由来するビスフェノールA構造、ビスフェノールF(2,2-ビス(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)メタン)に由来するビスフェノールF構造、及びビスフェノールB(2,2-ビス(4-ヒドロキシフェニル)ブタン)に由来するビスフェノールB構造が挙げられ、ビスフェノールA構造が好ましい。
The polymerizable compound B1 preferably has a bisphenol structure from the viewpoint of improving the resolution by suppressing the swelling of the negative photosensitive composition layer due to the developing solution.
Examples of the bisphenol structure include a bisphenol A structure derived from bisphenol A (2,2-bis (4-hydroxyphenyl) propane) and a bisphenol derived from bisphenol F (2,2-bis (4-hydroxyphenyl) methane). Examples thereof include an F structure and a bisphenol B structure derived from bisphenol B (2,2-bis (4-hydroxyphenyl) butane), and a bisphenol A structure is preferable.
 ビスフェノール構造を有する重合性化合物B1としては、例えば、ビスフェノール構造と、そのビスフェノール構造の両端に結合した2個の重合性基(好ましくは(メタ)アクリロイル基)とを有する化合物が挙げられる。
 ビスフェノール構造の両端と2個の重合性基とは、直接結合してもよく、1個以上のアルキレンオキシ基を介して結合してもよい。ビスフェノール構造の両端に付加するアルキレンオキシ基としては、エチレンオキシ基又はプロピレンオキシ基が好ましく、エチレンオキシ基がより好ましい。ビスフェノール構造に付加するアルキレンオキシ基の付加数は特に制限されないが、1分子あたり4~16個が好ましく、6~14個がより好ましい。
 ビスフェノール構造を有する重合性化合物B1については、特開2016-224162号公報の段落0072~0080に記載されており、この公報に記載の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
Examples of the polymerizable compound B1 having a bisphenol structure include a compound having a bisphenol structure and two polymerizable groups (preferably (meth) acryloyl groups) bonded to both ends of the bisphenol structure.
Both ends of the bisphenol structure and the two polymerizable groups may be directly bonded or may be bonded via one or more alkyleneoxy groups. As the alkyleneoxy group added to both ends of the bisphenol structure, an ethyleneoxy group or a propyleneoxy group is preferable, and an ethyleneoxy group is more preferable. The number of alkyleneoxy groups added to the bisphenol structure is not particularly limited, but is preferably 4 to 16 per molecule, more preferably 6 to 14.
The polymerizable compound B1 having a bisphenol structure is described in paragraphs 0072 to 0080 of JP-A-2016-224162, and the contents described in this publication are incorporated in the present specification.
 重合性化合物B1としては、ビスフェノールA構造を有する2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物が好ましく、2,2-ビス(4-((メタ)アクリロキシポリアルコキシ)フェニル)プロパンがより好ましい。
 2,2-ビス(4-((メタ)アクリロキシポリアルコキシ)フェニル)プロパンとしては、例えば、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシジエトキシ)フェニル)プロパン(FA-324M、日立化成社製)、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシエトキシプロポキシ)フェニル)プロパン、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシペンタエトキシ)フェニル)プロパン(BPE-500、新中村化学工業社製)、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシドデカエトキシテトラプロポキシ)フェニル)プロパン(FA-3200MY、日立化成社製)、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシペンタデカエトキシ)フェニル)プロパン(BPE-1300、新中村化学工業社製)、2,2-ビス(4-(メタクリロキシジエトキシ)フェニル)プロパン(BPE-200、新中村化学工業社製)、及びエトキシ化(10)ビスフェノールAジアクリレート(NKエステルA-BPE-10、新中村化学工業社製)が挙げられる。
As the polymerizable compound B1, a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having a bisphenol A structure is preferable, and 2,2-bis (4-((meth) acryloxypolyalkoxy) phenyl) propane is more preferable.
Examples of the 2,2-bis (4-((meth) acryloxypolyalkoxy) phenyl) propane include 2,2-bis (4- (methacryloxydiethoxy) phenyl) propane (FA-324M, Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.). , 2,2-Bis (4- (methacryloxyethoxypropoxy) phenyl) propane, 2,2-bis (4- (methacryloxypentethoxy) phenyl) propane (BPE-500, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) , 2,2-Bis (4- (methacryloxidedecaethoxytetrapropoxy) phenyl) propane (FA-3200MY, manufactured by Hitachi Chemical Co., Ltd.), 2,2-bis (4- (methacryloxypentadecaethoxy) phenyl) propane ( BPE-1300, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), 2,2-bis (4- (methacryloxydiethoxy) phenyl) propane (BPE-200, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and ethoxylated (10) bisphenol A Diacrylate (NK ester A-BPE-10, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) can be mentioned.
 重合性化合物B1としては、下記一般式(B1)で表される化合物も好ましい。 As the polymerizable compound B1, a compound represented by the following general formula (B1) is also preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000024
 一般式B1中、R及びRは、それぞれ独立に、水素原子又はメチル基を表す。AはCを表す。BはCを表す。n1及びn3は各々独立に1~39の整数であり、且つ、n1+n3は2~40の整数である。n2及びn4は各々独立に0~29の整数であり、且つ、n2+n4は0~30の整数である。-(A-O)-及び-(B-O)-の構成単位の配列は、ランダムであってもブロックであってもよい。そして、ブロックの場合、-(A-O)-と-(B-O)-とのいずれがビスフェニル基側でもよい。
 一態様において、n1+n2+n3+n4は、2~20が好ましく、2~16がより好ましく、4~12が更に好ましい。また、n2+n4は、0~10が好ましく、0~4がより好ましく、0~2が更に好ましく、0が特に好ましい。
In the general formula B1, R 1 and R 2 independently represent a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, respectively. A represents C 2 H 4 . B represents C 3 H 6 . n1 and n3 are independently integers of 1 to 39, and n1 + n3 are integers of 2 to 40. n2 and n4 are independently integers of 0 to 29, and n2 + n4 are integers of 0 to 30. The sequence of constituent units of-(AO)-and-(BO)-may be random or block. In the case of a block, either − (A—O) − or − (BO) − may be on the bisphenyl group side.
In one embodiment, n1 + n2 + n3 + n4 is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 2 to 16, and even more preferably 4 to 12. Further, n2 + n4 is preferably 0 to 10, more preferably 0 to 4, further preferably 0 to 2, and particularly preferably 0.
 重合性化合物B1は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 重合性化合物B1の含有量は、解像性がより優れる観点から、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、10質量%以上が好ましく、20質量%以上がより好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、転写性及びエッジフュージョン(転写部材の端部から感光性樹脂が滲み出す現象)の観点から、70質量%以下が好ましく、60質量%以下がより好ましい。
The polymerizable compound B1 may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the polymerizable compound B1 is preferably 10% by mass or more, more preferably 20% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer, from the viewpoint of better resolution. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of transferability and edge fusion (a phenomenon in which the photosensitive resin exudes from the end of the transfer member), 70% by mass or less is preferable, and 60% by mass or less is more preferable.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、上述した重合性化合物B1以外の重合性化合物を含んでもよい。
 重合性化合物B1以外の重合性化合物は、特に制限されず、公知の化合物の中から適宜選択できる。例えば、一分子中に1個のエチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物(単官能エチレン性不飽和化合物)、芳香環を有さない2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物、及び3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物が挙げられる。
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a polymerizable compound other than the above-mentioned polymerizable compound B1.
The polymerizable compound other than the polymerizable compound B1 is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected from known compounds. For example, a compound having one ethylenically unsaturated group in one molecule (monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound), a bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having no aromatic ring, and a trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound. Examples include compounds.
 単官能エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、2-(メタ)アクリロイルオキシエチルサクシネート、ポリエチレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリプロピレングリコールモノ(メタ)アクリレート、及びフェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。 Examples of the monofunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound include ethyl (meth) acrylate, ethylhexyl (meth) acrylate, 2- (meth) acryloyloxyethyl succinate, polyethylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate, and polypropylene glycol mono (meth) acrylate. , And phenoxyethyl (meth) acrylate.
 芳香環を有さない2官能エチレン性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、アルキレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ポリアルキレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレート、及びトリメチロールプロパンジアクリレートが挙げられる。
 アルキレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレート(A-DCP、新中村化学工業社製)、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジメタクリレート(DCP、新中村化学工業社製)、1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレート(A-NOD-N、新中村化学工業社製)、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(A-HD-N、新中村化学工業社製)、エチレングリコールジメタクリレート、1,10-デカンジオールジアクリレート、及びネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
 ポリアルキレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、ポリエチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ジプロピレングリコールジアクリレート、トリプロピレングリコールジアクリレート、及びポリプロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。
 ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、プロピレンオキサイド変性ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレート、並びに、エチレンオキサイド及びプロピレンオキサイド変性ウレタンジ(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。市販品としては、例えば、8UX-015A(大成ファインケミカル社製)、UA-32P(新中村化学工業社製)、及びUA-1100H(新中村化学工業社製)が挙げられる。
Examples of the bifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compound having no aromatic ring include alkylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, polyalkylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, urethane di (meth) acrylate, and trimethylolpropane diacrylate. ..
Examples of the alkylene glycol di (meth) acrylate include tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate (A-DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), tricyclodecanedimethanol dimethacrylate (DCP, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and the like. 1,9-Nonandiol diacrylate (A-NOD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), 1,6-hexanediol diacrylate (A-HD-N, manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), ethylene glycol dimethacrylate , 1,10-decanediol diacrylate, and neopentyl glycol di (meth) acrylate.
Examples of the polyalkylene glycol di (meth) acrylate include polyethylene glycol di (meth) acrylate, dipropylene glycol diacrylate, tripropylene glycol diacrylate, and polypropylene glycol di (meth) acrylate.
Examples of the urethane di (meth) acrylate include propylene oxide-modified urethane di (meth) acrylate, and ethylene oxide and propylene oxide-modified urethane di (meth) acrylate. Examples of commercially available products include 8UX-015A (manufactured by Taisei Fine Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), UA-32P (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), and UA-1100H (manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
 3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、例えば、ジペンタエリスリトール(トリ/テトラ/ペンタ/ヘキサ)(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトール(トリ/テトラ)(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジトリメチロールプロパンテトラ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールエタントリ(メタ)アクリレート、イソシアヌル酸トリ(メタ)アクリレート、グリセリントリ(メタ)アクリレート、及びこれらのアルキレンオキサイド変性物が挙げられる。
 ここで、「(トリ/テトラ/ペンタ/ヘキサ)(メタ)アクリレート」は、トリ(メタ)アクリレート、テトラ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタ(メタ)アクリレート、及びヘキサ(メタ)アクリレートを包含する概念であり、「(トリ/テトラ)(メタ)アクリレート」は、トリ(メタ)アクリレート及びテトラ(メタ)アクリレートを包含する概念である。
 なお、5~6官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物としては、ジペンタエリスリトールポリアクリレート(新中村化学工業社製「A-DPH」)等が挙げられる。
 一態様において、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、上述した重合性化合物B1及び3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことも好ましく、上述した重合性化合物B1及び2種以上の3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことがより好ましい。この場合、重合性化合物B1と3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物の質量比は、(重合性化合物B1の合計質量):(3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物の合計質量)=1:1~5:1が好ましく、1.2:1~4:1がより好ましく、1.5:1~3:1が更に好ましい。
 また、一態様において、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、上述した重合性化合物B1及び2種以上の3官能のエチレン性不飽和化合物を含むことが好ましい。
Examples of the trifunctional or higher functional ethylenically unsaturated compound include dipentaerythritol (tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate, pentaerythritol (tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate, and trimethylolpropane tri (meth). Examples thereof include acrylates, trimethylolpropane tetra (meth) acrylates, trimethylolethanetri (meth) acrylates, isocyanuric acid tri (meth) acrylates, glycerintri (meth) acrylates, and alkylene oxide modified products thereof.
Here, "(tri / tetra / penta / hexa) (meth) acrylate" is a concept including tri (meth) acrylate, tetra (meth) acrylate, penta (meth) acrylate, and hexa (meth) acrylate. , "(Tri / tetra) (meth) acrylate" is a concept that includes tri (meth) acrylate and tetra (meth) acrylate.
Examples of the ethylenically unsaturated compound having 5 to 6 or more functionalities include dipentaerythritol polyacrylate (“A-DPH” manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.).
In one embodiment, the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains the above-mentioned polymerizable compound B1 and a trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound, and the above-mentioned polymerizable compound B1 and two or more trifunctional or higher. It is more preferable to contain an ethylenically unsaturated compound. In this case, the mass ratio of the polymerizable compound B1 to the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound is (total mass of the polymerizable compound B1): (total mass of the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound) = 1: 1. It is preferably ~ 5: 1, more preferably 1.2: 1 to 4: 1, and even more preferably 1.5: 1 to 3: 1.
Further, in one embodiment, the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains the above-mentioned polymerizable compound B1 and two or more trifunctional ethylenically unsaturated compounds.
 3官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物のアルキレンオキサイド変性物としては、カプロラクトン変性(メタ)アクリレート化合物(日本化薬社製KAYARAD(登録商標)DPCA-20、新中村化学工業社製A-9300-1CL等)、アルキレンオキサイド変性(メタ)アクリレート化合物(日本化薬社製KAYARAD RP-1040、新中村化学工業社製ATM-35E及びA-9300、ダイセル・オルネクス社製EBECRYL(登録商標) 135等)、エトキシル化グリセリントリアクリレート(新中村化学工業社製A-GLY-9E等)、アロニックス(登録商標)TO-2349(東亞合成社製)、アロニックスM-520(東亞合成社製)、及びアロニックスM-510(東亞合成社製)が挙げられる。 Examples of the alkylene oxide-modified product of the trifunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound include caprolactone-modified (meth) acrylate compound (KAYARAD (registered trademark) DPCA-20 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. and A-9300-1CL manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.). Etc.), alkylene oxide-modified (meth) acrylate compound (KAYARAD RP-1040 manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd., ATM-35E and A-9300 manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., EBECRYL (registered trademark) 135 manufactured by Daicel Ornex Co., Ltd., etc.), Acrylate glycerin triacrylate (A-GLY-9E manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Aronix (registered trademark) TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), Aronix M-520 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.), and Aronix M- 510 (manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd.) can be mentioned.
 また、エチレン性不飽和化合物として、酸基(カルボキシ基等)を有する重合性化合物を使用してもよい。上記酸基は酸無水物基を形成していてもよい。酸基を有する重合性化合物としては、アロニックス(登録商標)TO-2349(東亞合成社製)、アロニックス(登録商標)M-520(東亞合成社製)、及びアロニックス(登録商標)M-510(東亞合成社製)が挙げられる。酸基を有するエチレン性不飽和化合物として、例えば、特開2004-239942号公報の段落0025~0030に記載の化合物を用いてもよい。 Further, as the ethylenically unsaturated compound, a polymerizable compound having an acid group (carboxy group or the like) may be used. The acid group may form an acid anhydride group. Polymerizable compounds having an acid group include Aronix (registered trademark) TO-2349 (manufactured by Toagosei), Aronix (registered trademark) M-520 (manufactured by Toagosei), and Aronix (registered trademark) M-510 (registered trademark). Toagosei Co., Ltd.). As the ethylenically unsaturated compound having an acid group, for example, the compounds described in paragraphs 0025 to 0030 of JP-A-2004-239942 may be used.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層におけるエチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量の下限値としては、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、1質量%以上が好ましく、5質量%以上がより好ましく、20質量%以上が更に好ましく、35質量%以上が更に好ましく、40質量%以上が特に好ましい。また、その上限値としては特に制限されないが、70質量%以下が好ましく、60質量%以下がより好ましく、55質量%以下が更に好ましい。
 また、ネガ型感光性組成物層において、バインダーポリマーに対するエチレン性不飽和化合物の質量含有量比(エチレン性不飽和化合物/バインダーポリマー)は、0.4以上であるのが好ましく、0.5以上であるのがより好ましく、0.6以上であるのが更に好ましく、0.7以上であるのが特に好ましく、0.8以上であるのが最も好ましい。なお、上限値としては特に制限されないが、1.5以下が好ましく、1.2以下であるのが更に好ましい。
The ethylenically unsaturated compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The lower limit of the content of the ethylenically unsaturated compound in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 1% by mass or more, more preferably 5% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. , 20% by mass or more is further preferable, 35% by mass or more is further preferable, and 40% by mass or more is particularly preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and further preferably 55% by mass or less.
Further, in the negative photosensitive composition layer, the mass content ratio of the ethylenically unsaturated compound to the binder polymer (ethylenically unsaturated compound / binder polymer) is preferably 0.4 or more, preferably 0.5 or more. Is more preferable, 0.6 or more is further preferable, 0.7 or more is particularly preferable, and 0.8 or more is most preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1.5 or less, and more preferably 1.2 or less.
 エチレン性不飽和化合物(重合性化合物B1を含む)の分子量(分子量分布を有する場合は重量平均分子量)としては、200~3,000が好ましく、280~2,200がより好ましく、300~2,200が更に好ましい。 The molecular weight (weight average molecular weight when having a molecular weight distribution) of the ethylenically unsaturated compound (including the polymerizable compound B1) is preferably 200 to 3,000, more preferably 280 to 2,200, and 300 to 2, 200 is more preferred.
 また、重合性化合物は、エチレン性不飽和化合物以外の他の重合性化合物(以下「他の重合性化合物」ともいう。)を含んでいてもよい。
 他の重合性化合物とは、後述する光重合開始剤の作用を受けて重合する化合物であって、上述した重合体Aとは異なる化合物を意味する。また、他の重合性化合物は、分子量5,000未満であることが好ましい。
 他の重合性化合物が有する重合性基としては、エポキシ基及びオキセタン基等のカチオン性重合性基を有する基が挙げられる。
Further, the polymerizable compound may contain a polymerizable compound other than the ethylenically unsaturated compound (hereinafter, also referred to as “another polymerizable compound”).
The other polymerizable compound is a compound that polymerizes under the action of a photopolymerization initiator described later, and means a compound different from the above-mentioned polymer A. Further, the other polymerizable compound preferably has a molecular weight of less than 5,000.
Examples of the polymerizable group of the other polymerizable compound include a group having a cationically polymerizable group such as an epoxy group and an oxetane group.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層が、他の重合性化合物を含む場合、エチレン性不飽和化合物の含有量としては、重合性化合物の全質量(エチレン性不飽和化合物及び他の重合性化合物の合計質量)に対して、60~100質量%が好ましく、80~100質量%がより好ましく、90~100質量%が更に好ましく、95~100質量%が特に好ましい。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層中の重合性化合物の含有量(エチレン性不飽和化合物及び他の重合性化合物の合計質量)の下限値としては、重合性化合物の全質量(エチレン性不飽和化合物及び他の重合性化合物の合計質量)に対して、1質量%以上が好ましく、5質量%以上がより好ましく、20質量%以上が更に好ましく、35質量%以上が更に好ましく、40質量%以上が特に好ましい。また、その上限値としては特に制限されないが、70質量%以下が好ましく、60質量%以下がより好ましく、55質量%以下が更に好ましい。
When the negative photosensitive composition layer contains other polymerizable compounds, the content of the ethylenically unsaturated compound is the total mass of the polymerizable compound (total mass of the ethylenically unsaturated compound and other polymerizable compounds). ), 60 to 100% by mass is preferable, 80 to 100% by mass is more preferable, 90 to 100% by mass is further preferable, and 95 to 100% by mass is particularly preferable.
The lower limit of the content of the polymerizable compound (total mass of the ethylenically unsaturated compound and other polymerizable compounds) in the negative photosensitive composition layer is the total mass of the polymerizable compound (ethylene unsaturated compound and 1% by mass or more is preferable, 5% by mass or more is more preferable, 20% by mass or more is further preferable, 35% by mass or more is further preferable, and 40% by mass or more is particularly preferable. preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 70% by mass or less, more preferably 60% by mass or less, and further preferably 55% by mass or less.
 本発明の転写フィルムは、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、4官能以上の重合性化合物を含んでいるのが好ましい。4官能以上の重合性化合物としては、4官能以上のエチレン性不飽和化合物(4個以上のエチレン性不飽和基を有する重合性化合物)であるのが好ましい。
 4官能以上の重合性化合物の含有量としては、重合性化合物の全質量(エチレン性不飽和化合物及び他の重合性化合物の合計質量)に対して、35質量%以上であるのが好ましく、40質量%以上であるのがより好ましく、65質量%以上であるのが更に好ましく、70質量%以上であるのが特に好ましい。なお、上限値としては特に制限されないが、例えば、100質量%以下が好ましく、90質量%以下がより好ましく、80質量%以下が更に好ましい。
The transfer film of the present invention preferably contains a polyfunctional or higher functional compound in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. The tetrafunctional or higher functional polymerizable compound is preferably a tetrafunctional or higher ethylenically unsaturated compound (a polymerizable compound having four or more ethylenically unsaturated groups).
The content of the tetrafunctional or higher-functional polymerizable compound is preferably 35% by mass or more, preferably 35% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the polymerizable compound (total mass of the ethylenically unsaturated compound and other polymerizable compounds). It is more preferably 7% by mass or more, further preferably 65% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 70% by mass or more. The upper limit value is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100% by mass or less, more preferably 90% by mass or less, and further preferably 80% by mass or less.
<光重合開始剤>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、光重合開始剤を含む。
 光重合開始剤は、紫外線、可視光線、及びX線等の活性光線を受けて、重合性化合物の重合を開始する化合物である。光重合開始剤としては、特に制限されず、公知の光重合開始剤を使用できる。
 光重合開始剤としては、例えば、光ラジカル重合開始剤及び光カチオン重合開始剤が挙げられ、光ラジカル重合開始剤が好ましい。
<Photopolymerization initiator>
The negative photosensitive composition layer contains a photopolymerization initiator.
The photopolymerization initiator is a compound that initiates the polymerization of a polymerizable compound by receiving active light such as ultraviolet rays, visible light, and X-rays. The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, and a known photopolymerization initiator can be used.
Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include a photoradical polymerization initiator and a photocationic polymerization initiator, and a photoradical polymerization initiator is preferable.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、例えば、オキシムエステル構造を有する光重合開始剤、α-アミノアルキルフェノン構造を有する光重合開始剤、α-ヒドロキシアルキルフェノン構造を有する光重合開始剤、アシルフォスフィンオキサイド構造を有する光重合開始剤、及びN-フェニルグリシン構造を有する光重合開始剤が挙げられる。 Examples of the photoradical polymerization initiator include a photopolymerization initiator having an oxime ester structure, a photopolymerization initiator having an α-aminoalkylphenone structure, a photopolymerization initiator having an α-hydroxyalkylphenone structure, and an acylphosphine oxide. Examples thereof include a photopolymerization initiator having a structure and a photopolymerization initiator having an N-phenylglycine structure.
 また、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、感光性、露光部及び非露光部の視認性、及び解像性の観点から、光ラジカル重合開始剤として、2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾール二量体及びその誘導体からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましい。なお、2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾール二量体及びその誘導体における2つの2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾール構造は、同一であっても異なっていてもよい。
 2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾール二量体の誘導体としては、例えば、2-(o-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体、2-(o-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジ(メトキシフェニル)イミダゾール二量体、2-(o-フルオロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体、2-(o-メトキシフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体、及び2-(p-メトキシフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体が挙げられる。
 2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾール二量体の誘導体としては、例えば、2,2’-ビス(2-クロロフェニル)-4,4’,5,5’-テトラフェニル-1,2’-ビイミダゾールも挙げられる。
Further, the negative photosensitive composition layer contains 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer as a photoradical polymerization initiator from the viewpoints of photosensitive, visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, and resolution. It preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of the body and its derivatives. The two 2,4,5-triarylimidazole structures in the 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer and its derivatives may be the same or different.
Derivatives of the 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer include, for example, 2- (o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2- (o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-di. (Methoxyphenyl) imidazole dimer, 2- (o-fluorophenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, 2- (o-methoxyphenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer, and 2- Examples thereof include (p-methoxyphenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer.
Derivatives of the 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimer include, for example, 2,2'-bis (2-chlorophenyl) -4,4', 5,5'-tetraphenyl-1,2'-bi. Imidazole is also mentioned.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、例えば、特開2011-095716号公報の段落0031~0042、特開2015-014783号公報の段落0064~0081に記載された重合開始剤を用いてもよい。 As the photoradical polymerization initiator, for example, the polymerization initiator described in paragraphs 0031 to 0042 of JP-A-2011-09571 and paragraphs 0064-0081 of JP-A-2015-014783 may be used.
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、例えば、ジメチルアミノ安息香酸エチル(DBE、CAS No.10287-53-3)、ベンゾインメチルエーテル、アニシル(p,p’-ジメトキシベンジル)、TAZ-110(商品名:みどり化学社製)、ベンゾフェノン、4,4′-ビス(ジエチルアミノ)ベンゾフェノン、TAZ-111(商品名:みどり化学社製)、IrgacureOXE01、OXE02、OXE03、OXE04(BASF社製)、Omnirad651及び369(商品名:IGM Resins B.V.社製)、及び2,2’-ビス(2-クロロフェニル)-4,4’,5,5’-テトラフェニル-1,2’-ビイミダゾール(東京化成工業社製)が挙げられる。 Examples of the photoradical polymerization initiator include ethyl dimethylaminobenzoate (DBE, CAS No. 10287-53-3), benzoin methyl ether, anisyl (p, p'-dimethoxybenzyl), and TAZ-110 (trade name:). Midori Kagaku Co., Ltd.), Benzophenone, 4,4'-bis (diethylamino) benzophenone, TAZ-111 (trade name: Midori Kagaku Co., Ltd.), RadicalOXE01, OXE02, OXE03, OXE04 (BASF), Polymer 651 and 369 (Products) Name: IGM Resins B.V.) and 2,2'-bis (2-chlorophenyl) -4,4', 5,5'-tetraphenyl-1,2'-biimidazole (Tokyo Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.) Made).
 光ラジカル重合開始剤の市販品としては、例えば、1-[4-(フェニルチオ)]-1,2-オクタンジオン-2-(O-ベンゾイルオキシム)(商品名:IRGACURE(登録商標) OXE-01、BASF社製)、1-[9-エチル-6-(2-メチルベンゾイル)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]エタノン-1-(O-アセチルオキシム)(商品名:IRGACURE OXE-02、BASF社製)、IRGACURE OXE-03(BASF社製)、IRGACURE OXE-04(BASF社製)、2-(ジメチルアミノ)-2-[(4-メチルフェニル)メチル]-1-[4-(4-モルフォリニル)フェニル]-1-ブタノン(商品名:Omnirad 379EG、IGM Resins B.V.製)、2-メチル-1-(4-メチルチオフェニル)-2-モルフォリノプロパン-1-オン(商品名:Omnirad 907、IGM Resins B.V.製)、2-ヒドロキシ-1-{4-[4-(2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチルプロピオニル)ベンジル]フェニル}-2-メチルプロパン-1-オン(商品名:Omnirad127、IGM Resins B.V.製)、2-ベンジル-2-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルフォリノフェニル)ブタノン-1(商品名:Omnirad 369、IGM Resins B.V.製)、2-ヒドロキシ-2-メチル-1-フェニルプロパン-1-オン(商品名:Omnirad 1173、IGM Resins B.V.製)、1-ヒドロキシシクロヘキシルフェニルケトン(商品名:Omnirad 184、IGM Resins B.V.製)、2,2-ジメトキシ-1,2-ジフェニルエタン-1-オン(商品名:Omnirad 651、IGM Resins B.V.製)、2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾリル-ジフェニルフォスフィンオキサイド(商品名:Omnirad TPO H、IGM Resins B.V.製)、ビス(2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾリル)フェニルフォスフィンオキサイド(商品名:Omnirad 819、IGM Resins B.V.製)、オキシムエステル系の光重合開始剤(商品名:Lunar 6、DKSHジャパン社製)、2,2’-ビス(2-クロロフェニル)-4,4’,5,5’-テトラフェニルビスイミダゾール(2-(2-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体)(商品名:B-CIM、Hampford社製)、及び2-(o-クロロフェニル)-4,5-ジフェニルイミダゾール二量体(商品名:BCTB、東京化成工業社製)、1-[4-(フェニルチオ)フェニル]-3-シクロペンチルプロパン-1,2-ジオン-2-(O-ベンゾイルオキシム)(商品名:TR-PBG-305、常州強力電子新材料社製)、1,2-プロパンジオン,3-シクロヘキシル-1-[9-エチル-6-(2-フラニルカルボニル)-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル]-,2-(O-アセチルオキシム)(商品名:TR-PBG-326、常州強力電子新材料社製)、及び3-シクロヘキシル-1-(6-(2-(ベンゾイルオキシイミノ)ヘキサノイル)-9-エチル-9H-カルバゾール-3-イル)-プロパン-1,2-ジオン-2-(O-ベンゾイルオキシム)(商品名:TR-PBG-391、常州強力電子新材料社製)が挙げられる。
 また、光ラジカル重合開始剤の市販品としては、商品名「Omnirad 379」(IGM Resins B.V.社製)のアルキルフェノン系化合物が挙げられる。
Examples of commercially available photoradical polymerization initiators include 1- [4- (phenylthio)] -1,2-octanedione-2- (O-benzoyloxime) (trade name: IRGACURE® OXE-01). , BASF), 1- [9-ethyl-6- (2-methylbenzoyl) -9H-carbazole-3-yl] etanone-1- (O-acetyloxime) (trade name: IRGACURE OXE-02, BASF) IRGACURE OXE-03 (BASF), IRGACURE OXE-04 (BASF), 2- (dimethylamino) -2-[(4-methylphenyl) methyl] -1- [4- (4) -Morphorinyl) Phenyl] -1-butanone (trade name: Omnirad 379EG, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), 2-methyl-1- (4-methylthiophenyl) -2-morpholinopropane-1-one (trade name) : Omnirad 907, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), 2-hydroxy-1- {4- [4- (2-hydroxy-2-methylpropionyl) benzyl] phenyl} -2-methylpropan-1-one (commodity) Name: Omnirad 127, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V., 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino-1- (4-morpholinophenyl) butanone-1 (trade name: Omnirad 369, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), 2-Hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenylpropan-1-one (trade name: Omnirad 1173, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), 1-hydroxycyclohexylphenylketone (trade name: Omnirad 184, IGM Resins B.V.) , 2,2-Dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethan-1-one (trade name: Omnirad 651, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), 2,4,6-trimethylbenzolyl-diphenylphosphine oxide (Product name: Omnirad TPO H, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Bis (2,4,6-trimethylbenzolyl) Phenylphosphinoxide (Product name: Omnirad 819, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.), Oxym Ester-based photopolymerization initiator (trade name: Lunar 6, manufactured by DKSH Japan), 2,2'-bis (2-chlorophenyl) -4,4', 5,5'-tetraphenylbisimidazole (2-( 2-Chlorophenyl) -4, 5-Diphenylimidazole dimer (trade name: B-CIM, manufactured by Carbonyl) and 2- (o-chlorophenyl) -4,5-diphenylimidazole dimer (trade name: BCTB, manufactured by Tokyo Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.) ), 1- [4- (Phenylthio) phenyl] -3-cyclopentylpropane-1,2-dione-2- (O-benzoyloxime) (trade name: TR-PBG-305, manufactured by Joshu Powerful Electronics New Materials Co., Ltd.) , 1,2-Propandione, 3-Cyclohexyl-1- [9-ethyl-6- (2-furanylcarbonyl) -9H-carbazole-3-yl]-, 2- (O-acetyloxime) (trade name) : TR-PBG-326, manufactured by Changzhou Strong Electronics New Materials Co., Ltd.), and 3-cyclohexyl-1- (6- (2- (benzoyloxyimino) hexanoyl) -9-ethyl-9H-carbazole-3-yl)- Propane-1,2-dione-2- (O-benzoyloxime) (trade name: TR-PBG-391, manufactured by Changzhou Powerful Electronics New Materials Co., Ltd.) can be mentioned.
Examples of commercially available photo-radical polymerization initiators include alkylphenone compounds having the trade name “Omnirad 379” (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.).
 光カチオン重合開始剤(光酸発生剤)は、活性光線を受けて酸を発生する化合物である。光カチオン重合開始剤としては、波長300nm以上、好ましくは波長300~450nmの活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物が好ましいが、その化学構造は制限されない。また、波長300nm以上の活性光線に直接感応しない光カチオン重合開始剤についても、増感剤と併用することによって波長300nm以上の活性光線に感応し、酸を発生する化合物であれば、増感剤と組み合わせて好ましく使用できる。
 光カチオン重合開始剤としては、pKaが4以下の酸を発生する光カチオン重合開始剤が好ましく、pKaが3以下の酸を発生する光カチオン重合開始剤がより好ましく、pKaが2以下の酸を発生する光カチオン重合開始剤が特に好ましい。pKaの下限値は特に定めないが、例えば、-10.0以上が好ましい。
The photocationic polymerization initiator (photoacid generator) is a compound that generates an acid by receiving active light rays. As the photocationic polymerization initiator, a compound that is sensitive to active light having a wavelength of 300 nm or more, preferably a wavelength of 300 to 450 nm and generates an acid is preferable, but its chemical structure is not limited. In addition, a photocationic polymerization initiator that is not directly sensitive to active light with a wavelength of 300 nm or more is also a sensitizer if it is a compound that is sensitive to active light with a wavelength of 300 nm or more and generates an acid when used in combination with a sensitizer. Can be preferably used in combination with.
As the photocationic polymerization initiator, a photocationic polymerization initiator that generates an acid having a pKa of 4 or less is preferable, a photocationic polymerization initiator that generates an acid having a pKa of 3 or less is more preferable, and an acid having a pKa of 2 or less is used. The generated photocationic polymerization initiator is particularly preferred. The lower limit of pKa is not particularly defined, but is preferably -10.0 or higher, for example.
 光カチオン重合開始剤としては、イオン性光カチオン重合開始剤及び非イオン性光カチオン重合開始剤が挙げられる。
 イオン性光カチオン重合開始剤として、例えば、ジアリールヨードニウム塩類及びトリアリールスルホニウム塩類等のオニウム塩化合物、並びに、第4級アンモニウム塩類が挙げられる。
 イオン性光カチオン重合開始剤としては、特開2014-085643号公報の段落0114~0133に記載のイオン性光カチオン重合開始剤を用いてもよい。
Examples of the photocationic polymerization initiator include an ionic photocationic polymerization initiator and a nonionic photocationic polymerization initiator.
Examples of the ionic photocationic polymerization initiator include onium salt compounds such as diaryliodonium salts and triarylsulfonium salts, and quaternary ammonium salts.
As the ionic photocationic polymerization initiator, the ionic photocationic polymerization initiator described in paragraphs 0114 to 0133 of JP-A-2014-085643 may be used.
 非イオン性光カチオン重合開始剤としては、例えば、トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物、イミドスルホネート化合物、及びオキシムスルホネート化合物が挙げられる。トリクロロメチル-s-トリアジン類、ジアゾメタン化合物及びイミドスルホネート化合物としては、特開2011-221494号公報の段落0083~0088に記載の化合物を用いてもよい。また、オキシムスルホネート化合物としては、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0084~0088に記載された化合物を用いてもよい。 Examples of the nonionic photocationic polymerization initiator include trichloromethyl-s-triazines, diazomethane compounds, imide sulfonate compounds, and oxime sulfonate compounds. As the trichloromethyl-s-triazines, the diazomethane compound and the imide sulfonate compound, the compounds described in paragraphs 0083 to 0088 of JP-A-2011-22149 may be used. Further, as the oxime sulfonate compound, the compound described in paragraphs 0084 to 0088 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 may be used.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、光ラジカル重合開始剤を含むことが好ましく、2,4,5-トリアリールイミダゾール二量体及びその誘導体からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種を含むことがより好ましい。 The negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains a photoradical polymerization initiator, and more preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of 2,4,5-triarylimidazole dimers and derivatives thereof. preferable.
 光重合開始剤は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 光重合開始剤の含有量は、特に制限されないが、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対し、0.1質量%以上が好ましく、0.5質量%以上がより好ましく、1.0質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対し、20質量%以下が好ましく、15質量%以下が更に好ましく、10質量%以下がより好ましく、5質量%以下が更に好ましい。
The photopolymerization initiator may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and more preferably 1.0% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. % Or more is more preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 20% by mass or less, more preferably 15% by mass or less, still more preferably 10% by mass or less, still more preferably 5% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. ..
<重合禁止剤>
 本発明の転写フィルムが本発明の効果を奏する上では、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、重合禁止剤を含むのが好ましい。
 重合禁止剤とは、重合反応を遅延又は禁止させる機能を有する化合物を意味する。重合禁止剤としては、例えば、重合禁止剤として用いられる公知の化合物を使用できる。
<Polymerization inhibitor>
In order for the transfer film of the present invention to exert the effect of the present invention, it is preferable that the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a polymerization inhibitor.
The polymerization inhibitor means a compound having a function of delaying or prohibiting a polymerization reaction. As the polymerization inhibitor, for example, a known compound used as a polymerization inhibitor can be used.
 重合禁止剤としては、例えば、フェノチアジン、ビス-(1-ジメチルベンジル)フェノチアジン、及び、3,7-ジオクチルフェノチアジン等のフェノチアジン化合物;フェノキサジン等のフェノキサジン化合物;ビス[3-(3-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシ-5-メチルフェニル)プロピオン酸][エチレンビス(オキシエチレン)]2,4-ビス〔(ラウリルチオ)メチル〕-o-クレゾール、1,3,5-トリス(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンジル)、1,3,5-トリス(4-t-ブチル-3-ヒドロキシ-2,6-ジメチルベンジル)、2,4-ビス-(n-オクチルチオ)-6-(4-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ジ-t-ブチルアニリノ)-1,3,5-トリアジン、及び、ペンタエリスリトールテトラキス3-(3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート等のヒンダードフェノール化合物;4-ニトロソフェノール、N-ニトロソジフェニルアミン、N-ニトロソシクロヘキシルヒドロキシルアミン、及び、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミン等のニトロソ化合物又はその塩;メチルハイドロキノン、t-ブチルハイドロキノン、2,5-ジ-t-ブチルハイドロキノン、及び、4-ベンゾキノン等のキノン化合物;4-メトキシフェノール、4-メトキシ-1-ナフトール、及び、t-ブチルカテコール等のフェノール化合物;ジブチルジチオカルバミン酸銅、ジエチルジチオカルバミン酸銅、ジエチルジチオカルバミン酸マンガン、及び、ジフェニルジチオカルバミン酸マンガン等の金属塩化合物が挙げられる。
 また、重合禁止剤としては、例えば、特許第4502784号公報の段落0018に記載された熱重合防止剤、ナフチルアミン及び塩化第一銅等も挙げられる。
 なかでも、本発明の効果がより優れる点で、重合禁止剤としては、フェノチアジン化合物(フェノチアジン及びその誘導体)、フェノキサジン等のフェノキサジン化合物;ニトロソ化合物又はその塩、及び、ヒンダードフェノール化合物からなる群より選ばれる少なくとも1種が好ましく、フェノチアジン、フェノキサジン、ビス[3-(3-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシ-5-メチルフェニル)プロピオン酸]、[エチレンビス(オキシエチレン)]2,4-ビス〔(ラウリルチオ)メチル〕-o-クレゾール、1,3,5-トリス(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンジル)、p-メトキシフェノール、又は、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシルアミンアルミニウム塩がより好ましく、フェノチアジン、フェノキサジン、又は、、p-メトキシフェノールが更に好ましい。
Examples of the polymerization inhibitor include phenothiazine compounds such as phenothiazine, bis- (1-dimethylbenzyl) phenothiazine, and 3,7-dioctylphenothiazine; phenoxazine compounds such as phenoxazine; bis [3- (3-tert- Butyl-4-hydroxy-5-methylphenyl) propionic acid] [ethylenebis (oxyethylene)] 2,4-bis [(laurylthio) methyl] -o-cresol, 1,3,5-tris (3,5-) Di-t-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl), 1,3,5-tris (4-t-butyl-3-hydroxy-2,6-dimethylbenzyl), 2,4-bis- (n-octylthio)- 6- (4-Hydroxy-3,5-di-t-butylanilino) -1,3,5-triazine and pentaerythritol tetrakis 3- (3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl) propionate Hindered phenolic compounds such as: 4-nitrosophenol, N-nitrosodiphenylamine, N-nitrosocyclohexylhydroxylamine, and nitroso compounds such as N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine or salts thereof; methylhydroquinone, t-butylhydroquinone, 2, Phenolic compounds such as 5-di-t-butylhydroquinone and 4-benzoquinone; phenolic compounds such as 4-methoxyphenol, 4-methoxy-1-naphthol, and t-butylcatechol; copper dibutyldithiocarbamate, diethyldithiocarbamine. Examples thereof include metal salt compounds such as copper acid, manganese diethyldithiocarbamate, and manganese diphenyldithiocarbamate.
Further, examples of the polymerization inhibitor include thermal polymerization inhibitors, naphthylamines, cuprous chloride and the like described in paragraph 0018 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784.
Among them, the polymerization inhibitor is composed of a phenothiazine compound (phenothiazine and its derivative), a phenoxazine compound such as phenoxazine; a nitroso compound or a salt thereof, and a hindered phenol compound in that the effect of the present invention is more excellent. At least one selected from the group is preferable, and phenolthiazine, phenoxazine, bis [3- (3-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy-5-methylphenyl) propionic acid], [ethylenebis (oxyethylene)] 2,4 -Bis [(laurylthio) methyl] -o-cresol, 1,3,5-tris (3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl), p-methoxyphenol, or N-nitrosophenylhydroxylamine Aluminum salts are more preferred, and phenothiazine, phenoxazine, or p-methoxyphenol is even more preferred.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、ラジカル重合禁止剤を含んでもよい。
 ラジカル重合禁止剤としては、例えば、特許第4502784号公報の段落0018に記載された熱重合防止剤が挙げられる。なかでも、フェノチアジン、フェノキサジン、又は4-メトキシフェノールが好ましい。その他のラジカル重合禁止剤としては、ナフチルアミン、塩化第一銅、ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミンアルミニウム塩、及びジフェニルニトロソアミン等が挙げられる。ネガ型感光性組成物層の感度を損なわないために、ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミンアルミニウム塩をラジカル重合禁止剤として使用することが好ましい。
 ラジカル重合禁止剤の好ましい含有量は、第1実施形態と同様である。
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a radical polymerization inhibitor.
Examples of the radical polymerization inhibitor include the thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0018 of Japanese Patent No. 4502784. Of these, phenothiazine, phenoxazine, or 4-methoxyphenol is preferable. Examples of other radical polymerization inhibitors include naphthylamine, cuprous chloride, nitrosophenylhydroxyamine aluminum salt, diphenylnitrosamine and the like. It is preferable to use a nitrosophenylhydroxylamine aluminum salt as a radical polymerization inhibitor so as not to impair the sensitivity of the negative photosensitive composition layer.
The preferred content of the radical polymerization inhibitor is the same as in the first embodiment.
 重合禁止剤は、1種単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上を併用してもよい。
 また、本発明の転写フィルムが本発明の効果を奏する上では、ネガ型感光性組成物層における重合禁止剤の含有量は、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、0.10~5.0質量%が好ましく、0.10~3.0質量%がより好ましく、0.10~2.0質量%が更に好ましい。
 また、本発明の転写フィルムが本発明の効果を奏する上では、重合禁止剤の含有量は、光重合開始剤の含有量に対して、5~15質量%であるのが好ましい。
The polymerization inhibitor may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
Further, in order for the transfer film of the present invention to exert the effect of the present invention, the content of the polymerization inhibitor in the negative type photosensitive composition layer is 0.10 with respect to the total mass of the negative type photosensitive composition layer. It is preferably ~ 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.10 to 3.0% by mass, still more preferably 0.10 to 2.0% by mass.
Further, in order for the transfer film of the present invention to exert the effect of the present invention, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 5 to 15% by mass with respect to the content of the photopolymerization initiator.
 また、重合禁止剤の含有量は、重合性化合物の全質量に対しては、0.005~5.0質量%が好ましく、0.01~3.0質量%がより好ましく、0.01~1.0質量%が更に好ましい。 The content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.005 to 5.0% by mass, more preferably 0.01 to 3.0% by mass, and 0.01 to 0.01% by mass with respect to the total mass of the polymerizable compound. 1.0% by mass is more preferable.
<色素>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、露光部及び非露光部の視認性、現像後のパターン視認性、及び解像性の観点から、発色時の波長範囲400~780nmにおける最大吸収波長が450nm以上であり、且つ、酸、塩基、又はラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素(「色素N」ともいう)を含むことも好ましい。色素Nを含むと、詳細なメカニズムは不明であるが、隣接する層(例えば水溶性樹脂層)との密着性が向上し、解像性により優れる。
<Dye>
The negative photosensitive composition layer has a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 to 780 nm at the time of color development from the viewpoints of visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, pattern visibility after development, and resolution. It is also preferable to include a dye (also referred to as "dye N") whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, a base, or a radical. When the dye N is contained, the detailed mechanism is unknown, but the adhesion to the adjacent layer (for example, a water-soluble resin layer) is improved, and the resolution is more excellent.
 本明細書において、色素が「酸、塩基、又はラジカルにより極大吸収波長が変化する」とは、発色状態にある色素が酸、塩基、又はラジカルにより消色する態様、消色状態にある色素が酸、塩基、又はラジカルにより発色する態様、及び発色状態にある色素が他の色相の発色状態に変化する態様のいずれの態様を意味してもよい。
 具体的には、色素Nは、露光により消色状態から変化して発色する化合物であってもよいし、露光により発色状態から変化して消色する化合物であってもよい。この場合、露光により酸、塩基、又はラジカルがネガ型感光性組成物層内において発生し作用することにより、発色又は消色の状態が変化する色素でもよく、酸、塩基、又はラジカルによりネガ型感光性組成物層内の状態(例えばpH)が変化することで発色又は消色の状態が変化する色素でもよい。また、露光を介さずに、酸、塩基、又はラジカルを刺激として直接受けて発色又は消色の状態が変化する色素でもよい。
In the present specification, the term "the maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, a base, or a radical" means that the dye in a color-developing state is decolorized by an acid, a base, or a radical, and the dye in a decolorized state is decolorized. It may mean any aspect of a mode in which a color is developed by an acid, a base, or a radical, and a mode in which a dye in a color-developing state changes to a color-developing state of another hue.
Specifically, the dye N may be a compound that changes its color from the decolorized state by exposure and may be a compound that changes its color from the decolorized state by exposure. In this case, it may be a dye whose color development or decolorization state changes due to the generation and action of an acid, a base, or a radical in the negative photosensitive composition layer by exposure, and the negative type by the acid, the base, or the radical. It may be a dye whose color development or decolorization state changes by changing the state (for example, pH) in the photosensitive composition layer. Further, it may be a dye that changes the state of color development or decolorization by directly receiving an acid, a base, or a radical as a stimulus without going through exposure.
 なかでも、露光部及び非露光部の視認性並びに解像性の観点から、色素Nは、酸又はラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素が好ましく、ラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素がより好ましい。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層がネガ型感光性組成物層である場合は、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、露光部及び非露光部の視認性並びに解像性の観点から、色素Nとしてラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素、及び光ラジカル重合開始剤の両者を含むことが好ましい。
 また、露光部及び非露光部の視認性の観点から、色素Nは、酸、塩基、又はラジカルにより発色する色素であることが好ましい。
Among them, from the viewpoint of visibility and resolution of the exposed and unexposed areas, the dye N is preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid or a radical, and more preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by a radical. ..
When the negative photosensitive composition layer is a negative photosensitive composition layer, the negative photosensitive composition layer is a radical as the dye N from the viewpoint of visibility and resolution of the exposed portion and the non-exposed portion. It is preferable to contain both a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength changes depending on the temperature and a photoradical polymerization initiator.
Further, from the viewpoint of visibility of the exposed portion and the non-exposed portion, the dye N is preferably a dye that develops color by an acid, a base, or a radical.
 色素Nの発色機構の例としては、ネガ型感光性組成物層に光ラジカル重合開始剤、光カチオン重合開始剤(光酸発生剤)、又は光塩基発生剤を添加して、露光後に光ラジカル重合開始剤、光カチオン重合開始剤、又は光塩基発生剤から発生するラジカル、酸、又は塩基によって、ラジカル反応性色素、酸反応性色素、又は塩基反応性色素(例えばロイコ色素)が発色する態様が挙げられる。 As an example of the color development mechanism of dye N, a photoradical polymerization initiator, a photocationic polymerization initiator (photoacid generator), or a photobase generator is added to a negative photosensitive composition layer, and a photoradical is applied after exposure. A mode in which a radical-reactive dye, an acid-reactive dye, or a base-reactive dye (for example, a leuco dye) is colored by a radical, acid, or base generated from a polymerization initiator, a photocationic polymerization initiator, or a photobase generator. Can be mentioned.
 色素Nは、露光部及び非露光部の視認性の観点から、発色時の波長範囲400~780nmにおける極大吸収波長が、550nm以上であることが好ましく、550~700nmであることがより好ましく、550~650nmであることが更に好ましい。
 また、色素Nは、発色時の波長範囲400~780nmにおける極大吸収波長を1つのみ有していてもよく、2つ以上有していてもよい。色素Nが発色時の波長範囲400~780nmにおける極大吸収波長を2つ以上有する場合は、2つ以上の極大吸収波長のうち吸光度が最も高い極大吸収波長が450nm以上であればよい。
From the viewpoint of visibility of the exposed and non-exposed areas, the dye N preferably has a maximum absorption wavelength of 550 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 to 780 nm at the time of color development, more preferably 550 to 700 nm. It is more preferably ~ 650 nm.
Further, the dye N may have only one maximum absorption wavelength in the wavelength range of 400 to 780 nm at the time of color development, or may have two or more. When the dye N has two or more maximum absorption wavelengths in the wavelength range of 400 to 780 nm at the time of color development, the maximum absorption wavelength having the highest absorbance among the two or more maximum absorption wavelengths may be 450 nm or more.
 色素Nの極大吸収波長は、大気雰囲気下で、分光光度計:UV3100((株)島津製作所製)を用いて、400~780nmの範囲で色素Nを含む溶液(液温25℃)の透過スペクトルを測定し、光の強度が極小となる波長(極大吸収波長)を検出することにより、得られる。 The maximum absorption wavelength of the dye N is the transmission spectrum of the solution containing the dye N (liquid temperature 25 ° C.) in the range of 400 to 780 nm using a spectrophotometer: UV3100 (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation) in an atmospheric atmosphere. Is measured, and the wavelength at which the light intensity becomes the minimum (maximum absorption wavelength) is detected.
 露光により発色又は消色する色素としては、例えば、ロイコ化合物が挙げられる。
 露光により消色する色素としては、例えば、ロイコ化合物、ジアリールメタン系色素、オキザジン系色素、キサンテン系色素、イミノナフトキノン系色素、アゾメチン系色素、及びアントラキノン系色素が挙げられる。
 色素Nとしては、露光部及び非露光部の視認性の観点から、ロイコ化合物が好ましい。
Examples of the dye that develops or decolorizes by exposure include leuco compounds.
Examples of the dye that is decolorized by exposure include a leuco compound, a diarylmethane dye, an oxadin dye, a xanthene dye, an iminonaphthoquinone dye, an azomethin dye, and an anthraquinone dye.
As the dye N, a leuco compound is preferable from the viewpoint of visibility of the exposed portion and the non-exposed portion.
 ロイコ化合物としては、例えば、トリアリールメタン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(トリアリールメタン系色素)、スピロピラン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(スピロピラン系色素)、フルオラン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(フルオラン系色素)、ジアリールメタン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(ジアリールメタン系色素)、ローダミンラクタム骨格を有するロイコ化合物(ローダミンラクタム系色素)、インドリルフタリド骨格を有するロイコ化合物(インドリルフタリド系色素)、及びロイコオーラミン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(ロイコオーラミン系色素)が挙げられる。
 なかでも、トリアリールメタン系色素又はフルオラン系色素が好ましく、トリフェニルメタン骨格を有するロイコ化合物(トリフェニルメタン系色素)又はフルオラン系色素がより好ましい。
Examples of the leuco compound include a leuco compound having a triarylmethane skeleton (triarylmethane dye), a leuco compound having a spiropyran skeleton (spiropylan dye), a leuco compound having a fluorane skeleton (fluorane dye), and a diarylmethane skeleton. It has a leuco compound (diarylmethane dye) having a leuco compound (diarylmethane dye), a leuco compound having a rhodamine lactam skeleton (lodamine lactam dye), a leuco compound having an indrill phthalide skeleton (indrill phthalide dye), and a leuco auramine skeleton. Leuco compounds (leuco-auramine-based dyes) can be mentioned.
Of these, triarylmethane-based dyes or fluorane-based dyes are preferable, and leuco compounds (triphenylmethane-based dyes) or fluorane-based dyes having a triphenylmethane skeleton are more preferable.
 ロイコ化合物としては、露光部及び非露光部の視認性の観点から、ラクトン環、スルチン環、又はスルトン環を有することが好ましい。これにより、ロイコ化合物が有するラクトン環、スルチン環、又はスルトン環を、光ラジカル重合開始剤から発生するラジカル又は光カチオン重合開始剤から発生する酸と反応させて、ロイコ化合物を閉環状態に変化させて消色させるか、又はロイコ化合物を開環状態に変化させて発色させることができる。ロイコ化合物としては、ラクトン環、スルチン環、又はスルトン環を有し、ラジカル、又は酸によりラクトン環、スルチン環又はスルトン環が開環して発色する化合物が好ましく、ラクトン環を有し、ラジカル又は酸によりラクトン環が開環して発色する化合物がより好ましい。 The leuco compound preferably has a lactone ring, a surujin ring, or a sultone ring from the viewpoint of visibility of the exposed portion and the non-exposed portion. As a result, the lactone ring, sultone ring, or sultone ring of the leuco compound is reacted with the radical generated from the photoradical polymerization initiator or the acid generated from the photocationic polymerization initiator to change the leuco compound into a closed ring state. The color can be decolorized, or the radical compound can be changed to an open ring state to develop a color. As the leuco compound, a compound having a lactone ring, a sultone ring, or a sultone ring, and the lactone ring, the sultone ring, or the sultone ring is opened by a radical or an acid to develop color is preferable, and the lactone ring has a radical or a radical. A compound in which the lactone ring is opened by an acid to develop a color is more preferable.
 色素Nとしては、例えば、以下の染料及びロイコ化合物が挙げられる。
 色素Nのうち染料の具体例としては、ブリリアントグリーン、エチルバイオレット、メチルグリーン、クリスタルバイオレット、ベイシックフクシン、メチルバイオレット2B、キナルジンレッド、ローズベンガル、メタニルイエロー、チモールスルホフタレイン、キシレノールブルー、メチルオレンジ、パラメチルレッド、コンゴーフレッド、ベンゾプルプリン4B、α-ナフチルレッド、ナイルブルー2B、ナイルブルーA、メチルバイオレット、マラカイトグリーン、パラフクシン、ビクトリアピュアブルー-ナフタレンスルホン酸塩、ビクトリアピュアブルーBOH(保土谷化学工業社製)、オイルブルー#603(オリヱント化学工業社製)、オイルピンク#312(オリヱント化学工業社製)、オイルレッド5B(オリヱント化学工業社製)、オイルスカーレット#308(オリヱント化学工業社製)、オイルレッドOG(オリヱント化学工業社製)、オイルレッドRR(オリヱント化学工業社製)、オイルグリーン#502(オリヱント化学工業社製)、スピロンレッドBEHスペシャル(保土谷化学工業社製)、m-クレゾールパープル、クレゾールレッド、ローダミンB、ローダミン6G、スルホローダミンB、オーラミン、4-p-ジエチルアミノフェニルイミノナフトキノン、2-カルボキシアニリノ-4-p-ジエチルアミノフェニルイミノナフトキノン、2-カルボキシステアリルアミノ-4-p-N,N-ビス(ヒドロキシエチル)アミノ-フェニルイミノナフトキノン、1-フェニル-3-メチル-4-p-ジエチルアミノフェニルイミノ-5-ピラゾロン、及び1-β-ナフチル-4-p-ジエチルアミノフェニルイミノ-5-ピラゾロンが挙げられる。
Examples of the dye N include the following dyes and leuco compounds.
Specific examples of the dyes among the dyes N include Brilliant Green, Ethyl Violet, Methyl Green, Crystal Violet, Basic Fuxin, Methyl Violet 2B, Kinaldine Red, Rose Bengal, Metanyl Yellow, Timor Sulfophthalein, Xylenol Blue, and Methyl. Orange, Paramethyl Red, Congofred, Benzopurpurin 4B, α-Naphtyl Red, Nile Blue 2B, Nile Blue A, Methyl Violet, Malakite Green, Parafuxin, Victoria Pure Blue-Naphthalene Sulfate, Victoria Pure Blue BOH Tsuchiya Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Blue # 603 (Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Pink # 312 (Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Red 5B (Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Scarlet # 308 (Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) , Oil Red OG (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Red RR (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Oil Green # 502 (manufactured by Orient Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Spiron Red BEH Special (manufactured by Hodoya Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), m-Cresol Purple, Cresol Red, Rhodamine B, Rhodamine 6G, Sulfolodamine B, Auramine, 4-p-diethylaminophenyliminonaphthoquinone, 2-carboxyanilino-4-p-diethylaminophenyliminonaphthoquinone, 2-carboxystearylamino- 4-p-N, N-bis (hydroxyethyl) amino-phenyliminonaphthoquinone, 1-phenyl-3-methyl-4-p-diethylaminophenylimino-5-pyrazolone, and 1-β-naphthyl-4-p- Diethylaminophenylimino-5-pyrazolone can be mentioned.
 色素Nのうちロイコ化合物の具体例としては、p,p’,p”-ヘキサメチルトリアミノトリフェニルメタン(ロイコクリスタルバイオレット)、Pergascript Blue SRB(チバガイギー社製)、クリスタルバイオレットラクトン、マラカイトグリーンラクトン、ベンゾイルロイコメチレンブルー、2-(N-フェニル-N-メチルアミノ)-6-(N-p-トリル-N-エチル)アミノフルオラン、2-アニリノ-3-メチル-6-(N-エチル-p-トルイジノ)フルオラン、3,6-ジメトキシフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-5-メチル-7-(N,N-ジベンジルアミノ)フルオラン、3-(N-シクロヘキシル-N-メチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-アニリノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-アニリノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-キシリジノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-クロロフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-6-メトキシ-7-アミノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-7-(4-クロロアニリノ)フルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-7-クロロフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-7-ベンジルアミノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジエチルアミノ)-7,8-ベンゾフロオラン、3-(N,N-ジブチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-アニリノフルオラン、3-(N,N-ジブチルアミノ)-6-メチル-7-キシリジノフルオラン、3-ピペリジノ-6-メチル-7-アニリノフルオラン、3-ピロリジノ-6-メチル-7-アニリノフルオラン、3,3-ビス(1-エチル-2-メチルインドール-3-イル)フタリド、3,3-ビス(1-n-ブチル-2-メチルインドール-3-イル)フタリド、3,3-ビス(p-ジメチルアミノフェニル)-6-ジメチルアミノフタリド、3-(4-ジエチルアミノ-2-エトキシフェニル)-3-(1-エチル-2-メチルインドール-3-イル)-4-ザフタリド、3-(4-ジエチルアミノフェニル)-3-(1-エチル-2-メチルインドール-3-イル)フタリド、及び3’,6’-ビス(ジフェニルアミノ)スピロイソベンゾフラン-1(3H),9’-[9H]キサンテン-3-オンが挙げられる。 Specific examples of the leuco compound among the dyes N include p, p', p "-hexamethyltriaminotriphenylmethane (leucocrystal violet), Pergascript Blue SRB (manufactured by Ciba Geigy), crystal violet lactone, and malakite green lactone. Benzoyl leucomethylene blue, 2- (N-phenyl-N-methylamino) -6- (N-p-trill-N-ethyl) aminofluorane, 2-anilino-3-methyl-6- (N-ethyl-p) -Truizino) fluorane, 3,6-dimethoxyfluorane, 3- (N, N-diethylamino) -5-methyl-7- (N, N-dibenzylamino) fluorane, 3- (N-cyclohexyl-N-methyl) Amino) -6-methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3- (N, N-diethylamino) -6-methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3- (N, N-diethylamino) -6-methyl-7 -Xylidinofluorane, 3- (N, N-diethylamino) -6-methyl-7-chlorofluorane, 3- (N, N-diethylamino) -6-methoxy-7-aminofluorane, 3- (N) , N-diethylamino) -7- (4-chloroanilino) fluorane, 3- (N, N-diethylamino) -7-chlorofluorane, 3- (N, N-diethylamino) -7-benzylaminofluorane, 3- (N, N-diethylamino) -7,8-benzofluorolane, 3- (N, N-dibutylamino) -6-methyl-7-anilinofluorane, 3- (N, N-dibutylamino) -6 -Methyl-7-xylidinofluolane, 3-piperidino-6-methyl-7-anilinofluolane, 3-pyrrolidino-6-methyl-7-anilinofluolane, 3,3-bis (1-ethyl- 2-Methylindole-3-yl) phthalide, 3,3-bis (1-n-butyl-2-methylindole-3-yl) phthalide, 3,3-bis (p-dimethylaminophenyl) -6-dimethyl Aminophthalide, 3- (4-diethylamino-2-ethoxyphenyl) -3- (1-ethyl-2-methylindole-3-yl) -4-zaphthalide, 3- (4-diethylaminophenyl) -3-( 1-Ethyl-2-methylindol-3-yl) phthalide, and 3', 6'-bis (diphenylamino) spirisobenzofuran-1 (3H), 9'-[9H] xanthene-3-one can be mentioned. ..
 色素Nは、露光部及び非露光部の視認性、現像後のパターン視認性、及び解像性の観点から、ラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素であることが好ましく、ラジカルにより発色する色素であることがより好ましい。
 色素Nとしては、ロイコクリスタルバイオレット、クリスタルバイオレットラクトン、ブリリアントグリーン、又はビクトリアピュアブルー-ナフタレンスルホン酸塩が好ましい。
The dye N is preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by radicals from the viewpoints of visibility of exposed and unexposed areas, pattern visibility after development, and resolution, and is a dye that develops color by radicals. It is more preferable to have.
As the dye N, leuco crystal violet, crystal violet lactone, brilliant green, or Victoria pure blue-naphthalene sulfonate is preferable.
 色素Nは、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 色素Nの含有量は、露光部及び非露光部の視認性、現像後のパターン視認性、及び解像性の観点から、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、0.1質量%以上が好ましく、0.1~10質量%がより好ましく、0.1~5質量%が更に好ましく、0.1~1質量%が特に好ましい。
The dye N may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the dye N is 0.1 mass with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer from the viewpoints of visibility of the exposed portion and the non-exposed portion, pattern visibility after development, and resolution. % Or more is preferable, 0.1 to 10% by mass is more preferable, 0.1 to 5% by mass is further preferable, and 0.1 to 1% by mass is particularly preferable.
 色素Nの含有量は、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量中に含まれる色素Nの全てを発色状態にした場合の色素の含有量を意味する。以下に、ラジカルにより発色する色素を例に、色素Nの含有量の定量方法を説明する。
 メチルエチルケトン100mLに、色素0.001g及び0.01gを溶かした溶液を調製する。得られた各溶液に、光ラジカル重合開始剤Irgacure OXE01(商品名、BASFジャパン株式会社)を加え、365nmの光を照射することによりラジカルを発生させ、全ての色素を発色状態にする。その後、大気雰囲気下で、分光光度計(UV3100、(株)島津製作所製)を用いて、液温が25℃である各溶液の吸光度を測定し、検量線を作成する。
 次に、色素に代えてネガ型感光性組成物層3gをメチルエチルケトンに溶かすこと以外は上記と同様の方法で、色素を全て発色させた溶液の吸光度を測定する。得られたネガ型感光性組成物層を含む溶液の吸光度から、検量線に基づいてネガ型感光性組成物層に含まれる色素の含有量を算出する。
 なお、ネガ型感光性組成物層3gとは、ネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物中の全固形分の3gと同様である。
The content of the dye N means the content of the dye when all of the dye N contained in the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer is in a colored state. Hereinafter, a method for quantifying the content of dye N will be described by taking a dye that develops color by radicals as an example.
A solution prepared by dissolving 0.001 g and 0.01 g of the dye in 100 mL of methyl ethyl ketone is prepared. Irradicure OXE01 (trade name, BASF Japan, Inc.), a photoradical polymerization initiator, is added to each of the obtained solutions, and radicals are generated by irradiating with light of 365 nm to bring all the dyes into a colored state. Then, in an atmospheric atmosphere, the absorbance of each solution having a liquid temperature of 25 ° C. is measured using a spectrophotometer (UV3100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation), and a calibration curve is prepared.
Next, the absorbance of the solution in which all the dyes are colored is measured by the same method as above except that 3 g of the negative photosensitive composition layer is dissolved in methyl ethyl ketone instead of the dye. From the absorbance of the obtained solution containing the negative photosensitive composition layer, the content of the dye contained in the negative photosensitive composition layer is calculated based on the calibration curve.
The negative type photosensitive composition layer 3 g is the same as 3 g of the total solid content in the composition for forming the negative type photosensitive composition layer.
<熱架橋性化合物>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層がネガ型感光性組成物層である場合、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、熱架橋性化合物を含むことが好ましい。なお、本明細書においては、後述するエチレン性不飽和基を有する熱架橋性化合物は、重合性化合物としては扱わず、熱架橋性化合物として扱うものとする。
 熱架橋性化合物としては、メチロール化合物、及びブロックイソシアネート化合物が挙げられる。なかでも、得られる硬化膜の強度、及び得られる未硬化膜の粘着性の観点から、ブロックイソシアネート化合物が好ましい。
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物は、ヒドロキシ基及びカルボキシ基と反応するため、例えば、樹脂及び/又は重合性化合物等が、ヒドロキシ基及びカルボキシ基の少なくとも一方を有する場合には、形成される膜の親水性が下がり、ネガ型感光性組成物層を硬化した膜を保護膜として使用する場合の機能が強化される傾向がある。
 なお、ブロックイソシアネート化合物とは、「イソシアネートのイソシアネート基をブロック剤で保護(いわゆる、マスク)した構造を有する化合物」を指す。
<Thermal crosslinkable compound>
When the negative photosensitive composition layer is a negative photosensitive composition layer, it is preferable to contain a heat-crosslinkable compound from the viewpoint of the strength of the obtained cured film and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film. In this specification, the heat-crosslinkable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group, which will be described later, is not treated as a polymerizable compound, but is treated as a heat-crosslinkable compound.
Examples of the heat-crosslinkable compound include a methylol compound and a blocked isocyanate compound. Of these, a blocked isocyanate compound is preferable from the viewpoint of the strength of the obtained cured film and the adhesiveness of the obtained uncured film.
Since the blocked isocyanate compound reacts with a hydroxy group and a carboxy group, for example, when the resin and / or the polymerizable compound has at least one of the hydroxy group and the carboxy group, the hydrophilicity of the formed film decreases. When a film obtained by curing a negative photosensitive composition layer is used as a protective film, the function tends to be enhanced.
The blocked isocyanate compound refers to "a compound having a structure in which the isocyanate group of isocyanate is protected (so-called masked) with a blocking agent".
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物の解離温度は、特に制限されないが、100~160℃が好ましく、130~150℃がより好ましい。
 ブロックイソシアネートの解離温度とは、「示差走査熱量計を用いて、DSC(Differential scanning calorimetry)分析にて測定した場合における、ブロックイソシアネートの脱保護反応に伴う吸熱ピークの温度」を意味する。
 示差走査熱量計としては、例えば、セイコーインスツルメンツ社製の示差走査熱量計(型式:DSC6200)を好適に使用できる。但し、示差走査熱量計は、これに限定されない。
The dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate compound is not particularly limited, but is preferably 100 to 160 ° C, more preferably 130 to 150 ° C.
The dissociation temperature of the blocked isocyanate means "the temperature of the endothermic peak associated with the deprotection reaction of the blocked isocyanate when measured by DSC (Differential scanning calorimetry) analysis using a differential scanning calorimeter".
As the differential scanning calorimeter, for example, a differential scanning calorimeter (model: DSC6200) manufactured by Seiko Instruments Co., Ltd. can be preferably used. However, the differential scanning calorimeter is not limited to this.
 解離温度が100~160℃であるブロック剤としては、活性メチレン化合物〔マロン酸ジエステル(マロン酸ジメチル、マロン酸ジエチル、マロン酸ジn-ブチル、マロン酸ジ2-エチルヘキシル等)〕、オキシム化合物(ホルムアルドオキシム、アセトアルドオキシム、アセトオキシム、メチルエチルケトオキシム、及びシクロヘキサノンオキシム等の分子内に-C(=N-OH)-で表される構造を有する化合物)が挙げられる。
 これらのなかでも、解離温度が100~160℃であるブロック剤としては、例えば、保存安定性の観点から、オキシム化合物から選ばれる少なくとも1種が好ましい。
Examples of the blocking agent having a dissociation temperature of 100 to 160 ° C. include an active methylene compound [malonic acid diester (dimethyl malonate, diethyl malonate, din-butyl malonate, di2-ethylhexyl malonic acid, etc.)] and an oxime compound ( Examples thereof include compounds having a structure represented by -C (= N-OH) -in the molecule such as formaldoxime, acetaldoxime, acetoxime, methylethylketooxime, and cyclohexanone oxime).
Among these, as the blocking agent having a dissociation temperature of 100 to 160 ° C., for example, at least one selected from oxime compounds is preferable from the viewpoint of storage stability.
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物は、例えば、膜の脆性改良、被転写体との密着力向上等の観点から、イソシアヌレート構造を有することが好ましい。
 イソシアヌレート構造を有するブロックイソシアネート化合物は、例えば、ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネートをイソシアヌレート化して保護することにより得られる。
 イソシアヌレート構造を有するブロックイソシアネート化合物のなかでも、オキシム化合物をブロック剤として用いたオキシム構造を有する化合物が、オキシム構造を有さない化合物よりも解離温度を好ましい範囲にしやすく、且つ、現像残渣を少なくしやすいという観点から好ましい。
The blocked isocyanate compound preferably has an isocyanurate structure, for example, from the viewpoint of improving the brittleness of the membrane and improving the adhesion to the transferred body.
The blocked isocyanate compound having an isocyanurate structure can be obtained, for example, by subjecting hexamethylene diisocyanate to isocyanurate to protect it.
Among the blocked isocyanate compounds having an isocyanurate structure, a compound having an oxime structure using an oxime compound as a blocking agent is more likely to have a dissociation temperature in a preferable range than a compound having no oxime structure, and has less development residue. It is preferable from the viewpoint of easy operation.
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物は、重合性基を有していてもよい。
 重合性基としては、特に制限はなく、公知の重合性基を用いることができ、ラジカル重合性基が好ましい。
 重合性基としては、(メタ)アクリロキシ基、(メタ)アクリルアミド基、及びスチリル基等のエチレン性不飽和基、並びに、グリシジル基等のエポキシ基を有する基が挙げられる。
 なかでも、重合性基としては、エチレン性不飽和基が好ましく、(メタ)アクリロキシ基がより好ましく、アクリロキシ基が更に好ましい。
The blocked isocyanate compound may have a polymerizable group.
The polymerizable group is not particularly limited, and a known polymerizable group can be used, and a radically polymerizable group is preferable.
Examples of the polymerizable group include an ethylenically unsaturated group such as a (meth) acryloxy group, a (meth) acrylamide group, and a styryl group, and a group having an epoxy group such as a glycidyl group.
Among them, as the polymerizable group, an ethylenically unsaturated group is preferable, a (meth) acryloxy group is more preferable, and an acryloxy group is further preferable.
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物としては、市販品を使用できる。
 ブロックイソシアネート化合物の市販品の例としては、カレンズ(登録商標) AOI-BM、カレンズ(登録商標) MOI-BM、カレンズ(登録商標) MOI-BP等(以上、昭和電工社製)、ブロック型のデュラネートシリーズ(例えば、デュラネート(登録商標) TPA-B80E、デュラネート(登録商標) WT32-B75P等、旭化成ケミカルズ社製)が挙げられる。
 また、ブロックイソシアネート化合物として、下記の構造の化合物を用いることもできる。
As the blocked isocyanate compound, a commercially available product can be used.
Examples of commercially available blocked isocyanate compounds include Karenz (registered trademark) AOI-BM, Karenz (registered trademark) MOI-BM, Karenz (registered trademark) MOI-BP (all manufactured by Showa Denko KK), and block type. Examples thereof include the Duranate series (for example, Duranate (registered trademark) TPA-B80E, Duranate (registered trademark) WT32-B75P, etc., manufactured by Asahi Kasei Chemicals Co., Ltd.).
Further, as the blocked isocyanate compound, a compound having the following structure can also be used.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000025
 熱架橋性化合物は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層が熱架橋性化合物を含む場合、熱架橋性化合物の含有量は、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、1~50質量%が好ましく、5~30質量%がより好ましい。
The heat-crosslinkable compound may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the negative-type photosensitive composition layer contains a heat-crosslinkable compound, the content of the heat-crosslinkable compound is preferably 1 to 50% by mass, preferably 5 to 30% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative-type photosensitive composition layer. % By mass is more preferred.
<その他の添加剤>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、上記成分以外に、必要に応じて公知の添加剤を含んでもよい。
 添加剤としては、例えば、増感剤、可塑剤、ヘテロ環状化合物(トリアゾール等)、ベンゾトリアゾール類、カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール類、ピリジン類(イソニコチンアミド等)、プリン塩基(アデニン等)、及び界面活性剤が挙げられる。
 各添加剤は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
<Other additives>
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain known additives in addition to the above components, if necessary.
Examples of the additive include sensitizers, plasticizers, heterocyclic compounds (triazole and the like), benzotriazoles, carboxybenzotriazoles, pyridines (isonicotinamide and the like), purine bases (adenine and the like), and surfactants. Agents are mentioned.
Each additive may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
 ベンゾトリアゾール類としては、例えば、1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、1-クロロ-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、ビス(N-2-エチルヘキシル)アミノメチレン-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、ビス(N-2-エチルヘキシル)アミノメチレン-1,2,3-トリルトリアゾール、及びビス(N-2-ヒドロキシエチル)アミノメチレン-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール等が挙げられる。 Examples of benzotriazoles include 1,2,3-benzotriazole, 1-chloro-1,2,3-benzotriazole, bis (N-2-ethylhexyl) aminomethylene-1,2,3-benzotriazole, and the like. Examples thereof include bis (N-2-ethylhexyl) aminomethylene-1,2,3-tolyltriazole and bis (N-2-hydroxyethyl) aminomethylene-1,2,3-benzotriazole.
 カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール類としては、例えば、4-カルボキシ-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、5-カルボキシ-1,2,3-ベンゾトリアゾール、N-(N,N-ジ-2-エチルヘキシル)アミノメチレンカルボキシベンゾトリアゾール、N-(N,N-ジ-2-ヒドロキシエチル)アミノメチレンカルボキシベンゾトリアゾール、及びN-(N,N-ジ-2-エチルヘキシル)アミノエチレンカルボキシベンゾトリアゾール等が挙げられる。カルボキシベンゾトリアゾール類としては、例えば、CBT-1(城北化学工業株式会社、商品名)等の市販品を使用できる。 Examples of carboxybenzotriazoles include 4-carboxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole, 5-carboxy-1,2,3-benzotriazole, and N- (N, N-di-2-ethylhexyl) aminomethylene. Examples thereof include carboxybenzotriazole, N- (N, N-di-2-hydroxyethyl) aminomethylenecarboxybenzotriazole, N- (N, N-di-2-ethylhexyl) aminoethylenecarboxybenzotriazole and the like. As the carboxybenzotriazoles, for example, a commercially available product such as CBT-1 (Johoku Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., trade name) can be used.
 ベンゾトリアゾ-ル類、及びカルボキシベンゾトリアゾ-ル類の合計含有量は、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、0.01~3質量%が好ましく、0.05~1質量%がより好ましい。含有量が0.01質量%以上の場合、ネガ型感光性組成物層の保存安定性がより優れる。一方、含有量が3質量%以下である場合、感度の維持及び染料の脱色を抑制がより優れる。 The total content of the benzotriazols and the carboxybenzotriazols is preferably 0.01 to 3% by mass, preferably 0.05 to 1% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer. Is more preferable. When the content is 0.01% by mass or more, the storage stability of the negative photosensitive composition layer is more excellent. On the other hand, when the content is 3% by mass or less, the maintenance of sensitivity and the suppression of dye decolorization are more excellent.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、増感剤を含んでもよい。
 増感剤は、特に制限されず、公知の増感剤、染料及び顔料を使用できる。増感剤としては、例えば、ジアルキルアミノベンゾフェノン化合物、ピラゾリン化合物、アントラセン化合物、クマリン化合物、キサントン化合物、チオキサントン化合物、アクリドン化合物、オキサゾール化合物、ベンゾオキサゾール化合物、チアゾール化合物、ベンゾチアゾール化合物、トリアゾール化合物(例えば、1,2,4-トリアゾール)、スチルベン化合物、トリアジン化合物、チオフェン化合物、ナフタルイミド化合物、トリアリールアミン化合物、及びアミノアクリジン化合物が挙げられる。
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a sensitizer.
The sensitizer is not particularly limited, and known sensitizers, dyes and pigments can be used. Examples of the sensitizer include dialkylaminobenzophenone compounds, pyrazoline compounds, anthracene compounds, coumarin compounds, xanthone compounds, thioxanthone compounds, acridone compounds, oxazole compounds, benzoxazole compounds, thiazole compounds, benzothiazole compounds, and triazole compounds (for example). 1,2,4-triazole), stilben compounds, triazine compounds, thiophene compounds, naphthalimide compounds, triarylamine compounds, and aminoacridin compounds.
 増感剤は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層が増感剤を含む場合、増感剤の含有量は、目的により適宜選択できるが、光源に対する感度の向上、及び重合速度と連鎖移動のバランスによる硬化速度の向上の観点から、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、0.01~5質量%が好ましく、0.05~1質量%がより好ましい。
The sensitizer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
When the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a sensitizer, the content of the sensitizer can be appropriately selected depending on the purpose, but the sensitivity to the light source is improved and the curing rate is improved by the balance between the polymerization rate and the chain transfer. From the viewpoint, 0.01 to 5% by mass is preferable, and 0.05 to 1% by mass is more preferable with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、可塑剤及びヘテロ環状化合物からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種を含んでもよい。
 可塑剤及びヘテロ環状化合物としては、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0097~0103及び0111~0118に記載された化合物が挙げられる。ネガ型感光性組成物層は、界面活性剤を含むことが好ましい。界面活性剤としては、第1実施形態の界面活性剤と同じものが挙げられ、好適態様も同じである。
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain at least one selected from the group consisting of a plasticizer and a heterocyclic compound.
Examples of the plasticizer and the heterocyclic compound include the compounds described in paragraphs 097 to 0103 and 0111 to 0118 of International Publication No. 2018/179640. The negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains a surfactant. Examples of the surfactant include the same surfactants as those of the first embodiment, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
 また、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、金属酸化物粒子、酸化防止剤、分散剤、酸増殖剤、現像促進剤、導電性繊維、紫外線吸収剤、増粘剤、架橋剤、及び有機又は無機の沈殿防止剤等の公知の添加剤を更に含んでもよい。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層に含まれる添加剤については特開2014-085643号公報の段落0165~0184に記載されており、この公報の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
In addition, the negative photosensitive composition layer includes metal oxide particles, antioxidants, dispersants, acid growth agents, development accelerators, conductive fibers, ultraviolet absorbers, thickeners, cross-linking agents, and organic or inorganic materials. It may further contain known additives such as anti-precipitation agents.
Additives contained in the negative photosensitive composition layer are described in paragraphs 0165 to 0184 of JP-A-2014-085643, and the contents of this publication are incorporated in the present specification.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層における水の含有量は、信頼性及びラミネート性を向上させる観点から、0.01~1.0質量%が好ましく、0.05~0.5質量%がより好ましい。 The water content in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 0.01 to 1.0% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 0.5% by mass, from the viewpoint of improving reliability and laminateability.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層の層厚(膜厚)は、一般的には0.1~300μmであり、0.2~100μmが好ましく、0.5~50μmがより好ましく、0.5~15μmが更に好ましく、0.5~10μmが特に好ましく、0.5~8μmが最も好ましい。これにより、ネガ型感光性組成物層の現像性が向上し、解像性を向上させることができる。
 また、一態様において、0.5~5μmが好ましく、0.5~4μmがより好ましく、0.5~3μmが更に好ましい。
The layer thickness (thickness) of the negative photosensitive composition layer is generally 0.1 to 300 μm, preferably 0.2 to 100 μm, more preferably 0.5 to 50 μm, and 0.5 to 15 μm. Is more preferable, 0.5 to 10 μm is particularly preferable, and 0.5 to 8 μm is most preferable. As a result, the developability of the negative photosensitive composition layer can be improved, and the resolution can be improved.
Further, in one embodiment, 0.5 to 5 μm is preferable, 0.5 to 4 μm is more preferable, and 0.5 to 3 μm is further preferable.
 また、密着性により優れる観点から、ネガ型感光性組成物層の波長365nmの光の透過率は、10%以上が好ましく、30%以上がより好ましく、50%以上が更に好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、99.9%以下が好ましい。 Further, from the viewpoint of excellent adhesion, the transmittance of light having a wavelength of 365 nm in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 10% or more, more preferably 30% or more, still more preferably 50% or more. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 99.9% or less.
<不純物等>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、所定量の不純物を含んでいてもよい。
 不純物の具体例としては、ナトリウム、カリウム、マグネシウム、カルシウム、鉄、マンガン、銅、アルミニウム、チタン、クロム、コバルト、ニッケル、亜鉛、スズ、ハロゲン及びこれらのイオンが挙げられる。なかでも、ハロゲン化物イオン、ナトリウムイオン、及びカリウムイオンは不純物として混入し易いため、下記の含有量にすることが好ましい。
<Impurities, etc.>
The negative photosensitive composition layer may contain a predetermined amount of impurities.
Specific examples of impurities include sodium, potassium, magnesium, calcium, iron, manganese, copper, aluminum, titanium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, zinc, tin, halogen and ions thereof. Of these, halide ions, sodium ions, and potassium ions are likely to be mixed as impurities, so the following content is preferable.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層における不純物の含有量は、質量基準で、80ppm以下が好ましく、10ppm以下がより好ましく、2ppm以下が更に好ましい。不純物の含有量は、質量基準で、1ppb以上とすることができ、0.1ppm以上としてもよい。 The content of impurities in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 80 ppm or less, more preferably 10 ppm or less, still more preferably 2 ppm or less on a mass basis. The content of impurities may be 1 ppb or more, or 0.1 ppm or more, on a mass basis.
 不純物を上記範囲にする方法としては、組成物の原料として不純物の含有量が少ないものを選択すること、ネガ型感光性組成物層の作製時に不純物の混入を防ぐこと、及び洗浄して除去することが挙げられる。このような方法により、不純物量を上記範囲内とすることができる。 As a method for keeping impurities in the above range, select a composition having a low content of impurities as a raw material, prevent impurities from being mixed in when producing a negative photosensitive composition layer, and wash and remove the impurities. Can be mentioned. By such a method, the amount of impurities can be kept within the above range.
 不純物は、例えば、ICP(Inductively Coupled Plasma)発光分光分析法、原子吸光分光法、及びイオンクロマトグラフィー法等の公知の方法で定量できる。 The impurities can be quantified by known methods such as ICP (Inductively Coupled Plasma) emission spectroscopy, atomic absorption spectroscopy, and ion chromatography.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層における、ベンゼン、ホルムアルデヒド、トリクロロエチレン、1,3-ブタジエン、四塩化炭素、クロロホルム、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、及びヘキサン等の化合物の含有量は、少ないことが好ましい。これら化合物のネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対する含有量としては、質量基準で、100ppm以下が好ましく、20ppm以下がより好ましく、4ppm以下が更に好ましい。
 下限は、質量基準で、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、10ppb以上とすることができ、100ppb以上とすることができる。これら化合物は、上記の金属の不純物と同様の方法で含有量を抑制できる。また、公知の測定法により定量できる。
The content of compounds such as benzene, formaldehyde, trichlorethylene, 1,3-butadiene, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, N, N-dimethylformamide, N, N-dimethylacetamide, and hexane in the negative photosensitive composition layer is , Preferably less. The content of these compounds with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 100 ppm or less, more preferably 20 ppm or less, still more preferably 4 ppm or less on a mass basis.
The lower limit can be 10 ppb or more and 100 ppb or more with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer on a mass basis. The content of these compounds can be suppressed in the same manner as the above-mentioned metal impurities. Further, it can be quantified by a known measurement method.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層における水の含有量は、信頼性及びラミネート性を向上させる観点から、0.01~1.0質量%が好ましく、0.05~0.5質量%がより好ましい。 The water content in the negative photosensitive composition layer is preferably 0.01 to 1.0% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 0.5% by mass, from the viewpoint of improving reliability and laminateability.
<顔料>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層は、顔料を含む着色樹脂層となっていてもよい。
 近年の電子機器が有する液晶表示窓には、液晶表示窓を保護するために、透明なガラス基板等の裏面周縁部に黒色の枠状遮光層が形成されたカバーガラスが取り付けられている場合がある。このような遮光層を形成するために着色樹脂層が使用され得る。
 顔料としては、所望とする色相に合わせて適宜選択すればよく、黒色顔料、白色顔料、黒色及び白色以外の有彩色の顔料の中から選択できる。なかでも、黒色系のパターンを形成する場合には、顔料として黒色顔料が好適に選択される。
<Pigment>
The negative photosensitive composition layer may be a colored resin layer containing a pigment.
In recent years, the liquid crystal display window of an electronic device may have a cover glass having a black frame-shaped light-shielding layer formed on the peripheral edge of the back surface of a transparent glass substrate or the like to protect the liquid crystal display window. be. A colored resin layer can be used to form such a light-shielding layer.
The pigment may be appropriately selected according to the desired hue, and can be selected from black pigments, white pigments, and chromatic pigments other than black and white. Among them, when forming a black pattern, a black pigment is preferably selected as the pigment.
 黒色顔料としては、本発明の効果を損なわない範囲であれば、公知の黒色顔料(有機顔料又は無機顔料等)を適宜選択することができる。なかでも、光学濃度の観点から、黒色顔料としては、例えば、カーボンブラック、酸化チタン、チタンカーバイド、酸化鉄、酸化チタン、及び黒鉛等が好適に挙げられ、特にカーボンブラックは好ましい。カーボンブラックとしては、表面抵抗の観点から、表面の少なくとも一部が樹脂で被覆されたカーボンブラックが好ましい。 As the black pigment, a known black pigment (organic pigment, inorganic pigment, etc.) can be appropriately selected as long as the effect of the present invention is not impaired. Among them, as the black pigment, for example, carbon black, titanium oxide, titanium carbide, iron oxide, titanium oxide, graphite and the like are preferably mentioned from the viewpoint of optical density, and carbon black is particularly preferable. As the carbon black, from the viewpoint of surface resistance, carbon black having at least a part of the surface coated with a resin is preferable.
 黒色顔料の粒子径は、分散安定性の観点から、数平均粒径で0.001~0.1μmが好ましく、0.01~0.08μmがより好ましい。
 ここで、粒径とは、電子顕微鏡で撮影した顔料粒子の写真像から顔料粒子の面積を求め、顔料粒子の面積と同面積の円を考えた場合の円の直径を指し、数平均粒径は、任意の100個の粒子について上記の粒径を求め、求められた100個の粒径を平均して得られる平均値である。
From the viewpoint of dispersion stability, the particle size of the black pigment is preferably 0.001 to 0.1 μm, more preferably 0.01 to 0.08 μm in terms of number average particle size.
Here, the particle size refers to the diameter of a circle when the area of the pigment particles is obtained from a photographic image of the pigment particles taken with an electronic microscope and a circle having the same area as the area of the pigment particles is considered, and the number average particle size. Is an average value obtained by obtaining the above particle size for any 100 particles and averaging the obtained 100 particle sizes.
 黒色顔料以外の顔料として、白色顔料については、特開2005-007765号公報の段落0015及び0114に記載の白色顔料を使用できる。具体的には、白色顔料のうち、無機顔料としては、酸化チタン、酸化亜鉛、リトポン、軽質炭酸カルシウム、ホワイトカーボン、酸化アルミニウム、水酸化アルミニウム、又は硫酸バリウムが好ましく、酸化チタン又は酸化亜鉛がより好ましく、酸化チタンが更に好ましい。無機顔料としては、ルチル型又はアナターゼ型の酸化チタンが更に好ましく、ルチル型の酸化チタンが特に好ましい。
 また、酸化チタンの表面は、シリカ処理、アルミナ処理、チタニア処理、ジルコニア処理、又は有機物処理が施されていてもよく、二つ以上の処理が施されてもよい。これにより、酸化チタンの触媒活性が抑制され、耐熱性及び褪光性等が改善される。
 加熱後のネガ型感光性組成物層の厚みを薄くする観点から、酸化チタンの表面への表面処理としては、アルミナ処理及びジルコニア処理の少なくとも一方が好ましく、アルミナ処理及びジルコニア処理の両方が特に好ましい。
As the pigment other than the black pigment, the white pigment described in paragraphs 0015 and 0114 of JP-A-2005-007765 can be used as the white pigment. Specifically, among the white pigments, as the inorganic pigment, titanium oxide, zinc oxide, lithopone, light calcium carbonate, white carbon, aluminum oxide, aluminum hydroxide, or barium sulfate are preferable, and titanium oxide or zinc oxide is more preferable. Preferably, titanium oxide is more preferred. As the inorganic pigment, rutile-type or anatase-type titanium oxide is more preferable, and rutile-type titanium oxide is particularly preferable.
Further, the surface of titanium oxide may be treated with silica, alumina, titania, zirconia, or an organic substance, or may be subjected to two or more treatments. As a result, the catalytic activity of titanium oxide is suppressed, and heat resistance, fading and the like are improved.
From the viewpoint of reducing the thickness of the negative photosensitive composition layer after heating, at least one of alumina treatment and zirconia treatment is preferable as the surface treatment of the surface of titanium oxide, and both alumina treatment and zirconia treatment are particularly preferable. ..
 また、ネガ型感光性組成物層が着色樹脂層である場合、転写性の観点から、ネガ型感光性組成物層は、黒色顔料及び白色顔料以外の有彩色の顔料を更に含んでいることも好ましい。有彩色の顔料を含む場合、有彩色の顔料の粒径としては、分散性がより優れる点で、0.1μm以下が好ましく、0.08μm以下がより好ましい。
 有彩色の顔料としては、例えば、ビクトリア・ピュアーブルーBO(Color Index(以下C.I.)42595)、オーラミン(C.I.41000)、ファット・ブラックHB(C.I.26150)、モノライト・エローGT(C.I.ピグメント・エロー12)、パーマネント・エローGR(C.I.ピグメント・エロー17)、パーマネント・エローHR(C.I.ピグメント・エロー83)、パーマネント・カーミンFBB(C.I.ピグメント・レッド146)、ホスターバームレッドESB(C.I.ピグメント・バイオレット19)、パーマネント・ルビーFBH(C.I.ピグメント・レッド11)、ファステル・ピンクBスプラ(C.I.ピグメント・レッド81)、モナストラル・ファースト・ブルー(C.I.ピグメント・ブルー15)、モノライト・ファースト・ブラックB(C.I.ピグメント・ブラック1)及びカーボン、C.I.ピグメント・レッド97、C.I.ピグメント・レッド122、C.I.ピグメント・レッド149、C.I.ピグメント・レッド168、C.I.ピグメント・レッド177、C.I.ピグメント・レッド180、C.I.ピグメント・レッド192、C.I.ピグメント・レッド215、C.I.ピグメント・グリーン7、C.I.ピグメント・ブルー15:1、C.I.ピグメント・ブルー15:4、C.I.ピグメント・ブルー22、C.I.ピグメント・ブルー60、C.I.ピグメント・ブルー64、及びC.I.ピグメント・バイオレット23等が挙げられる。なかでも、C.I.ピグメント・レッド177が好ましい。
Further, when the negative photosensitive composition layer is a colored resin layer, the negative photosensitive composition layer may further contain a chromatic pigment other than the black pigment and the white pigment from the viewpoint of transferability. preferable. When a chromatic pigment is contained, the particle size of the chromatic pigment is preferably 0.1 μm or less, more preferably 0.08 μm or less, in that the dispersibility is more excellent.
Examples of chromatic pigments include Victoria Pure Blue BO (Color Index (hereinafter CI) 42595), Auramine (CI41000), Fat Black HB (CI26150), and Monolite. -Ero GT (CI Pigment Ellow 12), Permanent Ellow GR (CI Pigment Ellow 17), Permanent Yellow HR (CI Pigment Ellow 83), Permanent Carmine FBB (C) I. Pigment Red 146), Hoster Balm Red ESB (CI Pigment Violet 19), Permanent Ruby FBH (CI Pigment Red 11), Fastel Pink B Supra (CI Pigment) Red 81), Monastral First Blue (CI Pigment Blue 15), Monolite First Black B (CI Pigment Black 1) and Carbon, C.I. I. Pigment Red 97, C.I. I. Pigment Red 122, C.I. I. Pigment Red 149, C.I. I. Pigment Red 168, C.I. I. Pigment Red 177, C.I. I. Pigment Red 180, C.I. I. Pigment Red 192, C.I. I. Pigment Red 215, C.I. I. Pigment Green 7, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 1, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 15: 4, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 22, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 60, C.I. I. Pigment Blue 64, and C.I. I. Pigment Violet 23 and the like. Above all, C.I. I. Pigment Red 177 is preferred.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層が顔料を含む場合、顔料の含有量としては、ネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対して、3質量%超40質量%以下が好ましく、3質量%超35質量%以下がより好ましく、5質量%超35質量%以下が更に好ましく、10質量%以上35質量%以下が特に好ましい。 When the negative type photosensitive composition layer contains a pigment, the content of the pigment is preferably more than 3% by mass and 40% by mass or less, preferably more than 3% by mass and 35% by mass, based on the total mass of the negative type photosensitive composition layer. More preferably, it is more preferably 5% by mass or more and 35% by mass or less, and particularly preferably 10% by mass or more and 35% by mass or less.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層が黒色顔料以外の顔料(白色顔料及び有彩色の顔料)を含む場合、黒色顔料以外の顔料の含有量は、黒色顔料に対して、30質量%以下が好ましく、1~20質量%がより好ましく、3~15質量%が更に好ましい。 When the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a pigment other than the black pigment (white pigment and chromatic pigment), the content of the pigment other than the black pigment is preferably 30% by mass or less with respect to the black pigment. It is more preferably from 20% by mass, still more preferably from 3 to 15% by mass.
 なお、ネガ型感光性組成物層が黒色顔料を含み、且つ、ネガ型感光性組成物層がネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物で形成される場合、黒色顔料(好ましくはカーボンブラック)は、顔料分散液の形態でネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物に導入されることが好ましい。
 分散液は、黒色顔料と顔料分散剤とをあらかじめ混合して得られる混合物を、有機溶剤(又はビヒクル)に加えて分散機で分散させることによって調製されるものでもよい。顔料分散剤は、顔料及び溶剤に応じて選択すればよく、例えば市販の分散剤を使用することができる。なお、ビヒクルとは、顔料分散液とした場合に顔料を分散させている媒質の部分を指し、液状であり、黒色顔料を分散状態で保持するバインダー成分と、バインダー成分を溶解及び希釈する溶剤成分(有機溶剤)と、を含む。
When the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a black pigment and the negative photosensitive composition layer is formed of a composition for forming a negative photosensitive composition layer, a black pigment (preferably carbon black) is used. Is preferably introduced into a composition for forming a negative photosensitive composition layer in the form of a pigment dispersion.
The dispersion liquid may be prepared by adding a mixture obtained by previously mixing a black pigment and a pigment dispersant to an organic solvent (or vehicle) and dispersing it with a disperser. The pigment dispersant may be selected depending on the pigment and the solvent, and for example, a commercially available dispersant can be used. The vehicle refers to a portion of the medium in which the pigment is dispersed when the pigment is dispersed, and is a liquid, a binder component that holds the black pigment in a dispersed state, and a solvent component that dissolves and dilutes the binder component. (Organic solvent) and.
 分散機としては、特に制限はなく、例えば、ニーダー、ロールミル、アトライター、スーパーミル、ディゾルバ、ホモミキサー、及びサンドミル等の公知の分散機が挙げられる。更に、機械的摩砕により摩擦力を利用して微粉砕してもよい。分散機及び微粉砕については、「顔料の事典」(朝倉邦造著、第一版、朝倉書店、2000年、438頁、310頁)の記載を参照することができる。 The disperser is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include known dispersers such as a kneader, a roll mill, an attritor, a super mill, a dissolver, a homomixer, and a sand mill. Further, it may be finely pulverized by mechanical grinding using frictional force. For the disperser and fine pulverization, the description of "Encyclopedia of Pigments" (Kunizo Asakura, First Edition, Asakura Shoten, 2000, 438, 310) can be referred to.
<<仮支持体、ネガ型感光性組成物層及び保護フィルムの関係>>
 第2実施形態においても、第1実施形態で記載した、仮支持体、ネガ型感光性組成物層及び保護フィルムの関係を満たすことが好ましい。
<< Relationship between temporary support, negative photosensitive composition layer and protective film >>
Also in the second embodiment, it is preferable to satisfy the relationship of the temporary support, the negative photosensitive composition layer and the protective film described in the first embodiment.
<<熱可塑性樹脂層>>
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、通常、仮支持体とネガ型感光性組成物層との間に配置される。転写フィルムが熱可塑性樹脂層を備えることで、転写フィルムと基板との貼合工程における基板への追従性が向上して、基板と転写フィルムとの間の気泡の混入を抑制できる。この結果として、熱可塑性樹脂層に隣接する層(例えば仮支持体)との密着性を担保できる。
<< Thermoplastic resin layer >>
The thermoplastic resin layer is usually arranged between the temporary support and the negative photosensitive composition layer. When the transfer film is provided with the thermoplastic resin layer, the followability to the substrate in the bonding process between the transfer film and the substrate is improved, and the mixing of air bubbles between the substrate and the transfer film can be suppressed. As a result, the adhesion to the layer adjacent to the thermoplastic resin layer (for example, a temporary support) can be ensured.
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、樹脂を含む。上記樹脂は、その一部又は全部として、熱可塑性樹脂を含む。つまり、一態様において、熱可塑性樹脂層は、樹脂が熱可塑性樹脂であることも好ましい。 The thermoplastic resin layer contains resin. The resin contains a thermoplastic resin in part or in whole. That is, in one embodiment, it is also preferable that the resin of the thermoplastic resin layer is a thermoplastic resin.
<アルカリ可溶性樹脂(熱可塑性樹脂)>
 熱可塑性樹脂としては、アルカリ可溶性樹脂であることが好ましい。
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、例えば、アクリル樹脂、ポリスチレン樹脂、スチレン-アクリル系共重合体、ポリウレタン樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール、ポリビニルホルマール、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリエステル樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、エポキシ樹脂、ポリアセタール樹脂、ポリヒドロキシスチレン樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリベンゾオキサゾール樹脂、ポリシロキサン樹脂、ポリエチレンイミン、ポリアリルアミン、及びポリアルキレングリコールが挙げられる。
<Alkali-soluble resin (thermoplastic resin)>
The thermoplastic resin is preferably an alkali-soluble resin.
Examples of the alkali-soluble resin include acrylic resin, polystyrene resin, styrene-acrylic copolymer, polyurethane resin, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl formal, polyamide resin, polyester resin, polyamide resin, epoxy resin, polyacetal resin, and polyhydroxystyrene resin. , Polychloride resin, polybenzoxazole resin, polysiloxane resin, polyethyleneimine, polyallylamine, and polyalkylene glycol.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、現像性及び隣接する層との密着性の観点から、アクリル樹脂が好ましい。
 ここで、アクリル樹脂は、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位、(メタ)アクリル酸エステルに由来する構成単位、及び(メタ)アクリル酸アミドに由来する構成単位からなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の構成単位を有する樹脂を意味する。
 アクリル樹脂としては、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位、(メタ)アクリル酸エステルに由来する構成単位、及び(メタ)アクリル酸アミドに由来する構成単位の合計含有量が、アクリル樹脂の全質量に対して50質量%以上であることが好ましい。
 なかでも、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位及び(メタ)アクリル酸エステルに由来する構成単位の合計含有量が、アクリル樹脂の全質量に対して、30~100質量%が好ましく、50~100質量%がより好ましい。
As the alkali-soluble resin, an acrylic resin is preferable from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to an adjacent layer.
Here, the acrylic resin is at least selected from the group consisting of a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid, a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester, and a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid amide. It means a resin having one kind of structural unit.
As the acrylic resin, the total content of the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid, the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester, and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid amide is the total content of the acrylic resin. It is preferably 50% by mass or more with respect to the mass.
Among them, the total content of the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid and the structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid ester is preferably 30 to 100% by mass, preferably 50 to 100% by mass, based on the total mass of the acrylic resin. 100% by mass is more preferable.
 また、アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、酸基を有する重合体であることが好ましい。
 酸基としては、カルボキシ基、スルホ基、リン酸基、及びホスホン酸基が挙げられ、カルボキシ基が好ましい。
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、現像性の観点から、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のアルカリ可溶性樹脂がより好ましく、酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂が更に好ましい。
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂の酸価の上限は、特に制限されないが、300mgKOH/g以下が好ましく、250mgKOH/g以下がより好ましく、200mgKOH/g以下が更に好ましく、150mgKOH/g以下が特に好ましい。
Further, the alkali-soluble resin is preferably a polymer having an acid group.
Examples of the acid group include a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, and a phosphonic acid group, and a carboxy group is preferable.
From the viewpoint of developability, the alkali-soluble resin is more preferably an alkali-soluble resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more, and further preferably a carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more.
The upper limit of the acid value of the alkali-soluble resin is not particularly limited, but is preferably 300 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 250 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, and particularly preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less.
 酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂としては、特に制限されず、公知の樹脂から適宜選択して使用できる。
 例えば、特開2011-095716号公報の段落0025に記載のポリマーのうち酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂であるアルカリ可溶性樹脂、特開2010-237589号公報の段落0033~0052に記載のポリマーのうちの酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂、及び特開2016-224162号公報の段落0053~0068に記載のバインダーポリマーのうちの酸価60mgKOH/g以上のカルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂が挙げられる。
 上記カルボキシ基含有アクリル樹脂におけるカルボキシ基を有する構成単位の共重合比は、アクリル樹脂の全質量に対して、5~50質量%が好ましく、10~40質量%がより好ましく、12~30質量%が更に好ましい。
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、現像性及び隣接する層との密着性の観点から、(メタ)アクリル酸に由来する構成単位を有するアクリル樹脂が特に好ましい。
The carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more is not particularly limited and can be appropriately selected from known resins and used.
For example, among the polymers described in paragraph 0025 of JP-A-2011-095716, an alkali-soluble resin which is a carboxy group-containing acrylic resin having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more, described in paragraphs 0033 to 0052 of JP-A-2010-237589. Acrylic resin containing a carboxy group having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more among the polymers of the above, and acrylic containing a carboxy group having an acid value of 60 mgKOH / g or more among the binder polymers described in paragraphs 0053 to 0068 of JP2016-224162A. Acrylic can be mentioned.
The copolymerization ratio of the structural unit having a carboxy group in the carboxy group-containing acrylic resin is preferably 5 to 50% by mass, more preferably 10 to 40% by mass, and 12 to 30% by mass with respect to the total mass of the acrylic resin. Is more preferable.
As the alkali-soluble resin, an acrylic resin having a structural unit derived from (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to an adjacent layer.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、反応性基を有していてもよい。反応性基としては、付加重合可能な基であればよく、エチレン性不飽和基;ヒドロキシ基及びカルボキシ基等の重縮合性基;エポキシ基、(ブロック)イソシアネート基等の重付加反応性基が挙げられる。 The alkali-soluble resin may have a reactive group. The reactive group may be any addition-polymerizable group, and an ethylenically unsaturated group; a polycondensable group such as a hydroxy group and a carboxy group; a polyaddition reactive group such as an epoxy group and a (block) isocyanate group may be used. Can be mentioned.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、1,000以上が好ましく、1万~10万がより好ましく、2万~5万が更に好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 1,000 or more, more preferably 10,000 to 100,000, and even more preferably 20,000 to 50,000.
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 アルカリ可溶性樹脂の含有量は、現像性及び隣接する層との密着性の観点から、熱可塑性樹脂層の全質量に対して、10~99質量%が好ましく、20~90質量%がより好ましく、40~80質量%が更に好ましく、50~75質量%が特に好ましい。
The alkali-soluble resin may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 10 to 99% by mass, more preferably 20 to 90% by mass, based on the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoint of developability and adhesion to the adjacent layer. 40 to 80% by mass is more preferable, and 50 to 75% by mass is particularly preferable.
<色素>
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、発色時の波長範囲400~780nmにおける最大吸収波長が450nm以上であり、酸、塩基、又はラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素(単に「色素B」ともいう。)を含むことが好ましい。
 色素Bの好ましい態様は、後述する点以外は、上述した色素Nの好ましい態様と同様である。
<Dye>
The thermoplastic resin layer contains a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength of 450 nm or more in the wavelength range of 400 to 780 nm at the time of color development and whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, a base, or a radical (also referred to simply as “dye B”). Is preferable.
The preferred embodiment of the dye B is the same as the preferred embodiment of the dye N described above, except for the points described later.
 色素Bは、露光部及び非露光部の視認性並びに解像性の観点から、酸又はラジカルにより最大吸収波長が変化する色素が好ましく、酸により最大吸収波長が変化する色素であることがより好ましい。
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、露光部及び非露光部の視認性並びに解像性の観点から、色素Bとしての酸により最大吸収波長が変化する色素、及び後述する光により酸を発生する化合物の両者を含むことが好ましい。
The dye B is preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid or a radical, and more preferably a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength is changed by an acid, from the viewpoint of visibility and resolution of the exposed part and the non-exposed part. ..
From the viewpoint of visibility and resolution of the exposed and non-exposed areas, the thermoplastic resin layer contains both a dye whose maximum absorption wavelength changes depending on the acid as the dye B and a compound that generates an acid by light, which will be described later. It is preferable to include it.
 色素Bは、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 色素Bの含有量は、露光部及び非露光部の視認性の観点から、熱可塑性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.2質量%以上が好ましく、0.2~6質量%がより好ましく、0.2~5質量%が更に好ましく、0.25~3.0質量%が特に好ましい。
The dye B may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the dye B is preferably 0.2% by mass or more, more preferably 0.2 to 6% by mass, based on the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoint of visibility of the exposed portion and the non-exposed portion. , 0.2 to 5% by mass, more preferably 0.25 to 3.0% by mass.
 ここで、色素Bの含有量は、熱可塑性樹脂層に含まれる色素Bの全てを発色状態にした場合の色素の含有量を意味する。以下に、ラジカルにより発色する色素を例に、色素Bの含有量の定量方法を説明する。
 メチルエチルケトン100mLに、色素0.001g及び0.01gを溶かした溶液を調製する。得られた各溶液に、光ラジカル重合開始剤Irgacure OXE01(商品名、BASFジャパン株式会社)を加え、365nmの光を照射することによりラジカルを発生させ、全ての色素を発色状態にする。その後、大気雰囲気下で、分光光度計(UV3100、(株)島津製作所製)を用いて、液温が25℃である各溶液の吸光度を測定し、検量線を作成する。
 次に、色素に代えて熱可塑性樹脂層0.1gをメチルエチルケトンに溶かすこと以外は上記と同様の方法で、色素を全て発色させた溶液の吸光度を測定する。得られた熱可塑性樹脂層を含む溶液の吸光度から、検量線に基づいて熱可塑性樹脂層に含まれる色素の量を算出する。
 なお、熱可塑性樹脂層3gとは、組成物の固形分の3gと同様である。
Here, the content of the dye B means the content of the dye when all of the dye B contained in the thermoplastic resin layer is in a colored state. Hereinafter, a method for quantifying the content of dye B will be described by taking a dye that develops color by radicals as an example.
A solution prepared by dissolving 0.001 g and 0.01 g of the dye in 100 mL of methyl ethyl ketone is prepared. Irradicure OXE01 (trade name, BASF Japan, Inc.), a photoradical polymerization initiator, is added to each of the obtained solutions, and radicals are generated by irradiating with light of 365 nm to bring all the dyes into a colored state. Then, in an atmospheric atmosphere, the absorbance of each solution having a liquid temperature of 25 ° C. is measured using a spectrophotometer (UV3100, manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation), and a calibration curve is prepared.
Next, the absorbance of the solution in which all the dyes are colored is measured by the same method as above except that 0.1 g of the thermoplastic resin layer is dissolved in methyl ethyl ketone instead of the dye. From the absorbance of the obtained solution containing the thermoplastic resin layer, the amount of the dye contained in the thermoplastic resin layer is calculated based on the calibration curve.
The thermoplastic resin layer (3 g) is the same as the solid content of the composition (3 g).
<光により酸、塩基、又はラジカルを発生する化合物>
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、光により酸、塩基、又はラジカルを発生する化合物(単に「化合物C」ともいう。)を含んでもよい。
 化合物Cとしては、紫外線及び可視光線等の活性光線を受けて、酸、塩基、又はラジカルを発生する化合物が好ましい。
 化合物Cとしては、公知の、光酸発生剤、光塩基発生剤、及び光ラジカル重合開始剤(光ラジカル発生剤)を使用できる。
<Compounds that generate acids, bases, or radicals with light>
The thermoplastic resin layer may contain a compound (also simply referred to as “compound C”) that generates an acid, a base, or a radical by light.
As the compound C, a compound that generates an acid, a base, or a radical by receiving active light such as ultraviolet rays and visible light is preferable.
As the compound C, known photoacid generators, photobase generators, and photoradical polymerization initiators (photoradical generators) can be used.
(光酸発生剤)
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、解像性の観点から、光酸発生剤を含んでもよい。
 光酸発生剤としては、上述したネガ型感光性組成物層が含んでもよい光カチオン重合開始剤が挙げられ、後述する点以外は好ましい態様も同じである。
(Photoacid generator)
The thermoplastic resin layer may contain a photoacid generator from the viewpoint of resolution.
Examples of the photoacid generator include a photocationic polymerization initiator that may be contained in the negative-type photosensitive composition layer described above, and the same preferred embodiments are used except for the points described below.
 光酸発生剤としては、感度及び解像性の観点から、オニウム塩化合物、及びオキシムスルホネート化合物からなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の化合物を含むことが好ましく、感度、解像性、及び密着性の観点から、オキシムスルホネート化合物を含むことがより好ましい。
 また、光酸発生剤としては、以下の構造を有する光酸発生剤も好ましい。
The photoacid generator preferably contains at least one compound selected from the group consisting of an onium salt compound and an oxime sulfonate compound from the viewpoint of sensitivity and resolution, and preferably contains sensitivity, resolution and adhesion. From the viewpoint of sex, it is more preferable to contain an oxime sulfonate compound.
Further, as the photoacid generator, a photoacid generator having the following structure is also preferable.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000026
(光ラジカル重合開始剤)
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、光ラジカル重合開始剤を含んでもよい。
 光ラジカル重合開始剤としては、上述したネガ型感光性組成物層が含んでもよい光ラジカル重合開始剤が挙げられ、好ましい態様も同じである。
(Photoradical polymerization initiator)
The thermoplastic resin layer may contain a photoradical polymerization initiator.
Examples of the photo-radical polymerization initiator include a photo-radical polymerization initiator that may be contained in the negative-type photosensitive composition layer described above, and the same preferred embodiments are also used.
(光塩基発生剤)
 熱可塑性樹脂組成物は、光塩基発生剤を含んでもよい。
 光塩基発生剤としては、公知の光塩基発生剤であれば特に制限されず、例えば、2-ニトロベンジルシクロヘキシルカルバメート、トリフェニルメタノール、O-カルバモイルヒドロキシルアミド、O-カルバモイルオキシム、[[(2,6-ジニトロベンジル)オキシ]カルボニル]シクロヘキシルアミン、ビス[[(2-ニトロベンジル)オキシ]カルボニル]ヘキサン1,6-ジアミン、4-(メチルチオベンゾイル)-1-メチル-1-モルホリノエタン、(4-モルホリノベンゾイル)-1-ベンジル-1-ジメチルアミノプロパン、N-(2-ニトロベンジルオキシカルボニル)ピロリジン、ヘキサアンミンコバルト(III)トリス(トリフェニルメチルボレート)、2-ベンジル-2-ジメチルアミノ-1-(4-モルホリノフェニル)-ブタノン、2,6-ジメチル-3,5-ジアセチル-4-(2-ニトロフェニル)-1,4-ジヒドロピリジン、及び2,6-ジメチル-3,5-ジアセチル-4-(2,4-ジニトロフェニル)-1,4-ジヒドロピリジンが挙げられる。
(Photobase generator)
The thermoplastic resin composition may contain a photobase generator.
The photobase generator is not particularly limited as long as it is a known photobase generator, and for example, 2-nitrobenzylcyclohexylcarbamate, triphenylmethanol, O-carbamoyl hydroxylamide, O-carbamoyloxime, [[(2, 6-Dinitrobenzyl) Oxy] carbonyl] cyclohexylamine, bis [[(2-nitrobenzyl) oxy] carbonyl] hexane 1,6-diamine, 4- (methylthiobenzoyl) -1-methyl-1-morpholinoetan, (4) -Morholinobenzoyl) -1-benzyl-1-dimethylaminopropane, N- (2-nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl) pyrrolidine, hexaammine cobalt (III) tris (triphenylmethylborate), 2-benzyl-2-dimethylamino- 1- (4-morpholinophenyl) -butanone, 2,6-dimethyl-3,5-diacetyl-4- (2-nitrophenyl) -1,4-dihydropyridine, and 2,6-dimethyl-3,5-diacetyl -4- (2,4-dinitrophenyl) -1,4-dihydropyridine can be mentioned.
 化合物Cは、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 化合物Cの含有量は、露光部及び非露光部の視認性並びに解像性の観点から、熱可塑性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.1~10質量%が好ましく、0.5~5質量%がより好ましい。
Compound C may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the compound C is preferably 0.1 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.5 to 5% by mass, based on the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoint of visibility and resolution of the exposed and non-exposed areas. More preferably by mass.
<可塑剤>
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、解像性、隣接する層との密着性、及び現像性の観点から、可塑剤を含むことが好ましい。
 可塑剤は、アルカリ可溶性樹脂よりも分子量(オリゴマー又はポリマーであり分子量分布を有する場合は重量平均分子量)が小さいことが好ましい。可塑剤の分子量(重量平均分子量)は、200~2,000が好ましい。
 可塑剤は、アルカリ可溶性樹脂と相溶して可塑性を発現する化合物であれば特に制限されないが、可塑性付与の観点から、可塑剤は、分子中にアルキレンオキシ基を有することが好ましく、ポリアルキレングリコール化合物がより好ましい。可塑剤に含まれるアルキレンオキシ基は、ポリエチレンオキシ構造又はポリプロピレンオキシ構造を有することがより好ましい。
<Plasticizer>
The thermoplastic resin layer preferably contains a plasticizer from the viewpoints of resolution, adhesion to adjacent layers, and developability.
The plasticizer preferably has a smaller molecular weight (weight average molecular weight when it is an oligomer or a polymer and has a molecular weight distribution) than that of an alkali-soluble resin. The molecular weight (weight average molecular weight) of the plasticizer is preferably 200 to 2,000.
The plasticizer is not particularly limited as long as it is a compound that is compatible with an alkali-soluble resin and exhibits plasticity, but from the viewpoint of imparting plasticity, the plasticizer preferably has an alkyleneoxy group in the molecule, and is a polyalkylene glycol. Compounds are more preferred. It is more preferable that the alkyleneoxy group contained in the plasticizer has a polyethyleneoxy structure or a polypropyleneoxy structure.
 また、可塑剤は、解像性及び保存安定性の観点から、(メタ)アクリレート化合物を含むことが好ましい。相溶性、解像性、及び隣接する層との密着性の観点から、アルカリ可溶性樹脂がアクリル樹脂であり、且つ、可塑剤が(メタ)アクリレート化合物を含むことがより好ましい。
 可塑剤として用いられる(メタ)アクリレート化合物としては、上述したネガ型感光性組成物層に含まれる重合性化合物として記載した(メタ)アクリレート化合物が挙げられる。
 転写フィルムにおいて、熱可塑性樹脂層とネガ型感光性組成物層とが直接接触して積層される場合、熱可塑性樹脂層及びネガ型感光性組成物層がいずれも同じ(メタ)アクリレート化合物を含むことが好ましい。同じ(メタ)アクリレート化合物を熱可塑性樹脂層及びネガ型感光性組成物層がそれぞれ含むことで、層間の成分拡散が抑制され、保存安定性が向上するためである。
Further, the plasticizer preferably contains a (meth) acrylate compound from the viewpoint of resolution and storage stability. From the viewpoint of compatibility, resolution, and adhesion to the adjacent layer, it is more preferable that the alkali-soluble resin is an acrylic resin and the plasticizer contains a (meth) acrylate compound.
Examples of the (meth) acrylate compound used as a plasticizer include the (meth) acrylate compound described as the polymerizable compound contained in the above-mentioned negative photosensitive composition layer.
In the transfer film, when the thermoplastic resin layer and the negative photosensitive composition layer are directly contacted and laminated, both the thermoplastic resin layer and the negative photosensitive composition layer contain the same (meth) acrylate compound. Is preferable. This is because the thermoplastic resin layer and the negative photosensitive composition layer each contain the same (meth) acrylate compound, so that the diffusion of components between the layers is suppressed and the storage stability is improved.
 熱可塑性樹脂層が可塑剤として(メタ)アクリレート化合物を含む場合、熱可塑性樹脂層と隣接する層との密着性の観点から、露光後の露光部においても(メタ)アクリレート化合物が重合しないことが好ましい。
 また、可塑剤として用いられる(メタ)アクリレート化合物としては、熱可塑性樹脂層の解像性、隣接する層との密着性、及び現像性の観点から、一分子中に2個以上の(メタ)アクリロイル基を有する多官能(メタ)アクリレート化合物が好ましい。
 更に、可塑剤として用いられる(メタ)アクリレート化合物としては、酸基を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物又はウレタン(メタ)アクリレート化合物も好ましい。
When the thermoplastic resin layer contains a (meth) acrylate compound as a plasticizer, the (meth) acrylate compound may not polymerize even in the exposed portion after exposure from the viewpoint of adhesion between the thermoplastic resin layer and the adjacent layer. preferable.
Further, as the (meth) acrylate compound used as a plasticizer, two or more (meth) in one molecule from the viewpoint of the resolution of the thermoplastic resin layer, the adhesion to the adjacent layer, and the developability. Polyfunctional (meth) acrylate compounds having an acryloyl group are preferred.
Further, as the (meth) acrylate compound used as a plasticizer, a (meth) acrylate compound having an acid group or a urethane (meth) acrylate compound is also preferable.
 可塑剤は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 可塑剤の含有量は、熱可塑性樹脂層の解像性、隣接する層との密着性、及び現像性の観点から、熱可塑性樹脂層の全質量に対して、1~70質量%が好ましく、10~60質量%がより好ましく、20~50質量%が更に好ましい。
The plasticizer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the plasticizer is preferably 1 to 70% by mass with respect to the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer from the viewpoints of the resolution of the thermoplastic resin layer, the adhesion to the adjacent layer, and the developability. 10 to 60% by mass is more preferable, and 20 to 50% by mass is further preferable.
<増感剤>
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、増感剤を含んでもよい。
 増感剤としては、特に制限されず、上述したネガ型感光性組成物層が含んでもよい増感剤が挙げられる。
<Sensitizer>
The thermoplastic resin layer may contain a sensitizer.
The sensitizer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a sensitizer that may be contained in the negative photosensitive composition layer described above.
 増感剤は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 増感剤の含有量は、目的により適宜選択できるが、光源に対する感度の向上、並びに、露光部及び非露光部の視認性の観点から、熱可塑性樹脂層の全質量に対して、0.01~5質量%が好ましく、0.05~1質量%がより好ましい。
The sensitizer may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the sensitizer can be appropriately selected depending on the purpose, but from the viewpoint of improving the sensitivity to the light source and the visibility of the exposed and non-exposed areas, it is 0.01 with respect to the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer. It is preferably from 5% by mass, more preferably 0.05 to 1% by mass.
<添加剤等>
 熱可塑性樹脂層は、上記成分以外に、必要に応じて界面活性剤等の公知の添加剤を含んでもよい。
 また、熱可塑性樹脂層については、特開2014-085643号公報の段落0189~0193に記載されており、この公報に記載の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Additives, etc.>
In addition to the above components, the thermoplastic resin layer may contain a known additive such as a surfactant, if necessary.
Further, the thermoplastic resin layer is described in paragraphs 0189 to 0193 of JP-A-2014-085643, and the contents described in this publication are incorporated in the present specification.
 熱可塑性樹脂層の層厚は、特に制限されないが、隣接する層との密着性の観点から、1μm以上が好ましく、2μm以上がより好ましい。上限は特に制限されないが、現像性及び解像性の観点から、20μm以下が好ましく、10μm以下がより好ましく、8μm以下が更に好ましい。 The layer thickness of the thermoplastic resin layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably 1 μm or more, more preferably 2 μm or more, from the viewpoint of adhesion to adjacent layers. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoint of developability and resolvability, 20 μm or less is preferable, 10 μm or less is more preferable, and 8 μm or less is further preferable.
<<中間層>>
 転写フィルム20において、中間層15は、熱可塑性樹脂層13とネガ型感光性組成物層17との間に存在することにより、熱可塑性樹脂層13及びネガ型感光性組成物層17の塗布形成の際及び塗布形成後の保存の際に生じ得る成分の混合を抑制できる。
 中間層としては、水溶性樹脂を含む水溶性樹脂層が使用できる。
 また、中間層としては、特開平5-072724号公報に「分離層」として記載されている、酸素遮断機能のある酸素遮断層も使用できる。中間層が酸素遮断層であると、露光時の感度が向上し、露光機の時間負荷が低減し、生産性が向上するため、好ましい。
 中間層として用いられる酸素遮断層は、上記公報等に記載された公知の層から適宜選択すればよい。中でも、低い酸素透過性を示し、水又はアルカリ水溶液(22℃の炭酸ナトリウムの1質量%水溶液)に分散又は溶解する酸素遮断層が好ましい。
<< Middle class >>
In the transfer film 20, the intermediate layer 15 is present between the thermoplastic resin layer 13 and the negative photosensitive composition layer 17, so that the thermoplastic resin layer 13 and the negative photosensitive composition layer 17 are coated and formed. It is possible to suppress the mixing of components that may occur during storage at the time of coating and after coating formation.
As the intermediate layer, a water-soluble resin layer containing a water-soluble resin can be used.
Further, as the intermediate layer, an oxygen blocking layer having an oxygen blocking function, which is described as a “separation layer” in JP-A-5-07724, can also be used. When the intermediate layer is an oxygen blocking layer, the sensitivity at the time of exposure is improved, the time load of the exposure machine is reduced, and the productivity is improved, which is preferable.
The oxygen blocking layer used as the intermediate layer may be appropriately selected from the known layers described in the above publications and the like. Of these, an oxygen blocking layer that exhibits low oxygen permeability and is dispersed or dissolved in water or an alkaline aqueous solution (1% by mass aqueous solution of sodium carbonate at 22 ° C.) is preferable.
 以下、水溶性樹脂層(中間層)が含み得る各成分について説明する。 Hereinafter, each component that can be contained in the water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer) will be described.
 水溶性樹脂層(中間層)は、樹脂を含む。
 上記樹脂は、その一部又は全部として、水溶性樹脂を含む。
 水溶性樹脂として使用可能な樹脂としては、例えば、ポリビニルアルコール系樹脂、ポリビニルピロリドン系樹脂、セルロース系樹脂、アクリルアミド系樹脂、ポリエチレンオキサイド系樹脂、ゼラチン、ビニルエーテル系樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、及びこれらの共重合体等の樹脂が挙げられる。
 また、水溶性樹脂としては、(メタ)アクリル酸/ビニル化合物の共重合体等も使用できる。(メタ)アクリル酸/ビニル化合物の共重合体としては、(メタ)アクリル酸/(メタ)アクリル酸アリルの共重合体が好ましく、メタクリル酸/メタクリル酸アリルの共重合体がより好ましい。
 水溶性樹脂が(メタ)アクリル酸/ビニル化合物の共重合体である場合、各組成比(モル%)としては、例えば、90/10~20/80が好ましく、80/20~30/70がより好ましい。
The water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer) contains a resin.
The resin contains a water-soluble resin in part or in whole.
Examples of the resin that can be used as the water-soluble resin include polyvinyl alcohol-based resin, polyvinylpyrrolidone-based resin, cellulose-based resin, acrylamide-based resin, polyethylene oxide-based resin, gelatin, vinyl ether-based resin, polyamide resin, and their co-weight. Examples include resins such as coalescing.
Further, as the water-soluble resin, a (meth) acrylic acid / vinyl compound copolymer or the like can also be used. As the copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid / vinyl compound, a copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid / allyl (meth) acrylic acid is preferable, and a copolymer of methacrylic acid / allyl methacrylate is more preferable.
When the water-soluble resin is a copolymer of (meth) acrylic acid / vinyl compound, the composition ratio (mol%) is preferably 90/10 to 20/80, preferably 80/20 to 30/70. More preferred.
 水溶性樹脂の重量平均分子量の下限値としては、5,000以上が好ましく、7,000以上がより好ましく、10,000以上が更に好ましい。また、その上限値としては、200,000以下が好ましく、100,000以下がより好ましく、50,000以下が更に好ましい。
 水溶性樹脂の分散度(Mw/Mn)は、1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましい。
The lower limit of the weight average molecular weight of the water-soluble resin is preferably 5,000 or more, more preferably 7,000 or more, and even more preferably 10,000 or more. The upper limit thereof is preferably 200,000 or less, more preferably 100,000 or less, and even more preferably 50,000 or less.
The dispersity (Mw / Mn) of the water-soluble resin is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5.
 なお、水溶性樹脂層(中間層)の層間混合抑制能をより向上させる点で、水溶性樹脂層(中間層)中の樹脂は、水溶性樹脂層(中間層)の一方の面側に配置される層に含まれる樹脂及び他方の面側に配置される層に含まれる樹脂とは異なる樹脂であることが好ましい。例えば、ネガ型感光性組成物層17中に重合体Aが含まれ、熱可塑性樹脂層13中に熱可塑性樹脂(アルカリ可溶性樹脂)が含まれる場合、水溶性樹脂層(中間層)15の樹脂は、重合体A及び熱可塑性樹脂(アルカリ可溶性樹脂)とは異なる樹脂であるのが好ましい。 The resin in the water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer) is arranged on one surface side of the water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer) in order to further improve the ability to suppress the interlayer mixing of the water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer). It is preferable that the resin is different from the resin contained in the layer to be formed and the resin contained in the layer arranged on the other surface side. For example, when the polymer A is contained in the negative photosensitive composition layer 17 and the thermoplastic resin (alkali-soluble resin) is contained in the thermoplastic resin layer 13, the resin of the water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer) 15 is contained. Is preferably a resin different from the polymer A and the thermoplastic resin (alkali-soluble resin).
 水溶性樹脂は、酸素遮断性、並びに、層間混合抑制能をより向上させる点で、ポリビニルアルコールを含むことが好ましく、ポリビニルアルコール及びポリビニルピロリドンの両者を含むことがより好ましい。 The water-soluble resin preferably contains polyvinyl alcohol, and more preferably contains both polyvinyl alcohol and polyvinylpyrrolidone, in terms of further improving the oxygen blocking property and the ability to suppress interlayer mixing.
 水溶性樹脂は、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 水溶性樹脂の含有量は特に制限されないが、酸素遮断性、並びに、層間混合抑制能をより向上させる点で、水溶性樹脂層(中間層)の全質量に対して、50質量%以上が好ましく、70質量%以上がより好ましく、80質量%以上が更に好ましく、90質量%以上が特に好ましい。なお、その上限値としては特に制限されないが、例えば、99.9質量%以下が好ましく、99.8質量%以下が更に好ましい。
 中間層は、必要に応じて界面活性剤などの公知の添加剤を含んでいてもよい。
The water-soluble resin may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the water-soluble resin is not particularly limited, but is preferably 50% by mass or more with respect to the total mass of the water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer) in terms of further improving the oxygen blocking property and the ability to suppress interlayer mixing. , 70% by mass or more is more preferable, 80% by mass or more is further preferable, and 90% by mass or more is particularly preferable. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 99.9% by mass or less, and more preferably 99.8% by mass or less.
The intermediate layer may contain a known additive such as a surfactant, if necessary.
 水溶性樹脂層(中間層)の層厚は、特に制限されないが、0.1~5μmが好ましく、0.5~3μmがより好ましい。水溶性樹脂層(中間層)の厚みが上記の範囲内であると、酸素遮断性を低下させることがなく、層間混合抑制能が優れる。また、更に、現像時の水溶性樹脂層(中間層)除去時間の増大も抑制できる。 The layer thickness of the water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer) is not particularly limited, but is preferably 0.1 to 5 μm, more preferably 0.5 to 3 μm. When the thickness of the water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer) is within the above range, the oxygen blocking property is not lowered and the ability to suppress interlaminar mixing is excellent. Further, it is possible to suppress an increase in the time for removing the water-soluble resin layer (intermediate layer) during development.
<<第2実施形態の転写フィルムの製造方法>>
 第2実施形態の転写フィルムの製造方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法を使用できる。
 上記の転写フィルム20の製造方法としては、例えば、仮支持体11の表面に熱可塑性樹脂組成物を塗布して塗膜を形成し、更にこの塗膜を乾燥して熱可塑性樹脂層13を形成する工程と、熱可塑性樹脂層13の表面に水溶性樹脂組成物を塗布して塗膜を形成し、更にこの塗膜を乾燥して中間層15を形成する工程と、中間層15の表面に感光性組成物を塗布して塗膜を形成し、更にこの塗膜を乾燥してネガ型感光性組成物層17を形成する工程と、を含む方法が挙げられる。
<< Method for Producing Transfer Film of Second Embodiment >>
The method for producing the transfer film of the second embodiment is not particularly limited, and a known method can be used.
As a method for producing the transfer film 20, for example, a thermoplastic resin composition is applied to the surface of the temporary support 11 to form a coating film, and the coating film is further dried to form a thermoplastic resin layer 13. A step of applying a water-soluble resin composition to the surface of the thermoplastic resin layer 13 to form a coating film, and a step of further drying the coating film to form an intermediate layer 15 and a step of forming an intermediate layer 15 on the surface of the intermediate layer 15. Examples thereof include a step of applying a photosensitive composition to form a coating film, and further drying the coating film to form a negative photosensitive composition layer 17.
 上述の製造方法により製造された積層体のネガ型感光性組成物層17上に、保護フィルム19を圧着させることにより、転写フィルム20が製造される。
 第2実施形態の転写フィルムの製造方法としては、ネガ型感光性組成物層17の仮支持体11を有する側とは反対側の面に接するように保護フィルム19を設ける工程を含むことにより、仮支持体11、熱可塑性樹脂層13、中間層15、ネガ型感光性組成物層17、及び保護フィルム19を備える転写フィルム20を製造することが好ましい。
 上記の製造方法により転写フィルム20を製造した後、転写フィルム20を巻き取ることにより、ロール形態の転写フィルムを作製及び保管してもよい。ロール形態の転写フィルムは、後述するロールツーロール方式での基板との貼合工程にそのままの形態で提供できる。
The transfer film 20 is manufactured by crimping the protective film 19 onto the negative photosensitive composition layer 17 of the laminate manufactured by the above-mentioned manufacturing method.
The method for producing the transfer film of the second embodiment includes a step of providing the protective film 19 so as to be in contact with the surface of the negative photosensitive composition layer 17 opposite to the side having the temporary support 11. It is preferable to produce a transfer film 20 including a temporary support 11, a thermoplastic resin layer 13, an intermediate layer 15, a negative photosensitive composition layer 17, and a protective film 19.
After the transfer film 20 is manufactured by the above-mentioned manufacturing method, the transfer film 20 may be wound up to prepare and store the transfer film in the form of a roll. The roll-type transfer film can be provided as it is in the bonding process with the substrate in the roll-to-roll method described later.
 また、上記の転写フィルム20の製造方法としては、カバーフィルム19上に、ネガ型感光性組成物層17及び中間層15を形成した後、中間層15の表面に熱可塑性樹脂層13を形成する方法であってもよい。 Further, as a method for producing the transfer film 20, the negative type photosensitive composition layer 17 and the intermediate layer 15 are formed on the cover film 19, and then the thermoplastic resin layer 13 is formed on the surface of the intermediate layer 15. It may be a method.
<熱可塑性樹脂層形成用組成物及び熱可塑性樹脂層の形成方法>
 仮支持体上に熱可塑性樹脂層を形成する方法としては特に制限されず、公知の方法が使用できる。例えば、仮支持体上に熱可塑性樹脂層形成用組成物を塗布し、そして、必要に応じて乾燥させることにより形成できる。
 熱可塑性樹脂層形成用組成物としては、上述した熱可塑性樹脂層を形成する各種成分と溶剤とを含むのが好ましい。なお、熱可塑性樹脂層形成用組成物において、組成物の全固形分に対する各成分の含有量の好適範囲は、上述した熱可塑性樹脂層の全質量に対する各成分の含有量の好適範囲と同じである。
 溶剤としては、溶剤以外の各成分を溶解又は分散可能であれば特に制限されず、公知の溶剤を使用できる。溶剤としては、後述するネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物が含む溶剤と同様のものが挙げられ、好適態様も同じである。
 溶剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分100質量部に対して、50~1,900質量部が好ましく、100~900質量部がより好ましい。
<Composition for forming a thermoplastic resin layer and a method for forming a thermoplastic resin layer>
The method for forming the thermoplastic resin layer on the temporary support is not particularly limited, and a known method can be used. For example, it can be formed by applying a composition for forming a thermoplastic resin layer on a temporary support and drying it if necessary.
The composition for forming the thermoplastic resin layer preferably contains the above-mentioned various components for forming the thermoplastic resin layer and a solvent. In the composition for forming a thermoplastic resin layer, the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total solid content of the composition is the same as the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total mass of the thermoplastic resin layer described above. be.
The solvent is not particularly limited as long as each component other than the solvent can be dissolved or dispersed, and a known solvent can be used. Examples of the solvent include the same solvents as those contained in the composition for forming a negative photosensitive composition layer described later, and the preferred embodiments are also the same.
The content of the solvent is preferably 50 to 1,900 parts by mass, more preferably 100 to 900 parts by mass, based on 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the composition.
 熱可塑性樹脂層の形成方法は、上記の成分を含む層を形成可能な方法であれば特に制限されず、例えば、公知の塗布方法(スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、及びインクジェット塗布等)が挙げられる。 The method for forming the thermoplastic resin layer is not particularly limited as long as it can form a layer containing the above components, and for example, known coating methods (slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, inkjet coating, etc.) can be used. Can be mentioned.
<水溶性樹脂組成物及び中間層(水溶性樹脂層)の形成方法>
 水溶性樹脂組成物としては、上述した中間層(水溶性樹脂層)を形成する各種成分と溶剤とを含むのが好ましい。なお、水溶性樹脂組成物において、組成物の全固形分に対する各成分の含有量の好適範囲は、上述した水溶性樹脂層の全質量に対する各成分の含有量の好適範囲と同じである。
 溶剤としては、水溶性樹脂を溶解又は分散可能であれば特に制限されず、水及び水混和性の有機溶剤からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種が好ましく、水又は水と水混和性の有機溶剤との混合溶剤がより好ましい。
 水混和性の有機溶剤としては、例えば、炭素数1~3のアルコール、アセトン、エチレングリコール、及びグリセリンが挙げられ、炭素数1~3のアルコールが好ましく、メタノール又はエタノールがより好ましい。
 溶剤を、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 溶剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分100質量部に対して、50~2,500質量部が好ましく、50~1,900質量部がより好ましく、100~900質量部が更に好ましい。
<Method of forming water-soluble resin composition and intermediate layer (water-soluble resin layer)>
The water-soluble resin composition preferably contains various components forming the above-mentioned intermediate layer (water-soluble resin layer) and a solvent. In the water-soluble resin composition, the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total solid content of the composition is the same as the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total mass of the water-soluble resin layer described above.
The solvent is not particularly limited as long as it can dissolve or disperse the water-soluble resin, and at least one selected from the group consisting of water and water-miscible organic solvents is preferable, and water or water-miscible organic. A mixed solvent with a solvent is more preferable.
Examples of the water-miscible organic solvent include alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, acetone, ethylene glycol, and glycerin, and alcohols having 1 to 3 carbon atoms are preferable, and methanol or ethanol is more preferable.
The solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the solvent is preferably 50 to 2,500 parts by mass, more preferably 50 to 1,900 parts by mass, and even more preferably 100 to 900 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the composition.
 水溶性樹脂層の形成方法は、上記の成分を含む層を形成可能な方法であれば特に制限されず、例えば、公知の塗布方法(スリット塗布、スピン塗布、カーテン塗布、及びインクジェット塗布等)が挙げられる。 The method for forming the water-soluble resin layer is not particularly limited as long as it can form a layer containing the above components, and for example, known coating methods (slit coating, spin coating, curtain coating, inkjet coating, etc.) can be used. Can be mentioned.
<ネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物及びネガ型感光性組成物層の形成方法>
 生産性に優れる点で、上述したネガ型感光性組成物層を構成する成分(例えば、バインダーポリマー、重合性化合物、及び、重合開始剤等)、及び、溶剤を含むネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物を使用して塗布法により形成されるのが望ましい。
 第2実施形態の転写フィルムの製造方法としては、具体的には、中間層上にネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物を塗布して塗膜を形成し、この塗膜に乾燥処理を施してネガ型感光性組成物層を形成する方法であるのが好ましい。
<Composition for forming a negative photosensitive composition layer and a method for forming a negative photosensitive composition layer>
A negative photosensitive composition layer containing the above-mentioned components (for example, a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound, a polymerization initiator, etc.) and a solvent that constitute the above-mentioned negative photosensitive composition layer in terms of excellent productivity. It is preferably formed by a coating method using a forming composition.
Specifically, as a method for producing a transfer film of the second embodiment, a negative-type photosensitive composition layer-forming composition is applied onto an intermediate layer to form a coating film, and the coating film is subjected to a drying treatment. It is preferable to apply the method to form a negative photosensitive composition layer.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物としては、上述したネガ型感光性組成物層を形成する各種成分と溶剤とを含むのが好ましい。なお、ネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物において、組成物の全固形分に対する各成分の含有量の好適範囲は、上述したネガ型感光性組成物層の全質量に対する各成分の含有量の好適範囲と同じである。
 溶剤としては、溶剤以外の各成分を溶解又は分散可能であれば特に制限されず、公知の溶剤を使用できる。具体的には、例えば、アルキレングリコールエーテル溶剤、アルキレングリコールエーテルアセテート溶剤、アルコール溶剤(メタノール及びエタノール等)、ケトン溶剤(アセトン及びメチルエチルケトン等)、芳香族炭化水素溶剤(トルエン等)、非プロトン性極性溶剤(N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド等)、環状エーテル溶剤(テトラヒドロフラン等)、エステル溶剤(酢酸nプロピル等)、アミド溶剤、ラクトン溶剤、並びにこれらの2種以上を含む混合溶剤が挙げられる。
The composition for forming the negative photosensitive composition layer preferably contains various components and a solvent for forming the negative photosensitive composition layer described above. In the composition for forming a negative photosensitive composition layer, the preferable range of the content of each component with respect to the total solid content of the composition is the content of each component with respect to the total mass of the negative photosensitive composition layer described above. It is the same as the preferable range of.
The solvent is not particularly limited as long as each component other than the solvent can be dissolved or dispersed, and a known solvent can be used. Specifically, for example, alkylene glycol ether solvent, alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent, alcohol solvent (methanol, ethanol, etc.), ketone solvent (acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, etc.), aromatic hydrocarbon solvent (toluene, etc.), aprotonic polarity. Examples thereof include a solvent (N, N-dimethylformamide, etc.), a cyclic ether solvent (tetratetra, etc.), an ester solvent (npropyl acetate, etc.), an amide solvent, a lactone solvent, and a mixed solvent containing two or more of these.
 溶剤としては、アルキレングリコールエーテル溶剤及びアルキレングリコールエーテルアセテート溶剤からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種を含むことが好ましい。なかでも、アルキレングリコールエーテル溶剤及びアルキレングリコールエーテルアセテート溶剤からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種と、ケトン溶剤及び環状エーテル溶剤からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種とを含む混合溶剤がより好ましく、アルキレングリコールエーテル溶剤及びアルキレングリコールエーテルアセテート溶剤からなる群より選択される少なくとも1種、ケトン溶剤、並びに、環状エーテル溶剤の3種を少なくとも含む混合溶剤が更に好ましい。 The solvent preferably contains at least one selected from the group consisting of an alkylene glycol ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent. Among them, a mixed solvent containing at least one selected from the group consisting of an alkylene glycol ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent and at least one selected from the group consisting of a ketone solvent and a cyclic ether solvent is more preferable. A mixed solvent containing at least one selected from the group consisting of an alkylene glycol ether solvent and an alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent, a ketone solvent, and at least three types of a cyclic ether solvent is more preferable.
 アルキレングリコールエーテル溶剤としては、例えば、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル、エチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル(プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート等)、プロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールジアルキルエーテル、ジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテル、及びジプロピレングリコールジアルキルエーテルが挙げられる。
 アルキレングリコールエーテルアセテート溶剤としては、例えば、エチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテート、及びジプロピレングリコールモノアルキルエーテルアセテートが挙げられる。
 溶剤としては、国際公開第2018/179640号の段落0092~0094に記載された溶剤、及び特開2018-177889公報の段落0014に記載された溶剤を用いてもよく、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
 溶剤を、1種単独で使用してもよく、2種以上使用してもよい。
 溶剤の含有量は、組成物の全固形分100質量部に対し、50~1,900質量部が好ましく、100~1200質量部が更に好ましく、100~900質量部が更に好ましい。
Examples of the alkylene glycol ether solvent include ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether, ethylene glycol dialkyl ether, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether (propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, etc.), propylene glycol dialkyl ether, diethylene glycol dialkyl ether, dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether, and the like. And dipropylene glycol dialkyl ether.
Examples of the alkylene glycol ether acetate solvent include ethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate, propylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate, diethylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate, and dipropylene glycol monoalkyl ether acetate.
As the solvent, the solvent described in paragraphs 0092 to 0094 of International Publication No. 2018/179640 and the solvent described in paragraph 0014 of JP-A-2018-177789 may be used, and the contents thereof are described in the present specification. Will be incorporated into.
The solvent may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
The content of the solvent is preferably 50 to 1,900 parts by mass, more preferably 100 to 1200 parts by mass, still more preferably 100 to 900 parts by mass with respect to 100 parts by mass of the total solid content of the composition.
 ネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物の塗布方法としては、例えば、印刷法、スプレー法、ロールコート法、バーコート法、カーテンコート法、スピンコート法、及び、ダイコート法(すなわち、スリットコート法)が挙げられる。 Examples of the method for applying the negative photosensitive composition layer forming composition include a printing method, a spray method, a roll coating method, a bar coating method, a curtain coating method, a spin coating method, and a die coating method (that is, a slit coating method). Law).
 ネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物の塗膜の乾燥方法としては、加熱乾燥及び減圧乾燥が好ましい。
 乾燥温度としては、80℃以上が好ましく、90℃以上がより好ましい。また、その上限値としては130℃以下が好ましく、120℃以下がより好ましい。温度を連続的に変化させて乾燥させることもできる。
 また、乾燥時間としては、20秒以上が好ましく、40秒以上がより好ましく、60秒以上が更に好ましい。また、その上限値としては特に制限されないが、600秒以下が好ましく、300秒以下がより好ましい。
As a method for drying the coating film of the negative photosensitive composition layer forming composition, heat drying and vacuum drying are preferable.
The drying temperature is preferably 80 ° C. or higher, more preferably 90 ° C. or higher. The upper limit thereof is preferably 130 ° C. or lower, more preferably 120 ° C. or lower. It can also be dried by continuously changing the temperature.
The drying time is preferably 20 seconds or longer, more preferably 40 seconds or longer, and even more preferably 60 seconds or longer. The upper limit is not particularly limited, but is preferably 600 seconds or less, and more preferably 300 seconds or less.
 更に、保護フィルムをネガ型感光性組成物層に貼り合わせることにより、第2実施形態の転写フィルムを製造できる。
 保護フィルムをネガ型感光性組成物層に貼り合わせる方法は特に制限されず、公知の方法が挙げられる。
 保護フィルムをネガ型感光性組成物層に貼り合わせる装置としては、真空ラミネーター、及び、オートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネーターが挙げられる。
 ラミネーターはゴムローラー等の任意の加熱可能なローラーを備え、加圧及び加熱ができるものであることが好ましい。
Further, the transfer film of the second embodiment can be produced by adhering the protective film to the negative photosensitive composition layer.
The method of adhering the protective film to the negative photosensitive composition layer is not particularly limited, and known methods can be mentioned.
Examples of the device for adhering the protective film to the negative photosensitive composition layer include a vacuum laminator and a known laminator such as an auto-cut laminator.
It is preferable that the laminator is provided with an arbitrary heatable roller such as a rubber roller and can be pressurized and heated.
[積層体の製造方法]
 上述した転写フィルムを用いることにより、被転写体へ組成物層を転写することができる。
 なかでも、本発明の転写フィルムは、タッチパネルの製造に用いられることが好ましい。
 なかでも、本発明の積層体の製造方法は、転写フィルムが有する仮支持体とは反対側の表面を、導電部を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせ、基板、導電層、組成物層、及び、仮支持体をこの順に有する組成物層付き基板を得る貼合工程と、
 組成物層をパターン露光する露光工程と、
 露光された組成物層を現像して、導電層を保護する保護膜パターンを形成する現像工程と、を有し、
 更に、貼合工程と露光工程との間、又は、露光工程と現像工程との間に、組成物層付き基板から仮支持体を剥離する剥離工程と、を有する、積層体の製造方法であるのが好ましい。
[Manufacturing method of laminated body]
By using the above-mentioned transfer film, the composition layer can be transferred to the transferred body.
Above all, the transfer film of the present invention is preferably used for manufacturing a touch panel.
Among them, in the method for producing a laminated body of the present invention, the surface of the transfer film on the opposite side of the temporary support is brought into contact with a substrate having a conductive portion and bonded to the substrate, the conductive layer, the composition layer, and , A bonding step of obtaining a substrate with a composition layer having a temporary support in this order,
An exposure process for pattern exposure of the composition layer and
It comprises a developing step of developing an exposed composition layer to form a protective film pattern that protects the conductive layer.
Further, it is a method for manufacturing a laminated body, which comprises a peeling step of peeling a temporary support from a substrate with a composition layer between a bonding step and an exposure step, or between an exposure step and a developing step. Is preferable.
 また、本発明の積層体の製造方法及び回路配線の製造方法は、ロール状の転写フィルムを使用してロールトゥールプロセスで実施されるのが好ましい。つまり、貼合工程が、転写フィルムと後述する導電層を有する基板とをロールトゥロールで貼り合せる工程であり、上述の貼合工程により形成される長尺状の積層体に対して、少なくとも上記露光工程及び上記現像工程を実施するのが好ましい。
 以下、上記工程の手順について詳述する。
Further, it is preferable that the method for manufacturing the laminate and the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring of the present invention are carried out by a roll tool process using a roll-shaped transfer film. That is, the bonding step is a step of bonding the transfer film and the substrate having the conductive layer described later by roll-to-roll, and at least the above-mentioned long-shaped laminate formed by the above-mentioned bonding step. It is preferable to carry out the exposure step and the development step.
Hereinafter, the procedure of the above process will be described in detail.
〔貼合工程〕
 貼合工程は、転写フィルムが有する仮支持体とは反対側の表面を、導電部を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせ、基板、導電層、ネガ型感光性組成物層、及び、仮支持体をこの順に有する組成物層付き基板を得る工程である。なお、転写フィルムが保護フィルムを有する構成である場合、保護フィルムを剥がしてから貼合工程を実施する。
[Lasting process]
In the bonding step, the surface of the transfer film opposite to the temporary support is brought into contact with the substrate having the conductive portion and bonded, and the substrate, the conductive layer, the negative photosensitive composition layer, and the temporary support are bonded. Is a step of obtaining a substrate with a composition layer having the above in this order. If the transfer film has a protective film, the protective film is peeled off and then the bonding step is performed.
 上記貼合においては、上記導電層と上記組成物層の表面とが接触するように圧着させる。
 上記圧着の方法としては特に制限はなく、公知の転写方法、及び、ラミネート方法を使用できる。なかでも、組成物層の表面を、導電部を有する基板に重ね、ロール等による加圧及び加熱が行われることが好ましい。
 貼り合せには、真空ラミネーター、及び、オートカットラミネーター等の公知のラミネーターを使用できる。
 ラミネート温度としては特に制限されないが、例えば、70~130℃であるのが好ましい。
In the above bonding, the conductive layer and the surface of the composition layer are pressure-bonded so as to be in contact with each other.
The crimping method is not particularly limited, and a known transfer method and laminating method can be used. Above all, it is preferable that the surface of the composition layer is superposed on a substrate having a conductive portion, and pressure and heating are performed by a roll or the like.
A known laminator such as a vacuum laminator and an auto-cut laminator can be used for bonding.
The laminating temperature is not particularly limited, but is preferably 70 to 130 ° C., for example.
 導電層を有する基板は、基板上に導電層を有し、必要により任意の層が形成されてもよい。つまり、導電層を有する基板は、基板と、基板上に配置される導電層とを少なくとも有する導電性基板である。 The substrate having a conductive layer has a conductive layer on the substrate, and any layer may be formed if necessary. That is, the substrate having the conductive layer is a conductive substrate having at least a substrate and a conductive layer arranged on the substrate.
 基板としては、例えば、樹脂基板、ガラス基板、及び、半導体基板が挙げられる。
 基板の好ましい態様としては、例えば、国際公開第2018/155193号の段落[0140]に記載があり、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。樹脂基板の材料としては、シクロオレフィンポリマー及びポリイミドが好ましい。樹脂基板の厚みは5μm~200μmが好ましく、10~100μmがより好ましい。
Examples of the substrate include a resin substrate, a glass substrate, and a semiconductor substrate.
Preferred embodiments of the substrate are described, for example, in paragraph [0140] of WO 2018/155193, the contents of which are incorporated herein. As the material of the resin substrate, cycloolefin polymer and polyimide are preferable. The thickness of the resin substrate is preferably 5 μm to 200 μm, more preferably 10 to 100 μm.
 導電層としては、導電性及び細線形成性の点から、金属層、導電性金属酸化物層、グラフェン層、カーボンナノチューブ層、及び、導電ポリマー層からなる群から選択される少なくとも1種の層であるのが好ましい。
 また、基板上には導電層を1層のみ配置してもよいし、2層以上配置してもよい。導電層を2層以上配置する場合は、異なる材質の導電層を有することが好ましい。
 導電層の好ましい態様としては、例えば、国際公開第2018/155193号の段落
[0141]に記載があり、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
The conductive layer is at least one layer selected from the group consisting of a metal layer, a conductive metal oxide layer, a graphene layer, a carbon nanotube layer, and a conductive polymer layer from the viewpoint of conductivity and fine wire forming property. It is preferable to have it.
Further, only one conductive layer may be arranged on the substrate, or two or more layers may be arranged. When two or more conductive layers are arranged, it is preferable to have conductive layers made of different materials.
Preferred embodiments of the conductive layer are described, for example, in paragraph [0141] of WO 2018/155193, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
 導電層を有する基板としては、透明電極及び引き回り配線の少なくとも一方を有する基板が好ましい。上記のような基板は、タッチパネル用基板として好適に使用できる。
 透明電極は、タッチパネル用電極として好適に機能し得る。透明電極は、ITO(酸化インジウムスズ)、及び、IZO(酸化インジウム亜鉛)等の金属酸化膜、並びに、金属メッシュ、及び、金属ナノワイヤー等の金属細線により構成されることが好ましい。
 金属細線としては、銀、銅等の細線が挙げられる。なかでも、銀メッシュ、銀ナノワイヤー等の銀導電性材料が好ましい。
As the substrate having a conductive layer, a substrate having at least one of a transparent electrode and a routing wire is preferable. The above-mentioned substrate can be suitably used as a touch panel substrate.
The transparent electrode may function suitably as a touch panel electrode. The transparent electrode is preferably composed of a metal oxide film such as ITO (indium tin oxide) and IZO (indium zinc oxide), a metal mesh, and a fine metal wire such as a metal nanowire.
Examples of the thin metal wire include thin wires such as silver and copper. Of these, silver conductive materials such as silver mesh and silver nanowires are preferable.
 引き回し配線の材質としては、金属が好ましい。
 引き回し配線の材質である金属としては、金、銀、銅、モリブデン、アルミニウム、チタン、クロム、亜鉛、及び、マンガン、並びに、これらの金属元素の2種以上からなる合金が挙げられる。引き回し配線の材質としては、銅、モリブデン、アルミニウム、又は、チタンが好ましく、銅が特に好ましい。
Metal is preferable as the material of the routing wiring.
Examples of the metal that is the material of the routing wiring include gold, silver, copper, molybdenum, aluminum, titanium, chromium, zinc, and manganese, and alloys composed of two or more of these metal elements. As the material of the routing wiring, copper, molybdenum, aluminum, or titanium is preferable, and copper is particularly preferable.
 本発明の転写フィルム中のネガ型感光性組成物層を用いて形成されたタッチパネル用保護膜は、電極及び/又は配線を保護する目的で、電極及び/又は配線を直接又は他の層を介して覆うように設けられてもよいし、或いは、電極間を絶縁するための保護膜(具体的にはブリッジ配線等の電極間を絶縁するための保護膜)として設けられていてもよい。 The protective film for a touch panel formed by using the negative photosensitive composition layer in the transfer film of the present invention has the electrode and / or the wiring directly or via another layer for the purpose of protecting the electrode and / or the wiring. It may be provided so as to cover the electrodes, or it may be provided as a protective film for insulating the electrodes (specifically, a protective film for insulating the electrodes such as bridge wiring).
〔露光工程〕
 露光工程は、組成物層をパターン露光する工程である。
 なお、ここで、「パターン露光」とは、パターン状に露光する形態、すなわち、露光部と非露光部とが存在する形態の露光を指す。
 パターン露光における露光領域と未露光領域との位置関係は特に制限されず、適宜調整される。
 組成物層の基板とは反対側から露光してもよいし、組成物層の基板側から露光してもよい。
[Exposure process]
The exposure step is a step of pattern-exposing the composition layer.
Here, the "pattern exposure" refers to an exposure in a form of exposure in a pattern, that is, a form in which an exposed portion and a non-exposed portion are present.
The positional relationship between the exposed area and the unexposed area in the pattern exposure is not particularly limited and is appropriately adjusted.
It may be exposed from the side opposite to the substrate of the composition layer, or may be exposed from the substrate side of the composition layer.
 パターン露光の光源としては、少なくともネガ型感光性組成物層を硬化し得る波長域の光(例えば、365nm又は405nm)を照射できるものであれば適宜選定して使用できる。なかでも、パターン露光の露光光の主波長は、365nmが好ましい。なお、主波長とは、最も強度が高い波長である。 As the light source for pattern exposure, any light source in a wavelength range capable of curing at least the negative photosensitive composition layer (for example, 365 nm or 405 nm) can be appropriately selected and used. Of these, the main wavelength of the exposure light for pattern exposure is preferably 365 nm. The main wavelength is the wavelength having the highest intensity.
 光源としては、例えば、各種レーザー、発光ダイオード(LED)、超高圧水銀灯、高圧水銀灯、及び、メタルハライドランプが挙げられる。
 露光量は、5~200mJ/cmが好ましく、10~200mJ/cmがより好ましい。
Examples of the light source include various lasers, light emitting diodes (LEDs), ultra-high pressure mercury lamps, high pressure mercury lamps, and metal halide lamps.
The exposure amount is preferably 5 to 200 mJ / cm 2 , more preferably 10 to 200 mJ / cm 2 .
 露光に使用する光源、露光量及び露光方法の好ましい態様としては、例えば、国際公開第2018/155193号の段落[0146]~[0147]に記載があり、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 Preferred embodiments of the light source, exposure amount and exposure method used for exposure are described in, for example, paragraphs [0146] to [0147] of International Publication No. 2018/155193, and these contents are incorporated in the present specification. ..
 露光工程、及び、後述する現像工程を行うことで、基板上の導電層上に、導電層の少なくとも一部を保護する保護膜パターンが形成される。 By performing the exposure step and the development step described later, a protective film pattern that protects at least a part of the conductive layer is formed on the conductive layer on the substrate.
〔剥離工程〕
 剥離工程は、貼合工程と露光工程との間、又は、露光工程と後述する現像工程との間に、組成物層付き基板から仮支持体を剥離する工程である。
 剥離方法は特に制限されず、特開2010-072589号公報の段落[0161]~[0162]に記載されたカバーフィルム剥離機構と同様の機構を使用できる。
[Peeling process]
The peeling step is a step of peeling the temporary support from the substrate with the composition layer between the bonding step and the exposure step, or between the exposure step and the development step described later.
The peeling method is not particularly limited, and a mechanism similar to the cover film peeling mechanism described in paragraphs [0161] to [0162] of JP2010-072589 can be used.
〔現像工程〕
 現像工程は、露光された組成物層を現像して、パターンを形成する工程である。
 上記組成物層の現像は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。
 現像液として、アルカリ性水溶液が好ましい。アルカリ性水溶液に含まれ得るアルカリ性化合物としては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸カリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、炭酸水素カリウム、テトラメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラエチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラプロピルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、テトラブチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド、及び、コリン(2-ヒドロキシエチルトリメチルアンモニウムヒドロキシド)が挙げられる。
[Development process]
The developing step is a step of developing the exposed composition layer to form a pattern.
The development of the composition layer can be carried out using a developing solution.
An alkaline aqueous solution is preferable as the developing solution. Examples of the alkaline compound that can be contained in the alkaline aqueous solution include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, sodium hydrogencarbonate, potassium hydrogencarbonate, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, and tetrapropylammonium hydroxy. Do, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, and choline (2-hydroxyethyltrimethylammonium hydroxide).
 現像の方式としては、例えば、パドル現像、シャワー現像、スピン現像、及び、ディップ現像等の方式が挙げられ、シャワー現像であるのが好ましい。 Examples of the development method include paddle development, shower development, spin development, and dip development, and shower development is preferable.
 現像工程で使用する現像液の好適な一態様としては、例えば、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落[0194]に記載の現像液が挙げられる。
 また、現像工程を実施する現像方式の好適な一態様としては、例えば、国際公開第2015/093271号の段落[0195]に記載の現像方式が挙げられる。
A preferred embodiment of the developer used in the developing step is, for example, the developer described in paragraph [0194] of International Publication No. 2015/093271.
Further, as a preferable aspect of the developing method for carrying out the developing step, for example, the developing method described in paragraph [0195] of International Publication No. 2015/093271 can be mentioned.
 また、現像工程としては、現像液を循環させることによって、現像液を繰り返して使用する工程であるのが好ましく、現像方式がシャワー現像であり、且つ、現像液を循環させることによって、現像液を繰り返して使用する工程であるのが好ましい。上述の現像工程を実施する具体的な態様としては、例えば、特開2012-137574号公報等に記載の現像方式が挙げられる。 Further, the developing step is preferably a step of repeatedly using the developing solution by circulating the developing solution, the developing method is shower development, and the developing solution is circulated by circulating the developing solution. It is preferable that the process is used repeatedly. Specific embodiments for carrying out the above-mentioned development step include, for example, the development method described in JP-A-2012-137574.
〔ポスト露光工程及びポストベーク工程〕
 上記積層体の製造方法は、上記現像工程によって得られたパターンを、露光する工程(ポスト露光工程)、及び/又は、加熱する工程(ポストベーク工程)を有していてもよい。
 ポスト露光工程及びポストベーク工程の両方を含む場合、ポスト露光の後、ポストベークを実施することが好ましい。ポスト露光の露光量は、100~5000mJ/cmが好ましく、200~3000mJ/cmがより好ましい。ポストベークの温度は、80~250℃が好ましく、90~160℃がより好ましい。ポストベークの時間は、1~180分が好ましく、10~60分がより好ましい。
[Post-exposure process and post-baking process]
The method for producing the laminate may include a step of exposing the pattern obtained by the development step (post-exposure step) and / or a step of heating (post-baking step).
When both the post-exposure step and the post-baking step are included, it is preferable to carry out post-baking after post-exposure. The exposure amount of the post exposure is preferably 100 to 5000 mJ / cm 2 , more preferably 200 to 3000 mJ / cm 2 . The post-bake temperature is preferably 80 to 250 ° C, more preferably 90 to 160 ° C. The post-baking time is preferably 1 to 180 minutes, more preferably 10 to 60 minutes.
〔積層体の用途〕
 本発明の積層体の製造方法により製造される積層体は、種々の装置に適用することができる。上記積層体を備えた装置としては、例えば、入力装置等が挙げられ、タッチパネルであることが好ましく、静電容量型タッチパネルであることがより好ましい。また、上記入力装置は、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置、液晶表示装置等の表示装置に適用することができる。
 積層体がタッチパネルに適用される場合、組成物層から形成されるパターンは、タッチパネル用電極又はタッチパネル用配線の保護膜として用いられることが好ましい。つまり、転写フィルムに含まれる組成物層は、タッチパネル用電極保護膜又はタッチパネル用配線保護膜の形成に用いられることが好ましい。
[Use of laminated body]
The laminate produced by the method for producing a laminate of the present invention can be applied to various devices. Examples of the device provided with the laminated body include an input device and the like, preferably a touch panel, and more preferably a capacitive touch panel. Further, the input device can be applied to a display device such as an organic electroluminescence display device and a liquid crystal display device.
When the laminate is applied to a touch panel, the pattern formed from the composition layer is preferably used as a touch panel electrode or a protective film for the touch panel wiring. That is, the composition layer contained in the transfer film is preferably used for forming the electrode protective film for the touch panel or the wiring protective film for the touch panel.
[回路配線の製造方法]
 上述した転写フィルムを用いることにより、回路配線も製造できる。
 回路配線の製造方法は、上記の転写フィルムを用いる回路配線の製造方法であれば、特に制限されない。
 なかでも、本発明の回路配線の製造方法は、転写フィルムが有する仮支持体とは反対側の表面を、導電層を有する基板に接触させ、基板、導電層、組成物層、及び、仮支持体をこの順に有する組成物層付き基板を得る貼合工程と
 組成物層をパターン露光する露光工程と、
 露光された組成物層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する現像工程と、
 樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における導電層をエッチング処理するエッチング工程と、更に、貼合工程と露光工程との間、又は、露光工程と現像工程との間に、組成物層付き基板から仮支持体を剥離する剥離工程と、を含む製造方法であるのが好ましい。
[Manufacturing method of circuit wiring]
Circuit wiring can also be manufactured by using the transfer film described above.
The method for manufacturing the circuit wiring is not particularly limited as long as it is the method for manufacturing the circuit wiring using the transfer film described above.
Among them, in the method for manufacturing a circuit wiring of the present invention, the surface of the transfer film on the opposite side of the temporary support is brought into contact with the substrate having the conductive layer, and the substrate, the conductive layer, the composition layer, and the temporary support are provided. A bonding step of obtaining a substrate with a composition layer having a body in this order, an exposure step of pattern-exposing the composition layer, and a process of exposing the composition layer to a pattern.
A developing process that develops the exposed composition layer to form a resin pattern,
Temporarily from the substrate with the composition layer between the etching process of etching the conductive layer in the region where the resin pattern is not arranged, and further between the bonding process and the exposure process, or between the exposure process and the developing process. It is preferable that the manufacturing method includes a peeling step of peeling the support.
 以下において、回路配線の製造方法の具体的な手順について説明する。
 回路配線の製造方法における貼合工程、露光工程、現像工程、及び剥離工程については、上述した積層体の製造方法における貼合工程、露光工程、現像工程、及び剥離工程と同じであり、好適態様も同じである。
Hereinafter, a specific procedure of a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring will be described.
The bonding step, the exposure process, the developing process, and the peeling step in the circuit wiring manufacturing method are the same as the bonding step, the exposure step, the developing step, and the peeling step in the above-mentioned laminated body manufacturing method, and are preferred embodiments. Is the same.
〔エッチング工程〕
 回路配線の製造方法は、基板、導電層(基板が有する導電層)、及び、樹脂パターン(より好ましくは、上記貼合工程と、上記露光工程と、上記現像工程とを含む製造方法により製造された樹脂パターン)がこの順で積層された積層体において、樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域にある導電層をエッチング処理する工程(エッチング工程)を含む。
 上記エッチング工程では、上記現像工程によりネガ型感光性組成物層から得られる樹脂パターンを、エッチングレジストとして使用し、導電層のエッチング処理を行う。
 エッチング処理の方法としては、公知の方法を適用でき、例えば、特開2017-120435号公報の段落[0209]~[0210]に記載の方法、特開2010-152155号公報の段落[0048]~[0054]等に記載の方法、エッチング液に浸漬するウェットエッチング法、及び、プラズマエッチング等のドライエッチングによる方法が挙げられる。
[Etching process]
The circuit wiring is manufactured by a manufacturing method including a substrate, a conductive layer (conductive layer of the substrate), and a resin pattern (more preferably, the bonding step, the exposure step, and the developing step. In the laminated body in which the resin pattern is laminated in this order, the step (etching step) of etching the conductive layer in the region where the resin pattern is not arranged is included.
In the etching step, the resin pattern obtained from the negative photosensitive composition layer by the developing step is used as an etching resist, and the conductive layer is etched.
As a method of etching treatment, a known method can be applied. For example, the methods described in paragraphs [0209] to [0210] of JP-A-2017-120435, paragraphs [0048] to JP-A-2010-152155. Examples thereof include the method described in [0054], a wet etching method of immersing in an etching solution, and a dry etching method such as plasma etching.
 ウェットエッチングに用いられるエッチング液は、エッチングの対象に合わせて酸性又はアルカリ性のエッチング液を適宜選択すればよい。
 酸性のエッチング液としては、例えば、塩酸、硫酸、硝酸、酢酸、フッ酸、シュウ酸及びリン酸から選択される酸性成分単独の水溶液、並びに、酸性成分と、塩化第2鉄、フッ化アンモニウム及び過マンガン酸カリウムから選択される塩との混合水溶液が挙げられる。酸性成分は、複数の酸性成分を組み合わせた成分であってもよい。
 アルカリ性のエッチング液としては、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、アンモニア、有機アミン、及び、有機アミンの塩(テトラメチルアンモニウムハイドロオキサイド等)から選択されるアルカリ成分単独の水溶液、並びに、アルカリ成分と塩(過マンガン酸カリウム等)との混合水溶液が挙げられる。アルカリ成分は、複数のアルカリ成分を組み合わせた成分であってもよい。
As the etching solution used for wet etching, an acidic or alkaline etching solution may be appropriately selected according to the etching target.
Examples of the acidic etching solution include an aqueous solution of an acidic component alone selected from hydrochloric acid, sulfuric acid, nitric acid, acetic acid, hydrofluoric acid, oxalic acid and phosphoric acid, an acidic component, ferric chloride, ammonium fluoride and Examples thereof include a mixed aqueous solution with a salt selected from potassium permanganate. The acidic component may be a component in which a plurality of acidic components are combined.
The alkaline etching solution includes an aqueous solution of an alkaline component alone selected from sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, ammonia, an organic amine, and a salt of an organic amine (tetramethylammonium hydroxide, etc.), and an alkaline component and a salt. Examples thereof include a mixed aqueous solution with (potassium permanganate, etc.). The alkaline component may be a component in which a plurality of alkaline components are combined.
〔除去工程〕
 回路配線の製造方法においては、残存する樹脂パターンを除去する工程(除去工程)を行うことが好ましい。
 除去工程は、特に制限されず、必要に応じて行うことができるが、エッチング工程の後に行うことが好ましい。
 残存する樹脂パターンを除去する方法としては特に制限されないが、薬品処理により除去する方法が挙げられ、除去液を用いて除去する方法が好ましい。
 ネガ型感光性組成物層の除去方法としては、液温が好ましくは30~80℃、より好ましくは50~80℃である撹拌中の除去液に、残存する樹脂パターンを有する基板を、1~30分間浸漬する方法が挙げられる。
[Removal process]
In the circuit wiring manufacturing method, it is preferable to perform a step (removal step) of removing the remaining resin pattern.
The removing step is not particularly limited and can be performed as needed, but it is preferably performed after the etching step.
The method for removing the remaining resin pattern is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a method for removing by chemical treatment, and a method for removing with a removing liquid is preferable.
As a method for removing the negative photosensitive composition layer, a substrate having a resin pattern remaining in the removing liquid during stirring having a liquid temperature of preferably 30 to 80 ° C., more preferably 50 to 80 ° C. is 1 to 1 to 1. A method of soaking for 30 minutes can be mentioned.
 除去液としては、例えば、無機アルカリ成分又は有機アルカリ成分を、水、ジメチルスルホキシド、N-メチルピロリドン又はこれらの混合溶液に溶解させた除去液が挙げられる。無機アルカリ成分としては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム及び水酸化カリウムが挙げられる。有機アルカリ成分としては、第1級アミン化合物、第2級アミン化合物、第3級アミン化合物及び第4級アンモニウム塩化合物が挙げられる。
 また、除去液を使用し、スプレー法、シャワー法及びパドル法等の公知の方法により除去してもよい。
Examples of the removing liquid include a removing liquid in which an inorganic alkaline component or an organic alkaline component is dissolved in water, dimethyl sulfoxide, N-methylpyrrolidone, or a mixed solution thereof. Examples of the inorganic alkaline component include sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide. Examples of the organic alkali component include a primary amine compound, a secondary amine compound, a tertiary amine compound and a quaternary ammonium salt compound.
Further, the removing liquid may be used and removed by a known method such as a spray method, a shower method and a paddle method.
〔その他の工程〕
 回路配線の製造方法は、上述した工程以外の任意の工程(その他の工程)を含んでもよい。
 例えば、国際公開第2019/022089号の段落[0172]に記載の可視光線反射率を低下させる工程、国際公開第2019/022089号の段落[0172]に記載の絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程等が挙げられるが、これらの工程に制限されない。
[Other processes]
The method for manufacturing the circuit wiring may include any process (other process) other than the above-mentioned process.
For example, a step of reducing the visible light reflectance described in paragraph [0172] of International Publication No. 2019/022089, a new conductive layer is provided on the insulating film described in paragraph [0172] of International Publication No. 2019/022089. Examples thereof include steps of forming, but the process is not limited to these steps.
<可視光線反射率を低下させる工程>
 回路配線の製造方法は、基材が有する複数の導電層の一部又は全ての可視光線反射率を低下させる処理を行う工程を含んでいてもよい。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理としては、酸化処理が挙げられる。基材が銅を含む導電層を有する場合、銅を酸化処理して酸化銅とし、導電層を黒化することにより、導電層の可視光線反射率を低下させることができる。
 可視光線反射率を低下させる処理については、特開2014-150118号公報の段落0017~0025、並びに、特開2013-206315号公報の段落0041、段落0042、段落0048及び段落0058に記載されており、これらの公報に記載の内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。
<Step to reduce visible light reflectance>
The method for manufacturing a circuit wiring may include a step of reducing the visible light reflectance of a part or all of the plurality of conductive layers of the base material.
Examples of the treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance include an oxidation treatment. When the base material has a conductive layer containing copper, the visible light reflectance of the conductive layer can be lowered by oxidizing copper to obtain copper oxide and blackening the conductive layer.
The treatment for reducing the visible light reflectance is described in paragraphs 0017 to 0025 of JP-A-2014-150118 and paragraphs 0041, 0042, 0048 and 0058 of JP-2013-206315. , The contents of these publications are incorporated herein.
<絶縁膜を形成する工程、絶縁膜の表面に新たな導電層を形成する工程>
 回路配線の製造方法は、回路配線の表面に絶縁膜を形成する工程と、絶縁膜の表面に新たな導電層を形成する工程と、を含むことも好ましい。
 上記の工程により、第一の電極パターンと絶縁した第二の電極パターンを形成することができる。
 絶縁膜を形成する工程としては、特に制限されず、公知の永久膜を形成する方法が挙げられる。また、絶縁性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの絶縁膜を形成してもよい。
 絶縁膜上に新たな導電層を形成する工程は、特に制限されず、例えば、導電性を有する感光性材料を用いて、フォトリソグラフィにより所望のパターンの新たな導電層を形成してもよい。
<Step of forming an insulating film, step of forming a new conductive layer on the surface of the insulating film>
The method for manufacturing a circuit wiring preferably includes a step of forming an insulating film on the surface of the circuit wiring and a step of forming a new conductive layer on the surface of the insulating film.
By the above steps, a second electrode pattern insulated from the first electrode pattern can be formed.
The step of forming the insulating film is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a known method of forming a permanent film. Further, an insulating film having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having an insulating property.
The step of forming the new conductive layer on the insulating film is not particularly limited, and for example, a new conductive layer having a desired pattern may be formed by photolithography using a photosensitive material having conductivity.
 回路配線の製造方法は、基材の両方の表面にそれぞれ複数の導電層を有する基板を用い、基材の両方の表面に形成された導電層に対して逐次又は同時に回路形成することも好ましい。このような構成により、基材の一方の表面に第一の導電パターン、もう一方の表面に第二の導電パターンを形成したタッチパネル用回路配線を形成できる。また、このような構成のタッチパネル用回路配線を、ロールトゥロールで基材の両面から形成することも好ましい。 As a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring, it is also preferable to use a substrate having a plurality of conductive layers on both surfaces of the base material, and to form a circuit sequentially or simultaneously on the conductive layers formed on both surfaces of the base material. With such a configuration, it is possible to form a circuit wiring for a touch panel in which a first conductive pattern is formed on one surface of a base material and a second conductive pattern is formed on the other surface. It is also preferable to form the touch panel circuit wiring having such a configuration from both sides of the base material by roll-to-roll.
〔回路配線の用途〕
 回路配線の製造方法により製造される回路配線は、種々の装置に適用することができる。上記の製造方法により製造される回路配線を備えた装置としては、例えば、入力装置が挙げられ、タッチパネルが好ましく、静電容量型タッチパネルがより好ましい。また、上記入力装置は、有機EL表示装置及び液晶表示装置等の表示装置に適用できる。
[Use of circuit wiring]
The circuit wiring manufactured by the method of manufacturing the circuit wiring can be applied to various devices. Examples of the device provided with the circuit wiring manufactured by the above manufacturing method include an input device, a touch panel is preferable, and a capacitance type touch panel is more preferable. Further, the input device can be applied to a display device such as an organic EL display device and a liquid crystal display device.
 以下に実施例に基づいて本発明をさらに詳細に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、及び処理手順等は、本発明の趣旨を逸脱しない限り適宜変更することができる。したがって、本発明の範囲は以下に示す実施例により限定的に解釈されるべきものではない。
 なお、特に断りのない限り、「部」及び、「%」は質量基準である。
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in more detail based on examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, treatment contents, treatment procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed as long as they do not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention should not be construed as limiting by the examples shown below.
Unless otherwise specified, "part" and "%" are based on mass.
[実施例1~36及び比較例1~9の転写フィルムの作製及び各種評価]
〔ネガ型感光性組成物層形成用組成物(以下「感光性組成物」と略記する。)に含まれる各種成分〕
 以下において、実施例及び比較例の各転写フィルム中に含まれるネガ型感光性組成物層を形成するための感光性組成物に使用される各種成分について説明する。
[Preparation of transfer films of Examples 1 to 36 and Comparative Examples 1 to 9 and various evaluations]
[Various components contained in a negative-type photosensitive composition layer-forming composition (hereinafter abbreviated as "photosensitive composition")]
Hereinafter, various components used in the photosensitive composition for forming the negative photosensitive composition layer contained in the transfer films of Examples and Comparative Examples will be described.
<バインダーポリマー>
(バインダーポリマー)
 表2にて示すバインダーポリマーを以下に示す。なお、以下に示す共重合体において組成比は質量基準である。
 B1:MMA/MAA/St=40/16/44の共重合体(酸価:104、Mw:17000)
 B2:MMA/MAA/CHMA=35/25/40の共重合体(酸価:163、Mw:17000)
 B3:St/MMA/MAA/MAA-GMA=29/2/19/50の共重合体(酸価:124、Mw:17000)
 B4:St/MMA/MAA/MAA-GMA/HEMA=27/2/19/50/2の共重合体(酸価:124、Mw:17000)
 B5:St/MMA/MAA/MAA-GMA=49/2/19/30の共重合体(酸価:124、Mw:17000)
 B6:St/MMA/MAA/MAA-GMA=29/2/19/50の共重合体(酸価:124、Mw:42000)
 B7:St/MMA/MAA/MAA-GMA=29/2/19/50の共重合体(酸価:124、Mw:105000)
 B8:St/MMA/MAA/MAA-GMA=29/8/13/50の共重合体(酸価:83、Mw:17000)
 B9:St/MMA/MAA/MAA-GMA=29/2/19/50の共重合体(酸価:124、Mw:17000)
 B10:MMA/MAA/St=40/16/44の共重合体(酸価:104、Mw:17000)
 B11:St/MMA/MAA/MAA-GMA=29/2/19/50の共重合体(酸価:124、Mw:17000)
 B12:St/MMA/MAA/BnMA=45/5/25/25の共重合体(酸価:163、Mw:17000)
 B13:St/MMA/MAA=31/38/31の共重合体(酸価:202、Mw:17000)
<Binder polymer>
(Binder polymer)
The binder polymers shown in Table 2 are shown below. In the copolymers shown below, the composition ratio is based on mass.
B1: MMA / MAA / St = 40/16/44 copolymer (acid value: 104, Mw: 17000)
B2: MMA / MAA / CHMA = 35/25/40 copolymer (acid value: 163, Mw: 17000)
B3: Copolymer of St / MMA / MAA / MAA-GMA = 29/2/19/50 (acid value: 124, Mw: 17000)
B4: Copolymer of St / MMA / MAA / MAA-GMA / HEMA = 27/2/19/50/2 (acid value: 124, Mw: 17000)
B5: Copolymer of St / MMA / MAA / MAA-GMA = 49/2/19/30 (acid value: 124, Mw: 17000)
B6: Copolymer of St / MMA / MAA / MAA-GMA = 29/2/19/50 (acid value: 124, Mw: 42000)
B7: Copolymer of St / MMA / MAA / MAA-GMA = 29/2/19/50 (acid value: 124, Mw: 105000)
B8: Copolymer of St / MMA / MAA / MAA-GMA = 29/8/13/50 (acid value: 83, Mw: 17000)
B9: Copolymer of St / MMA / MAA / MAA-GMA = 29/2/19/50 (acid value: 124, Mw: 17000)
B10: MMA / MAA / St = 40/16/44 copolymer (acid value: 104, Mw: 17000)
B11: Copolymer of St / MMA / MAA / MAA-GMA = 29/2/19/50 (acid value: 124, Mw: 17000)
B12: Copolymer of St / MMA / MAA / BnMA = 45/5/25/25 (acid value: 163, Mw: 17000)
B13: St / MMA / MAA = 31/38/31 copolymer (acid value: 202, Mw: 17000)
 上記バインダーポリマーの構成単位を形成する各モノマーの略語は以下の通りである。
 St:スチレン
 MAA:メタクリル酸
 MMA:メタクリル酸メチル
 MMA-GMA:メタクリル酸にグリシジルメタクリレートを付加させた単位
 CHMA:メタクリル酸シクロヘキシル
 HEMA:メタクリル酸-2-ヒドロキシエチル
 BnMA:メタクリル酸ベンジル
The abbreviations for each monomer forming the constituent unit of the binder polymer are as follows.
St: Styrene MAA: Methacrylic acid MMA: Methyl methacrylate MMA-GMA: A unit obtained by adding glycidyl methacrylate to methacrylic acid CHMA: Cyclohexyl methacrylate HEMA: -2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate BnMA: benzyl methacrylate
(バインダーポリマーの合成例)
 以下において、バインダーポリマーの合成例について説明する。なお、以下においては、バインダーポリマーB3の合成例を一例に挙げて説明する。
 なお、バインダーポリマーの合成において、バインダーポリマーB1~B9、B12、B13については、いずれも再沈処理による精製工程を実施したが、バインダーポリマーB10及びB11については、再沈処理による精製処理を実施しなかった。
(Example of synthesis of binder polymer)
Hereinafter, an example of synthesizing the binder polymer will be described. In the following, an example of synthesizing the binder polymer B3 will be described as an example.
In the synthesis of the binder polymer, the binder polymers B1 to B9, B12, and B13 were all subjected to the purification step by the reprecipitation treatment, but the binder polymers B10 and B11 were subjected to the purification treatment by the reprecipitation treatment. There wasn't.
<バインダーポリマーB3の合成>
 3口フラスコにプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル(MFG、和光純薬工業(株)製)244.2質量部を入れ、窒素下、90℃に保持した。そこに、メタクリル酸メチル(東京化成工業(株)製)6質量部、メタクリル酸(MAA、富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)207質量部、スチレン(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)87質量部、MFG188.5質量部、p-メトキシフェノール(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)0.0610質量部、V-601(ジメチル2,2’-アゾビス(2-メチルプロピオネート)、富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)16.7質量部の混合液を3時間かけて滴下した。
 滴下後、90℃で1時間撹拌し、V-601(2.1質量部)とMFG(5.2質量部)の混合液を添加し、1時間撹拌後、V-601(2.1質量部)とMFG(5.2質量部)の混合液を更に添加した。1時間撹拌後、V-601(2.1質量部)とMFG(5.2質量部)の混合液を更に添加した。3時間撹拌後、MFG2.9質量部、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PGMEA、(株)ダイセル製)166.9質量部を添加し、均一になるまで撹拌した。
 反応液に、付加触媒としてのテトラメチルアンモニウムブロミド(TEAB、東京化成工業(株)製)1.5質量部、p-メトキシフェノール0.7質量部を添加し、100℃に昇温した。更に、メタクリル酸グリシジル(GMA、富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製)150質量部を添加し、100℃、9時間撹拌し、バインダーポリマーB3のMFG/PGMEA混合溶液を得た。
 このバインダーポリマーB3のMFG/PGMEA混合溶液100gを、30℃のイオン交換水1000gに30分かけて滴下し再沈処理を行い、固形物として沈殿したバインダーポリマーB3をろ過により取り出し使用した。
 バインダーポリマーB3のGPC測定による重量平均分子量は17,000(ポリスチレン換算)であり、酸価は124mgKOH/gであった。
<Synthesis of binder polymer B3>
244.2 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether (MFG, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) was placed in a three-necked flask and kept at 90 ° C. under nitrogen. There, 6 parts by mass of methyl methacrylate (manufactured by Tokyo Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.), 207 parts by mass of methacrylic acid (MAA, manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.), styrene (manufactured by Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) 87 parts by mass, MFG 188.5 parts by mass, p-methoxyphenol (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) 0.0610 parts by mass, V-601 (dimethyl 2,2'-azobis (2-methylpropionate)) , Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd. (manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) 16.7 parts by mass of a mixed solution was added dropwise over 3 hours.
After the dropping, the mixture is stirred at 90 ° C. for 1 hour, a mixture of V-601 (2.1 parts by mass) and MFG (5.2 parts by mass) is added, and after stirring for 1 hour, V-601 (2.1 parts by mass) is added. Part) and MFG (5.2 parts by mass) were further added. After stirring for 1 hour, a mixture of V-601 (2.1 parts by mass) and MFG (5.2 parts by mass) was further added. After stirring for 3 hours, 2.9 parts by mass of MFG and 166.9 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (PGMEA, manufactured by Daicel Corporation) were added, and the mixture was stirred until uniform.
To the reaction solution, 1.5 parts by mass of tetramethylammonium bromide (TEAB, manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.) and 0.7 parts by mass of p-methoxyphenol as an addition catalyst were added, and the temperature was raised to 100 ° C. Further, 150 parts by mass of glycidyl methacrylate (GMA, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) was added, and the mixture was stirred at 100 ° C. for 9 hours to obtain an MFG / PGMEA mixed solution of the binder polymer B3.
100 g of the MFG / PGMEA mixed solution of the binder polymer B3 was added dropwise to 1000 g of ion-exchanged water at 30 ° C. over 30 minutes for reprecipitation treatment, and the binder polymer B3 precipitated as a solid substance was taken out by filtration and used.
The weight average molecular weight of the binder polymer B3 measured by GPC was 17,000 (in terms of polystyrene), and the acid value was 124 mgKOH / g.
 表1に、上述したバインダーの主な特徴点についてまとめて示す。 Table 1 summarizes the main feature points of the above-mentioned binder.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000027
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000027
<エチレン性不飽和基を有する化合物>
 A-NOD-N:1,9-ノナンジオールジアクリレート(新中村化学工業社製「A-NOD-N」、2官能アクリレート)
 A-DCP:トリシクロデカンジメタノールジアクリレート(新中村化学工業社製「A-DCP」、2官能アクリレート)
 BPE-200:エトキシ化ビスフェノールAジメタクリレート(新中村化学工業社製「BPE-200」、2官能アクリレート)
 A-TMPT:トリメチロールプロパントリアクリレート(新中村化学工業社製「A-TMPT」、3官能アクリレート)
 A-TMMT:ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート(新中村化学工業社製「A-TMMT」、4官能アクリレート)
 TO-2349:ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタアクリレート、及びジペンタエリスリトールペンタアクリレートのコハク酸誘導体との混合物(東亞合成社製「アロニックスTO-2349」、5又は6官能アクリレート)
 A-DPH:ジペンタエリスリトールポリアクリレート(新中村化学工業社製「A-DPH」、5~6官能アクリレート)
 U-15HA:新中村化学工業社製「U-15HA」(15官能ウレタンアクリレート)
<Compound with ethylenically unsaturated group>
A-NOD-N: 1,9-nonanediol diacrylate ("A-NOD-N" manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., bifunctional acrylate)
A-DCP: Tricyclodecanedimethanol diacrylate ("A-DCP" manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., bifunctional acrylate)
BPE-200: Ethoxylated bisphenol A dimethacrylate ("BPE-200" manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., bifunctional acrylate)
A-TMPT: Trimethylolpropane triacrylate ("A-TMPT" manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., trifunctional acrylate)
A-TMMT: Pentaerythritol tetraacrylate ("A-TMMT" manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., tetrafunctional acrylate)
TO-2349: Mixture of dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate, and succinic acid derivative of dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate ("Aronix TO-2349" manufactured by Toagosei Co., Ltd., 5 or 6 functional acrylate)
A-DPH: Dipentaerythritol polyacrylate ("A-DPH" manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., 5-6 functional acrylate)
U-15HA: "U-15HA" manufactured by Shin Nakamura Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. (15-functional urethane acrylate)
<光重合開始剤>
 Omn379:アルキルフェノン系化合物(IGM Resins B.V.社製「Omnirad 379」)
 OXE-02:オキシムエステル系光重合開始剤(BASF社製「Irgacure OXE02」)
 OXE-03:オキシムエステル系光重合開始剤(BASF社製「Irgacure OXE03」)
 Omn 907:α―アミノアルキルフェノン系光重合開始剤(IGM Resins B.V.製「Omnirad 907」)
 HABI:2,2’-ビス(2-クロロフェニル)-4,4’,5,5’-テトラフェニル-1,2’-ビイミダゾール(東京化成工業社製)
 APi-307:1-(ビフェニル-4-イル)-2-メチル-2-モルホリノプロパン-1-オン(Shenzhen UV-ChemTech Ltd.製「APi-307」)
<Photopolymerization initiator>
Omni379: Alkylphenone-based compound (“Omnirad 379” manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.)
OXE-02: Oxime ester-based photopolymerization initiator (BASF's "Irgacure OXE02")
OXE-03: Oxime ester-based photopolymerization initiator (BASF's "Irgacure OXE03")
Omni 907: α-Aminoalkylphenone-based Photopolymerization Initiator (“Omnirad 907” manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.)
HABI: 2,2'-bis (2-chlorophenyl) -4,4', 5,5'-tetraphenyl-1,2'-biimidazole (manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
API-307: 1- (biphenyl-4-yl) -2-methyl-2-morpholinopropane-1-one (Shenzhen UV-ChemTech Ltd. "APi-307")
 <重合禁止剤>
 フェノチアジン:東京化成工業社製
 フェノキサジン:東京化成工業社製
 p-メトキシフェノール:富士フイルム和光純薬社製
<Polymerization inhibitor>
Phenothiazine: Made by Tokyo Chemical Industry Phenoxazine: Made by Tokyo Chemical Industry p-Methoxyphenol: Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.
 <界面活性剤>
 F-551:フッ素系界面活性剤、DIC社製
 メガファック R-40:DIC社製
 フタージェント710FL:ネオス社製
 DOWSIL 8032 ADDITIVE:東レダウ社製
<Surfactant>
F-551: Fluorosurfactant, DIC Megafuck R-40: DIC Futergent 710FL: Neos DOWNSIL 8032 ADDITION: Toredau
 <溶剤>
 1-メトキシ-2-プロピルアセテート:東京化成工業(株)社製
 メチルエチルケトン:東京化成工業(株)社製
 プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル:東京化成工業(株)社製
<Solvent>
1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate: manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Methyl ethyl ketone: manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd. Propylene glycol monomethyl ether: manufactured by Tokyo Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.
〔感光性組成物の調製〕
 表2に示す配合に基づく溶剤以外の各成分、1-メトキシ-2-プロピルアセテート100質量部、メチルエチルケトン150質量部、及び、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル50質量部を混合して、感光性組成物(塗布液)を調製した。なお、表2に記載された成分に対応する数値は、各成分の配合量(質量部)を表す。
[Preparation of photosensitive composition]
Each component other than the solvent based on the formulation shown in Table 2, 100 parts by mass of 1-methoxy-2-propyl acetate, 150 parts by mass of methyl ethyl ketone, and 50 parts by mass of propylene glycol monomethyl ether are mixed to form a photosensitive composition (coating). Liquid) was prepared. The numerical values corresponding to the components shown in Table 2 represent the blending amount (parts by mass) of each component.
〔転写フィルムの作製〕
 表2に示す構成となるように、転写フィルムを各々作製した。具体的には以下のとおりである。
[Preparation of transfer film]
Transfer films were prepared so as to have the configurations shown in Table 2. Specifically, it is as follows.
<実施例1の転写フィルムの作製>
 厚み16μmのポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム(仮支持体、16KS40(東レ(株)製))の上に、スリット状ノズルを用いて、感光性組成物(塗布液1)を、乾燥後に表2に記載の膜厚になるように調整して塗布し、75℃から120℃の温度勾配をもつ熱風対流式乾燥機で乾燥して溶剤を除去して、ネガ型感光性組成物層を形成した。
 次いで、ネガ型感光性組成物層の上に、厚み25μmのポリプロピレンフィルム(保護フィルム、トレファン25A-KW37(東レ(株)製))を圧着し、実施例1の転写フィルムを作製した。
<Preparation of transfer film of Example 1>
The photosensitive composition (coating liquid 1) was dried on a 16 μm-thick polyethylene terephthalate film (temporary support, 16KS40 (manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.)) using a slit-shaped nozzle, and the film shown in Table 2 was dried. The film was adjusted to a thickness and applied, and dried with a hot air convection dryer having a temperature gradient of 75 ° C. to 120 ° C. to remove the solvent to form a negative photosensitive composition layer.
Next, a polypropylene film having a thickness of 25 μm (protective film, Trefan 25A-KW37 (manufactured by Toray Industries, Inc.)) was pressure-bonded onto the negative photosensitive composition layer to prepare a transfer film of Example 1.
<実施例2~36の転写フィルムの作製>
 感光性組成物(塗布液1)の溶剤以外の成分を表2に記載するものに変更し、且つ、乾燥後に表2に記載の膜厚になるように調整したこと以外は、実施例1と同様の方法により、実施例2~36の転写フィルムの転写フィルムを作製した。
<Preparation of Transfer Films of Examples 2-36>
Except that the components other than the solvent of the photosensitive composition (coating liquid 1) were changed to those shown in Table 2 and adjusted to have the film thickness shown in Table 2 after drying, the same as in Example 1. A transfer film of the transfer film of Examples 2 to 36 was prepared by the same method.
<比較例1~9の転写フィルムの作製>
 感光性組成物(塗布液1)の溶剤以外の成分を表2に記載するものに変更し、且つ、乾燥後に表2に記載の膜厚になるように調整したこと以外は、実施例1と同様の方法により、比較例1~9転写フィルムの転写フィルムを作製した。
<Preparation of transfer films of Comparative Examples 1 to 9>
Except that the components other than the solvent of the photosensitive composition (coating liquid 1) were changed to those shown in Table 2 and adjusted to have the film thickness shown in Table 2 after drying, the same as in Example 1. A transfer film of Comparative Examples 1 to 9 transfer films was prepared by the same method.
〔転写フィルムの各種測定〕
 得られた実施例及び比較例の各転写フィルムについて、以下に示す測定を実施した。表2に、測定結果を示す。
[Various measurements of transfer film]
The measurements shown below were carried out for each of the obtained transfer films of Examples and Comparative Examples. Table 2 shows the measurement results.
<E10及びE90の測定>
 保護フィルムを剥離した転写フィルムを、厚み0.7mmのガラス板(コーニング社イーグルXG)の上に、温度100℃速度4m/minの条件で転写した。転写した材料の仮支持体越しに、超高圧水銀灯ランプを用いて、露光量を10mJから5mJ毎増加させながら露光を30箇所行い、紫外線照射を行った。
 紫外線照射されたサンプルを25℃60%の環境で24時間保持した。その後、サンプルの仮支持体を剥離し、山縣機械社製の現像機YCD-500WAを使用して現像処理及び洗浄処理を実施した。現像条件としては、温度30℃の1.0質量%濃度の炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を使用して、新液を供給しながらのシャワー現像処理(シャワーノズル:フルコーンノズル、シャワー圧力:0.10MPa、シャワー流量:1000mL/min)とした。現像時間は、30秒とした。現像処理の後、直ちに純水を使用して洗浄処理(リンス処理)を行った。洗浄条件(リンス条件)としては、温度30℃の純水を使用したシャワー洗浄処理(シャワーノズル:フルコーンノズル、シャワー圧力:0.10MPa、シャワー流量:1000mL/min)とした。洗浄時間は、30秒とした。
 リンス処理まで行ったサンプルを十分に乾燥させた後、触針式膜厚計(DekTak150)を用いて各露光量におけるネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜の膜厚を測定した。
 次いで、上記硬化膜の膜厚を縦軸とし露光量を横軸とした直交座標に、各露光箇所での膜厚及び露光量に対応する点をプロットし、膜厚が実質的に変化しなくなる露光量での膜厚を基準膜厚とし、上記直交座標から、上記基準膜厚に対して10%の膜厚となる露光量E10、上記基準膜厚に対して90%の膜厚となる露光量E90を算出した。得られた数値に基づいて、E10/E90の値を算出した。
<Measurement of E10 and E90>
The transfer film from which the protective film was peeled off was transferred onto a glass plate (Eagle XG, Corning Inc.) having a thickness of 0.7 mm under the conditions of a temperature of 100 ° C. and a speed of 4 m / min. Through the temporary support of the transferred material, exposure was performed at 30 points while increasing the exposure amount by 5 mJ from 10 mJ using an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp, and ultraviolet irradiation was performed.
The UV-irradiated sample was kept in an environment of 25 ° C. and 60% for 24 hours. Then, the temporary support of the sample was peeled off, and a developing process and a cleaning process were carried out using a developing machine YCD-500WA manufactured by Yamagata Machinery Co., Ltd. As the development conditions, a shower development process (shower nozzle: full cone nozzle, shower pressure: 0.10 MPa, shower) while supplying a new liquid using a 1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at a temperature of 30 ° C. The flow rate was 1000 mL / min). The development time was 30 seconds. Immediately after the development treatment, a cleaning treatment (rinsing treatment) was performed using pure water. The cleaning conditions (rinse conditions) were shower cleaning treatment using pure water at a temperature of 30 ° C. (shower nozzle: full cone nozzle, shower pressure: 0.10 MPa, shower flow rate: 1000 mL / min). The washing time was 30 seconds.
After the sample that had been rinsed was sufficiently dried, the film thickness of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer at each exposure amount was measured using a stylus type film thickness meter (DekTak150).
Next, the points corresponding to the film thickness and the exposure amount at each exposed portion are plotted on the Cartesian coordinates with the film thickness of the cured film as the vertical axis and the exposure amount as the horizontal axis, and the film thickness does not substantially change. The film thickness at the exposure amount is used as the reference film thickness, and from the Cartesian coordinates, the exposure amount E10 is 10% of the reference film thickness, and the exposure is 90% of the reference film thickness. The quantity E90 was calculated. The values of E10 / E90 were calculated based on the obtained numerical values.
<現像液中での質量増加率の測定>
 現像液中での質量増加率は、QCM法(リソテックジャパン社製RDA-Qz3)によって求めた。
 まず、測定用の水晶振動子上に、保護フィルムを剥離した転写フィルムを、温度100℃速度4m/minの条件で転写した。転写した材料の仮支持体越しに、超高圧水銀灯ランプを用いて、上述したE90の2倍の露光量にて紫外線照射を行った。
 紫外線照射されたサンプルを25℃60%の環境で24時間保持した。その後、サンプルの仮支持体を剥離し、水晶振動子をサンプルホルダーに取り付け、QCM現像ユニットにマウントした。現像液(温度30℃の1.0質量%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液)を使用し、QCMユニットにマウントしたサンプルを現像液に浸漬した。質量変化をモニターし、上記溶液に浸漬した後30秒経過時点でのネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜の質量増加率(質量%)を測定した。
<Measurement of mass increase rate in developer>
The mass increase rate in the developing solution was determined by the QCM method (RDA-Qz3 manufactured by Lithotech Japan Co., Ltd.).
First, the transfer film from which the protective film was peeled off was transferred onto the crystal oscillator for measurement under the conditions of a temperature of 100 ° C. and a speed of 4 m / min. Ultraviolet irradiation was performed through the temporary support of the transferred material using an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp with an exposure amount twice that of the above-mentioned E90.
The UV-irradiated sample was kept in an environment of 25 ° C. and 60% for 24 hours. Then, the temporary support of the sample was peeled off, the crystal oscillator was attached to the sample holder, and the crystal oscillator was mounted on the QCM development unit. A developer (1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution at a temperature of 30 ° C.) was used, and the sample mounted on the QCM unit was immersed in the developer. The mass change was monitored, and the mass increase rate (mass%) of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer was measured 30 seconds after being immersed in the above solution.
〔転写フィルムの評価〕
 得られた実施例及び比較例の各転写フィルムについて、以下に示す評価を実施した。表2に、評価結果を示す。
[Evaluation of transfer film]
Each of the obtained transfer films of Examples and Comparative Examples was evaluated as shown below. Table 2 shows the evaluation results.
<転写フィルムの評価1>
(再付着故障の評価方法)
 透明フィルム基板上に透明膜と透明電極層を形成したフィルムを洗浄し、洗浄後のフィルムに、実施例及び比較例の各転写フィルムをラミネートした。フィルム幅は500mmであった。ラミネート条件は、透明フィルム基板の温度100℃、ゴムローラー温度100℃、線圧100N/cm、搬送速度4m/分にて行なった。
 露光マスク(10μm幅のラインアンドスペースパターンが全面に刻まれている露光マスク)を介して、超高圧水銀灯ランプを用いて、上述したE90の2倍の露光量にて紫外線照射を行った。
 紫外線照射されたサンプルを25℃60%の環境で24時間保持した。その後、サンプルの仮支持体を剥離し、1.0質量%炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を用いて現像処理を行った。現像処理は現像液循環系のロールトゥロールプロセスで行い、現像条件は、温度30℃、時間30秒、シャワー圧力0.10MPaとした。現像処理の後、直ちに純水を使用してリンス処理を行った。純水リンス条件は、温度30℃、時間30秒、シャワー圧力0.10MPaとした。長さ1000m相当のフィルムを処理した。
 処理したフィルムのラスト1mの個所から、10×10cmサイズのサンプリングを行い、光学顕微鏡にて現像未溶解物の再付着発生個数を計測し、下記評価基準に基づいて評価を実施した。D以上が実用上問題ないレベルである。
 「A」・・・再付着物が無い
 「B」・・・再付着物が1~2個
 「C」・・・再付着物が3~5個
 「D」・・・再付着物が6~10個
 「E」・・・再付着物が11~30個
 「F」・・・再付着物が31個以上
<Evaluation of transfer film 1>
(Evaluation method for reattachment failure)
The film in which the transparent film and the transparent electrode layer were formed on the transparent film substrate was washed, and the transferred films of Examples and Comparative Examples were laminated on the washed film. The film width was 500 mm. The laminating conditions were a transparent film substrate temperature of 100 ° C., a rubber roller temperature of 100 ° C., a linear pressure of 100 N / cm, and a transport speed of 4 m / min.
Ultraviolet irradiation was performed through an exposure mask (an exposure mask in which a line and space pattern having a width of 10 μm is engraved on the entire surface) using an ultrahigh pressure mercury lamp with an exposure amount twice that of E90 described above.
The UV-irradiated sample was kept in an environment of 25 ° C. and 60% for 24 hours. Then, the temporary support of the sample was peeled off, and development treatment was performed using a 1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution. The development process was carried out by a roll-to-roll process of a developer circulation system, and the development conditions were a temperature of 30 ° C., a time of 30 seconds, and a shower pressure of 0.10 MPa. Immediately after the development treatment, a rinsing treatment was performed using pure water. The pure water rinsing conditions were a temperature of 30 ° C., a time of 30 seconds, and a shower pressure of 0.10 MPa. A film equivalent to a length of 1000 m was processed.
A 10 × 10 cm size sampling was performed from the last 1 m portion of the treated film, the number of redeposition occurrences of undissolved developed material was measured with an optical microscope, and evaluation was carried out based on the following evaluation criteria. D or higher is a level at which there is no practical problem.
"A" ... No reattachment "B" ... 1 to 2 reattachment "C" ... 3 to 5 reattachment "D" ... 6 reattachment ~ 10 "E" ... 11 to 30 reattachments "F" ... 31 or more reattachments
<転写フィルムの評価2>
(転写性の評価)
 厚み75μm幅500mmのPET(ポリエチレンテレフタレート)上に、厚み200nmで10μm幅の銅で形成されたラインアンドスペースパターンを有する基材を準備した。この基材のラインに直行する方向に、実施例及び比較例の各転写フィルムをラミネートした。フィルム幅は500mmであった。ラミネート条件は、透明フィルム基板の温度100℃、ゴムローラー温度100℃、線圧100N/cm、搬送速度4m/分にて行なった。
 転写後の基材を、目視及び光学顕微鏡で観察し、気泡の有無を評価した。「B」以上が実用上問題ないレベルである。
(評価基準)
 「A」・・・目視でも光学顕微鏡でも気泡が見えない
 「B」・・・目視では気泡が見えないが、光学顕微鏡では気泡が見える
 「C」・・・目視でも光学顕微鏡でも気泡が見える
<Evaluation of transfer film 2>
(Evaluation of transferability)
A substrate having a line-and-space pattern formed of copper having a thickness of 200 nm and a width of 10 μm was prepared on PET (polyethylene terephthalate) having a thickness of 75 μm and a width of 500 mm. The transfer films of Examples and Comparative Examples were laminated in a direction orthogonal to the line of this substrate. The film width was 500 mm. The laminating conditions were a transparent film substrate temperature of 100 ° C., a rubber roller temperature of 100 ° C., a linear pressure of 100 N / cm, and a transport speed of 4 m / min.
The substrate after transfer was visually observed and observed with an optical microscope to evaluate the presence or absence of bubbles. "B" and above are practically acceptable levels.
(Evaluation criteria)
"A" ... Bubbles cannot be seen visually or with an optical microscope "B" ... Bubbles cannot be seen visually, but bubbles can be seen with an optical microscope "C" ... Bubbles can be seen both visually and with an optical microscope
<転写フィルムの評価3>
(保護フィルム剥離性の評価)
 作製した転写フィルムをA4サイズにカットし、端部のカバーフィルムを少し剥離した。剥離箇所の仮支持体を左手で、保護フィルムを右手で持ち、1m/分の速度で空中で剥離した。保護フィルムを剥離した後の転写フィルムの状態を目視にて評価した。「B」以上が実用上問題ないレベルである。
(評価基準)
 「A」・・・感光性組成物層が仮支持体側に残っている
 「B」・・・感光性組成物層の大部分は仮支持体側に残っているが、一部が保護フィルム側に付着している。
 「C」・・・感光性組成物層の大部分が保護フィルム側に付着している
<Evaluation of transfer film 3>
(Evaluation of protective film peelability)
The produced transfer film was cut into A4 size, and the cover film at the end was slightly peeled off. The temporary support at the peeled portion was held with the left hand and the protective film with the right hand, and peeled in the air at a speed of 1 m / min. The state of the transfer film after the protective film was peeled off was visually evaluated. "B" and above are practically acceptable levels.
(Evaluation criteria)
"A" ... The photosensitive composition layer remains on the temporary support side. "B" ... Most of the photosensitive composition layer remains on the temporary support side, but a part of the photosensitive composition layer remains on the protective film side. It is attached.
"C": Most of the photosensitive composition layer is attached to the protective film side.
 以下に、表2を示す。
 表2中、「ネガ型感光性組成物層の特徴点」における「バインダーポリマー中のラジカル重合性基を有する構成単位の有無」において、「P」は、バインダーポリマーがラジカル重合性基を有する構成単位を有することを表し、「N」は、バインダーポリマーがラジカル重合性基を有する構成単位を有さないことを表す。
 また、表2中、「ネガ型感光性組成物層の特徴点」における「バインダーポリマー中のラジカル重合性基を有する構成単位の含有量」において、「P」は、バインダーポリマー中のラジカル重合性基を有する構成単位の含有量が、全構成単位に対して20質量%以上であることを表し、「N」は、上記含有量が20質量%未満であることを表す。
 また、表2中、「ネガ型感光性組成物層の特徴点」における「4官能以上の重合性化合物の有無」において、「P」は、4官能以上の重合性化合物を有することを表し、「N」は、4官能以上の重合性化合物を有さないことを表す。
 また、表2中、「ネガ型感光性組成物層の特徴点」における「重合禁止剤の含有量」において、「P」は、重合禁止剤の含有量が、光重合開始剤の含有量に対して5~15質量%であることを表し、「N」は、上記含有量が5質量%未満又は15質量%超であることを表す。
 また、表2中「ネガ型感光性組成物層の特徴点」における「バインダーポリマーの精製処理(再沈の有無)」とは、バインダーポリマーの合成において、重合後に再沈による精製を実施したか否かを表す。「P」は再沈による精製を実施したことを表し、「N」は、再沈による精製を実施しなかったことを表す。
Table 2 is shown below.
In Table 2, in "Presence / absence of a structural unit having a radically polymerizable group in the binder polymer" in "Characteristic points of the negative photosensitive composition layer", "P" is a configuration in which the binder polymer has a radically polymerizable group. It represents having a unit, and "N" means that the binder polymer does not have a structural unit having a radically polymerizable group.
Further, in Table 2, in the "content of the structural unit having a radically polymerizable group in the binder polymer" in the "characteristic points of the negative photosensitive composition layer", "P" is the radical polymerizable in the binder polymer. The content of the structural unit having a group is 20% by mass or more with respect to all the structural units, and "N" means that the content is less than 20% by mass.
Further, in Table 2, in "presence or absence of a polyfunctional compound having four or more functionalities" in "characteristic points of the negative photosensitive composition layer", "P" indicates that the polymerizable compound has four or more functionalities. "N" means that it does not have a polyfunctional compound having four or more functionalities.
Further, in Table 2, in the "content of the polymerization inhibitor" in the "characteristic points of the negative photosensitive composition layer", in "P", the content of the polymerization inhibitor is the content of the photopolymerization initiator. On the other hand, it represents 5 to 15% by mass, and "N" means that the content is less than 5% by mass or more than 15% by mass.
Further, in Table 2, the "purification treatment of the binder polymer (presence or absence of reprecipitation)" in the "characteristic points of the negative photosensitive composition layer" means whether the binder polymer was purified by reprecipitation after the polymerization. Indicates whether or not. "P" indicates that purification by reprecipitation was performed, and "N" indicates that purification by reprecipitation was not performed.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000028
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000029
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000030
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000031
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000032
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000032
 表2の結果から、実施例の転写フィルムにより形成されるパターンでは、再付着故障に基づく欠陥が抑制されていることが確認された。
 また、実施例の評価結果から、式(1)で表されるE10/E90の値が0.8以上の場合、形成されるパターンの再付着故障に基づく欠陥がより抑制されることが確認された。
 また、実施例の評価結果から、ネガ型感光性組成物層が4官能以上の重合性化合物を含む場合、形成されるパターンの再付着故障に基づく欠陥がより抑制されることが確認された。
 また、実施例1~10、35、36の対比から、バインダーポリマーがラジカル重合性基を有する構成単位を含む場合、形成されるパターンの再付着故障に基づく欠陥がより抑制されることが確認された。なかでも、バインダーポリマーの重量平均分子量(Mw)が30,000以下であり、且つバインダーポリマー中のラジカル重合性基を有する構成単位の割合が40質量%以上である場合、形成されるパターンの再付着故障に基づく欠陥がより抑制されることが確認された。
 また、実施例1、実施例3、及び実施例11~13の評価結果等から、バインダーポリマーに対する重合性化合物の質量含有量比(重合性化合物の含有量/バインダーポリマーに対する含有量)が、0.5以上の場合(好ましくは、0.7以上の場合)、形成されるパターンの再付着故障に基づく欠陥がより抑制されることが確認された。
 また、実施例3と実施例10の評価結果等から、バインダーポリマーが重合反応後に再沈による精製処理を実施されている場合、形成されるパターンの再付着故障に基づく欠陥がより抑制されることが確認された。
 また、実施例3と実施例24及び25の評価結果から、ネガ型感光性組成物層の膜厚が、3.0μm以下である場合、形成されるパターンの再付着故障に基づく欠陥がより抑制されることが確認された。
From the results in Table 2, it was confirmed that the pattern formed by the transfer film of the example suppressed defects due to reattachment failure.
Further, from the evaluation results of the examples, it was confirmed that when the value of E10 / E90 represented by the formula (1) is 0.8 or more, the defects due to the reattachment failure of the formed pattern are further suppressed. rice field.
Further, from the evaluation results of the examples, it was confirmed that when the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a polyfunctional compound having four or more functionalities, defects due to reattachment failure of the formed pattern are further suppressed.
Further, from the comparison of Examples 1 to 10, 35 and 36, it was confirmed that when the binder polymer contains a structural unit having a radically polymerizable group, defects due to reattachment failure of the formed pattern are further suppressed. rice field. In particular, when the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the binder polymer is 30,000 or less and the proportion of the structural units having radical polymerizable groups in the binder polymer is 40% by mass or more, the formed pattern is re-formed. It was confirmed that defects due to adhesion failure were further suppressed.
Further, from the evaluation results of Examples 1, 3 and 11 to 13, the mass content ratio of the polymerizable compound to the binder polymer (content of the polymerizable compound / content to the binder polymer) is 0. It was confirmed that when the value was 5.5 or more (preferably 0.7 or more), defects due to reattachment failure of the formed pattern were further suppressed.
Further, from the evaluation results of Examples 3 and 10, when the binder polymer is purified by reprecipitation after the polymerization reaction, defects due to reattachment failure of the formed pattern are further suppressed. Was confirmed.
Further, from the evaluation results of Examples 3 and 24 and 25, when the film thickness of the negative photosensitive composition layer is 3.0 μm or less, defects due to reattachment failure of the formed pattern are further suppressed. It was confirmed that it would be done.
 一方で、比較例の転写フィルムにより形成されるパターンは、所望の要求を満たしていなかった。 On the other hand, the pattern formed by the transfer film of the comparative example did not meet the desired requirements.
[実施例1A~36Aの転写フィルムの作製及び評価]
〔実施例1A~36Aの転写フィルムの作製〕
<実施例1Aの転写フィルムの作製>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層を形成後、保護フィルムを圧着する前に、ネガ型感光性組成物層上に、以下の手順によって屈折率調整層を形成する工程を実施した以外は、実施例1と同様の方法により、実施例1Aの転写フィルム(仮支持体、ネガ型感光性組成物層、屈折率調整層、及び、保護フィルムを有する転写フィルム)を作製した。
(屈折率調整層の形成工程)
 ネガ型感光性組成物層上に、表3に示す塗布液Aを乾燥後の厚みが70nmになるように調整してスリット状ノズルを用いて塗布し、40℃から95℃の温度勾配をもつ熱風対流式乾燥機で乾燥して溶剤を除去し、屈折率調整層を形成した。
 なお、屈折率調整層の屈折率は、25℃において波長550nmで1.68であった。
[Preparation and evaluation of transfer films of Examples 1A to 36A]
[Preparation of Transfer Films of Examples 1A to 36A]
<Preparation of transfer film of Example 1A>
Example 1 except that a step of forming a refractive index adjusting layer on the negative photosensitive composition layer after forming the negative photosensitive composition layer and before crimping the protective film was carried out by the following procedure. The transfer film of Example 1A (a transfer film having a temporary support, a negative photosensitive composition layer, a refractive index adjusting layer, and a protective film) was produced by the same method as in the above.
(Step of forming the refractive index adjusting layer)
The coating liquid A shown in Table 3 is applied onto the negative photosensitive composition layer using a slit-shaped nozzle after adjusting the thickness to 70 nm after drying, and has a temperature gradient of 40 ° C to 95 ° C. It was dried with a hot air convection dryer to remove the solvent, and a refractive index adjusting layer was formed.
The refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer was 1.68 at a wavelength of 550 nm at 25 ° C.
<実施例2A~36Aの転写フィルムの作製>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層を形成後、保護フィルムを圧着する前に、ネガ型感光性組成物層上に、以下の手順によって屈折率調整層を形成する工程を実施した以外は、実施例2~36と同様の方法により、実施例2A~36Aの転写フィルム(仮支持体、ネガ型感光性組成物層、屈折率調整層、及び、保護フィルムを有する転写フィルム)を作製した。
(屈折率調整層の形成工程)
 ネガ型感光性組成物層上に、表3に示す塗布液Aを乾燥後の厚みが70nmになるように調整してスリット状ノズルを用いて塗布し、40℃から95℃の温度勾配をもつ熱風対流式乾燥機で乾燥して溶剤を除去し、屈折率調整層を形成した。
 なお、屈折率調整層の屈折率は、25℃において波長550nmで1.68であった。
<Preparation of Transfer Films of Examples 2A to 36A>
Example 2 except that a step of forming a refractive index adjusting layer on the negative photosensitive composition layer after forming the negative photosensitive composition layer and before crimping the protective film was carried out by the following procedure. The transfer films of Examples 2A to 36A (transfer film having a temporary support, a negative photosensitive composition layer, a refractive index adjusting layer, and a protective film) were prepared by the same method as in ~ 36.
(Step of forming the refractive index adjusting layer)
The coating liquid A shown in Table 3 is applied onto the negative photosensitive composition layer using a slit-shaped nozzle after adjusting the thickness to 70 nm after drying, and has a temperature gradient of 40 ° C to 95 ° C. It was dried with a hot air convection dryer to remove the solvent, and a refractive index adjusting layer was formed.
The refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer was 1.68 at a wavelength of 550 nm at 25 ° C.
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000033
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000033
 表3中、「化合物B」は、以下のポリマーである。なお、以下、式中の繰り返し単位の比は、左側の繰り返し単位から順(質量基準)に、50:4:38:8であった。 In Table 3, "Compound B" is the following polymer. In the following, the ratio of the repeating units in the formula was 50: 4: 38: 8 in order from the repeating unit on the left side (based on mass).
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000034
〔実施例1A~36Aの転写フィルムの評価〕
 上述した〔転写フィルムの評価〕を実施したところ、実施例1A~36Aの転写フィルムは、各々、実施例1~36の転写フィルムと同等の評価結果であることが確認された。
[Evaluation of Transfer Films of Examples 1A to 36A]
When the above-mentioned [evaluation of transfer film] was carried out, it was confirmed that the transfer films of Examples 1A to 36A had the same evaluation results as the transfer films of Examples 1 to 36, respectively.
[実施例1B~36Bの転写フィルムの作製及び評価]
〔実施例1B~36Bの転写フィルムの作製〕
<実施例1Bの転写フィルムの作製>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層を形成後、保護フィルムを圧着する前に、ネガ型感光性組成物層上に、以下の手順によって屈折率調整層を形成する工程を実施した以外は、実施例1と同様の方法により、実施例1Bの転写フィルム(仮支持体、ネガ型感光性組成物層、屈折率調整層、及び、保護フィルムを有する転写フィルム)を作製した。
(屈折率調整層の形成工程)
 ネガ型感光性組成物層上に、表3に示す上述した塗布液Aを乾燥後の厚みが81nmになるように調整してスリット状ノズルを用いて塗布し、40℃から95℃の温度勾配をもつ熱風対流式乾燥機で乾燥して溶剤を除去し、屈折率調整層を形成した。
 なお、屈折率調整層の屈折率は、25℃において波長550nmで1.68であった。
[Preparation and evaluation of transfer films of Examples 1B to 36B]
[Preparation of Transfer Films of Examples 1B to 36B]
<Preparation of transfer film of Example 1B>
Example 1 except that a step of forming a refractive index adjusting layer on the negative photosensitive composition layer after forming the negative photosensitive composition layer and before crimping the protective film was carried out by the following procedure. The transfer film of Example 1B (a temporary support, a negative photosensitive composition layer, a refractive index adjusting layer, and a transfer film having a protective film) was produced by the same method as in the above.
(Step of forming the refractive index adjusting layer)
The above-mentioned coating liquid A shown in Table 3 is applied onto the negative photosensitive composition layer so that the thickness after drying is 81 nm using a slit-shaped nozzle, and the temperature gradient is 40 ° C to 95 ° C. The solvent was removed by drying with a hot air convection dryer, and a refractive index adjusting layer was formed.
The refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer was 1.68 at a wavelength of 550 nm at 25 ° C.
<実施例2B~36Bの転写フィルムの作製>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層を形成後、保護フィルムを圧着する前に、ネガ型感光性組成物層上に、以下の手順によって屈折率調整層を形成する工程を実施した以外は、実施例2~36と同様の方法により、実施例2B~36Bの転写フィルム(仮支持体、ネガ型感光性組成物層、屈折率調整層、及び、保護フィルムを有する転写フィルム)を作製した。
(屈折率調整層の形成工程)
 ネガ型感光性組成物層上に、表3に示す上述した塗布液Aを乾燥後の厚みが81nmになるように調整してスリット状ノズルを用いて塗布し、40℃から95℃の温度勾配をもつ熱風対流式乾燥機で乾燥して溶剤を除去し、屈折率調整層を形成した。
 なお、屈折率調整層の屈折率は、25℃において波長550nmで1.68であった。
<Preparation of Transfer Films of Examples 2B to 36B>
Example 2 except that a step of forming a refractive index adjusting layer on the negative photosensitive composition layer after forming the negative photosensitive composition layer and before crimping the protective film was carried out by the following procedure. The transfer films of Examples 2B to 36B (transfer film having a temporary support, a negative photosensitive composition layer, a refractive index adjusting layer, and a protective film) were prepared by the same method as in ~ 36.
(Step of forming the refractive index adjusting layer)
The above-mentioned coating liquid A shown in Table 3 is applied onto the negative photosensitive composition layer so that the thickness after drying is 81 nm using a slit-shaped nozzle, and the temperature gradient is 40 ° C to 95 ° C. The solvent was removed by drying with a hot air convection dryer, and a refractive index adjusting layer was formed.
The refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer was 1.68 at a wavelength of 550 nm at 25 ° C.
〔実施例1B~36Bの転写フィルムの評価〕
 上述した〔転写フィルムの評価〕を実施したところ、実施例1B~36Bの転写フィルムは、各々、実施例1~36の転写フィルムと同等の評価結果であることが確認された。
[Evaluation of Transfer Films of Examples 1B to 36B]
When the above-mentioned [evaluation of transfer film] was carried out, it was confirmed that the transfer films of Examples 1B to 36B had the same evaluation results as the transfer films of Examples 1 to 36, respectively.
[実施例1C~36Cの転写フィルムの作製及び評価]
〔実施例1C~36Cの転写フィルムの作製〕
<実施例1Cの転写フィルムの作製>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層を形成後、保護フィルムを圧着する前に、ネガ型感光性組成物層上に、以下の手順によって屈折率調整層を形成する工程を実施した以外は、実施例1と同様の方法により、実施例1Cの転写フィルム(仮支持体、ネガ型感光性組成物層、屈折率調整層、及び、保護フィルムを有する転写フィルム)を作製した。
(屈折率調整層の形成工程)
 ネガ型感光性組成物層上に、表3に示す上述した塗布液Aを乾燥後の厚みが59nmになるように調整してスリット状ノズルを用いて塗布し、40℃から95℃の温度勾配をもつ熱風対流式乾燥機で乾燥して溶剤を除去し、屈折率調整層を形成した。
 なお、屈折率調整層の屈折率は、25℃において波長550nmで1.68であった。
[Preparation and Evaluation of Transfer Films of Examples 1C to 36C]
[Preparation of Transfer Films of Examples 1C to 36C]
<Preparation of Transfer Film of Example 1C>
Example 1 except that a step of forming a refractive index adjusting layer on the negative photosensitive composition layer after forming the negative photosensitive composition layer and before crimping the protective film was carried out by the following procedure. The transfer film of Example 1C (a transfer film having a temporary support, a negative photosensitive composition layer, a refractive index adjusting layer, and a protective film) was produced by the same method as in the above.
(Step of forming the refractive index adjusting layer)
The above-mentioned coating liquid A shown in Table 3 is applied onto the negative photosensitive composition layer so that the thickness after drying is 59 nm using a slit-shaped nozzle, and the temperature gradient is 40 ° C to 95 ° C. The solvent was removed by drying with a hot air convection dryer, and a refractive index adjusting layer was formed.
The refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer was 1.68 at a wavelength of 550 nm at 25 ° C.
<実施例2C~36Cの転写フィルムの作製>
 ネガ型感光性組成物層を形成後、保護フィルムを圧着する前に、ネガ型感光性組成物層上に、以下の手順によって屈折率調整層を形成する工程を実施した以外は、実施例2~36と同様の方法により、実施例2C~36Cの転写フィルム(仮支持体、ネガ型感光性組成物層、屈折率調整層、及び、保護フィルムを有する転写フィルム)を作製した。
(屈折率調整層の形成工程)
 ネガ型感光性組成物層上に、表3に示す上述した塗布液Aを乾燥後の厚みが59nmになるように調整してスリット状ノズルを用いて塗布し、40℃から95℃の温度勾配をもつ熱風対流式乾燥機で乾燥して溶剤を除去し、屈折率調整層を形成した。
 なお、屈折率調整層の屈折率は、25℃において波長550nmで1.68であった。
<Preparation of Transfer Films of Examples 2C to 36C>
Example 2 except that a step of forming a refractive index adjusting layer on the negative photosensitive composition layer after forming the negative photosensitive composition layer and before crimping the protective film was carried out by the following procedure. The transfer films of Examples 2C to 36C (transfer film having a temporary support, a negative photosensitive composition layer, a refractive index adjusting layer, and a protective film) were prepared by the same method as in ~ 36.
(Step of forming the refractive index adjusting layer)
The above-mentioned coating liquid A shown in Table 3 is applied onto the negative photosensitive composition layer so that the thickness after drying is 59 nm using a slit-shaped nozzle, and the temperature gradient is 40 ° C to 95 ° C. The solvent was removed by drying with a hot air convection dryer, and a refractive index adjusting layer was formed.
The refractive index of the refractive index adjusting layer was 1.68 at a wavelength of 550 nm at 25 ° C.
〔実施例1C~36Cの転写フィルムの評価〕
 上述した〔転写フィルムの評価〕を実施したところ、実施例1C~36Cの転写フィルムは、各々、実施例1~36の転写フィルムと同等の評価結果であることが確認された。
[Evaluation of Transfer Films of Examples 1C to 36C]
When the above-mentioned [evaluation of transfer film] was carried out, it was confirmed that the transfer films of Examples 1C to 36C had the same evaluation results as the transfer films of Examples 1 to 36, respectively.
[実施例1D~36D:タッチパネルを備えた液晶表示装置の作製及び評価]
〔透明積層体の作製〕
 シクロオレフィン透明フィルムに、屈折率調整層、ITO透明電極パターン、及び銅の引き回し配線を形成した基板を準備した。
 保護フィルムを剥離した実施例1A~36A、実施例1B~36B、並びに実施例1C~36Cの各転写フィルムを用いて、屈折率調整層、ITO透明電極パターン、及び銅の引き回し配線を、転写フィルムが覆う位置にてラミネートした。ラミネートは、MCK社製真空ラミネーターを用いて、シクロオレフィン透明フィルムの温度:40℃、ゴムローラー温度100℃、線圧3N/cm、搬送速度4m/分の条件で行った。
 その後、超高圧水銀灯を有するプロキシミティー型露光機(日立ハイテク電子エンジニアリング(株)製)を用いて、露光マスク(オーバーコート形成用パターンを有す石英露光マスク)面と仮支持体とを密着させ、仮支持体を介して露光量100mJ/cm(i線)でパターン露光した。
 仮支持体を剥離後、炭酸ナトリウム1質量%水溶液30℃で30秒間現像処理を実施した。
 その後、現像処理後の透明フィルム基板に超高圧洗浄ノズルから超純水を噴射することで残渣を除去した。引き続き、エアを吹きかけて透明フィルム基板上の水分を除去し、145℃30分間のポストベーク処理を行って、透明フィルム基板上に、屈折率調整層、ITO透明電極パターン、銅の引き回し配線、屈折率調整層、及び、硬化膜が順に積層された透明積層体を形成した。
 作製した透明積層体を用いて、公知の方法によりタッチパネルを製造した。製造したタッチパネルを、特開2009-47936号公報の段落0097~0119に記載の方法で製造した液晶表示素子に貼り合わせることにより、タッチパネルを備えた液晶表示装置を製造した。
 タッチパネルを備えた液晶表示装置について、表示特性に優れ、問題無く動作することを確認した。
[Examples 1D to 36D: Fabrication and evaluation of a liquid crystal display device provided with a touch panel]
[Preparation of transparent laminate]
A substrate having a refractive index adjusting layer, an ITO transparent electrode pattern, and copper routing wiring formed on a cycloolefin transparent film was prepared.
Using the transfer films of Examples 1A to 36A, Examples 1B to 36B, and Examples 1C to 36C from which the protective film was peeled off, the refractive index adjusting layer, the ITO transparent electrode pattern, and the copper routing wiring were transferred to the transfer film. Laminated at the position covered by. Lamination was performed using a vacuum laminator manufactured by MCK under the conditions of a cycloolefin transparent film temperature: 40 ° C., a rubber roller temperature of 100 ° C., a linear pressure of 3 N / cm, and a transport speed of 4 m / min.
After that, using a proximity type exposure machine (manufactured by Hitachi High-Tech Electronics Engineering Co., Ltd.) equipped with an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp, the surface of the exposure mask (quartz exposure mask having a pattern for forming an overcoat) and the temporary support are brought into close contact with each other. , Pattern exposure was performed with an exposure amount of 100 mJ / cm 2 (i-line) via a temporary support.
After peeling off the temporary support, development treatment was carried out at 30 ° C. for 30 seconds with a 1% by mass aqueous solution of sodium carbonate.
Then, the residue was removed by injecting ultrapure water from the ultrapure water cleaning nozzle onto the transparent film substrate after the development treatment. Subsequently, air is blown to remove water on the transparent film substrate, and post-baking treatment is performed at 145 ° C. for 30 minutes. A transparent laminated body in which the rate adjusting layer and the cured film were laminated in order was formed.
A touch panel was manufactured by a known method using the prepared transparent laminate. A liquid crystal display device provided with a touch panel was manufactured by attaching the manufactured touch panel to a liquid crystal display element manufactured by the method described in paragraphs 097 to 0119 of JP2009-47936A.
It was confirmed that the liquid crystal display device equipped with a touch panel has excellent display characteristics and operates without problems.
1、11、34  仮支持体
2、12  組成物層
3、17、32、41  ネガ型感光性組成物層
5  屈折率調整層
7、19  保護フィルム
10、20  転写フィルム
13  熱可塑性樹脂層
15  中間層
30  ガラス基板
32A  ネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜
40 基材
42 マスク
43 露光部
44 未露光部
45 ハーフ露光部
T   ネガ型感光性組成物層の膜厚
T1、T2、T3  ネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜の膜厚
T100 基準膜厚
T10 基準膜厚T100に対して10%の膜厚
T90 基準膜厚T100に対して90%の膜厚
E10 T10となるときの露光量
E90 T90となるときの露光量
P1、P2 隣接し合うプロット
1, 11, 34 Temporary support 2, 12 Composition layer 3, 17, 32, 41 Negative type photosensitive composition layer 5 Refraction rate adjustment layer 7, 19 Protective film 10, 20 Transfer film 13 Thermoplastic resin layer 15 Intermediate Layer 30 Glass substrate 32A Hardened film of negative photosensitive composition layer 40 Base material 42 Mask 43 Exposed part 44 Unexposed part 45 Half exposed part T Negative type photosensitive composition layer thickness T1, T2, T3 Negative type photosensitive Film thickness of the cured film of the sex composition layer T100 Standard film thickness T10 10% film thickness with respect to the standard film thickness T100 T90 90% film thickness with respect to the standard film thickness T100 E10 T90 Exposure amount E90 T90 Exposure amount P1 and P2 when

Claims (15)

  1.  仮支持体と、組成物層と、を有する転写フィルムであり、
     前記組成物層は、ネガ型感光性組成物層を含み、
     前記ネガ型感光性組成物層は、バインダーポリマー、エチレン性不飽和基を有する重合性化合物、及び、光重合開始剤を含み、
     下記要件1及び要件2を満たす、転写フィルム。
     要件1:前記転写フィルムの仮支持体側とは反対側の表面をガラス基板に接触させて、前記ガラス基板、前記組成物層、及び前記仮支持体をこの順に有する積層体を形成し、前記積層体に対して、露光量を増加させながら複数の箇所において露光を行い、下記条件Aを満たす現像及び洗浄処理を実施した後の露光部におけるネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜の膜厚を測定し、前記硬化膜の膜厚を縦軸とし露光量を横軸とした直交座標に、各露光箇所での膜厚及び露光量に対応する点をプロットし、膜厚が実質的に変化しなくなる露光量での膜厚を基準膜厚とし、前記直交座標から、前記硬化膜の膜厚が前記基準膜厚に対して10%の膜厚となる露光量E10、前記硬化膜の膜厚が前記基準膜厚に対して90%の膜厚となる露光量E90を算出したとき、下記式(1)の関係を満たす。
     条件A:温度30℃の1.0質量%濃度の炭酸ナトリウム水溶液を使用して30秒間の現像処理を実施し、その後、温度30℃の純水を使用して30秒間の洗浄処理を実施する。前記現像処理は、シャワー方式による現像であり、シャワー圧力は0.10MPaであり、シャワー流量は1000mL/minである。また、前記洗浄処理は、シャワー方式による洗浄であり、シャワー圧力は0.10MPaであり、シャワー流量は1000mL/minである。
     式(1): E10/E90≧0.5
    要件2:前記転写フィルムの仮支持体側とは反対側の表面を水晶振動子に接触させて、前記水晶振動子、前記組成物層、及び前記仮支持体をこの順に有する積層体を形成し、前記積層体に対して前記E90の2倍の露光量で紫外線を照射した後、露光後の前記積層体を温度30℃の1.0質量%濃度の炭酸ナトリウム水溶液中に浸漬したとき、水晶振動子マイクロバランス法に基づいて求められる、浸漬開始から30秒後における前記ネガ型感光性組成物層の硬化膜の質量増加率が、20質量%以下である。
    A transfer film having a temporary support and a composition layer.
    The composition layer contains a negative photosensitive composition layer.
    The negative photosensitive composition layer contains a binder polymer, a polymerizable compound having an ethylenically unsaturated group, and a photopolymerization initiator.
    A transfer film that meets the following requirements 1 and 2.
    Requirement 1: The surface of the transfer film opposite to the temporary support side is brought into contact with the glass substrate to form a laminate having the glass substrate, the composition layer, and the temporary support in this order, and the laminate is formed. The thickness of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer in the exposed portion after the body is exposed to a plurality of locations while increasing the exposure amount and the development and cleaning treatment satisfying the following condition A is performed. The measurement was performed, and the points corresponding to the film thickness and the exposure amount at each exposure point were plotted on the orthogonal coordinates with the film thickness of the cured film as the vertical axis and the exposure amount as the horizontal axis, and the film thickness changed substantially. The film thickness at the exposure amount that disappears is used as the reference film thickness, and the exposure amount E10 at which the film thickness of the cured film is 10% of the reference film thickness and the film thickness of the cured film are obtained from the orthogonal coordinates. When the exposure amount E90, which is 90% of the reference film thickness, is calculated, the relationship of the following formula (1) is satisfied.
    Condition A: A development treatment is carried out for 30 seconds using a 1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution having a temperature of 30 ° C., and then a cleaning treatment is carried out for 30 seconds using pure water having a temperature of 30 ° C. .. The development process is development by a shower method, the shower pressure is 0.10 MPa, and the shower flow rate is 1000 mL / min. Further, the washing treatment is washing by a shower method, the shower pressure is 0.10 MPa, and the shower flow rate is 1000 mL / min.
    Equation (1): E10 / E90 ≧ 0.5
    Requirement 2: The surface of the transfer film opposite to the temporary support side is brought into contact with the quartz crystal to form a laminate having the quartz crystal, the composition layer, and the temporary support in this order. After irradiating the laminate with ultraviolet rays at twice the exposure amount of E90, when the exposed laminate is immersed in a 1.0 mass% sodium carbonate aqueous solution having a temperature of 30 ° C., crystal vibration occurs. The mass increase rate of the cured film of the negative photosensitive composition layer 30 seconds after the start of immersion, which is determined based on the child microbalance method, is 20% by mass or less.
  2.  更に、下記式(1-1)を満たす、請求項1に記載の転写フィルム。
     式(1-1):E10/E90≧0.8
     式(1-1)中、前記E10及び前記E90は、各々、前記式(1)中の前記E10及び前記E90と同義である。
    The transfer film according to claim 1, further satisfying the following formula (1-1).
    Equation (1-1): E10 / E90 ≧ 0.8
    In the formula (1-1), the E10 and the E90 are synonymous with the E10 and the E90 in the formula (1), respectively.
  3.  前記バインダーポリマーに対する前記重合性化合物の質量含有量比が、0.5以上である、請求項1又は2に記載の転写フィルム。 The transfer film according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the mass content ratio of the polymerizable compound to the binder polymer is 0.5 or more.
  4.  前記ネガ型感光性組成物層が、4官能以上の重合性化合物を含む、請求項1~3のいずれか1項に記載の転写フィルム。 The transfer film according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the negative photosensitive composition layer contains a tetrafunctional or higher polymerizable compound.
  5.  前記バインダーポリマーが、ラジカル重合性基を有する、請求項1~4のいずれか1項に記載の転写フィルム。 The transfer film according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the binder polymer has a radically polymerizable group.
  6.  前記バインダーポリマーが、前記ラジカル重合性基を有する構成単位を含み、
     前記ラジカル重合性基を有する構成単位の含有量が、前記バインダーポリマー中の全構成単位に対して、20質量%以上である、請求項5に記載の転写フィルム。
    The binder polymer contains a structural unit having the radically polymerizable group.
    The transfer film according to claim 5, wherein the content of the structural unit having a radically polymerizable group is 20% by mass or more with respect to all the structural units in the binder polymer.
  7.  前記ネガ型感光性組成物層が、更に重合禁止剤を含み、
     前記重合禁止剤の含有量が、前記光重合開始剤の含有量に対して、5~15質量%である、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の転写フィルム。
    The negative photosensitive composition layer further contains a polymerization inhibitor and contains
    The transfer film according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the content of the polymerization inhibitor is 5 to 15% by mass with respect to the content of the photopolymerization initiator.
  8.  前記組成物層が、屈折率調整層を含む、請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の転写フィルム。 The transfer film according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein the composition layer includes a refractive index adjusting layer.
  9.  タッチパネル用保護膜形成用である、請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の転写フィルム。 The transfer film according to any one of claims 1 to 8, which is used for forming a protective film for a touch panel.
  10.  タッチパネル電極パターン形成エッチングレジスト用である、請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の転写フィルム。 The transfer film according to any one of claims 1 to 8, which is used for a touch panel electrode pattern forming etching resist.
  11.  請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の転写フィルムの前記仮支持体とは反対側の表面を、導電層を有する基板に接触させて貼り合わせ、前記基板、前記導電層、前記組成物層、及び、前記仮支持体をこの順に有する組成物層付き基板を得る貼合工程と、
     前記組成物層をパターン露光する露光工程と、
     露光された前記組成物層を現像して、前記導電層を保護する保護膜パターンを形成する現像工程と、
     更に、前記貼合工程と前記露光工程との間、又は、前記露光工程と前記現像工程との間に、前記組成物層付き基板から前記仮支持体を剥離する剥離工程と、を有する、積層体の製造方法。
    The surface of the transfer film according to any one of claims 1 to 8 opposite to the temporary support is brought into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer and bonded to the substrate, the conductive layer, and the composition. A bonding step of obtaining a substrate with a layer and a composition layer having the temporary support in this order, and
    An exposure step of pattern-exposing the composition layer and
    A developing step of developing the exposed composition layer to form a protective film pattern that protects the conductive layer.
    Further, laminating including a peeling step of peeling the temporary support from the substrate with the composition layer between the bonding step and the exposure step, or between the exposure step and the developing step. How to make a body.
  12.  前記現像工程が、現像液を循環させることによって、現像液を繰り返して使用する工程である、請求項11に記載の積層体の製造方法。 The method for manufacturing a laminate according to claim 11, wherein the developing step is a step of repeatedly using the developing solution by circulating the developing solution.
  13.  前記貼合工程が、前記転写フィルムと前記導電層を有する基板とをロールトゥロールで貼り合せる工程であり、前記貼合工程により形成される長尺状の積層体に対して、少なくとも前記露光工程及び前記現像工程を実施する、請求項11又は12に記載の積層体の製造方法。 The bonding step is a step of bonding the transfer film and the substrate having the conductive layer by roll-to-roll, and at least the exposure step for the long laminated body formed by the bonding step. The method for producing a laminate according to claim 11 or 12, wherein the development step is carried out.
  14.  前記導電層を有する基板が、タッチパネル用電極及びタッチパネル用配線の少なくとも一方を有する基板である、請求項11~13のいずれか1項に記載の積層体の製造方法。 The method for manufacturing a laminate according to any one of claims 11 to 13, wherein the substrate having the conductive layer is a substrate having at least one of a touch panel electrode and a touch panel wiring.
  15.  請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の転写フィルムの前記仮支持体とは反対側の表面を、導電層を有する基板に接触させ、前記基板、前記導電層、前記組成物層、及び、前記仮支持体をこの順に有する組成物層付き基板を得る貼合工程と、
     前記組成物層をパターン露光する露光工程と、
     露光された前記組成物層を現像して樹脂パターンを形成する現像工程と、
     前記樹脂パターンが配置されていない領域における前記導電層をエッチング処理するエッチング工程と、
     更に、貼合工程と露光工程との間、又は、露光工程と現像工程との間に、前記組成物層付き基板から仮支持体を剥離する剥離工程と、を含む、回路配線の製造方法。
    The surface of the transfer film according to any one of claims 1 to 8, which is opposite to the temporary support, is brought into contact with a substrate having a conductive layer, and the substrate, the conductive layer, the composition layer, and the like. , A bonding step of obtaining a substrate with a composition layer having the temporary supports in this order, and
    An exposure step of pattern-exposing the composition layer and
    A developing step of developing the exposed composition layer to form a resin pattern,
    An etching step of etching the conductive layer in a region where the resin pattern is not arranged, and an etching step of etching the conductive layer.
    Further, a method for manufacturing a circuit wiring, comprising a peeling step of peeling the temporary support from the substrate with the composition layer between the bonding step and the exposure step, or between the exposure step and the developing step.
PCT/JP2021/046474 2020-12-17 2021-12-16 Transfer film, method for producing laminate, and method for producing circuit wiring WO2022131324A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020209630 2020-12-17
JP2020-209630 2020-12-17

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022131324A1 true WO2022131324A1 (en) 2022-06-23

Family

ID=82059567

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2021/046474 WO2022131324A1 (en) 2020-12-17 2021-12-16 Transfer film, method for producing laminate, and method for producing circuit wiring

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2022131324A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007108275A (en) * 2005-10-12 2007-04-26 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Photosensitive red-colored composition, color filter substrate using the same and translucent liquid crystal display
WO2019244898A1 (en) * 2018-06-22 2019-12-26 旭化成株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition and resist pattern formation method

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2007108275A (en) * 2005-10-12 2007-04-26 Toppan Printing Co Ltd Photosensitive red-colored composition, color filter substrate using the same and translucent liquid crystal display
WO2019244898A1 (en) * 2018-06-22 2019-12-26 旭化成株式会社 Photosensitive resin composition and resist pattern formation method

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021199996A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing resin pattern, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and temporary support body for photosensitive transfer material
WO2022045203A1 (en) Transfer film, manufacturing method for laminate, and manufacturing method for circuit wiring
WO2022054599A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, etching method, and method for manufacturing electronic device
WO2022092160A1 (en) Method for manufacturing laminate, method for manufacturing circuit wiring substrate, and transfer film
JP7342246B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method
WO2021220981A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern production method, circuit wiring production method, touch panel production method, and polyethylene terephthalate film
WO2021199542A1 (en) Light-sensitive transfer material, method for manufacturing resin pattern, and method for manufacturing circuit wiring
WO2022131324A1 (en) Transfer film, method for producing laminate, and method for producing circuit wiring
WO2022138630A1 (en) Transfer film, method for producing laminate, and method for producing circuit wiring
WO2022075090A1 (en) Transfer film, method for producing laminate, and method for producing circuit wiring
WO2022054374A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, production method for resin pattern, production method for circuit wiring, and production method for electronic device
WO2021161965A1 (en) Photosensitive film and photosensitive-film manufacturing method
WO2022138154A1 (en) Method for manufacturing laminate, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and transfer film
WO2022138493A1 (en) Method for manufacturing laminate, method for manufacturing circuit wiring, and transfer film
WO2023100553A1 (en) Transfer film, laminate having conductor pattern, method for producing laminate having conductor pattern, and method for producing transfer film
WO2022045255A1 (en) Light-sensitive transfer material and method for manufacturing resin pattern
WO2022138246A1 (en) Transfer material and method for manufacturing laminate
WO2022045256A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing conductive pattern, and touch sensor
WO2022138576A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing circuit wiring line, method for producing electronic device, and method for producing multilayer body
JP7416910B2 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and temporary support for photosensitive transfer material
WO2022138468A1 (en) Transfer material and method for producing laminated body
WO2022059417A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, method for producing resin pattern, method for producing circuit wiring, and method for producing touch panel
US20230094866A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material for led array, light shielding material for led array, led array, and electronic apparatus
WO2022138577A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, laminate manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and electronic device manufacturing method
WO2022163301A1 (en) Photosensitive transfer material, resin pattern manufacturing method, circuit wiring manufacturing method, and touch panel manufacturing method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21906685

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21906685

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP